V40 Owners Manual MY14 en-GB TP 16776

WEB EDITION
OWNER'S MANUAL
DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we
pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been recommend that you familiarise yourself with the
designed for the safety and comfort of you and equipment, instructions and maintenance infor-
your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in mation contained in this owner's manual.
the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to
satisfy all current safety and environmental
requirements.
Table of contents
01 Introduction 02 Safety
Reading the owner's manual.................... 15 General information on seatbelts.............. 24 Pedestrian airbag...................................... 40
Recording data......................................... 17 Seatbelt - putting on................................. 25 Pedestrian airbag - moving the car........... 41
Accessories and extra equipment............ 18 Seat belt - loosening................................. 26 Pedestrian airbag - folding up.................. 42
Change of ownership for cars with Volvo Seatbelt - pregnancy................................ 26 General information on child safety.......... 42
01 02 02
On Call*..................................................... 18 Seatbelt reminder...................................... 27 Child seats................................................ 44
Information on the Internet....................... 19 Seatbelt tensioner..................................... 27 Child seats - location................................ 48
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy..... 20 Safety - warning symbol........................... 28 Child seat - ISOFIX................................... 48
The owner's manual and the environ- Airbag system........................................... 29 ISOFIX - size classes................................ 49
ment.......................................................... 22
Airbags on driver's side............................ 30 ISOFIX - types of child seat...................... 50
Laminated glass........................................ 22
Passenger airbag...................................... 30 Child seats - upper mounting points........ 52
Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat-
ing*............................................................ 31
Side airbag (SIPS)..................................... 33
Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster
cushion..................................................... 34
Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 34
General information on WHIPS (whiplash
protection)................................................. 35
WHIPS - child seats.................................. 36
WHIPS - seating position.......................... 36
When the systems deploy......................... 37
General information on safety mode......... 38
Safety mode - attempting to start the
car............................................................. 39
Safety mode - moving the car.................. 40
2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Table of contents
03 Instruments and controls

Instruments and controls, left-hand drive Steering wheel.......................................... 77 Compass................................................. 100
car - overview........................................... 54 Light switches........................................... 78 Menu navigation - combined instrument
Instruments and controls, right-hand Position/parking lamps............................. 80 panel....................................................... 101
drive car - overview................................... 57 Menu overview - analogue combined
Daytime running lights.............................. 81
Combined instrument panel...................... 60 instrument panel..................................... 102
03 03 03
Tunnel detection*...................................... 82
Analogue combined instrument panel - Menu overview - digital combined instru-
overview.................................................... 60 Main/dipped beam.................................... 82 ment panel.............................................. 102
Digital combined instrument panel - Active high beam*..................................... 83 Messages................................................ 103
overview.................................................... 61 Active Xenon headlamps*......................... 84 Messages - handling............................... 104
Eco guide & Power guide*........................ 64 Rear fog lamp........................................... 85 MY CAR.................................................. 104
Combined instrument panel - meaning of Brake lights............................................... 86 MY CAR - operation................................ 104
indicator symbols...................................... 65
Hazard warning flashers........................... 86 MY CAR - search paths.......................... 105
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols................................... 66 Direction indicators................................... 87 MY CAR - menu options......................... 106
Outside temperature gauge...................... 68 Interior lighting.......................................... 87 MY CAR - Car settings........................... 108
Trip meter.................................................. 68 Home safe light duration........................... 89 MY CAR - driving support system.......... 109
Clock......................................................... 69 Approach light duration............................ 89 MY CAR - System options...................... 111
Volvo Sensus............................................ 70 Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pat- MY CAR - Voice settings........................ 112
tern............................................................ 90
Key positions............................................ 71 MY CAR - Climate settings..................... 113
Wipers and washing.................................. 93
Key positions - functions at different lev- MY CAR Information............................... 114
els.............................................................. 71 Power windows......................................... 95
Trip computer......................................... 114
Seats, front................................................ 73 Door mirrors.............................................. 97
Trip computer - analogue combined
Seats, front - electrically operated............ 74 Windows and rearview and door mirrors instrument panel..................................... 115
- heating.................................................... 98
Key memory in remote control key........... 75 Trip computer - digital combined instru-
Rearview mirror - interior.......................... 99 ment panel.............................................. 119
Seats, rear................................................. 76
Glass roof*.............................................. 100 Trip computer - functions....................... 123
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

Table of contents
04 Climate control
Trip computer - trip statistics*................ 124 General information on climate control... 126 Air distribution - table............................. 138
Actual temperature................................. 126 Engine block heater and passenger com-
Sensors - climate control........................ 127 partment heater*..................................... 140
Air cleaning............................................. 127 Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - direct start/immediate
03 04 04
Air cleaning - passenger compartment fil- stop......................................................... 141
ter............................................................ 127
Engine block heater and passenger com-
Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior Pack- partment heater* - timer.......................... 141
age (CZIP)*.............................................. 128
Engine block heater and passenger com-
Air cleaning - IAQS*................................ 128 partment heater* - messages................. 142
Air cleaning - material............................. 129 Additional heater*.................................... 143
Menu settings - climate control.............. 129 Fuel-driven additional heater*................. 143
Air distribution in the passenger com- Electric additional heater*....................... 144
partment.................................................. 129
Electronic climate control - ECC*........... 131
Electronic temperature control - ETC..... 132
Heated front seats*................................. 133
Heated rear seat*.................................... 133
Fan.......................................................... 134
Auto-regulation....................................... 134
Temperature control in the passenger
compartment.......................................... 135
Air conditioning....................................... 135
Demisting and defrosting the wind-
screen..................................................... 136
Air distribution - recirculation.................. 137

Table of contents
05 Loading and storage 06 Locks and alarm

Storage spaces....................................... 146 Remote control key with key blade......... 159 Keyless* - locking................................... 170
Storage compartment driver’s side........ 148 Remote control key/PCC - losing .......... 159 Keyless* - unlocking............................... 171
Jacket holder.......................................... 148 Remote control key/PCC - key memory* 160 Keyless* - unlocking with the key blade 171
Tunnel console........................................ 148 Indication locking/unlocking - adjusting. 160 Keyless* - key memory........................... 172
05 06 06
Tunnel console - armrest........................ 149 Lock indicator......................................... 161 Keyless* - lock settings........................... 172
Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and Remote control key/PCC - Electronic Keyless* - antenna location.................... 173
ashtray*................................................... 149 immobiliser.............................................. 161 Locking/unlocking - from the outside .... 173
Glovebox................................................. 149 Remote-controlled immobiliser with Manual locking of the door..................... 174
Glovebox - cooling.................................. 150 tracking system....................................... 162
Locking/unlocking - from the inside....... 175
Inlay mats*.............................................. 150 Remote control key - function................ 162
Total airing function................................ 176
Vanity mirror............................................ 150 Remote control key - range.................... 163
Locking/unlocking - glovebox................. 176
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets............... 151 PCC* - unique functions......................... 164
Locking/unlocking - tailgate.................... 176
Loading................................................... 152 PCC* - range........................................... 165
Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap........... 178
Loading - long load................................. 153 Detachable key blade............................. 165
Deadlocks*.............................................. 178
Roof load................................................. 153 Detachable key blade - detaching/
attaching................................................. 166 Child safety locks - manual activation.... 179
Load retaining eyelets............................. 153 Child safety locks - electrical activation* 180
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors 166
Loading - bag holder ............................. 154 Alarm....................................................... 181
Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
Loading - folding bag holder*................. 154 battery..................................................... 167 Alarm indicator........................................ 182
12 V socket - cargo area......................... 155 Keyless*.................................................. 168 Alarm - automatic re-arming................... 182
Cargo net................................................ 155 Keyless* - remote control key range....... 169 Alarm - automatic arming....................... 182
Hat shelf.................................................. 157 Keyless* - Secure handling of the remote Alarm - remote control key not working. 183
control key.............................................. 169
Alarm signals........................................... 183
Keyless* - interference to remote control
key function............................................. 170 Reduced alarm level............................... 183

Table of contents
07 Driver support
Stability and traction control system Adaptive cruise control* - overview........ 202 City Safety™ - limitations....................... 219
(DSTC)..................................................... 185 Adaptive cruise control* - managing City Safety™ - laser sensor.................... 220
Stability and traction control system speed...................................................... 203 City Safety™ - symbols and messages.. 222
(DSTC) - operation.................................. 186 Adaptive cruise control* - set time inter- Collision warning system*....................... 223
Stability and traction control system val............................................................ 204
07 07 07
(DSTC) - symbols and messages........... 187 Collision warning system* - function...... 224
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
Road Sign Information (RSI)................... 188 deactivation, and standby mode............ 204 Collision warning system* - cyclist detec-
tion.......................................................... 225
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation 188 Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle........................................ 205 Collision warning system* - detection of
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations 190 pedestrians............................................. 227
Speed limiter*.......................................... 191 Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate...... 206
Collision warning system* - operation.... 228
Speed limiter* - getting started............... 191 Adaptive Cruise Control* - Queue Assist 206
Collision warning system* - general limi-
Speed limiter* - changing speed............. 192 Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise tations..................................................... 229
control functionality................................ 208
Speed limiter - temporary deactivation Collision warning system* - camera sen-
and standby mode*................................. 193 Radar sensor........................................... 209 sor limitations.......................................... 231
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed excee- Radar sensor - limitations....................... 209 Collision warning system* - symbols and
ded.......................................................... 194 Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing message.................................................. 233
Speed limiter* - deactivation................... 194 and action............................................... 211 Driver Alert System*................................ 235
Cruise control*........................................ 194 Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and Driver Alert Control (DAC)*...................... 235
messages................................................ 212
Cruise control* - managing speed.......... 195 Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation... 236
Distance Warning*.................................. 214
Cruise control* temporary deactivation Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
and standby mode.................................. 197 Distance Alert* - limitations..................... 215 messages................................................ 237
Cruise control* - resume set speed........ 198 Distance Alert* - symbols and messages 216 Lane Keeping Aid*.................................. 239
Cruise control* - deactivate.................... 199 City Safety™........................................... 217 Lane keeping assistant - function........... 239
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)*............... 199 City Safety™ - function........................... 217 Lane keeping assistant - operation......... 241
Adaptive cruise control* - function......... 200 City Safety™ - operation........................ 218 Lane keeping assistant - limitations....... 241

Table of contents
08 Starting and driving

Lane keeping assistant - symbols and Alcolock*................................................. 264 Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stop-
messages................................................ 243 Alcolock* - functions and operation........ 264 page manual gearbox............................. 284
Park assist syst*...................................... 245 Alcolock* - storage.................................. 265 Start/Stop* - settings.............................. 284
Park assist syst* - function..................... 245 Alcolock* - before starting the engine.... 265 Start/Stop* - symbols and messages..... 286
07 08 08
Park assist syst* - backward.................. 247 Alcolock* - to bear in mind..................... 266 Foot brake............................................... 288
Park assist syst* - forward...................... 247 Alcolock* - symbols and messages........ 268 Foot brake - anti-lock braking system.... 289
Park assist syst* - fault indication........... 248 Starting the engine.................................. 268 Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors. 248 automatic hazard warning flashers......... 289
Switching off the engine......................... 270
Park assist camera.................................. 249 Foot brake - emergency brake assis-
Steering lock........................................... 270 tance....................................................... 290
Park assist camera - settings................. 252 Jump starting.......................................... 270 Parking brake.......................................... 290
Park assist camera - limitations.............. 252 Gearboxes............................................... 271 Driving in water....................................... 291
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)*........................... 253 Manual gearbox...................................... 272 Overheating............................................. 292
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function.......... 253 Gear shift indicator*................................ 272 Driving with open tailgate....................... 292
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation........ 254 Automatic gearbox - Geartronic*............ 273 Overload - starter battery........................ 293
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations....... 256 Automatic gearbox - Powershift*............ 276 Before a long journey.............................. 293
Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols and Gear selector inhibitor............................. 278
messages................................................ 257 Winter driving.......................................... 293
Hill start assist (HSA)*............................. 279 Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing............. 294
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System).... 257
Start/Stop*.............................................. 279 Fuel filler flap - manual opening.............. 294
BLIS - operation...................................... 258
Start/Stop* - function and operation....... 280 Filling up with fuel................................... 295
CTA (Cross Traffic Alert)*........................ 260
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop... 281 Fuel - handling........................................ 295
BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages 262
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts........ 282 Fuel - petrol............................................. 296
Speed related power steering................. 262
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- Fuel - diesel............................................. 296
start......................................................... 283
Filling with fuel - with a fuel can.............. 298

Table of contents
09 Wheels and tyres

Diesel particle filter (DPF)........................ 298 Tyres - direction of rotation.................... 311 Emergency puncture repair* - recheck-
Economical driving.................................. 299 Tyres - maintenance............................... 311 ing........................................................... 327
Driving with a trailer................................ 299 Tyres - tread wear indicators.................. 313 Inflating tyres with the emergency punc-
ture repair kit*.......................................... 328
Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox... 300 Wheel bolts............................................. 313
Emergency puncture repair* - stowing
08 09 09
Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox 301 Jack........................................................ 314 components............................................ 329
Towing bracket....................................... 301 Winter tyres............................................. 314 Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant 329
Detachable towbar - storage.................. 302 Wheel and wheel rim dimensions........... 315
Detachable towbar - specifications........ 302 Tyres - dimensions.................................. 315
Detachable towbar - attachment/ Tyres - load index................................... 315
removal................................................... 303 Tyres - speed ratings.............................. 316
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA.................... 305 Spare wheel*........................................... 316
Towing.................................................... 306 Changing wheels - taking out the spare
Towing eye.............................................. 308 wheel*..................................................... 317
Recovery................................................. 309 Changing wheels - removing wheels...... 318
Changing wheels - fitting the spare
wheel*..................................................... 319
Tyres - air pressure................................. 321
Warning triangle...................................... 322
First aid kit*............................................. 323
Emergency puncture repair*................... 323
Emergency puncture repair kit* - loca-
tion.......................................................... 324
Emergency puncture repair kit* - over-
view......................................................... 325
Emergency puncture repair* - operation. 325

Table of contents
10 Maintenance and service

Volvo service programme....................... 331 Lamp replacement - daytime running Paint damage.......................................... 367
Raising the car........................................ 332 lights....................................................... 345
Bonnet - opening and closing................. 334 Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps...................................................... 345
Engine compartment - overview............. 334
Lamp replacement - direction indicators
10 10 10
Engine compartment - checking............. 335 rear, brake lights and reversing lamp..... 345
Engine oil - general................................. 335 Lamp replacement - rear fog lamp......... 346
Engine oil - checking and filling.............. 336 Lamp replacement - vanity mirror light-
Coolant - level......................................... 339 ing........................................................... 347
Brake and clutch fluid - level.................. 340 Lamps - specifications ........................... 347
Climate control system - fault tracing and Wiper blades........................................... 348
repair....................................................... 340 Washer fluid - filling................................ 350
Lamp replacement.................................. 341 Starter battery......................................... 350
Lamp replacement - location of front Battery - symbols.................................... 351
lamps...................................................... 342
Starter battery - replacement.................. 352
Lamp replacement - headlamps............. 342
Battery - Start/Stop................................. 352
Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs................................. 343 Fuses - general....................................... 354
Lamp replacement - dipped beam......... 343 Fuses - in engine compartment.............. 355
Lamp replacement - main beam............. 343 Fuses - under glovebox.......................... 358
Lamp replacement - extra main beam.... 344 Fuses - under right front seat................. 361
Lamp replacement - direction indicators Car washing............................................ 363
front......................................................... 344 Polishing and waxing.............................. 364
Lamp replacement - position/parking Water and dirt-repellent coating............. 365
lamps front.............................................. 344 Rustproofing........................................... 365
Cleaning the interior................................ 366
9
Table of contents
11 Audio and media

Audio and media..................................... 370 News broadcasts.................................... 383 Playback and navigation of DVD video
Audio and media - overview................... 371 Radio programme types (PTY)................ 383 discs........................................................ 391
Audio and media - operating the system 371 Searching radio programme types (PTY) 384 Camera angle for playback of DVD video
discs........................................................ 392
Audio and media - menu navigation....... 373 Show radio programme types (PTY)....... 384
DivX® Video On Demand........................ 392
11 11 11
Favourites............................................... 375 Volume control for interrupting radio pro-
gramme types (PTY)............................... 385 Picture settings....................................... 393
Audio and media - audio settings........... 375
Radio text................................................ 385 Media player - compatible file formats... 393
Audio and media - general audio set-
tings........................................................ 376 Automatic radio frequency update (AF).. 385 External audio source via AUX/USB*
input........................................................ 394
Audio and media - advanced audio set- Regional radio programmes (REG)......... 386
tings........................................................ 376 Connecting an external audio source via
Scan radio frequencies........................... 386 AUX/USB* input...................................... 395
Setting the equaliser............................... 377 Resetting RDS functions......................... 386 Playback and navigation of external
Setting the audio profile.......................... 377 Digital radio* (DAB)................................. 387 audio source........................................... 395
Setting the audio volume and automatic Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn) 387 Setting the audio volume for external
volume control........................................ 377 audio source........................................... 397
Navigation in channel group list (Ensem-
Radio....................................................... 378 ble).......................................................... 388 Media Bluetooth®* ................................. 397
Radio tuning............................................ 378 DAB to DAB link...................................... 388 Connecting and disconnecting a
Automatic radio tuning............................ 379 Bluetooth®* device.................................. 398
Digital radio* (DAB) - frequencies........... 388
Radio station list..................................... 379 Digital radio* (DAB) - subchannel............ 389 Registering a Bluetooth®* device............ 399
Manual radio tuning................................ 380 Digital radio* (DAB) - resetting................ 389 Automatic connection of Bluetooth®*
Radio stations as presets....................... 380 device...................................................... 400
Media player........................................... 389
RDS functions......................................... 381 Changing to another Bluetooth®* device 401
CD/DVD*................................................. 390
Alarms in the event of accidents and dis- Disconnecting the Bluetooth®* device.... 401
Fast forward/reverse............................... 390
asters...................................................... 382 Removing a Bluetooth®* device.............. 402
Random selection of disc track or audio
Traffic information (TP)............................ 382 file........................................................... 391 Bluetooth® handsfree phone................... 402
Enhanced Other Networks (EON)........... 383

Table of contents
Bluetooth®* handsfree phone - overview 403 Voice recognition* control of a mobile Audio and media - menu overview......... 427
phone - quick commands....................... 416 Menu overview - AM............................... 427
Making and receiving calls...................... 403
Voice guidance* control of a mobile Menu overview - FM............................... 428
Bluetooth® handsfree phone - audio set- phone - dialling a number....................... 416
tings........................................................ 404 Menu overview - Digital radio (DAB)*...... 428
Voice recognition* control of a mobile
11 11 11
Bluetooth® version information............... 405 phone - dialling from the call register..... 417 Main overview - CD/DVD Data............... 429
Phone book............................................. 405 Voice recognition* control of a mobile Menu overview - CD Audio..................... 430
Phone book - quick search for contacts 406 phone - dialling a contact....................... 417 Menu overview - DVD Video................... 430
Phone book - character table keypad in Voice recognition* control of a mobile Menu overview - iPod............................. 431
centre console........................................ 407 phone - calling the voice mailbox........... 417
Menu overview - USB............................. 432
Phone book - searching for contacts..... 408 Save as favourite.................................... 418
Menu overview - Media Bluetooth.......... 432
Phone book - new contact..................... 409 Playback and navigation of CD/DVD*
disc......................................................... 418 Menu overview - AUX............................. 433
Phone book - speed dial numbers.......... 410
Playback and navigation of burned discs Menu overview - Bluetooth handsfree.... 433
Phone book - receiving a vCard............. 411 with audio/video files.............................. 419 Menu overview - TV................................ 434
Phone book - memory status................. 411 Scan disc track or audio file................... 420
Phone book - clearing............................. 411 TV*........................................................... 420
Voice recognition* control of a mobile Searching TV* channels/Preset list......... 422
phone...................................................... 412
TV* - channel management..................... 422
Language options for voice recognition*
control of a mobile phone....................... 413 Information about the current TV* pro-
gramme................................................... 423
Help functions for voice recognition*
control of a mobile phone....................... 414 Teletext*.................................................. 423
Voice recognition* control of a mobile Reception of TV* channel is lost............. 424
phone - user setting and voice volume... 415 Remote control*...................................... 424
Voice recognition* control of a mobile Remote control* - functions.................... 425
phone - voice commands....................... 415
Remote control* - battery replacement.. 426

Table of contents
12 Specifications 13 Alphabetical Index

Type designations................................... 437 Alphabetical Index.................................. 476
Dimensions............................................. 439
Weights................................................... 440
Towing capacity and towball load.......... 441
12 13
Engine specifications.............................. 443
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions... 444
Engine oil - grade and volume................ 445
Coolant - grade and volume................... 447
Transmission fluid - grade and volume... 448
Brake fluid - grade and volume............... 449
Washer fluid - quality and volume.......... 449
Fuel tank - volume.................................. 450
Air conditioning, fluid - volume and
grade....................................................... 451
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions... 452
Tyres - approved tyre pressures............. 456
Electrical system..................................... 458
Starter battery - specification................. 459
Type approval - remote control key sys-
tem.......................................................... 460
Type approval - radar system................. 460
Type approval - Bluetooth®.................... 462
Licenses.................................................. 470
Symbols in the display............................ 472
12
Table of contents
13
INTRODUCTION
01 Introduction
Reading the owner's manual Special texts Decals 01

A good way of getting to know your new car The car contains different types of decal
is to read the owner's manual, ideally before WARNING which are designed to convey important
your first journey. This will give you the oppor- information in a simple and clear manner. The
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of decals in the car have the following descend-
tunity to familiarise yourself with new func- injury.
tions, to see how best to handle the car in dif- ing degree of importance for the warning/
ferent situations, and to make the best use of information.
all the car's features. Please pay attention to IMPORTANT Warning for personal injury
the safety instructions contained in the man- "Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
ual. damage.
The specifications, design features and illus-
trations in this owner's manual are not bind- NOTE
ing. We reserve the right to make modifica-
tions without prior notice. NOTE texts give advice or tips that facili-
tate the use of features and functions for
© Volvo Car Corporation example.
Options/accessories
Footnote
All types of option/accessory are marked with
There is footnote information in the owner's
an asterisk*.
manual that is located at the bottom of the
In addition to standard equipment, the page. This information is an addition to the
owner's manual also describes options (fac- text that it refers to via a number. If the foot-
G031590
tory fitted equipment) and certain accessories note refers to text in a table then letters are
(retrofitted extra equipment). used instead of numbers for referral. Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
The equipment described in the owner's white text/image on black message field.
Message texts
manual is not available in all cars - they have Used to indicate the presence of danger
Text messages can be shown in the com-
different equipment depending on adapta- which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
bined instrument panel and the screen. These
tions for the needs of different markets and serious personal injury or fatality.
text messages are highlighted in the owner's
national or local laws and regulations. manual by means of the text being slightly Risk of property damage
In the event of uncertainty over what is stand- larger and printed in grey. Examples of this
ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo are in menu texts and message texts in the
dealer. screen (e.g. Audio settings).
}}

01 Introduction
||
01 When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corres-
ponding illustration.
There are numbered lists with letters
adjacent to the series of illustrations
where the order of the instructions is not
significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnum-
bered and are used to illustrate a move-
ment.
G031592
G031593
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the reciprocal order is of
no relevance.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on White ISO symbols and white text/image on If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-
black or blue warning field and message field. black message field. step instructions then the different steps are
Used to indicate the presence of danger numbered with normal numbers.
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in NOTE
damage to property. Position lists
It is not intended that the decals illustrated Red circles containing a number are used
Information in the owner's manual should be exact
in overview images where different com-
replicas of those in the car. They are
included to show their approximate ponents are pointed out. The number
appearance and location in the car. The recurs in the position list featured in con-
information that applies to your particular nection with the illustration that describes
car is available on the respective decals the item.
for your car.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
Procedure lists
points in the owner's manual.
Procedures where action must be taken in a
certain sequence are numbered in the Example:
owner's manual.
• Coolant
• Engine oil
16
01 Introduction
Images Recording data for a certain length of time, but also as a 01

The manual's images are sometimes sche- Certain information about the vehicle's opera- result of a collision or incident. This informa-
matic and may deviate from the car's appear- tion and functionality, and any incidents, are tion may be stored by Volvo as long as it can
ance depending on equipment level and mar- recorded in the car. help to further develop and further enhance
ket. safety and quality and as long as there are
Your vehicle contains a number of computers legal requirements and other regulations that
Related information whose function is to continuously check and Volvo needs to consider.
Related information refers to other sections monitor the vehicle's operation and function-
Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri-
containing related information. ality. Some of the computers can record
bed information being disclosed to third par-
information during normal driving if they
To be continued ties without the vehicle owner's consent.
}} This symbol is located furthest down to
detect an error. In addition, information is
However, due to national legislation and reg-
recorded in the event of a collision or inci-
the right when a section continues on the fol- ulations Volvo may be required to disclose
dent. Parts of the recorded information are
lowing page. such information to authorities such as police
required so that technicians can diagnose
authorities, or others who may assert a legal
and rectify faults in the vehicle during servic-
Related information right to have access to it.
ing and maintenance and so that Volvo can
• The owner's manual and the environment
fulfil legal requirements and other regulations. To be able to read and interpret the informa-
(p. 22)
In addition to this, the information is used for tion recorded by the computers in the vehicle
• Information on the Internet (p. 19) research purposes by Volvo in order to con- requires special technical equipment that
tinually develop quality and safety, as the Volvo, and workshops that have entered into
information can contribute to a better under- agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo
standing of the factors that cause accidents is responsible that the information, which is
and injuries. The information includes details transferred to Volvo during servicing and
of the status and functionality of various sys- maintenance, is stored and handled in a
tems and modules in the vehicle with regard secure manner and that the handling com-
to engine, throttle, steering and brake sys- plies with applicable legal requirements. For
tems, amongst other things. This information further information - contact a Volvo dealer.
may include details regarding the way the
driver drives the vehicle, such as vehicle
speed, brake and accelerator pedal use,
steering wheel movement and whether or not
the driver and passengers have used their
seatbelts. For the reasons given this informa-
tion may be stored in the vehicle's computers
17
01 Introduction
01 Accessories and extra equipment Change of ownership for cars with

Dimensions
The incorrect connection and installation of Volvo On Call*
accessories and extra equipment can nega- A 65 mm If the car is equipped with Volvo On Call
tively affect the car's electronic system. (VOC) it is important to change the owner of
B 150 mm
the service.
Certain accessories only function when asso-
C 125 mm
ciated software is installed in the car's com- VOC is a supplemental service that consists
puter system. Volvo therefore recommends of safety, security and comfort services. In
that you always contact an authorised Volvo The windscreen is equipped with a heat- the event of change of ownership it is impor-
workshop before installing accessories or reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat tant to change the owner of the service.
extra equipment which are connected to or radiation into the passenger compartment.
affect the electrical system. Closing the VOC service
The positioning of electronic equipment, such
as a transponder, behind a glass surface with Contact a Volvo dealer in the event of change
Heat-reflecting windscreen* of ownership in order to close the VOC serv-
heat-reflecting film may affect its function and
performance. ice.
For the optimal function of electronic equip- Starting the VOC service
ment, it should be positioned on the part of It is very important that the VOC service
the windscreen with no heat-reflecting film changes owner so that the previous owner's
(see the highlighted area in the above illustra- ability to use services in the car is stopped.
tion). Contact a Volvo dealer in the event of a
change of ownership.
Related information
• Information on the Internet (p. 19)
Areas where IR film is not applied.

01 Introduction
Information on the Internet 01

At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-
mation concerning your car.
With a personal Volvo ID it is possible to log in
to My Volvo web which is a personal web
page for you and your car.
A QR code reader is required to read the QR

code, which is available as a supplemental
program for several mobile phones. The QR
code reader can be downloaded from e.g.
App Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.
QR code
19
01 Introduction
01 Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy tured in one of the cleanest and most
Your Volvo complies with strict international resource-efficient plants in the world.
environmental standards and is also manufac-
G000000
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Cor- for our partners so that they work systemati- Efficient emission control
poration's core values which influence all cally with environmental issues. Your Volvo is manufactured following the
operations. We also believe that our custom- concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept
ers share our consideration for the environ- Fuel consumption that encompasses a clean interior environ-
ment. Volvo cars have competitive fuel consump- ment as well as highly efficient emission con-
tion in each of their respective classes. Lower trol. In many cases the exhaust emissions are
Your Volvo complies with strict international fuel consumption generally results in lower
environmental standards and is also manu- well below the applicable standards.
emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon diox-
factured in one of the cleanest and most ide. Clean air in the passenger
resource-efficient plants in the world. Volvo
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel compartment
Car Corporation has global ISO certification,
consumption. For more information read A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
which includes the environmental standard
under the heading, Reducing environmental and pollen from entering the passenger com-
ISO 14001 covering all factories and several
impact. partment via the air intake.
of our other units. We also set requirements
20
01 Introduction
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* required to guarantee good environmental Following this advice can save money, the 01
(Interior Air Quality System) ensures that the care. planet's resources are saved, and the car's
incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traf- durability is extended. For more information
fic outside. Reducing environmental impact and further advice, see Economical driving (p.
You can easily help reduce environmental 299) and Fuel consumption and CO2 emis-
The system consists of an electronic sensor impact - here are a few tips: sions (p. 452).
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-
tored continuously and if there is an increase • Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off
Recycling
in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as the engine when stationary for longer
periods. Pay attention to local regula- As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is
carbon monoxide then the air intake is important that the car is recycled in an envi-
closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy tions.
ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
traffic, queues and tunnels for example. • Drive economically - think ahead.
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level • Perform service and maintenance in is therefore requested to contact a dealer for
ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the accordance with the owner's manual's referral to a certified/approved recycling
carbon filter. instructions - follow the intervals recom- facility.
mended in the Service and Warranty
Interior Booklet. Related information
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea- • If the car is equipped with an engine • The owner's manual and the environment
sant and comfortable, even for people with block heater*, use it before starting from (p. 22)
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. cold - it improves starting capacity and
Extreme attention has been given to choosing reduces wear in cold weather and the
environmentally-compatible materials. engine reaches normal operating tem-
perature more quickly, which lowers con-
Volvo workshops and the environment sumption and reduces emissions.
Regular maintenance creates the conditions • High speed increases consumption con-
for a long service life and low fuel consump- siderably due to increased wind resis-
tion for your car. In this way you contribute to tance - a doubling of speed increases
a cleaner environment. When Volvo's work- wind resistance 4 times.
shops are entrusted with the service and
maintenance of your car it becomes part of
• Always dispose of environmentally hazar-
dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
our system. Volvo makes clear demands an environmentally safe manner. Consult
regarding the way in which our workshops a workshop in the event of uncertainty
are designed in order to prevent spills and about how this type of waste should be
discharges into the environment. Our work- discarded - an authorised Volvo work-
shop staff have the knowledge and the tools shop is recommended.

01 Introduction
01 The owner's manual and the Laminated glass

environment
The paper pulp in a printed owner's manual Laminated glass
comes from FSC® certified forests or other The glass is reinforced which pro-
controlled sources. vides better protection against
break-ins and improved sound insu-
The Forest Stewardship Council® symbol lation in the passenger compart-
shows that the paper pulp in a printed ment. The windscreen and other windows*
owner's manual comes from FSC® certified have laminated glass.
forests or other controlled sources.
Related information
• Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy (p.
20)

SAFETY
02 Safety
General information on seatbelts • The hip strap must be positioned low Related information
Heavy braking can have serious consequen- down (not over the abdomen). • Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 26)
ces if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that • Tension the hip strap over the lap by pull- • Seat belt - loosening (p. 26)
all passengers are using their seatbelts during ing the diagonal shoulder belt up towards
02 the shoulder.
• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 27)
the journey.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a
seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly,
this may diminish the protection provided
by the airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per-
son.
WARNING
It is important that the seatbelt lies against
the body so it can provide maximum protec- Never modify or repair the seatbelts your-
self. Volvo recommends that you contact
tion. Do not lean the backrest too far back.
an authorised Volvo workshop.
The seatbelt is designed to protect in a nor-
mal seating position. If the seatbelt has been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas- collision, the entire seatbelt must be
ten their (p. 25) seatbelt by means of an replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective
audio and visual reminder (p. 27). properties may have been lost even if the
seatbelt does not appear damaged. The
Remember seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows
• Do not use clips or anything else that can signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly. must be type-approved and designed for
installation at the same location as the
• The seatbelt must not be twisted or replaced seatbelt.
caught on anything.
24
02 Safety
Seatbelt - putting on Remember

Put on the seatbelt (p. 24) before driving The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
starts. • if it is pulled out too quickly
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by • during braking and acceleration 02
pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt • if the car leans heavily.
buckle. A loud "click" indicates that the belt
has locked. Related information
• Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 26)
• Seat belt - loosening (p. 26)
• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 27)
Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on

• Seatbelt reminder (p. 27)
the shoulder.
Correctly fitted seatbelt.
Seatbelt height adjustment. Press the button and

move the belt vertically. Position the belt as high
as possible without it chafing against your throat.
The locking tab at the centre rear seat only
fits into the intended seatbelt buckle.
25
02 Safety
Seat belt - loosening Seatbelt - pregnancy The aim should be to position the seat with as
Loosen the seatbelt (p. 24) when the car is Seatbelt (p. 24) must always be worn during large a distance as possible between abdo-
stationary. pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in men and steering wheel.
the correct way.
02 Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle Related information
and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt • Seatbelt - putting on (p. 25)
does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so • Seat belt - loosening (p. 26)
that it does not hang loose.
Related information
• Seatbelt - putting on (p. 25)
• Seatbelt reminder (p. 27)
G020998
The diagonal section should wrap over the
shoulder then be routed between the breasts
and to the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen. –
It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove the slack from the seatbelt and
ensure that it fits as close to the body as pos-
sible. In addition, check that there are no
twists in the seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant dri-
vers must adjust the seat (p. 73) and steer-
ing wheel (p. 77) such that they can easily
maintain control of the vehicle as they drive
(which means that they must be able to easily
operate the foot pedals and steering wheel).
26
02 Safety
Seatbelt reminder automatically after approximately Seatbelt tensioner

Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas- 30 seconds driving or after pressing the Seatbelts (p. 24) on the driver's side, the pas-
ten (p. 25) their seatbelt by means of an audio indicator stalk (p. 101) OK button. If any- senger side and at the outer rear seats are fit-
and visual reminder. one is unbelted then the message can ted with seatbelt tensioners. A mechanism in
only be acknowledged manually by 02
the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
the event of a sufficiently violent collision. The
• Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- seatbelt then provides more effective restraint
belts is unfastened during travel. This for the occupants.
warning takes the form of a message in
the combined instrument panel along with WARNING
the audio/visual signal. The warning stops
when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
also be acknowledged manually by seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's
pressing the OK button. side. Always insert the tongue of the seat-
belt into the buckle on the correct side. Do
The combined instrument panel's information not make any damages on seatbelts nor
display shows which seatbelts are in use. insert any foreign objects into a buckle.
This information is always available. The seatbelts and buckles would then
possibly not function as intended in the
The audio reminder is speed dependent, and event of a collision. There is a risk of
in some cases time dependent. The visual serous injury.
reminder is located in the roof console and in
the combined instrument panel (p. 60). Related information
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt • General information on seatbelts (p. 24)
reminder system.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
• Provides information on which seatbelts
(p. 24) are being used in the rear seat. A
message appears in the combined instru-
ment panel when the seatbelts are in use,
or if one of the rear doors has been
opened. The message is acknowledged
27
02 Safety
Safety - warning symbol WARNING

The warning symbol is shown if a fault is
If the warning symbol for the airbag sys-
detected during fault tracing or if a system tem remains illuminated or illuminates
has been activated. Where required, the while driving, it means that the airbag sys-
02 warning symbol is shown together with a tem does not have full functionality. The
message in the combined instrument panel symbol indicates a fault in the airbag sys-
(p. 60) information display. tem, the belt tensioner system, SIPS, the
IC system or some other fault in the sys-
tem. Volvo recommends that you contact
an authorised Volvo workshop immedi-
ately.
Warning triangle and warning symbol for the air- Related information
bag system in the digital combined instrument • General information on safety mode (p.
panel. 38)
The warning symbol in the combined instru-
ment panel is switched on with the remote
control key in key position II (p. 71), fault
tracing is performed each time the ignition is
switched on. The symbol clears after
Warning triangle and warning symbol for the air- approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag sys-
bag system (p. 29) in the analogue combined tem is fault-free.
instrument panel.
The warning symbol is shown if a fault is
detected during fault tracing or if a system
has been activated. Where required, the
warning symbol is shown together with a
message in the display. If the warning symbol
malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates
and SRS airbag Service required or SRS
airbag Service urgent appears in the dis-
play. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
28
02 Safety
Airbag system The system consists of airbags and sensors. Related information
In the event of a frontal collision the airbag A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors • Airbags on driver's side (p. 30)
system helps to protect the head, face and and the airbag(s) are inflated and become • Passenger airbag (p. 30)
chest of the driver and passenger. hot. The airbag cushions the initial collision
impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates • Safety - warning symbol (p. 28)
02
when compressed by the collision. When this
occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is
completely normal. The entire process,
including inflation and deflation of the airbag,
occurs within tenths of a second.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair.
G018665 Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
Airbag system viewed from above, left-hand-
drive car.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending
on the nature of the collision and whether
or not the seatbelt is fastened. Applies to
all seatbelt positions apart from centre
seat rear.
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli-
sion. The detectors sense the force of the
collision on the vehicle and the action is
adapted accordingly so that one or more
G018666
airbags are deployed.
Airbag system viewed from above, right-hand-

drive car.
29
02 Safety
Airbags on driver's side Related information Passenger airbag

To supplement the protection afforded by the • Passenger airbag (p. 30) To supplement the protection afforded by the
seatbelt (p. 24) on the driver side, the car is seatbelt (p. 24) on the passenger side, the car
equipped with two airbags (p. 29). is equipped with an airbag (p. 29).
02
One of the airbags is folded up into the centre The airbag is folded up into a compartment
of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is above the glovebox. Its cover panel is
marked AIRBAG. marked AIRBAG.
Knee airbag on the driver's side in a left-hand- Location of the front passenger airbag in a left-
drive car. hand drive car.
The second airbag (at knee level) is fitted in
the lower part of the instrument panel on the
driver's side; this panel is labelled AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbags in the event of a collision.
30
02 Safety
WARNING Passenger airbag - activating/

deactivating*
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the air- Front passenger airbag (p. 30) can be deacti-
bag is activated. vated if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). 02
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat. Switch - PACOS
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is located on the passenger end of the instru-
is activated. ment panel and is accessible when the pas-
Failure to follow the advice given above senger door is open.
can endanger life.
Check that the switch is in the required posi-
Location of the front passenger airbag in a right- tion. The remote control key's key blade (p.
hand drive car.
Switch - PACOS* 166) should be used to change position.
The front passenger airbag can be deacti-
WARNING vated (p. 31) if the car is equipped with a
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this Switch).
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbag in the event of a collision. WARNING
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag If the car is equipped with a front passen-
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as ger airbag, but does not have a PACOS
possible with their feet on the floor and switch (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch),
backs against the backrest. Seatbelts then the airbag will always be activated.
must be secured.
WARNING Related information

• Airbags on driver's side (p. 30) Position of airbag label plus switch.
Do not put objects in front of or above the The airbag is activated. With the switch in
dashboard where the passenger airbag is • Child seats (p. 44)
this position, persons taller than 140 cm
located.
can sit in the front passenger seat, but

02 Safety
||
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
02 on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
booster cushion on the front passenger Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
seat when the airbag is activated. This activated. deactivated.
applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.
A text message and a warning symbol in the A text message and a symbol in the roof con-
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat): roof console indicate that the airbag for the sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas-
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit front passenger seat is activated (see preced- senger seat is deactivated (see preceding
in the front passenger seat when the airing illustration). illustration).
bag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above WARNING WARNING
can endanger life.
Never place a child in a child seat or on a Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-
booster cushion in the front seat if the air- senger seat if the message in the roof con-
NOTE bag is activated and the symbol in sole indicates that the airbag is deacti-
the roof console is illuminated. Failure to vated, and if the warning symbol (p. 28) for
When the remote control key is in key follow this advice could endanger the life the airbag system is also displayed on the
position II (p. 71) the warning symbol (p. of the child. combined instrument panel. This indicates
28) for the airbag is shown in the com- that there has been a severe malfunction.
bined instrument panel for Visit a workshop as soon as possible.
approx. 6 seconds. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Following which, the indicator in the roof
console is illuminated showing the correct
status for the front passenger seat airbag.
32
02 Safety
WARNING Side airbag (SIPS)

In a side impact collision a large proportion of
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger the lives of passengers in the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
the car. (Side Impact Protection System) to beams,
pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural 02
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-
Related information er's and front passenger seats protect the
• Child seats (p. 44) chest area and the hip and are an important
part of the SIPS.
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of two main

components, side airbag and sensors. The
side airbags are located in the front seat
backrests. Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag
inflates between the occupant and the door
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact.
The airbag deflates when compressed by the
collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
33
02 Safety
||
WARNING Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster Inflatable Curtain (IC)
cushion The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the
• Volvo recommends that repairs are
The protection provided by the car to children driver and passengers from striking their
only carried out by an authorised Volvo
workshop. Defective work in the SIPS- seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion heads on the inside of the car during a colli-
02 is not diminished by the side airbag (p. 33). sion.
bag system could cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury. Child seat/booster cushion (p. 44) can be
• Do not put objects in the area between placed on the front passenger seat provided
the outside of the seat and the door that the car does not have an activated airbag
panel, since this area is required by (p. 31) on the front passenger side.
the side airbag.
• Volvo recommends the use only of car Related information
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other • Passenger airbag (p. 30)
seat covers may impede the operation • General information on child safety (p.
of the side airbags. 42)
• Side airbags are a supplement the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Related information The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is

• Airbags on driver's side (p. 30) a part of the SIPS system (p. 33). It is fitted in
• Passenger airbag (p. 30) the headlining along both sides of the roof
and protects the car's occupants sitting in the
• Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster
outer seats. A sufficiently violent collision
cushion (p. 34)
trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is
• Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 34) inflated.
34
02 Safety
WARNING General information on WHIPS

(whiplash protection)
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) is a pro-
designed for light clothing (not for solid tection against whiplash injuries. The system
objects such as umbrellas for example). consists of energy absorbing backrests and 02
Do not screw or install anything onto the specially designed head restraints in the front
car's headlining, door pillars or side pan- seats.
els. This could compromise the intended
protection. Volvo recommends that you
only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm
under the top edge of the windows in the
doors. Otherwise, the intended protection
of the inflatable curtain, which is con-
cealed in the headlining, may be compro-
mised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to
the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
Related information
• General information on seatbelts (p. 24)
The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end
• Airbag system (p. 29)
collision, where the angle and speed of the
• Side airbag (SIPS) (p. 33) collision, and the nature of the colliding vehi-
cle all have an influence.
35
02 Safety
||
WARNING WHIPS - child seats WHIPS - seating position
The protection provided by the car to children In order to obtain optimum protection from
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion the WHIPS system (p. 35) the driver and pas-
is not diminished by the WHIPS system (p. senger must have the correct seating position
02 35). and make sure that the system's function is
Properties of the seat not obstructed.
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the Child seat/booster cushion (p. 44) can be
front seat backrests are lowered backward to placed on the front passenger seat provided Seating position
alter the seating position of the driver and that the car does not have an activated airbag Set the correct seating position in the front
front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of (p. 31) on the front passenger side. seat (p. 73) before driving starts.
whiplash injury.
Related information Driver and front seat passenger should sit in
• General information on child safety (p. the centre of the seat with as little space as
WARNING possible between the head and the head
42)
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS restraint.
system yourself. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo work- Function
shop.
Related information
• WHIPS - child seats (p. 36)
• WHIPS - seating position (p. 36)
• General information on seatbelts (p. 24)
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the

driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the
WHIPS system from functioning.
36
02 Safety
WARNING WARNING When the systems deploy

In the event of a collision Volvo's different
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the If a seat has been subjected to extreme
rear seat cushion and the front seat back- forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, personal safety systems work together in
rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the the WHIPS system must be checked. order to minimise injury.
function of the WHIPS system. Volvo recommends that it is checked by 02
an authorised Volvo workshop. System Triggered
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
Seatbelt ten- In the event of a
capacity may have been lost even if the
seats appear to be undamaged. sioner (p. 27) front frontal collision,
seat and/or side-impact
Volvo recommends that you contact an collision, and/or
authorised Volvo workshop to have the
rear-end collision
system checked even after a minor rear-
end collision. and/or overturning
Seatbelt ten- In a frontal collision

sioner (p. 27) rear and/or side-impact
seatA accident and/or
overturning
Airbags In a frontal collisionB

Do not place objects on the rear seat that may
prevent the WHIPS system from functioning. (Steering wheel,
knee (p. 30), pas-
WARNING senger airbag (p.
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the 30))
corresponding front seat must be moved
Side airbags In a side-impact
forward so that it does not touch the
folded backrest. (SIPS) (p. 33) accidentB
37
02 Safety
System Triggered WARNING General information on safety mode

Safety mode is a protective state that is
Inflatable Curtain In the event of a side The airbag system's control module is
located in the centre console. If the centre enforced when the collision may have dam-
IC (p. 34) impact and/or over- console is drenched with water or other aged any of the car's vital functions, such as
02 turning and/or some liquid, disconnect the battery cables. Do the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety
frontal collisionsB not attempt to start the car since the air- systems, or the brake system.
bags may deploy. Recovering the car.
Whiplash protec- In a rear-end colli- Volvo recommends that you have it con-
tion WHIPS (p. 35) sion veyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.
A There is no seatbelt tensioner at the centre rear seat.
B The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a
collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors WARNING
such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed
of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the Never drive with deployed airbags. They
different safety systems of the car are activated. can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The
If the airbags (p. 29) have deployed, the fol- smoke and dust created when the airbags
lowing is recommended: are deployed can cause skin and eye irrita-
tion/injury after intensive exposure. In case
• Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
of irritation, wash with cold water. The
that you have it conveyed to an author- rapid deployment sequence and airbag
ised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with fabric may cause friction and skin burns. Warning triangle in the analogue combined
deployed airbags. instrument panel.
• Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
• Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The airbags and belt tensioner system are
deployed only once during a collision.
38
02 Safety
Related information Safety mode - attempting to start the

• Safety mode - attempting to start the car car
(p. 39) If the car is set in safety mode (p. 38) then an
• Safety mode - moving the car (p. 40) attempt to start the car can be made if every-
thing seems normal and the absence of fuel 02
leakage has been checked.
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the

car. There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
Warning triangle in the digital combined instru-
ment panel. Remove the remote control key and open the
driver's door. If a message is now shown to
If the car is involved in a collision, the text
the effect that the ignition is on, press the
Safety mode See manual may appear in the
start button. Then close the door and reinsert
combined instrument panel (p. 60) informa-
the remote control key. The car's electronics
tion display. This means that the car has
will now try to reset themselves to normal
reduced functionality.
mode. Then try to start the car.
WARNING If the message Safety mode See manual is

still shown on the display, then the car must
Never attempt to repair your car or reset not be driven or towed, but a vehicle recovery
the electronics yourself if the car has been
service (p. 309) used instead. Even if the car
in safety mode. This could result in per-
sonal injury or the car not functioning as appears to be driveable, hidden damage may
normal. Volvo recommends that you make the car impossible to control once mov-
engage an authorised Volvo workshop to ing.
check and restore the car to normal status
after Safety mode See manual has been
displayed.
39
02 Safety
||
WARNING Safety mode - moving the car Pedestrian airbag
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode In certain frontal collisions, the pedestrian air-
Never, under any circumstances, attempt
to restart the car if it smells of fuel when See manual has been reset after attempting bag (Pedestrian Airbag) contributes to miti-
the Safety mode See manual message to start the car (p. 39) , the car can be moved gating the collision of the pedestrian with the
02 is displayed. Leave the car at once. carefully out of a dangerous position. car.
Do not move the car further than necessary.

WARNING
Related information
If the car is in safety mode it must not be • General information on safety mode (p.
towed. It must be transported from its 38)
location. Volvo recommends that it is
transported to an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Related information
• Safety mode - moving the car (p. 40)
The pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag) is

fitted under the bonnet near the windscreen.
In the event of certain frontal collisions with a
pedestrian, the sensors in the front bumper
react and the airbag inflates if required based
on the force of the impact. The sensors are
active at a speed of approx. 20-50 km/h and
an ambient temperature between
-20 and +70°C.
The sensors are designed to detect a collision
with an object that has similar properties to
those of the human leg.
40
02 Safety
NOTE Related information Pedestrian airbag - moving the car

• Pedestrian airbag - moving the car (p. The car may be moved if it has not been set in
There may be objects in the traffic environ- 41)
ment that prompt a signal to the sensors safety mode (p. 38).
that is similar to a collision with a pedes- • Pedestrian airbag - folding up (p. 42)
If any of the other airbags in the passenger 02
trian. It is possible that the system will be
activated in the event of a collision with compartment were activated then the car
such an object. remains in safety mode.
If only the pedestrian airbag (p. 40)
If the airbag is activated (Pedestrian Airbag) Pedestrian Airbag has been activated:
• the rear part of the bonnet is raised and 1. Move the car to a safe location as close
locked in this position as possible.
• the hazard warning flashers are activated 2. Fold up the airbag in accordance with the
• the brake system is prepared for the instructions (p. 42).
upcoming emergency braking. 3. Seek the nearest workshop.
WARNING WARNING
Do not fit any accessories or change any- Volvo recommends that, after activation of
thing in the front. Incorrect intervention at the airbag, you contact an authorised
the front may cause incorrect function in Volvo workshop as soon as possible.
the system and lead to serious injury and
damage to the car.
Volvo recommends that genuine wiper Related information
arms are used and that you only use genu- • Pedestrian airbag (p. 40)
ine parts for them.
WARNING
Volvo recommends contacting an author-
ised Volvo workshop in the event of dam-
age to the bumper in order to ensure that
the system is intact.
41
02 Safety
Pedestrian airbag - folding up 2. Gather the airbag fabric along its length General information on child safety
The car may be moved if it has not been set in on the driver's side. Then fold the gath- Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
safety mode (p. 38). ered fabric towards the centre. Wind the correctly secured in the car. Never allow a
Velcro strap (double sided) around as child to sit on the knee of a passenger.
The pedestrian airbag (p. 40) (Pedestrain much fabric as possible and fasten it.
02
Airbag) must be folded up before the car is Volvo recommends that children travel in
moved. 3. Press the rolled up portion of the airbag
rear-facing child seats until as late an age as
into the airbag housing (2).
possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and
4. Repeat steps 1-3 for the passenger side. then front-facing booster cushions/child seats
It may be necessary to fold the gathered until up to 10 years of age.
fabric twice on this side in order to wind
The position of a child in the car and the
the Velcro strap around it.
choice of equipment are dictated by the
5. The airbag housing cover will be open child's weight and size; see Child seats (p.
slightly. This is completely normal. 44).
Related information
NOTE
• Pedestrian airbag - moving the car (p. 41)
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.
Airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,
Airbag housing
booster cushions & attachment devices)
Velcro strap, passenger side which is designed for your particular car.
Using Volvo's child safety equipment pro-
Velcro strap, driver's side vides you with optimum conditions for your
child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore,
The airbag may feel warm and give off
the child safety equipment fits and is easy to
smoke. This is normal. Fold the airbag as fol-
use.
lows:
1. Find the Velcro strap on the
driver's side (4).
42
02 Safety
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
02
Child safety locks

The controls for operating the rear door
power windows and the rear door opening
handles can be blocked (p. 179) from open-
ing from the inside.
Related information
• Child seats (p. 44)
• Child seats - location (p. 48)
• Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 48)
• Child seats - upper mounting points (p.
52)
43
02 Safety
Child seats NOTE

Children should sit comfortably and safely.
When using child safety products it is
Make sure that the child seat is being used important to read the installation instruc-
correctly. tions included.
02
WARNING
Do not secure the straps of the child seat
to the seat's horizontal adjustment bar,
springs or the rails and beams under the
seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the

child seat for the correct fitting.
G020739
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
44
02 Safety
Recommended child seats1

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear
seat
Group 0 Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child 02
seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.
max 10 kg
Type approval: E1 04301146
Group 0+
(L)
max 13 kg
Group 0 Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child Volvo infant
child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt. seat, secured with the car's seatbelt. seat (Volvo
max 10 kg
Infant Seat) -
Type approval: E1 04301146 Type approval: E1 04301146
Group 0+ rear-facing child
(U) (U) seat, secured
max 13 kg with the car's
seatbelt.
Type approval:
E1 04301146
(U)
Group 0 Child seats which are universally approved.A Child seats which are universally approved.
max 10 kg (U) (U)
Group 0+
max 13 kg
1 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
}}
45
02 Safety
||
seat
Group 1 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
02 Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's
9-18 kg
secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. seatbelt and straps.
(L) (L)
Group 1 Child seats which are universally approved.A Child seats which are universally approved.
9-18 kg (U) (U)
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's
15-25 kg
secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. seatbelt and straps.
(L) (L)
Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the
15-25 kg
secured with the car's seatbelt. car's seatbelt.
(U) (U)
Group 2/3 Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat
Seat with backrest). with backrest).
15-36 kg
(UF) (UF)
46
02 Safety
seat
Group 2/3 Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster
Cushion with and without backrest). Cushion with and without backrest). 02
15-36 kg
(UF) (UF)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
A Only for rear-facing child seat. Set the seat's backrest in upright position.
Related information
• Child seats - location (p. 48)
52)
• General information on child safety (p. 42)
47
02 Safety
Child seats - location WARNING Child seat - ISOFIX

Always fit child seats/booster cushions (p. 44) ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is acti- braces or some other design that could (p. 44) that is based on an international stand-
vated (p. 31). If a child is sitting on the front rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening but- ard.
02 passenger seat then he/she could suffer seri- ton must not be used, as they could cause
ous injury if the airbag deploys. the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
Related information
• General information on child safety (p. 42)
The label for the airbag is visible when the pas- 52)
senger door is opened, see the illustration (p.
31). • Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 48)
You may place:
• a child seat/booster cushion on the front Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
passenger seat provided there is no acti- are located at the lower section of the rear
vated airbag on the front passenger side. seat backrest, in the outer seats.
• one or more child seats/booster cushions
The location of the mounting points is indi-
in the rear seat.
cated by symbols in the backrest upholstery
(see preceding illustration).
WARNING
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
booster cushion in the front seat if the air-
bag (SRS) is activated. the ISOFIX mounting points.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever Related information
sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag • ISOFIX - size classes (p. 49)
(SRS) is activated.
• ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 50)
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life. • General information on child safety (p. 42)
• Child seats (p. 44)
48
02 Safety
• Child seats - location (p. 48) ISOFIX - size classes WARNING

• Child seats - upper mounting points (p. There is a size classification for child seats
Never place the child in the passenger
52) using the ISOFIX (p. 48) fixture system in seat if the car is fitted with an activated air-
order to assist users in choosing the correct bag.
type of child seat (p. 50). 02
Size Description NOTE

class If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi-
cation, the car model must be included on
A Full size, front-facing child the vehicle list for the child seat.
seat
B Reduced size (alt. 1), front- NOTE

facing child seat
Volvo recommends that you contact an
B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-fac- authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda-
ing child seat tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo
recommends.
C Full size, rear-facing child seat
Related information
D Reduced size, rear-facing
child seat • ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 50)
E Rear-facing infant seat
F Transverse infant seat, left-

hand
G Transverse infant seat, right-

hand
49
02 Safety
ISOFIX - types of child seat seats are suitable for all seats in all car mod-
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in els.
different sizes. This means that not all child
02 Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIXA installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X
G X X
Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK

(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK

(IL)
D X OK
(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OK

(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
50
02 Safety
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIXA installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKB 02
(IUF)
B1 X OKB
(IUF)
A X OKB
(IUF)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal catego-
ries.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats that is based on an international standard.
B Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
Make sure you select the right size class (p.

49) of child seat with ISOFIX fixture system.
Related information
51
02 Safety
Child seats - upper mounting points NOTE

The car is equipped with upper mounting
In cars with a cargo cover over the lug-
points for certain front-facing child seats (p. gage compartment, this must be removed
44). These mounting points are located on the before child seats can be attached to the
02 rear of the seat. securing points.
Upper mounting points
For detailed information on how the child seat
should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be
drawn through the hole in the head
restraint leg before they are tensioned at
the attachment point.
Related information
The upper mounting points are primarily • General information on child safety (p. 42)
intended for use with front-facing child seats. • Child seats - location (p. 48)
Volvo recommends that small children should • Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 48)
sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age
as possible.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facili-
tate fitting this type of child seat in cars
with folding head restraints on the outer
seats.
52
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instruments and controls, left-hand

drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.
03
54
Overview, left-hand drive cars
03
}}
55
||
Function See Function See
Menus and mes- (p. 101), (p. Hazard warning (p. 86).
sages, direction 104), (p. 87), flashers
indicators, main/ (p. 82) and
dipped beam, trip (p. 123). Control panel for (p. 106), (p.
computer infotainment system 371) and (p.
and menu naviga- 373).
Cruise control (p. 194) and tion
03 (p. 199).
Control panel for (p. 131) or (p.
Horn, airbags (p. 77) and climate control 132).
(p. 29).
Gear selector (p. 272), (p.
Combined instru- (p. 60). 273) or (p.
ment panel 276).
Menu navigation, (p. 106), (p. Parking brake (p. 290).

audio control, 371), (p. 373)
phone control* and (p. 403). Wipers and wash- (p. 93).
ing
START/STOP (p. 268).
ENGINE button Steering wheel (p. 77).
adjustment
Ignition switch (p. 71).
Bonnet opener (p. 334).
Screen for infotain- (p. 106), (p.
ment and display of 370), (p. 371) Light switch, (p. 78) and
menus and (p. 371). opener for tailgate (p. 176).
Door handle – Seat adjustment* (p. 74).
Control panel (p. 175), (p. Related information

180), (p. 95) • Outside temperature gauge (p. 68)
and (p. 97).
• Trip meter (p. 68)
• Clock (p. 69)

Instruments and controls, right-hand

drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.
03
}}
57
||
Overview, right-hand drive cars
03
58
Function See Function See • Clock (p. 69)
Wipers and wash- (p. 93). Control panel for (p. 106), (p.
ing infotainment system 371) and (p.
and menu naviga- 373).
Menu navigation, (p. 106), (p. tion
audio control, 371), (p. 373)
phone control* and (p. 403). Control panel for (p. 131) or (p.
climate control 132).
Horn, airbags (p. 77) and 03
(p. 29). Gear selector (p. 272), (p.
273) or (p.
Combined instru- (p. 60). 276).
ment panel
Parking brake (p. 290).
Cruise control (p. 194) and
(p. 199). Menus and mes- (p. 101), (p.
sages, direction 104), (p. 87),
START/STOP (p. 268).
indicators, main/ (p. 82) and
ENGINE button
dipped beam, trip (p. 123).
Ignition switch (p. 71). computer
Screen for infotain- (p. 106), (p. Steering wheel (p. 77).
ment and display of 370), (p. 371) adjustment
menus and (p. 371). Bonnet opener (p. 334).
Door handle –
Light switch, (p. 78) and
Control panel (p. 175), (p. opener for tailgate (p. 176).
180), (p. 95) Seat adjustment* (p. 74).
and (p. 97).
Hazard warning (p. 86). Related information

flashers • Outside temperature gauge (p. 68)
• Trip meter (p. 68)

Combined instrument panel Analogue combined instrument panel Gauges and indicators
The combined instrument panel's information - overview
display shows information on some of the The combined instrument panel's information
car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip display shows information on some of the
computer, as well as messages. car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip
computer, as well as messages. The informa-
• Digital combined instrument panel - over- tion is shown with symbols and text.
view (p. 61)
• Analogue combined instrument panel - Information display
03
overview (p. 60)
• Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 65)
• Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 66) Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking1, the yellow indi-
cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer -
functions (p. 123) and Filling up with fuel
(p. 295).
Eco meter The meter provides an indica-
Information display, analogue instrument panel. tion of how economically the car is being
driven. The higher the reading on the
There are further descriptions under the func- scale, the more economical it is.
tions that use the display.
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine

speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Gearchange indicator2 / Gear position
indicator3. See also Gear shift indicator*
1
When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red.
2 Manual gearbox
3 Automatic gearbox

(p. 272), Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* If the engine does not start or if the function- Digital combined instrument panel -
(p. 273) or Automatic gearbox - ality check is carried out in key position II overview
Powershift* (p. 276). then all symbols go out within a few seconds The combined instrument panel's information
except the symbol for faults in the car's emis- display shows information on some of the
Indicator and warning symbols sions system and the symbol for low oil pres- car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip
sure. computer, as well as messages. The informa-
tion is shown with symbols and text.
Related information
• Combined instrument panel (p. 60) Information display
03
• Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 66)
• Digital combined instrument panel - over-
view (p. 61)
Indicator and warning symbols, analogue instru-

ment panel.
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols

Information display, digital instrument panel*.
warning symbols4 There are further descriptions under the func-
tions that use the display.
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols, apart from Gauges and indicators
symbols in the centre of the information dis- Various themes can be selected for the digital
play, illuminate in key position II or when the combined instrument panel Possible themes
engine is started. When the engine has are "Elegance", "Eco" and "Performance".
started, all the symbols should go out except The setting for the theme can be stored in the
the parking brake symbol, which only goes remote control key's memory when locking
out when the brake is disengaged. the car; see pages Remote control key with
4 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text; see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 336).

||
key blade (p. 159) and MY CAR - Car set- is illuminated. See also Trip computer -
tings (p. 108). functions (p. 123) and Filling up with fuel
(p. 295).
A theme can only be selected when the
engine is running. Temperature gauge for engine coolant
To select the theme, press the left-hand stalk Speedometer
switch's OK button and select the Themes
menu option by turning the thumbwheel on Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
the lever. Press the OK button. Turn the speed in thousands of revolutions per
03 thumbwheel to select the theme and confirm minute (rpm).
the selection by pressing the OK button. For Gearchange indicator6 / Gear position
more information on menu navigation, see indicator7. See also Gear shift indicator*
MY CAR - menu options (p. 106). (p. 272), Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco".
(p. 273) or Automatic gearbox - Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
Powershift* (p. 276). only one white marking8, the yellow indi-
is illuminated. See also Trip computer -
functions (p. 123) and Filling up with fuel
(p. 295).
Eco guide. See also Eco guide & Power
guide* (p. 64).
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine

Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance". minute (rpm).
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
Gearchange indicator6 / Gear position
only one white marking5, the yellow indi-
indicator7. See also Gear shift indicator*
(p. 272), Automatic gearbox - Geartronic*
5
6 Manual gearbox
7 Automatic gearbox
8

(p. 273) or Automatic gearbox - Power guide. See also Eco guide & Functionality check
Powershift* (p. 276). Power guide* (p. 64). All indicator and warning symbols, apart from
Gearchange indicator6 / Gear position symbols in the centre of the information dis-
indicator7. See also Gear shift indicator* play, illuminate in key position II or when the
(p. 272), Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* engine is started. When the engine has
(p. 273) or Automatic gearbox - started, all the symbols should go out except
Powershift* (p. 276). the parking brake symbol, which only goes
out when the brake is disengaged.
Indicator and warning symbols If the engine does not start or if the function- 03
ality check is carried out in key position II
then all symbols go out within a few seconds
except the symbol for faults in the car's emis-
sions system and the symbol for low oil pres-
sure.
Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to Related information
only one white marking9, the yellow indi- • Combined instrument panel (p. 60)
cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank • Combined instrument panel - meaning of
is illuminated. See also Trip computer - indicator symbols (p. 65)
functions (p. 123) and Filling up with fuel • Combined instrument cluster - meaning
(p. 295). of warning symbols (p. 66)
Indicator and warning symbols, digital instrument
Temperature gauge for engine coolant panel. • Analogue combined instrument panel -
overview (p. 60)
Speedometer Indicator symbols
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine Indicator and warning symbols

warning symbols10
minute (rpm).
9
6 Manual gearbox
7 Automatic gearbox
10 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text; see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 336).

Eco guide & Power guide* Instantaneous value

Eco guide and Power guide are two com- The instantaneous value is displayed here -
bined instrument panel (p. 60) instruments the higher the result on the scale, the better.
which help the driver to drive the car with
optimum driving economy. The instantaneous value is calculated on the
basis of speed, engine speed, engine power
The car also stores statistics of journeys utilised plus use of the foot brake.
made, which can be viewed in the form of a
block diagram; see Trip computer - trip statis- Optimum speed (50-80 km/h) and low revs
03 tics* (p. 124). are encouraged. The pointers fall under
acceleration and braking.
Eco guide Very low instantaneous values illuminate the
This instrument provides an indication of how red zone on the meter (with a short delay),
economically the car is being driven. which means poor driving economy and Available engine power
To view this function, select the theme "Eco"; hence should be avoided.
Engine power utilised
see Digital combined instrument panel - over- Average value
view (p. 61). Available engine power
The average value slowly follows the instanta-
neous value and describes how the car has The smaller, upper pointer shows the availa-
been driven of late. The higher the pointers ble engine power11. The higher the result on
on the scale, the better the economy ach- the scale, the more power is available in the
ieved by the driver. current gear.
Power guide Engine power utilised

This instrument shows the relationship The larger, lower pointer shows the engine
between how much power (Power) is being power utilised11. The higher the result on the
taken from the engine and how much power scale, the more power is being taken from the
is available. engine.
To view this function, select the theme A large gap between the two pointers indi-
"Performance"; see Digital combined instru- cates a large power reserve.
Instantaneous value ment panel - overview (p. 61).
Average value
11 Power is dependent on engine speed.

Combined instrument panel - Symbol Specification Rear fog lamp on

meaning of indicator symbols This symbol illuminates when the rear fog
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a Right-hand direction indicator lamp is switched on.
function is activated, that the system is oper-
Stability system
ating, or that an error or failure has occurred. Start/Stop, the engine auto-
A flashing symbol indicates that the stability
stopped; see Start/Stop* -
Indicator symbols system is operating. If the symbol illuminates
function and operation (p. 280)
with constant glow then there is a fault in the
Symbol Specification system.
ABL fault 03
ABL fault The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in Stability system, sport mode
the ABL function (Active Bending Lights). Sport mode allows for a more active driving
Emissions system experience. The system then detects whether
Emissions system the accelerator pedal, steering wheel move-
If the symbol illuminates after the engine has ments and cornering are more active than in
ABS fault
been started then it may be due to a fault in normal driving and then allows controlled
the car's emissions system. Drive to a work- skidding of the rear section up to a certain
Rear fog lamp on shop for checking. Volvo recommends that level before it intervenes and stabilises the
you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo car.
Stability system workshop.
Engine preheater (diesel)
ABS fault This symbol illuminates during engine pre-
Stability system, sport mode If this symbol illuminates then the system is heating. Preheating mostly takes place due to
not working. The car's regular brake system low temperature.
Engine preheater (diesel) continues to work, but without the ABS func-
tion. Low level in fuel tank
Low level in fuel tank 1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off When the symbol illuminates the level in the
the engine. fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
Information, read display text 2. Restart the engine. Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems does not
3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to
Main beam On behave as intended, this information symbol
a workshop to have the ABS system
illuminates and a text appears on the informa-
checked. Volvo recommends that you
tion display. The message text is cleared with
Left-hand direction indicator seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
}}

||
the OK button, see Menu navigation - com- Combined instrument cluster - engine immediately and check the engine oil
bined instrument panel (p. 101), or it disap- meaning of warning symbols level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi-
pears automatically after a time (time The warning symbols alert the driver that an nates and the oil level is normal, contact a
depending on which function is indicated). important function is activated, or that a seri- workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
The information symbol can also illuminate in ous error or a serious failure has occurred. assistance from an authorised Volvo work-
conjunction with other symbols. shop.
Warning symbols
NOTE Parking brake applied
Symbol Specification This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
03 When a service message is shown, the when the parking brake is applied. The sym-
symbol and message are cleared using the Low oil pressureA
bol is illuminated during application. For more
OK button, or disappear automatically information, see Parking brake (p. 290).
after a time. Parking brake applied, digital
instrument Airbags – SRS
Main beam On If this symbol remains illuminated or illumi-
Parking brake applied, ana- nates while driving, it means a fault has been
The symbol illuminates when main beam is on
logue instrument detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or
and with main beam flash.
Airbags – SRS IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop
Left/right-hand direction indicators to have the system checked. Volvo recom-
Both direction indicator symbols flash when mends that you seek assistance from an
the hazard warning flashers are used. Seatbelt reminder authorised Volvo workshop.
Start/Stop Alternator not charging Seatbelt reminder
The symbol shines when the engine is auto- This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat
stopped. has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in
Fault in brake system
a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Related information
• Combined instrument panel (p. 60) Warning Alternator not charging
• Combined instrument cluster - meaning This symbol illuminates during driving if a
of warning symbols (p. 66) A For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure
fault has occurred in the electrical system.
is not used. Warnings are made via display text; see Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you
• Analogue combined instrument panel - Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 336).
overview (p. 60) seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
Low oil pressure workshop.
view (p. 61) If this symbol illuminates during driving then
the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the
66
Fault in brake system WARNING 2. Read the information on the information

If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level display. Implement the action in accord-
may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in ance with the message in the display.
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- Clear the message using the OK button.
and check the level in the brake fluid reser- ther before topping up the brake fluid.
voir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level (p.
340). The loss of brake fluid must be investiga- Reminder – doors not closed
ted by a workshop. Volvo recommends If one of the doors is not closed properly then
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at that you contact an authorised Volvo the information or warning symbol illuminates
the same time, there may be a fault in the workshop. together with an explanatory image in the
brake force distribution system. information display. Stop the car in a safe 03
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off WARNING place as soon as possible and close the door
the engine. that is open.
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at
2. Restart the engine. the same time, there is a risk that the rear If the car is driven at a speed lower
end will skid during heavy braking. than approx. 7 km/h then the informa-
• If both symbols extinguish, continue tion symbol illuminates.
driving.
Warning If the car is driven at a speed higher
• If the symbols remain illuminated,
check the level in the brake fluid reser- The red warning symbol illuminates when a than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
voir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level fault has been indicated which could affect symbol illuminates.
(p. 340). If the level in the brake fluid the safety and/or driveability of the car. An
If the bonnet12 is not closed properly then the
reservoir is normal but the symbols are explanatory text is shown on the information
warning symbol illuminates together with an
still illuminated, the car can be driven, display at the same time. The symbol remains
explanatory image in the information display.
with great care, to a workshop to have visible until the fault has been rectified but the
Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possi-
the brake system checked. Volvo rec- text message can be cleared with the OK
ble and close the bonnet.
ommends that you seek assistance button; see Menu navigation - combined
from an authorised Volvo workshop. instrument panel (p. 101). The warning sym- If the tailgate is not closed properly then the
bol can also illuminate in conjunction with information symbol illuminates together with
other symbols. an explanatory image in the information dis-
play. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as
Action:
possible and close the tailgate.
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car
further.
12 Only cars with alarm*.

}}

||
Related information Outside temperature gauge Trip meter
• Combined instrument panel (p. 60) The display for the outside temperature gauge The trip meter display appears in the com-
• Combined instrument panel - meaning of appears in the combined instrument panel. bined instrument panel.
• Analogue combined instrument panel -
overview (p. 60)
view (p. 61)
03
Display for outside temperature gauge, Trip meter, digital instrument.

digital instrument panel Display for trip meter13
Display for outside temperature gauge,
The two trip meters T1 and T2 are used for
analogue instrument panel
measuring short distances. The distance is
When the temperature lies between +2 °C to shown in the display.
-5 °C a snowflake symbol illuminates in the
display. This warns of icy roads. If the car has Turn the left stalk switch thumbwheel to show
been stationary then the gauge may show a the required meter.
reading that is too high. A long press (until the change occurs) on the
left-hand stalk switch's RESET button resets
Related information the trip meter shown. For more information,
• Combined instrument panel (p. 60) see Trip computer - functions (p. 123).
Related information
• Combined instrument panel (p. 60)
13 Display appearance may differ depending on instrument variant.
68
Clock Related information

The clock display appears in the combined • Combined instrument panel (p. 60)
instrument panel.
03
1. Locate Settings System options

Time.
2. The cursor is located in the first box for
Clock, digital instrument panel. Hour: Press OK/MENU - the box is acti-
Display for showing the time14 vated.
3. Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and
Set the clock press OK/MENU - the box is deactivated.
The clock can be adjusted in the menu group 4. Turn TUNE to select the box for Minute
MY CAR; for more information see MY CAR - (A) and press OK/MENU - the box is acti-
menu options (p. 106). vated (B).
5. Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and
press OK/MENU - the box is deactivated.
6. Turn TUNE to select the box for OK and
press OK/MENU - the setting is com-
plete.
The menu option Settings System
options Time format selects the 24h or
12h system (AM/PM).
14 The time is shown in the middle of the instrument panel when an analogue instrument panel is fitted.
69
Volvo Sensus With a press on the respective function: Related information

Volvo Sensus is the car's operating system, RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, NAV* and CAM* other • Licenses (p. 470)
the heart of your personal Volvo experience. It sources, systems and functions can be acti-
is Sensus that provides information, entertain- vated, e.g. AM, FM1, CD, DVD*, TV*, Blue-
ment and functions to simplify your owner- tooth*, navigation* and park assist camera*.
ship. For more information on all functions/
systems, see the respective section in the
owner's manual.
03
Overview
Volvo Sensus combines and presents many

functions in several of the car's systems on
the display screen. With Volvo Sensus the car
can be personalised by means of an intuitive
user interface. Settings can be made in Car
settings, Audio and media, Climate control,
etc. Centre console control panel.
Navigation* - NAV, see separate supple-
With the centre console buttons and controls
ment.
or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad*
functions can be activated or deactivated and Audio and media (p. 370) (RADIO,
many different settings can be made. MEDIA, TEL*).
With a press on MY CAR all settings related Car settings (p. 108) - MY CAR.
to the driving and control of the car are pre- Climate control system (p. 126).
sented, such as City Safety, Locks and alarm,
setting the clock, etc. Park assist camera (p. 249) - CAM*.

Key positions Insert the key Key positions - functions at different

The remote control key can be used to set the 1. Hold the end of the remote control key levels
vehicle's electrical system in different modes/ with the detachable key blade and insert In order to enable the use of a limited number
levels so that different functions are available; the key in the ignition switch. of functions with the engine switched off, the
see Key positions - functions at different lev- 2. Then press the key in the lock up to its car's electrical system can be set in 3 differ-
els (p. 71). end position. ent levels (key positions) - 0, I and II - with the
remote control key. Throughout this owner's
IMPORTANT manual these levels are described using the
denomination "key positions". 03
Foreign objects in the ignition switch can
impair the function or destroy the lock. The following table shows the functions avail-
Do not press in the remote control key able in each key position/level.
incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the
detachable key blade; see Detachable key
blade - detaching/attaching (p. 166).
Withdraw the key

Push the remote control key, allow it to eject,
then pull it out from the ignition switch.
Ignition switch with remote control key extrac-
ted/inserted.
NOTE
For cars with the Keyless* function the key
does not need to be inserted into the igni-
tion switch but can be stored in e.g. a
pocket. For more information on Keyless
functions, see Keyless* (p. 168).

||
Level Functions Choosing key position/level Towing
• Key position 0 - Unlock the car - This For important information about the remote
0 Odometer, clock and temperature means that the car's electrical system is control key during towing, see Towing (p.
gauge are illuminated. at level 0. 306).
Electrically operated seats can be • Key position I - With the remote control
Related information
adjusted. key fully inserted into the ignition switch15
- Briefly press START/STOP ENGINE. • Key positions (p. 71)
The audio system can be used for
a limited time, see Audio and
03 NOTE
media (p. 370).
To reach level I or II without starting the
I Sun visor for glass roof, power engine - do not depress the brake/clutch
windows, 12 V socket in the pas- pedal when these key positions are due to
senger compartment, RTI, phone, be selected.
ventilation fan and windscreen
wipers can be used. • Key position II - With the remote control
key fully inserted into the ignition switch15
II The headlamps come on.
- Give a long16 press on START/STOP
Warning/indicator lamps illumi- ENGINE.
nate for 5 seconds. • Back to key position 0 - To return to key
Several other systems are acti- position 0 from position II and I - Briefly
vated. However, heating in seat press on START/STOP ENGINE.
cushions and the rear window can
Audio system
only be activated after the engine
For information on the audio system's func-
has been started.
tions with remote control key removed, see
This key position consumes a Audio and media (p. 370).
lot of current from the starter
battery and should therefore be Starting and stopping the engine
avoided! For information about starting/switching off
the engine, see Starting the engine (p. 268).
15 Not necessary for cars with the Keyless* function.

16 Approx. 2 seconds.

Seats, front WARNING Lowering the front seat backrest*

The car's front seats have different setting
Adjust the position of the driver's seat
options for optimum seating comfort. before setting off, never while driving.
Make sure that the seat is in locked posi-
tion in order to avoid personal injury in the
event of sudden braking or an accident.
Adjusting front seat head restraints

03
The passenger seat backrest can be folded

forward to make room for long loads.
To adjust lumbar support*, turn the Move the seat as far back/down as possi-
wheel17. ble.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
adjust the distance to the steering wheel
and pedals. Check that the seat is locked The height of the front seat head restraints can Lift the catches on the rear of the back-
after changing position. be adjusted. rest and fold it forward.
To raise/lower the front edge of seat Adjust the head restraint based on the per- 4. Push the seat forward so that the head
cushion*, pump up/down. son's height so that the whole of the back of restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel. the head is covered if possible. Raising takes place in reverse order.
To adjust the height, the button (see illustra-
Raise/lower the seat*, pump up/down. tion) must be pressed while the restraint is WARNING
Control panel for power seat*. moved up or down.
Do not use the space behind the front
The head restraint can be adjusted in three seat, or the rear seat's centre seat, when
different positions. the front seat backrest is lowered.
17 Also applies to power seat.

}}

||
WARNING Seats, front - electrically operated Preparations
The car's front seats have different setting The seats can be adjusted for a certain time
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it after unlocking the door with the remote con-
is properly locked after being folded up in options for optimum seating comfort. The
order to avoid personal injury in the event power seat can be moved forward/backward trol key without the key in the ignition switch.
of sudden braking or an accident. and up/down. The front edge of the seat Seat adjustment is normally made in key
cushion can be raised/lowered. The backrest position I and can always be made when the
angle can be changed. engine is running.
Related information
• Seats, front - electrically operated (p. Electrically operated seat* Seat with memory function*
03 74)
• Seats, rear (p. 76)
Front edge of seat cushion up/down The memory function stores settings for the
seat and the door mirrors.
Seat forward/backward and up/down
Store setting
Backrest rake
Memory button
The power front seats have overload protec-
tion which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an Memory button
object. If this happens, go to key position I or Memory button
0 and wait a short time before adjusting the
seat again. Button for storing settings
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) 1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
can be made at a time.

2. Hold the button depressed to store set- Key memory in remote control key has been moved since you locked the
tings while depressing one of the memory All remote control keys can be used by differ- car).
buttons. ent drivers to store the settings for the driver's The key memory can be activated/deacti-
seat and door mirrors18. vated in the menu system MY CAR under
Using a stored setting
Hold one of the memory buttons depressed Settings Car settings Car key
until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you memory. For a description of the menu sys-
release the button then the movement of the tem, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).
seat will stop. Emergency stop 03
Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one of the setting buttons for the seat or
one of the setting buttons for the seat or memory buttons in order to stop the seat.
memory buttons in order to stop the seat. Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
WARNING unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children
do not play with the controls. Check that
there are no objects in front of, behind or Proceed as follows in order to store the set- WARNING
under the seat during adjustment. Ensure tings and use the key memory*:
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children
that none of the rear seat passengers is in
danger of becoming trapped. • Adjust the seat as you want it. do not play with the controls. Check that
there are no objects in front of, behind or
• Lock the car by pressing the lock button
under the seat during adjustment. Ensure
on the remote control key that you nor-
Heated seats that none of the rear seat passengers is in
mally use. This stores the positions of the danger of becoming trapped.
For heated seats, see Heated front seats* (p. seat and door mirrors in the remote con-
133) and Heated rear seat* (p. 133). trol key's memory19.
Related information
Related information • Unlock the car (by pressing the unlock
• Remote control key - function (p. 162)
• Seats, front (p. 73) button on the same remote control key)
and open the driver's door. The driver's
• Seats, rear (p. 76)
seat and door mirrors will automatically
adopt the positions that are stored in the
remote control key's memory (if the seat
18 Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors.
19 This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.

Seats, rear Manual lowering of the outer head NOTE

The rear seat backrest and the outer seat restraints, rear seat
The front seats may need to be pushed
head restraints can be folded. The centre seat forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted
head restraint can be adjusted to suit the upwards, in order that the rear backrests
height of the passenger. can be folded forward fully.
Head restraint, centre seat, rear
• Both sections can be folded separately.
• If the entire backrest is to be folded then
03 the different sections should be folded
separately.
Pull the locking handle closest to the head

restraint to fold the head restraint forward.
The head restraint is moved back manually.
Adjust the head restraint according to pas- WARNING

senger height so that the whole of the back of The head restraint must be in locked posi-
the head is covered if possible. Slide it up as tion after being folded up.
required.
To lower the head restraint again, the button Lowering the rear seat backrest
(see illustration) must be pressed while the
restraint is carefully moved down. IMPORTANT
The head restraint can be adjusted in five dif- When the backrest is to be folded, the rear
ferent positions. seat cup holder must not be open and
there must be no objects in the rear seat.
NOTE Nor may the seat belts be connected. Oth-
erwise there is a risk of damage to the rear
Do not sit in the centre seat with the head seat upholstery.
restraint in fully lowered position.
76
NOTE Steering wheel

The steering wheel can be adjusted in differ-
When the backrest has been raised, the
red indicator should no longer be showing. ent positions and has controls for horn and
If it is still showing then the backrest is not cruise control, as well as menu, audio and
locked in place. phone control.
Adjusting
WARNING
Check that the backrests and head 03
restraints in the rear seat are locked prop-
If the right-hand section is being lowered
erly after being folded up.
- release and adjust head restraint for the
centre seat, see the earlier section "Head
restraint, centre seat, rear". Related information
• Seats, front (p. 73)
The outer head restraints are lowered
automatically when the backrests are • Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 74)
lowered. Pull up the backrest's locking
handle while folding the backrest for-
ward at the same time. A red indicator on
the lock catch shows that the back- Adjusting the steering wheel.
rest is no longer locked in place. Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Possible steering wheel positions

NOTE
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
When the backrests have been lowered
the head restraints must be moved for- height and depth:
ward slightly so as not to make contact 1. Push the lever forwards to release the
with the seat cushion. steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
Raising takes place in reverse order. that suits you.
77
||
3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering Horn Light switches
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press The headlamp control activates and adjusts
the steering wheel lightly at the same time the external lighting. It is also used to adjust
as you push the lever back. display and instrument lighting and mood
lighting.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away.
03
With speed related power steering* the level
of steering force can be adjusted, see Speed
related power steering (p. 262).
Keypads* Horn.
Press the centre of the steering wheel to sig-
nal.
Keypads in the steering wheel.

Cruise control* (p. 194)
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)

Audio and media - operating the system
(p. 371)
Bluetooth®* handsfree phone - overview (p. 403)

Overview, light switches Knob positions Posi- Specification

Posi- Specification tion
tion
Daytime running lights and
Daytime running lightsA when position/parking lamps/side
the car's electrical system is in marker lamps during the day
key position II or the engine is when the car's electrical sys-
running. tem is in key position II or the
engine is running.
Main beam flash can be used. 03
Automatic switching to dipped
Daytime running lights and beam and position/parking
position/parking lamps/side lamps/side marker lamps in
marker lamps when the car's poor light conditions or when
Overview, light switches. electrical system is in key posi- the windscreen wipers or rear
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and tion II or the engine is running. fog lamps are activated.
instrument lighting and ambient lighting* Automatic switching to posi- The tunnel detection (p. 82)*
Button for rear fog lamp tion/parking lamps/side marker function is activated.
lamps when the car is parked.
Knob for daytime running lights and park- The active high beam (p. 83)*
ing lamps Main beam flash can be used. function can be used.
Thumbwheel20 for headlamp levelling Main beam can be activated
when dipped beam is switched
on.
Main beam flash can be used.
20 Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.

}}

||
Posi- Specification 1. Leave the engine running, or have the Position/parking lamps
car's electrical system in key position I. Position/parking lamps are switched on with
tion
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/ the headlamp control knob.
Dipped beam and position/ lower beam alignment.
parking lamps/side marker
lamps.
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
03
A Fitted in or under the front bumper.
Volvo recommends that mode is used

when the car is being driven, as long as traffic
situations or weather conditions are unfavour-
able for the active high beam function*.
Instrument lighting Knob for headlamp control in the position for

Thumbwheel positions for different load cases. position/parking lamps.
Different display and instrument lighting is
switched on depending on key position; see Only driver Turn the knob to the position for (num-
Key positions - functions at different levels (p. ber plate lighting is switched on at the same
71). Driver and passenger in the front passen-
time).
ger seat
The display lighting is automatically subdued If the car's electrical system is in key position
Occupants in all seats
in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the II or the engine is running then the daytime
thumbwheel. Occupants in all seats and maximum load running lights also switch on.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is in the cargo area When it is dark outside and the tailgate is
adjusted with the thumbwheel. Driver and maximum load in the cargo opened the rear position/parking lamps illumi-
area nate to alert traffic behind. This takes place
Headlamp levelling irrespective of what position the knob is in or
Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have
The load in the car changes the vertical align- what key position the car's electrical system
automatic headlamp levelling and are there-
ment of the headlamp beam, which could is in.
fore not equipped with the thumbwheel.
dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by
adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the
beam if the car is heavily laden.

Related information Daytime running lights WARNING

• Light switches (p. 78)
Daytime running lights during the day. This system help to save energy - it cannot
• Lamp replacement - location of front determine in all situations when daylight is
lamps (p. 342) DRL too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist
and rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensur-
ing that the car is driven with its lights in a
correct state and in accordance with appli-
cable traffic regulations. 03
Related information
• Lamp replacement - location of front
lamps (p. 342)
Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.

With the knob for headlamp control in
position the daytime running lights (Daytime
Running Lights - DRL) are activated automati-
cally when the car is driven during daytime. A
light sensor on the top of the instrument
panel changes from daytime running lights to
dipped beam at twilight or when daylight
becomes too weak. Changing to dipped
beam also takes place if the windscreen wip-
ers or rear fog lamps are activated.
81
Tunnel detection* Main/dipped beam flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk
Tunnel detection changes the lighting from switch is released.
daytime running lights to dipped beam when
Main beam
the car is driven into a tunnel. Approx. 20 sec-
Main beam can be activated when the knob
onds after the car has left the tunnel, the light-
is in position 21 or . Activate/deac-
ing returns to daytime running lights.
tivate main beam by moving the stalk switch
The tunnel detection function is available in towards the steering wheel to the end posi-
cars with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the tion and then releasing. Alternatively, the
03 entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting main beam can be deactivated by a light
from daytime running lights to dipped beam. press of the stalk switch toward the steering
Approx. 20 seconds after the car has left the wheel.
tunnel, the lighting returns to daytime running
When main beam has been activated the
lights. If the car is driven into another tunnel
within this time period then dipped beam is symbol illuminates in the combined
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control.
kept switched on. This prevents frequent instrument panel.
Position for main beam flash
changes to the car lighting.
Related information
Note that the headlamp control's knob must Position for main beam • Active Xenon headlamps* (p. 84)
remain in position for tunnel detection
Dipped beam • Active high beam* (p. 83)
to work. • Lamp replacement - location of front
With the knob in position, dipped beam
lamps (p. 342)
Related information is activated automatically at dusk or when
• Main/dipped beam (p. 82) daylight becomes too weak. Dipped beam is • Light switches (p. 78)
• Light switches (p. 78) also activated automatically if the windscreen • Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern
wipers or rear foglights are activated. (p. 90)
With the knob in position, dipped beam • Tunnel detection* (p. 82)
is always switched on when the engine is run-
ning or when key position II is active.
Main beam flash

Move the stalk switch gently towards the
steering wheel to the position for main beam
21 When dipped beam is activated.

Active high beam* When AHB is activated the symbol

The Active High Beam function detects the turns white in the instrument's information
headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the display.
rear lights of vehicles in front, and switches When main beam is activated, the symbol
the lighting from main beam to dipped beam. shines blue.
The lighting returns to main beam when the
incoming light has stopped. Manual operation
Active high beam - AHB
Active high beam (Active High Beam - AHB) is
NOTE 03
a function which uses a camera sensor at the Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
top edge of the windscreen to detect the camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist
headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in and dirt.
rear lights of vehicles in front, and then AUTO position. Do not stick or attach anything to the
switches from main beam to dipped beam. The function can start while driving in the windscreen in front of the camera sensor
The function can also take streetlights into as this may reduce effectiveness or cause
dark when the car's speed is 20 km/h or one or more of the systems dependent on
account. higher. the camera to stop working.
The lighting returns to main beam about a Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left-
second after the camera sensor no longer hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel If the message Active main beam
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming to the end position and then releasing. Deac- Temporary unavailable Switch manually is
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front. tivation when main beam is on means that the shown in the combined instrument panel's
Activating/deactivating lights are reset directly to dipped beam. information display then you have to switch
AHB can be activated when the headlamp Car with analogue combined instrument manually between main and dipped beam.
control's knob is in position (provided panel However, the knob for headlamp control can
that the function has not been deactivated in still remain in position . The same
When AHB is activated the symbol illu- applies if the message Windscreen sensors
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR -
minates in the instrument's information dis-
menu options (p. 106)). blocked See manual and the symbol
play.
are shown. The symbol goes out when
When main beam has been switched on the these messages are shown.
symbol also illuminates in the com-
AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in
bined instrument panel.
situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When
Car with digital combined instrument panel
}}

||
AHB becomes available again, or the wind- IMPORTANT Active Xenon headlamps*
screen sensors are no longer blocked, the Active Xenon headlamps are designed to pro-
Examples of when manual switching
message goes out and the symbol illu- vide maximum illumination in bends and junc-
between main and dipped beam may be
minates. required: tions and so provide increased safety.
WARNING • In heavy rain or dense fog Active Xenon headlamps ABL

• In freezing rain
AHB is an aid for using the optimum beam
pattern when conditions are favourable. • In snow flurries or slush
03
The driver always bears responsibility for • In moonlight
manually switching between main and • When driving in poorly lit built-up
dipped beam when traffic situations or areas
weather conditions so require.
• When the traffic ahead has weak light-
ing
• If there are pedestrians on or beside
the road
• If there are highly reflective objects
such as signs in the vicinity of the road
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)
• When the lighting from oncoming traf- and activated (right) respectively.
fic is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
If the car is equipped with active Xenon head-
• When there is traffic on connecting lamps (Active Bending Lights – ABL) then the
roads light from the headlamps follows the steering
• On the brow of a hill or in a hollow wheel movement in order to provide maxi-
• In sharp bends. mum lighting in bends and junctions and so
provide increased safety.
For more information on the limitations of the The function is activated automatically when
camera sensor, see Collision warning system* the car is started (provided that it has not
- camera sensor limitations (p. 231). been deactivated in the menu system
MY CAR, see MY CAR - menu options (p.
Related information 106)). In the event of a fault in the function the
• Main/dipped beam (p. 82) symbol illuminates in the combined

instrument panel at the same time as the Rear fog lamp the headlamp control's knob is turned to
information display shows an explanatory text When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog position or .
and a further illuminated symbol. lamp can be used so that other road users
shall notice vehicles in front at an early stage. NOTE
Symbol Display Specification
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps
Headlamp The system is vary from country to country.
system disengaged. Visit
malfunc- a workshop if Related information
03
tion Serv- the message • Light switches (p. 78)
ice remains. Volvo
• Lamp replacement - location of rear
required recommends lamps (p. 345)
that you contact
an authorised
Volvo workshop.
The function is only active in twilight or dark-

ness and only when the car is moving. Button for rear fog lamp.
The function22 can be deactivated/ activated The rear fog lamp can only be switched on
in the menu system MY CAR under Settings when key position II is active or the engine is
running and the headlamp control's knob is in
Car settings Light settings Active
Bending Lights. For a description of the position or .
menu system, see MY CAR - menu options Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog
(p. 106). lamp indicator symbol in the combined
Related information instrument panel and the lamp in the button
illuminate when the rear fog lamp is switched
• Main/dipped beam (p. 82)
on.
• Active high beam* (p. 83)
The rear fog lamp is switched off automati-
cally when the engine is switched off or when
• Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern
(p. 90)
22 Activated on delivery from the factory.

Brake lights Hazard warning flashers again or the button is depressed. For more
The brake light automatically comes on during The hazard warning flashers warn other road information on emergency brake lights and
braking. users by means of all of the car's direction automatic hazard warning flashers, see Foot
indicator lamps flashing simultaneously when brake - emergency brake lights and auto-
The brake light is switched on when the brake this function is activated. matic hazard warning flashers (p. 289).
pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched
on when one of driving support systems When the hazard warning flashers are acti- Related information
Adaptive cruise control (p. 199), City Safety vated, both direction indicator symbols flash • Direction indicators (p. 87)
(p. 217) or Collision warning system (p. 223) in the combined instrument panel.
03 brakes the car.
For information on emergency brake lights
and automatic hazard warning flashers, see
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 289).
Related information
lamps (p. 345)
Button for hazard warning flashers.

Press the button to activate the hazard warn-
ing flashers. Both direction indicator symbols
in the combined instrument panel flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
The hazard warning flashers are activated
automatically when the car has been braked
so suddenly that the emergency brake lights
have been activated at a speed below
10 km/h. The hazard warning flashers remain
on when the car has stopped and are deacti-
vated automatically when the car is driven off
86
Direction indicators Continuous flash sequence Interior lighting

The car's direction indicators are operated Move the stalk switch up or down to the The passenger compartment lighting is acti-
with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction outer position. vated/deactivated with the buttons in the con-
indicator lamps flash three times or continu- The stalk switch remains in its position and is trols above the front seats and the rear seat.
ously, depending on how far up or down the moved back manually, or automatically by the
stalk switch is moved. steering wheel movement.
Direction indicator symbols

For direction indicator symbols, see Com- 03
bined instrument panel - meaning of indicator
symbols (p. 65).
Related information
• Hazard warning flashers (p. 86)
lamps (p. 345)
lamps (p. 342) Controls in roof console for the front reading
lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Direction indicators. Reading lamp, left-hand side
Short flash sequence Passenger compartment lighting (floor
Move the stalk switch up or down to the lamps* and ceiling lamps) - On/Off
first position and release. The direction Auto function for passenger compartment
indicator lamps flash three times. The lighting
function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Reading lamp, right-hand side
Settings Car settings Light All lighting in the passenger compartment can
settings Triple be switched on and off manually within
indicator. For a description of the menu 30 minutes from when:
system, see MY • the engine has been switched off and the
CAR - menu options (p. 106). car's electrical system is in key position 0
• the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started.

||
Front reading lamps* settings Light settings Interior light The passenger compartment lighting is
The reading lamps are switched on or off by Floor lights. Select from Off, Low and switched on and remains on for 30 seconds
briefly pressing the relevant button in the roof High. For more information on the menu sys- if:
console. tem, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106). • the car is unlocked with the remote con-
Brightness is adjusted by holding the button trol key or key blade, see Remote control
pressed in. Lighting in the front door storage key - function (p. 162) or Detachable key
compartments* blade - unlocking doors (p. 166)
Rear reading lamps* Lighting in the front door storage compart- • the engine has been switched off and the
03 ments comes on when the engine starts. car's electrical system is in key position
0.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off Passenger compartment lighting is switched
respectively when the lid is opened or closed. off when:
• the engine is started
Vanity mirror lighting
The lighting for the vanity mirror (p. 150) is • the car is locked.
switched on and off respectively when the The passenger compartment lighting is
cover is opened or closed. switched on and off respectively when a side
door is opened or closed.
To replace the lamp, see Lamp replacement -
vanity mirror lighting (p. 347). It remains switched on for two minutes if one
Rear reading lamps. of the doors is open.
Lighting in the cargo area
The lamps are switched on or off by briefly The lighting in the cargo area is switched on If any lighting is switched on manually and
pressing the relevant button. and off respectively when the tailgate is the car is locked then it will be switched off
opened or closed. automatically after two minutes.
Brightness is adjusted by holding the button
pressed in. Mood lights*
Auto function for passenger
When the normal passenger compartment
Floor lighting as ambient light* compartment lighting
lighting is switched off and the engine is run-
To make the interior brighter while driving the The auto function is activated when the lamp
ning, an LED illuminates in the front and rear
floor lighting can be activated at dimmed in the AUTO button is lit.
roof console respectively in order to provide a
level. The passenger compartment lighting is then low light and enhance the ambience while
Floor lamp intensity can be changed in the switched on and off as indicated below. driving. The light also makes it easier to see
MY CAR menu system under Settings Car objects in the storage compartments, etc.,

when it is dark outside. Light intensity can be Home safe light duration Approach light duration
changed in the MY CAR menu system under Home safe lighting consists of dipped beam, Approach lighting consists of parking lamps,
Settings Car settings Light settings parking lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate light-
Interior light Ambient light. Select number plate lighting, interior roof lighting ing, interior roof lighting and floor lighting.
from Off, Low and High. This lighting extin- and floor lighting.
Approach lighting is switched on with the
guishes when the engine is switched off.
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept remote control key, see Remote control key -
The colour of the light can be also set in the switched on to work as home safe lighting function (p. 162), and is used to switch on
MY CAR menu system under Settings Car after the car has been locked. the car's lighting at a distance.
03
settings Light settings Interior light 1. Remove the remote control key from the When the function is activated with the
Ambient light colours. If you select ignition switch. remote control, the parking lamps, door mir-
Temperature, the colour shifts between ror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward
warm white and cold white depending on the lighting and floor lighting are switched on.
the steering wheel to the end position and
temperature in the car or you can choose release it. The function can be activated The length of time for which the approach
between different colour themes. The availa- in the same way as with main beam flash; lighting should be kept on can be set in the
ble colour themes are Frosty White, see Main/dipped beam (p. 82). menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
Toscana White, Ember Gold, Red Sunset,
Rainforest, Glacier Blue and Violet Purple. 3. Get out of the car and lock the door. settings Light settings Approach light
For more information on the menu system, duration. For a description of the menu sys-
When the function is activated, dipped beam,
see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106). tem, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).
parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number
plate lighting, interior roof lighting and floor Related information
lighting are switched on. • Home safe light duration (p. 89)
The length of time for which the home safe
lighting should be kept on can be set in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Home safe
light duration. For a description of the menu
system, see MY CAR - menu options (p.
106).
Related information
• Approach light duration (p. 89)
89
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp Active Xenon headlamps*

pattern The light pattern does not need to be
The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to adjusted. The headlamp pattern is designed
avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can in such a way that oncoming traffic is not
be set for right or left-hand traffic. dazzled.
Adjusting headlamp pattern Halogen headlamps

The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps
is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens.
03 The headlamp pattern may not be as good.
Masking the headlamps

1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand
drive cars or the C and D templates for
right-hand drive cars, see the later sec-
tion "Templates for halogen headlamps":
• A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right
lens)
G021151
• B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)

Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.
• C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right
lens)
• D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left
lens)
2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive
waterproof material and cut it out.
3. Start from the design lines on the head-
lamp lenses; see the lines in the following
figure. Position the self-adhesive tem-
plates at the design lines with the help of
G021152
the illustration.
Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.

03
Upper row: left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.
}}
91
||
Templates for halogen headlamps
03
92
Wipers and washing Intermittent wiping detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
Wipers and washers clean the windscreen Set the number of sweeps per time the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
and rear window. The headlamps are cleaned unit with the thumbwheel when thumbwheel.
with high-pressure washing. intermittent wiping is selected. When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in
Continuous wiping the button illuminates and the rain sensor
Windscreen wipers23
The wipers sweep at normal speed. symbol is shown in the combined
instrument panel.
The wipers sweep at high speed. Activating and setting the sensitivity 03
When activating the rain sensor, the car must
be running or the remote control key in posi-
IMPORTANT tion I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk
switch must be in position 0 or in the position
Before activating the wipers during winter for a single sweep.
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen
in, and that any snow or ice on the wind- Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but-
screen is scraped away. ton . The windscreen wipers make one
sweep.
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers. IMPORTANT Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to
Rain sensor, on/off Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers make an extra sweep.
are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sen-
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency screen must be wet when the windscreen
sitivity and downward for lower sensitivity.
wipers are operating.
Windscreen wipers off (An extra sweep is made when the thumb-
Move the stalk switch to position 0 wheel is turned upward.)
Service position wiper blade
to switch off the windscreen wipers. Deactivate
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades
and replacement of wiper blades, see Wiper Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to blades (p. 348) and Car washing (p. 363). button or move the stalk switch down
make one sweep. to another wiper program.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-
screen wipers based on how much water it
23 For replacing the wiper blades and service position wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 348). For filling washer fluid, see Washer fluid - filling (p. 350).
}}

||
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated Washing the windscreen Wiping and washing the rear window
when the remote control key is removed from Move the stalk switch toward the steering
the ignition switch or five minutes after the wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
engine has been switched off. washers.
The windscreen wipers will make several
IMPORTANT more sweeps and the headlamps are washed
The windscreen wipers could start and be once the stalk switch has been released.
damaged in an automatic car wash.
03 Switch off the rain sensor while the car is High-pressure headlamp washing*
in motion or when the remote control key High-pressure headlamp washing consumes
is in position I or II. The symbol in the a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid,
combined instrument panel and the light in the headlamps are washed automatically at
the button go out. every fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping
Washing the headlamps and windows Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains Rear window wiper – continuous speed
in the reservoir and the message that you
should fill the washer fluid is shown in the Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow
combined instrument panel, then the supply in the illustration above) to initiate rear win-
of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched dow washing and wiping.
off. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the
windscreen and the visibility through it. NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with
overheating protection which means that
the motor is switched off if it overheats.
The rear window wiper works again after a
cooling period (30 seconds or longer,
depending on the heat in the motor and
Washing function. the outside temperature).

Wiper – reversing Power windows WARNING

Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen All power windows can be operated using the
wipers are on initiates intermittent rear win- Check that no rear seat passengers are
control panel for the driver's door - the con- trapped when the windows are closed
dow wiping24. The function stops when trol panels for the other doors operate their from the driver's door.
reverse gear is disengaged. respective power window.
If the rear window wiper is already on at con-
WARNING
tinuous speed, no change is made.
Check that children or other passengers
NOTE are not trapped if the windows are closed, 03
even when the remote control key is used.
On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is
activated during reversing if the sensor is
activated and it is raining. WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember
Related information to always switch off the power supply to
• Washer fluid - filling (p. 350) the power windows by selecting key posi-
tion 0 and then take the remote control key
• Washer fluid - quality and volume (p. with you when leaving the car. For infor-
449) mation on key positions - see Key posi-
Driver's door control panel.
tions - functions at different levels (p. 71).
Switch for electric child safety locks* and
disengaging rear power window buttons;
see Child safety locks - electrical activa-
tion* (p. 180).
Rear window controls
Front window controls
24 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

||
Operating movement. It is possible to override the pinch Resetting
protection when closing has been interrupted, If the battery is disconnected then the func-
e.g. if there is ice forming. After two succes- tion for automatic opening must be reset so
sive closing interruptions the pinch protection that it can work correctly.
will be forced and the automatic function
1. Gently raise the front section of the but-
deactivated for a short while, now it is possi-
ton to raise the window to its end position
ble to close by continually holding the button
and hold it there for one second.
pulled up.
2. Release the button briefly.
03
NOTE 3. Raise the front section of the button again
One way to reduce the pulsating wind for one second.
noise when the rear windows are open is
to also open the front windows slightly. WARNING
Operating the power windows.
A reset must take place for pinch protec-
Operating without auto Operating without auto tion to work.
Operating with auto Move one of the controls up/down gently.
The power windows move up/down as long
All power windows can be operated using the as the control is held in position.
control panel for the driver's door - the con-
trol panels for the other doors can only each Operating with auto
operate their respective power window. Only Move one of the controls up/down to the end
one control panel can be operated at a time. position and release it. The window runs
automatically to its end position.
In order for the power windows to be used,
the key position must be at least I - see Key Operating with the remote control key
positions - functions at different levels (p. 71). and central locking
The power windows can be operated for a To remotely operate the power windows from
few minutes after the engine has been the outside with the remote control key or
switched off and after the remote control key from inside with central locking, see Remote
has been removed - although not after a door control key with key blade (p. 159) and Lock-
has been opened. ing/unlocking - from the inside (p. 175).
Closing of the windows is stopped and the
window is opened if anything prevents its
96
Door mirrors WARNING after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing

The door mirror positions are adjusted with the button labelled L or R respectively.
The mirror on the driver's side is the wide-
the joystick in the driver's door controls. angle type to provide optimal vision. Automatic angling of the door mirror
Objects may appear further away than
Door mirrors when parking25
they actually are.
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror
is automatically angled down so that the
Storing the position25 driver can see the side of the road when
The mirror positions are stored in the key parking for example. When reverse gear is
memory when the car has been locked with 03
disengaged the mirror automatically returns
the remote control key. When the car is to its original position after a short time.
unlocked with the same remote control key
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the
stored positions when the driver's door is the menu system MY CAR under Settings
opened. Car settings Side mirror settings Tilt
left mirror or Tilt right mirror. For a descrip-
tion of the menu system, see MY CAR - menu
the menu system MY CAR under Settings options (p. 106).
Door mirror controls.
Car settings Car key memory
Adjusting Personal settings in key memory. For a Automatic retraction when locking25
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door description of the menu system, see MY CAR When the car is locked/unlocked with the
mirror or the R button for the right-hand - menu options (p. 106). remote control key the door mirrors are auto-
door mirror. The light in the button illumi- matically retracted/extended.
nates. Angling the door mirror when parking25
The door mirror can be angled down for the
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the driver to view the side of the road when park- the menu system MY CAR under Settings
centre. ing for example. Car settings Side mirror settings Fold
3. Press the L or R button again. The light mirrors. For a description of the menu sys-
– Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
should no longer be illuminated. tem, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).
button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position
25 Only in combination with power seat with memory; see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 74).
}}
97
||
Resetting to neutral Related information Windows and rearview and door
Mirrors that have been moved out of position • Rearview mirror - interior (p. 99) mirrors - heating
by an external force must be reset electrically • Windows and rearview and door mirrors - The defroster is used to quickly remove mist-
to the neutral position for electric retracting/ heating (p. 98) ing and ice from the windscreen, rear window
extending to work correctly: and door mirrors.
1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-
Heated windscreen*, rear window and
tons.
door mirrors
2. Fold them out again with the L and R but-
03
tons.
3. Repeat the above procedure as neces-
sary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Retractable power door mirrors*

The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driv-
ing in narrow spaces:
1. Depress the L and R buttons simultane-
ously (key position must be at least I).
2. Release them after Heating, windscreen
approximately 1 second. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully retracted Heating, rear window and door mirrors
position. The function is used to remove ice and mist-
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L ing from the windscreen, rear window and
and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors door mirrors.
automatically stop in the fully extended posi- One press of the respective button starts the
tion. heating. The light in the button indicates that
Home safe and approach lighting the function is active. Switch off the heating
as soon as the ice/misting is cleared in order
The lamp on the door mirrors illuminates
not to load the battery unnecessarily. How-
when approach lighting (p. 89) or home safe
ever, the function is switched off automati-
lighting (p. 89) is selected.
cally after a certain time.

See also Demisting and defrosting the wind- Rearview mirror - interior Automatic dimming*
screen (p. 136). The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed Bright light from behind is automatically
The door mirrors and rear window are demis- with a control in the mirror's lower edge. dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control
ted/defrosted automatically if the car is Alternatively, the rearview mirror dims auto- for manual dimming is not available on mir-
started in an outside temperature lower than matically. rors with automatic dimming.
+7 °C. Automatic defrosting can be selected The rearview mirror contains two sensors -
Interior rearview mirror
in the menu system MY CAR under Settings one forward facing and one rearward facing -
Climate settings Auto start rear that work together to identify and eliminate
defrost. Select between On or Off. For a dazzling light. The forward facing sensor 03
description of the menu system, see MY CAR detects ambient light, while the rearward fac-
- menu options (p. 106). ing sensor detects the light from vehicle
headlights behind.
The compass (p. 100) is deactivated when
the heated windscreen is activated. When the
heated windscreen is deactivated, the com-
NOTE
pass is reactivated. If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or
objects in the seats or in the cargo area in
such a way that light is prevented from
reaching the sensors, then the dimming
Control for dimming function of the rearview mirror is reduced.
Manual dimming The compass (p. 100) can only be specified

Bright light from behind could be reflected in for a rearview mirror with automatic dimming.
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming with the dimming control when Related information
lights from behind are distracting: • Door mirrors (p. 97)
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal position by moving the
control towards the windscreen.

Glass roof* IMPORTANT Compass

The glass roof's blind can be operated with The rearview mirror contains an integrated
the control in the roof console.
• Avoid touching the blind because it
display that shows the compass direction in
may then be damaged.
which the front of the car is pointing.
The glass roof* is fixed, but the blind can be • Only use the control in the roof con-
operated in key position I or II with the console to operate the blind. Operation
trol in the roof console. For information on
key positions - see Key positions - functions
at different levels (p. 71).
03
Rearview mirror with compass.

The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows
Automatic opening to end position the compass direction in which the front of
the car is pointing. Eight different directions
Manual opening until the button is are shown with English abbreviations: N
released (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south
Manual closing until the button is east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west)
released and NW (north west).
Automatic closing to end position The compass* is activated automatically
when the car is started or when key position
II is active, see Key positions - functions at
different levels (p. 71). To deactivate/activate
the compass - press in the button on the rear

side of the mirror using a paper clip for exam- Menu navigation - combined
ple. instrument panel
The compass is deactivated when the heated The menus shown on the information display
windscreen is activated. When the heated in the combined instrument panel (p. 60) are
windscreen is deactivated, the compass is controlled with the left-hand stalk switch.
reactivated. Which menus are shown depends on the key
position (p. 71).
Calibration
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. 03
The compass is set for the geographic area to
G030295
which the car was delivered. The compass
should be calibrated if the car is moved
across several magnetic zones. Proceed as Magnetic zones.
follows: 4. Press the button repeatedly until the
1. Stop the car in a large open area free required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
from steel structures and high-voltage See the map of magnetic zones for the
power lines. compass.
2. Start the car. 5. Wait until the display returns to showing
the character C, or hold the button on the
NOTE bottom of the rearview mirror depressed Information display (analogue combined instru-
for approx. 6 seconds (use e.g. a paper ment panel) and menu navigation controls.
For the best calibration, switch off all elec- clip) until the character C is shown.
trical equipment (climate control system,
wipers, etc.) and makes sure that all doors 6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
are closed. more than 10 km/h until a compass direc-
tion is shown in the display, indicating
3. Hold the button on the underside of the that calibration is complete. Then drive a
rearview mirror depressed further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.
approx. 3 seconds. The number of the 7. Repeat the above procedure as neces-
current magnetic zone is shown. sary.
101
||
Menu overview - analogue combined Menu overview - digital combined
instrument panel instrument panel
Which menus are shown in the combined Which menus are shown in the combined
instrument panel's information display instrument panel's information display
depends on the key position (p. 71). depends on the key position (p. 71).
Some of the following menu options require Some of the following menu options require
the function and hardware to be installed in the function and hardware to be installed in
the car. the car.
03
Digital speed Settings*
Parking heater* Themes
Information displays (digital combined instrument Additional heater* Contrast mode/Colour mode
panel) and controls for menu navigation.
TC options Service status
OK - access the menu, acknowledge
messages and confirm menu selections. Service status Messages28
Thumbwheel – browse between menu Oil level26 Oil level29
options.
Messages (##)27 Parking heater*
RESET - reset data in the selected trip
computer step and go back in the menu Trip computer reset
structure. Related information
• Menu navigation - combined instrument
Related information
If there is a message (p. 103) then it must be panel (p. 101)
acknowledged with OK in order that the • Menu navigation - combined instrument
menus shall be shown. • Menu overview - digital combined instru- panel (p. 101)
ment panel (p. 102)
• Menu overview - analogue combined
Related information • Combined instrument panel (p. 60) instrument panel (p. 102)
• Messages - handling (p. 104)
• Combined instrument panel (p. 60)
instrument panel (p. 102)
• Menu overview - digital combined instru-
ment panel (p. 102)
26 Certain engines.
27 The number of messages is indicated in brackets.

Messages Message Specification Message Specification

When a warning, information or indicator
symbol illuminates, a corresponding message Time for reg- Time for regular service - Transmission Drive more smoothly or
appears on the information display. ular mainte- contact a workshopB. The hot Reduce stop the car in a safe
nance timing is determined by speed manner. Disengage the
Message Specification the number of kilometres gear and run the engine
driven, number of months at idling speed until the
Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the since the last service, message clearsC.
engine. Serious risk of engine running time and
Transmission Critical fault. Stop the car 03
damage - consult a work- oil grade.
shopB. hot Stop immediately in a safe
Maintenance If the service intervals are safely Wait manner and contact a
Stop engineA Stop and switch off the overdue not followed then the for cooling workshopB.
engine. Serious risk of warranty does not cover
damage - consult a work- any damaged parts - Temporarily A function has been tem-
shopB. contact a workshopB. offA porarily switched off and
is reset automatically
Service Contact a workshopB to Transmission Contact a workshopB to while driving or after star-
urgentA check the car immedi- Oil change check the car as soon as ting again.
ately. needed possible.
Low battery The audio system is
Service Contact a workshopB to Transmission The gearbox cannot han- charge switched off to save
requiredA check the car as soon as Reduced dle full capacity. Drive Power save energy. Charge the bat-
possible. performance with care until the mes- mode tery.
sage clearsC.
See manualA Read the owner's man- A Part of message, shown together with information on
where the problem has arisen.
ual. If shown repeatedly - B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
contact a workshopB. C For more messages concerning automatic gearbox.
Book time Time to book regular
for mainte- service - contact a work- Related information
nance shopB. • Messages - handling (p. 104)
• Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 101)
28 The number of messages is indicated in brackets.

29 Certain engines.
103
Messages - handling MY CAR MY CAR - operation

Use the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge MY CAR is a menu source that handles many MY CAR is a menu source where many of the
and browse among messages (p. 103) that of the car's functions, e.g. setting the clock, car's functions can be handled, e.g. setting
are shown in the information display of the door mirrors and locks. the clock, door mirrors and locks.
combined instrument panel.
Many of the car's features are handled Centre console controls
When a warning, information or indicator in this menu source, e.g. setting the
symbol illuminates, a corresponding message clock, door mirrors and locks.
is shown in the display. An error message is
03 Navigation in the menus is carried out using
stored in a memory list until the fault has
buttons in the centre console or with the
been rectified.
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Press OK on the left-hand stalk switch to
Certain functions are standard, others are
acknowledge30 a message. Scroll through optional - the range also varies depending on
messages with the thumbwheel (p. 101). the market.
NOTE Related information

If a warning message appears while you
• MY CAR - operation (p. 104)
are using the trip computer, the message • MY CAR - search paths (p. 105) Centre console controls for menu navigation.
must be read (press OK) before the previ- • MY CAR - menu options (p. 106)
ous activity can be resumed. Press MY CAR to open the menus under
MY CAR.
Related information Press OK/MENU to select/tick in the

highlighted menu option or to store the
instrument panel (p. 102) selected function in the memory.
• Menu overview - digital combined instru- Turn the TUNE knob to scroll up/down
ment panel (p. 102) among the menu options.
EXIT
EXIT functions
Depending on the function in which the cur-
sor is located when EXIT is pressed, and at
30 A message can also be acknowledged via the thumbwheel or RESET button.
104
which menu level, one of the following may Steering wheel keypad* MY CAR - search paths
happen: MY CAR is a menu source that handles many
• telephone call rejected of the car's functions, e.g. setting the clock,
door mirrors and locks.
• current function cancelled
• input characters deleted The current menu level is shown at the top
• last selection undone right of the centre console's display screen.
The search paths to the menu system's func-
• move up in the menu system.
tions are given, e.g. as follows:
Short and long press may produce varying 03
results. Settings Car settings Lock settings
Doors unlock Driver door, then all.
A long press takes you to the top menu
level (p. 373) (Parent view), from which all car The following is an example of how a function
functions/menu sources can be accessed. The keypad may vary depending on audio level, can be accessed and adjusted using the
see Audio and media - operating the system (p. steering wheel keypad:
371).
Turn the thumbwheel to scroll up/down 1. Press the centre console button MY
among the menu options. CAR.
Press the thumbwheel to select/tick in 2. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Settings,
the highlighted menu option or to store with the thumbwheel and then press the
the selected function in the memory. thumbwheel - a submenu opens.
EXIT (see previous heading "EXIT func- 3. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Car
tions"). settings and press the thumbwheel - a
submenu opens.
Related information
• MY CAR (p. 104) 4. Scroll to Lock settings and press the
• MY CAR - search paths (p. 105) thumbwheel - a new submenu opens.
• MY CAR - search paths (p. 105) 5. Scroll to Doors unlock and press the
thumbwheel - a submenu of selectable
• MY CAR - menu options (p. 106)
functions opens.

||
6. Choose between the options All doors MY CAR - menu options My V40
and Driver door, then all and press the MY CAR is a menu source where many of the
thumbwheel - a cross is marked in the car's functions can be handled, e.g. setting
option's empty box. the clock, door mirrors and locks.
7. Exit the programming by backing out of
The following options are available first/
the menus incrementally with short
uppermost in MY CAR:
presses on EXIT or with one long press.
The procedure is the same for the centre con-
03 sole controls (p. 104): OK/MENU, EXIT and
the TUNE knob.
Related information
• MY CAR (p. 104)
• MY CAR - operation (p. 104) MY CAR My V40
• MY CAR - search paths (p. 105) The display screen shows a grouping of all of
• MY CAR - menu options (p. 106) the car's driving support systems - these can
be activated or deactivated here.
Trip statistics
• My V40 MY CAR Trip statistics
• Trip statistics
The screen shows the history as a bar chart
• DRIVe with average fuel consumption and average
• Support systems speed, see Trip computer - functions (p.
123).
• Settings
DRIVe
MY CAR DRIVe
An introduction of Volvo's Start-Stop system
is presented here, as well as recommenda-
tions for energy-saving driving techniques.
106
• Start/Stop Menu level 1 • Volvo On Call, described in a separate

• Eco driving guide manual.
For more information - see Start/Stop* (p. Menu level 2 • Information (p. 114)
279). Menu level 3 Related information
Driving support systems Menu level 4 • MY CAR (p. 104)
• MY CAR - operation (p. 104)
Shown here are the 4 first menu levels under

• MY CAR - search paths (p. 105)
• MY CAR - search paths (p. 105) 03
MY CAR Settings. Some menus have fur-
ther submenus - these are then described in
detail in their respective sections.
When selecting whether a function should be
activated/On or deactivated/Off a square is
displayed:
On: Selected square.
Off: Empty square.
MY CAR Support systems • Select On/Off with OK - then back out of
the menu with EXIT.
The display screen shows a summary of the
current status of the car's driving support Menus
systems. • Car settings (p. 108)
Settings • Driving support systems (p. 109)
This is how the menus are structured: • System settings (p. 111)
• Voice settings (p. 112)
• Audio settings, see Audio and media -
general audio settings (p. 376)
• Climate settings (p. 113)
• Favourites (p. 375)

MY CAR - Car settings (p. 162), (p. 160)

Keyless entry Door lock con-
Car settings menu option in the MY CAR (p. 168)
firmation light
menu source handles many of the car's func- All doors and (p.
tions, e.g. Car key memory and Lock settings 175) On
Any door
for doors.
Off
Doors on same side
Car settings See Both front doors (p. 160)
Unlock confirmation light
03 Car key memory (p. 74) and (p. 162), On
(p. 97) Audible confirmation
On (p. 168)
Off
On and (p.
Off 175)
Off (p. 162)
Approach light duration
Lock settings (p. 162), and (p. 89)
(p. 168) Reduced Guard (p. 178) Off
and (p. and (p.
Activate once 30 sec
175) 183)
Ask when exiting 60 sec
(p. 162), 90 sec
Automatic door locking
(p. 168) Side mirror settings (p. 97)
On and (p.
Fold mirrors (p. 89)
Off 175) Home safe light duration
Tilt left mirror 30 sec
(p. 162), Tilt right mirror 60 sec
Doors unlock
(p. 168)
All doors and (p. Light settings 90 sec
Driver door, then all 175)
(p. 87) (p. 87)
Interior light Triple indicator
Floor lights On
Ambient light Off
Ambient light colours
108
(p. 90) Related information MY CAR - driving support system

Temporary LH traffic • MY CAR (p. 104) Driving support systems menu option in the
On • MY CAR - driving support system (p. MY CAR menu source handles functions such
109) as e.g. Collision warning system and Lane
Off
• MY CAR - System options (p. 111) keeping aid.
or
• MY CAR - Voice settings (p. 112)
Driver support systems See
Temporary RH traffic • Audio and media - general audio settings
On (p. 376) Collision Warning (p. 228) 03
Off
• MY CAR - Climate settings (p. 113)
On
• MY CAR Information (p. 114)
Off
(p. 84)
Active bending lights
(p. 228)
On Warning distance
Off Long
Normal
Steering wheel force (p. 77)
Short
Low
Medium (p. 228)
Warning sound
High On
Speed in infotain- (p. 119) Off

ment display
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 241)
On
On
Off
Off
Reset car settings
All menus in Car settings are
given original factory settings.
109
||
(p. 241) City Safety (p. 218) • MY CAR - Climate settings (p. 113)
On at start-up
On
On
Off
Off
(p. 241) BLIS (p. 258)

Increased sensitivity*
On
On
03 Off
Off
Cross Traffic Alert (p. 258)
(p. 241)
Assistance alternatives On
Vibration only Off
Steering assist only
Distance Alert (p. 214)
Full function
On
Road Sign Information (p. 188) Off
On
Driver Alert (p. 236)
Off
On
Speed alert (p. 188) Off
On
Off Related information
• MY CAR (p. 104)
DSTC (p. 186) • MY CAR - Car settings (p. 108)
On • MY CAR - System options (p. 111)
Off • MY CAR - Voice settings (p. 112)

• Audio and media - general audio settings
(p. 376)

MY CAR - System options Show help text Volume levels (p.

The system settings menu option in the MY 415),
On Voice output volume
CAR menu source handles functions such as (p.
e.g. time and languages. Off Front park assist volume 245)
Explanatory text for the display Rear park assist volume and (p.
System options See 397)
screen's current content is
Phone ringing volume
shown with this option selected.
Time (p. 69)
Distance and fuel units (p. Reset system options 03
The combined instrument panel's
123) All menus in System options are
clock is adjusted here. MPG (UK)
given original factory settings.
Time format MPG (US)
12 h km/l Related information

l/100km • MY CAR (p. 104)
24 h
• MY CAR - Car settings (p. 108)
Screen saver Temperature unit (p. • MY CAR - driving support system (p. 109)
135) • MY CAR - System options (p. 111)
On Celsius
Fahrenheit • MY CAR - Voice settings (p. 112)
Off
Selects the unit for the display of • Audio and media - general audio settings
The display screen's current con- (p. 376)
tent fades out after a period of outside temperature and setting
inactivity and is replaced by a of the climate control system. • MY CAR - Climate settings (p. 113)
blank screen if this option is • MY CAR Information (p. 114)
selected.
The current screen content
returns if any of the display
screen's buttons or controls are
actuated.
Language
Selects language for menu texts.
111
MY CAR - Voice settings Voice command list Voice user setting

Voice settings menu option in the MY CAR
Phone commands Default setting
menu source manages functions such as
Voice tutorial and Command list for voice set- Phone User 1
ting.
Phone call contact User 2
Voice settings Phone dial number Here there is the option to create a second
user profile - an advantage if more than
Only in cars with Volvo GPS navigator RTI* Navigation commands
03
one person shall use the car/system regu-
- see separate manual. Navigation larly. Default setting restores factory set-
Voice tutorial Navigation repeat instruction tings.
This menu option + OK provides spoken Navigation go to address Voice training

information about how the system works.
General commands User 1
Help User 2
Cancel With Voice training the voice recognition
system is taught to recognise the driver's
Voice tutorial
voice and pronunciation. A number of
The menu options under Phone com- phrases are presented on the screen for
mands show several examples of available the driver to read aloud. When the system
voice commands - only with a Bluetooth®- has learnt how the driver talks, the presen-
enabled mobile phone installed. For more tation of the phrases stops. Following
and detailed information - see Bluetooth®* which e.g. User 1 can be selected in
handsfree phone - overview (p. 403). Voice user setting in order that the sys-
tem shall listen to the right user.
The menu options under Navigation com-
mands show several examples of available
voice commands in the Navigation system.

Voice output volume MY CAR - Climate settings Interior air (p. 134), (p.
Climate settings menu option in the MY CAR quality system 137), (p. 98) and
A volume control appears on the screen -
menu source handles functions such as e.g. (p. 128)
at which point, proceed as follows: On
fan adjustment and recirculation.
1. Adjust the volume with the thumb- Off
wheel. Climate settings See
2. Test-listen using OK. Reset climate settings (p. 134), (p.
3. Use EXIT to store the setting and the Automatic blower (p. 134), (p. 137), (p. 98) and
All menus in Climate
menu is switched off. adjustment 137), (p. 98) and (p. 128) 03
settings are given orig-
(p. 128)
Normal inal factory settings.
Voice POI list
High
Edit list Related information
Low • MY CAR (p. 104)
The number of facilities is extensive and
varies depending on market. Maximum 30 • MY CAR - Car settings (p. 108)
favourite facilities can be stored in this list. Recirculation timer (p. 134), (p.
137), (p. 98) and • MY CAR - driving support system (p. 109)
On
For more information on Facilities and (p. 128) • MY CAR - System options (p. 111)
Voice recognition - see the Navigation sys- Off • MY CAR - Voice settings (p. 112)
tem's owner's manual.
Automatic rear (p. 134), (p. (p. 376)
Related information defroster 137), (p. 98) and
• MY CAR (p. 104) (p. 128) • MY CAR Information (p. 114)
On
• MY CAR - Car settings (p. 108)
Off
• MY CAR - driving support system (p. 109)
• MY CAR - System options (p. 111)
(p. 376)
• MY CAR - Climate settings (p. 113)
113
MY CAR Information Trip computer Related information

Information menu option in the MY CAR The car's trip computer registers, calculates • Trip computer - analogue combined
menu source handles functions such as Num- and displays information. instrument panel (p. 115)
ber of keys and VIN number. • Trip computer - digital combined instru-
General ment panel (p. 119)
Information See Checking and settings can be made immedi-
ately after the combined instrument panel is
• Trip computer - functions (p. 123)
automatically illuminated in connection with • Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124)
Number of keys (p. 159)
unlocking. If none of the trip computer's con-
03
trols are actuated within approx. 30 seconds
VIN number (p. 437)
after the driver's door has been opened then
the instrument extinguishes, after which
DivX® VOD code (p. 392) either key position II (p. 71) or engine starting
is required in order to operate the trip com-
Bluetooth software (p. 405) puter.
version in car
NOTE
Map and software version*
If a warning message appears when the
Only in cars with Volvo's naviga- trip computer is used then the message
tion system* - see separate sup- must first be acknowledged before the trip
plement. computer can be reactivated.
• Acknowledge the message by briefly
Related information pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
• MY CAR (p. 104)
• MY CAR - Car settings (p. 108) Group menus
• MY CAR - driving support system (p. 109) The trip computer has two different group
menus:
• MY CAR - System options (p. 111)
• MY CAR - Voice settings (p. 112) • Functions
• Audio and media - general audio settings • Heading in combined instrument panel
(p. 376) The trip computer's functions or headings
• MY CAR - Climate settings (p. 113) are each listed in an infinite loop.

Trip computer - analogue combined Functions

instrument panel Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust
The car's trip computer registers, calculates functions:
and displays information. 1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
2 presses on RESET.
2. Press OK - the loop with all functions
opens.
3. Browse through the functions with the 03
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
4. Finish by pressing RESET twice after
completed checking/ adjustment.
The different functions of the trip computer
are listed in the following table:
Information display and controls.

OK - Opens the loop with the trip com-
puter's functions + Activates the selected
option.
Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the
trip computer's headings + Scrolls
through the options.
RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of
a function after making a selection.
}}
115
||
Functions Information
Digital speed Shows the car's speed digitally in the centre of the combined instrument panel:
- km/h • Open with OK, select with the thumbwheel, confirm with OK and go back out with ENTER.
mph
No display
03
Parking heater* For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compartment
heater* - timer (p. 141).
- Direct start
- Timer 1 - leads to the menu for selecting
time.
- Timer 2 - leads to the menu for selecting
time.
Additional heater* For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 143).
– Auto On
– Off
TC options Here you can select/activate the options that you want to be available as selectable headings in
the trip computer. The symbols for the items already selected are WHITE with a "tick" - others are
- Distance to empty tank
GREY and have no "tick":
Fuel consumption
1. Open the function with OK, scroll through the symbols for the options with the thumbwheel
Average speed and highlight/stop on the desired symbol.
- Trip meter T1 and total dist. 2. Confirm with OK - the symbol changes colour from GREY to WHITE and is marked with a
"tick".
- Trip meter T2 and total dist.
3. Continue to select the function symbols with the thumbwheel or finish with RESET.
Service status Shows the number of months and the distance until the next service.

Oil levelA For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 336).
Messages (##) For more information, see Messages (p. 103).
A Certain engines.
Headings 1. To ensure that no control is in the middle 3. Stop on desired heading.

of a sequence - "Reset" them first with 03
One of the headings in the following table can
be selected for constant display in the com- 2 presses on RESET.
bined instrument panel. Proceed as follows to 2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable head-
determine which: ings for the trip computer are shown in a
loop.
Trip computer heading in combined instrument Information

panel
Trip meter T1 and total dist. • Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Trip meter T2 and total dist. • Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
Distance to empty For more information, see Trip computer (p. 114), "Distance to empty tank".
Fuel consumption Current consumption.
Average speed • Long press on RESET resets Average speed.
No trip computer information. This option shows a blank display - it also marks the beginning/end of the loop.
The combined instrument panel's trip com- • Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the Resetting the trip computer - analogue
puter can be changed to another option at desired heading. combined instrument panel
any time during the journey. Proceed as fol- Trip meter and Average speed
lows:
}}
117
||
With current trip computer heading - Trip
meter T1, Trip meter T2 or Average speed -
shown in the combined instrument panel:
• Give a long press on RESET RESET -
selected heading is zeroed.
Each heading must be zeroed individually.
Change unit
03 To change unit (km/miles) for distance and
speed - go to MY CAR Settings
System options Distance and fuel units,
see Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124).
Related information
• Trip computer - digital combined instru-
ment panel (p. 119)
• Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124)

Trip computer - digital combined Functions

instrument panel Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust
The car's trip computer registers, calculates functions:
and displays information. 1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
2 presses on RESET.
2. Press OK - loop with all functions opens.
3. Browse through the functions with the
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK. 03
4. Finish by pressing RESET twice after

completed checking/adjustment.
The different functions of the trip computer
are listed in the following table:
Information displays and controls.

OK - Opens the loop with the trip com-
puter's functions + Activates the selected
option.
Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the
trip computer's headings + Scrolls
through the options.
RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of
a function after making a selection.
}}
119
||
Trip computer reset Note that this function does not reset the two trip meters T1 and T2 - see the table under the
"Headings" section below.
Average
Average speed
Messages For more information, see Messages (p. 103).
03 Themes The appearance of the combined instrument panel is selected here, see Digital combined
instrument panel - overview (p. 61).
Settings* Select Auto On or Off.

For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 143).
Contrast mode/Colour mode Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.
For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compart-
Parking heater*
ment heater* - timer (p. 141).
– Direct start
- Symbol Timer 1 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.
- Symbol Timer 2 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.
Service status Shows the number of months and the distance until the next service.
Oil levelA For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 336).
A Certain engines.

Headings play in the combined instrument panel. Pro- 1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
Three trip computer headings can be dis- ceed as follows to determine which: of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
played simultaneously - one in each "win- 2 presses on RESET.
dow" (see figure above). 2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable head-
One of the heading combinations in the fol- ing combinations are shown in a loop.
lowing table can be selected for constant dis- 3. Stop on desired heading combination.
Heading combinations Information 03

Average Trip meter T1 + Meter reading Average speed • Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Instantaneous Trip meter T2 + Meter reading Distance to empty • Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
tank
Instantaneous Meter reading kmh<>mph kmh<>mph - "Digital speed display", see Trip computer - functions (p.
123).
No trip computer information. This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays - it also marks
the beginning/end of the loop.
The combined instrument panel's heading • Give a long press on RESET RESET - Change unit
combination for the trip computer can be selected trip meter is zeroed.
To change unit (km/miles) for distance and
changed to another option at any time during Average speed & Average consumption
the journey. Proceed as follows: speed - go to MY CAR Settings
1. Select function Trip computer System options Distance and fuel units,
• Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the reset and activate with OK. see Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124).
desired heading.
2. Select one of the following options with
Resetting the trip computer - digital the thumbwheel and activate with OK: NOTE
combined instrument panel - l/100 km In addition to in the trip computer, these
Trip meter units are also changed in Volvo's naviga-
- km/h
tion system*.
Turn with the thumbwheel to the heading
- Reset both
combination containing the trip meter to be
reset: 3. Finish with RESET.
}}

||
Trip meter
Turn with the thumbwheel to the heading
combination containing the trip meter to be
reset:
• Give a long press on RESET RESET -
selected trip meter is zeroed.
Related information
03 • Trip computer - analogue combined
instrument panel (p. 115)
• Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124)

Trip computer - functions Range - distance to empty tank Change unit

The car's trip computer can record, calculate The trip computer shows the approximate To change unit (metric/imperial) for distance
and show information. It describes informa- distance that can be driven with the fuel and speed - go to MY CAR Settings
tion such as average consumption and aver- quantity remaining in the tank. System options Distance and fuel units,
age speed. No guaranteed range remains when the head- see MY CAR - System options (p. 111).
ing Distance to empty shows "----".
Average
Average fuel consumption is calculated from • In which case, refuel as soon as possible. NOTE
the last resetting. The calculation is based on the average fuel In addition to in the trip computer, these
03
consumption over the last 30 km and the units are also changed in Volvo's naviga-
NOTE remaining driveable fuel quantity. tion system*.
There may be a slight error in the reading if

a fuel-driven heater* has been used. NOTE Related information
• Trip computer - analogue combined
There may be a slight error in the reading if instrument panel (p. 115)
Average speed the driving style has been changed.
The average speed is calculated for the driv- • Trip computer - digital combined instru-
ment panel (p. 119)
ing distance driven since the last reset to An economic driving style generally results in
zero. a longer driving distance. For more informa- • Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124)
tion on how fuel consumption can be influ-
Instantaneous. enced, see Volvo Cars' environmental philos-
The information for current fuel consumption ophy (p. 20).
is updated continuously - approximately once
per second. When the car is driven at low Digital speed display31
speed the consumption is shown per time The speed is shown in the opposite unit
unit - at a higher speed it is shown related to (kmh/mph) of the main instrument panel. If it
mileage. is calibrated in mph then the trip computer
Different units (km/miles) can be selected for shows the corresponding speed in km/h and
the display - see the heading "Change unit" vice versa.
further down.
31 Only for combined instrument panel "Digital".

Trip computer - trip statistics* Operation

Information is stored about completed trips A setting can be defined in the MY CAR
containing average fuel consumption and menu system:
average speed, which can be viewed in the
MY CAR My V40 Trip statistics:
centre console's screen as a bar chart.
• Start new trip - ENTER is used to delete
Function all previous statistics, back out of the
menu by selecting EXIT.
03 • Reset for every driving cycle - highlight
the box by selecting ENTER and go back
out of the menu by selecting EXIT.
With the "Reset for every driving cycle"
option highlighted, all statistics are deleted
automatically once driving is complete and
the car has been stationary for 4 hours. The
journey statistics start again from zero the
next time the engine is started.
If a new drive cycle begins before 4 hours
Trip statistics32. have passed, the current period has to be
deleted manually first using the "Start new
Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven
trip" option.
distance, depending on the scale selected -
the bar at the far right shows the value for the See also information on Eco guide (p. 64).
current kilometre or 10 km.
Related information
With the TUNE wheel, the scale of each block • Trip computer - analogue combined
can be switched between 1 km and 10 km - instrument panel (p. 115)
the cursor at the far right shifts position
between up and down depending on the
• Trip computer - digital combined instru-
ment panel (p. 119)
scale selected.
32 The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on updated software and market.

CLIMATE CONTROL
04 Climate control
General information on climate • Remove misting on the insides of the win- Actual temperature
control dows primarily by using the defroster The temperature you select in the passenger
The car is equipped with electronic climate function (p. 136). To reduce the risk of compartment corresponds to the physical
misting, keep the windows clean and use experience with reference to factors such as
control. The climate control system cools or
window cleaner.
heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the air speed, humidity and solar radiation etc. in
passenger compartment. • In warm weather, condensation from the and around the car.
air conditioning may drip under the car.
There are two different climate control sys- This is normal. The system includes a sun sensor (p. 127)
tems: • When the engine requires full power, e.g. which detects on which side the sun is shin-
for full acceleration or driving uphill with a ing into the passenger compartment. This
• Electronic temperature control (ETC) (p.
132) trailer, the air conditioning can be tempo- means1 that the temperature can differ
rarily switched off. There may then be a between the right and left-hand air vents
• Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 131)
temporary increase in temperature in the despite the controls being set for the same
04 passenger compartment. temperature on both sides.
NOTE
• With an auto-stopped engine (p. 279)
Related information
The air conditioning system (AC) can be (cars with Start/Stop*), certain equipment
switched off, but to ensure the best possi- has its function temporarily reduced, e.g.
• General information on climate control (p.
ble climate comfort in the passenger com- 126)
the climate control system's air condition-
partment and to prevent the windows from ing and fan speed. • Temperature control in the passenger
misting, it should always be on. compartment (p. 135)
Related information
To bear in mind: • Actual temperature (p. 126)
• To ensure that the air conditioning works • Sensors - climate control (p. 127)
optimally, the side windows must be • Menu settings - climate control (p. 129)
closed. • Air conditioning (p. 135)
• Total airing function (p. 176) opens or • Air distribution in the passenger compart-
closes all side windows simultaneously ment (p. 129)
and can be used for example to quickly
air the car during hot weather. • Air cleaning (p. 127)
• Remove ice and snow from the climate • Heated front seats* (p. 133)
control system air intake (the grille • Heated rear seat* (p. 133)
between the bonnet and the windscreen).
1 Only applies to ECC.

04 Climate control
Sensors - climate control Air cleaning Air cleaning - passenger

The climate control system has a number of The interior in a passenger compartment is compartment filter
sensors to help control the temperature (p. designed to be pleasant and comfortable, All air entering the car's passenger compart-
126) in the car. even for people with contact allergies and for ment is cleaned with a filter.
asthma sufferers.
• The sun sensor is located on the top side The filter must be replaced at regular inter-
of the dashboard. • Passenger compartment filter (p. 127) vals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for
• The temperature sensor for the passen- • Material in the passenger compart- the recommended replacement intervals. If
ger compartment is located below the cli- ment (p. 129) the car is used in a severely contaminated
mate control panel. environment, it may be necessary to replace
• Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) (p.
the filter more often.
• The outside temperature sensor is 128)*
located in the door mirror. • Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) (p.
128)*
NOTE
04
NOTE There are different types of passenger
Related information compartment filter. Make sure that the cor-
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects. • General information on climate control (p. rect filter is fitted.
126)
Related information Related information

• General information on climate control (p. • Air cleaning (p. 127)
126)

04 Climate control
Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior For more information on CZIP, see the bro- Air cleaning - IAQS*
Package (CZIP)* chure included with the purchase of the car. The air quality system IAQS separates gases
CZIP comprises a series of modifications that and particles to reduce the levels of odours
Related information
keep the passenger compartment even and pollution in the passenger compartment.
clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing sub-
126) If the outside air is contaminated then the air
stances.
• Air cleaning (p. 127) intake is closed in order to shut out hydrocar-
The following is included: bons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone.
The air is recirculated in the passenger com-
• An enhanced fan function that means that
partment.
the fan starts when the car is opened with
the remote control key. The fan fills the Activate/deactivate the function in the menu
passenger compartment with fresh air. system MY CAR under Settings Climate
The function starts when required and is
04 settings Interior air quality system.
disengaged automatically after a time or
when one of the passenger compartment
doors is opened. NOTE
• The air quality system IAQS (p. 128) is a The air quality sensor must always be ena-
fully automatic system that cleans the air bled to ensure the best air in the passen-
in the passenger compartment from con- ger compartment.
taminants such as particles, hydrocar- In a cold climate, automatic recirculation is
bons, nitrous oxides and ground-level limited so as to prevent misting.
ozone.
Related information
NOTE • General information on climate control (p.
To maintain the CZIP standard in cars with 126)
CZIP the IAQS filter should be changed • Air cleaning (p. 127)
after 15 000 km or once per year depend-
ing on whichever occurs first. However, up • Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior Pack-
to 75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without age (CZIP)* (p. 128)
CZIP and where the customer does not
want to retain the CZIP standard, the IAQS
filter must be replaced during a regular
service.

04 Climate control
Air cleaning - material Menu settings - climate control Air distribution in the passenger
Tested materials have been developed in It is possible to activate/deactivate or change compartment
order to minimise the quantity of dust in the the default settings for four of the climate The incoming air is divided between a number
passenger compartment and to contribute to control system's functions via the centre con- of different vents in the passenger compart-
making the passenger compartment easier to sole. ment.
keep clean.
• Fan level during automatic climate control
The carpets in both the passenger compart- (p. 134)*.
ment and the cargo area are removable and • Recirculation timer (p. 137).
easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning
agents and car care products recommended
• Automatic start of rear window defroster
(p. 98).
by Volvo to clean the interior (p. 366).
• Interior air quality system (p. 128)*.
Related information More information is available in the descrip- 04
• Air cleaning (p. 127) tion of the menu system (p. 104).
The climate control system's functions can be
reset to the default settings via the menu sys-
tem in MY CAR and this is carried out under:
Settings Climate settings Reset Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
climate settings. mode*.
Related information If necessary it can be controlled manually;
• General information on climate control (p. see the air distribution table (p. 138).
126)

04 Climate control
||
Air vents in the dashboard Air distribution
The selected air distribution is shown in the cen-

04 tre console display screen.
Open Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Related information
Closed Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Lateral airflow Air distribution - ventilation floor 126)
• Auto-regulation (p. 134)
Vertical airflow The figure consists of three buttons. When
pressing the buttons the corresponding figure • Air distribution - recirculation (p. 137)
Aim the vents at the side windows to remove is illuminated in the display screen (see figure
misting. below) and an arrow in front of each part of
the figure shows the air distribution that is
NOTE selected. For more information, see the air
Remember that small children may be sen- distribution table (p. 138).
sitive to air flows and draughts.
130
04 Climate control
Electronic climate control - ECC* compartment and can be set separately for The auto function is used to automatically
ECC (Electronic Climate Control) maintains the driver's side and passenger side. control temperature, air conditioning, fan
the temperature selected in the passenger speed, recirculation and air distribution.
04
Fan (p. 134) Rear window and door mirror defrost-

ers (p. 98)
AUTO - Automatic climate control (p.
134) Setting, left/right-hand side for tempera-
ture control (p. 135)
Electrically heated front seat (p. 133), left
side Electrically heated front seat (p. 133),
right side
Heated windscreen and max.
defroster (p. 136)* Temperature control (p. 135)
Air distribution (p. 129) - ventilation floor Recirculation (p. 137)
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 135)
Air distribution - defroster windscreen

04 Climate control
Electronic temperature control - ETC

The passenger compartment's climate com-
fort is controlled manually using the ETC
(Electronic Temperature Control).
04
Fan (p. 134) Rear window and door mirror defrost-

ers (p. 98)
Electrically heated front seat (p. 133), left
side Recirculation (p. 137)
AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 135) Electrically heated front seat (p. 133),
right side
Heated windscreen and max. defroster*
Temperature control (p. 135)
Air distribution (p. 129) - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen

04 Climate control
Heated front seats* • Lowest heat level - one orange field illu- Heated rear seat*
The front seat heating has three positions for minates in the screen. The heating for the rear seat's outer positions
increasing the comfort for driver and passen- • Switch off the heat - no field illuminates. has three positions for increasing the comfort
ger when it is cold. for passengers when it is cold.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase
in temperature due to a lack of sensation
or who otherwise have problems operating
the controls for the heated seats. Other-
wise they may suffer burn injuries.
Related information 04
126)
• Heated rear seat* (p. 133)
Current heat level is shown in the centre console Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's
display screen. lamps:
Press the button repeatedly in order to acti-
vate the function:
• Highest heat level - three lamps illumi-
nate.
• Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate.
• Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates.
Press the button repeatedly in order to acti-
vate the function: • Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.
• Highest heat level - three orange fields

illuminate in the centre console's screen
(see figure above).
• Lower heat level - two orange fields illu-
minate in the screen.

04 Climate control
||
WARNING Fan Auto-regulation
The fan should always be activated in order to Auto-regulation is only possible in electronic
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase avoid misting on the windows. climate control (ECC) (p. 131).
in temperature due to a lack of sensation
NOTE The auto function automati-
or who otherwise have problems operating
the controls for the heated seats. Other- cally regulates temperature
If the fan is fully switched off then the air (p. 135), air conditioning (p.
wise they may suffer burn injuries. conditioning is not engaged - which can 135), fan speed (p. 134),
cause a risk of misting on the windows.
recirculation (p. 137) and air
Related information distribution (p. 129).
• General information on climate control (p. ECC*
126) Turn the knob to increase or If you select one or more manual functions,
• Heated front seats* (p. 133) decrease fan speed, AUTO the other functions continue to be controlled
04 is disengaged. If AUTO is automatically. All manual settings are disen-
selected, then the fan speed gaged when AUTO is pressed. The display
is regulated automatically (p. screen shows AUTO CLIMATE.
134) - the fan speed previ- Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in
ously set is disengaged. the menu system MY CAR under: Settings
ETC Climate settings Automatic blower
Turn the knob to increase or adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal
decrease fan speed. or High:
• Low - Automatic fan control. Low airflow
is prioritised.
• Normal - Automatic fan control.
• High - Automatic fan control. A more
Related information intense airflow is prioritised.
• General information on climate control (p. More information is available in the descrip-
126) tion of the menu system (p. 104).
• Electronic climate control - ECC* (p. 131)
Related information
• Electronic temperature control - ETC (p. • General information on climate control (p.
132) 126)

04 Climate control
Temperature control in the passenger The temperatures on the Air conditioning

compartment driver and passenger sides The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
When the car is started, the most recent tem- can be set independently. incoming air as required.
perature setting is resumed. Repeatedly press L/R in the
button to select the setting When the lamp in the AC
NOTE for left, right or both sides. button illuminates, the air
Set the temperature using conditioning is controlled by
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by the knob - the selected temperature for either the system's automatic func-
selecting a higher or lower temperature tion.
side is displayed in the centre console dis-
than the actual desired temperature.
play. When the lamp in the AC
ETC button is switched off the air conditioning is
ECC*
The temperature in the pas- disconnected. Other functions are still con-
senger compartment can be trolled automatically. When the max.
04
adjusted with the knob. defroster function (p. 136) is activated, the air
conditioning is switched on automatically so
that the air is dehumidified at the maximum
setting.
Related information
126)
• Actual temperature (p. 126)
• Electronic temperature control - ETC (p.
Current temperature for each side is shown in 132)
the centre console's display screen.
• Electronic climate control - ECC* (p. 131)

04 Climate control
Demisting and defrosting the For cars without heated windscreens: NOTE
windscreen • Air flows to the windows - symbol (2) illu- Electrically heated windscreen is not avail-
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster are minates in the screen. able when the engine is auto-stopped (p.
used to quickly remove misting and ice from 279).
• Switch off the function - no symbol illumi-
the windscreen and side windows. nates.
For cars with heated windscreens: The following also takes place when the func-
tion is active in order to provide maximum
• Start the heating for thewindscreen2 - dehumidification in the passenger compart-
symbol (1) illuminates in the screen.
ment:
• Start the heating for the windscreen2 and
air flow to the windows - symbols (1) and • the air conditioning is automatically
engaged
(2) illuminate in the screen.
04 • Switch off the function - no symbol illumi- • recirculation and the air quality system
are automatically disengaged.
nates.
NOTE NOTE
The noise level increases as the fan is
Heated windscreen and IR window (p. 18)
The selected setting is shown in the centre con- operating at max.
may have an impact on the performance of
sole display screen. transponders and other communication
Electric heating* equipment. When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
Max. defroster
The light in the defroster but-
ton illuminates when the A triangular area at the end of each side of • General information on climate control (p.
the windscreen is not electrically heated, 126)
function is active. where de-icing may take longer.
Press the button repeatedly
in order to activate the func-
tion.
2 The compass goes off when the heated windscreen is active.

04 Climate control
Air distribution - recirculation Related information

Select recirculation to shut out bad air, • General information on climate control (p.
exhaust gases etc. from the passenger com- 126)
partment, i.e. no outside air is taken into the • Air distribution in the passenger compart-
car when this function is activated. ment (p. 129)
When recirculation is • Air distribution - table (p. 138)

engaged the orange lamp in
the button illuminates.
IMPORTANT 04
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,

there is a risk of misting on the insides of
the windows.
Timer
With the timer function activated the system
will exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the out-
side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,
misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the
function in the menu system (p. 104) MY CAR
under Settings Climate settings
Recirculation timer.
NOTE
When max. defroster is selected, recircula-
tion is always deactivated.
137
04 Climate control
Air distribution - table

Three buttons are used to select the distribu-
tion (p. 129) of the air.
Air distribution Use

A large amount of hot air flows to the windows. to remove ice and misting quickly.
Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some to prevent misting and icing in a cold and humid climate,
04
air flows from the air vents. (not at too low fan speed to enable this).
Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents. to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.
Airflow to the head and chest from the dashboard air vents. to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.
138
04 Climate control
Air distribution Use

Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dash- to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in
board air vents. cold or humid weather.
Air to floor and from dashboard air vents. in sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.
04
Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and win- to direct heat or cold to the floor.
dows.
Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor. to provide cooler air along the floor or warmer air higher up
in cold weather or hot, dry weather.
Related information
126)
• Air distribution - recirculation (p. 137)
139
04 Climate control
Engine block heater and passenger Refuelling appears in the display. Acknowledge the
compartment heater* message by pressing the indicator stalk (p.
Preconditioning prepares the car's heater, 101) OK button once.
engine and passenger compartment before
departure so that both wear and energy IMPORTANT
needs during the journey are reduced. Warm- Repeated use of the heater in combination
ing up your car will also extend the driving with short driving distances may cause low
distance. charge level in the starter battery, this can
lead to the heater stopping or never star-
The heater can be started directly (p. 141) or ting. In the worst case, engine starting will
with a timer (p. 141). not be possible.
The heater cannot start if the outside tem- The car should be driven for the same time
perature exceeds 15 °C. At –5 °C or lower the as the heater is used to ensure that the
04 Warning label on fuel filler flap. starter battery is recharged adequately to
maximum running time of the heater is 50
minutes. replace the energy consumed by the
heater when it is used on a regular basis.
WARNING The heater is used for a maximum of 50
WARNING Fuel which spills out could be ignited. minutes each time.
Do not use the fuel-driven heater indoors. Switch off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater
Exhaust gases are secreted. before starting to refuel.
Related information
Check in the combined instrument panel • Engine block heater and passenger com-
that the heater is switched off. The heat partment heater* - messages (p. 142)
NOTE symbol is shown when it is operating.
• Additional heater* (p. 143)
When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is
active there may be smoke from under- Parking on a hill
neath the car, which is perfectly normal. If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the fuel-driven
heater.
Battery and fuel

If the battery has insufficient charge or the
fuel level is too low, the heater will be
switched off automatically and a message

04 Climate control
Engine block heater and passenger Engine block heater and passenger 7. Select the required minute using the
compartment heater* - direct start/ compartment heater* - timer thumbwheel.
immediate stop The timer of the engine block and passenger 8. Press OK3 to confirm the setting.
Upon direct start of the engine block and pas- compartment heater (p. 140) is connected to
senger compartment heater (p. 140), it will run the car's clock. 9. Go back in the menu structure using
for 50 minutes. RESET.
Two different times can be selected using the
Heating of the passenger compartment will 10. Select the other time (continue from step
timer. Here, time refers to the time when the
begin as soon as the engine coolant has 2) or exit the menu with RESET.
car is heated and ready. The car's electronic
reached the correct temperature. system calculates when heating should be Starting
started based on the outside temperature. 1. Press OK to access the menu.
NOTE
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
The car can be started and driven while NOTE
the heater is running. heater and select with OK. 04
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset. 3. Select one of the two timers using the
1. Press OK to access the menu. thumbwheel and activate with OK.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking Adjusting 4. Exit the menu with RESET.
heater and select with OK. 1. Press OK to access the menu.
Switching off
3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct 2. Scroll with the thumbwheel (p. 101) to A timer-started heater can be switched off
start/Stop in order to activate/deactivate Parking heater and select with OK. manually before the set time has elapsed.
the heater and select with OK. Proceed as follows:
3. Select one of the two timers using the
4. Exit the menu with RESET. thumbwheel and confirm with OK. 1. Press OK to access the menu.
Related information 4. Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours 2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
• Engine block heater and passenger com- setting. heater and select with OK.
partment heater* - timer (p. 141) 5. Select the required hour using the thumb- > If a timer is set but not activated, a
• Engine block heater and passenger com- wheel. clock icon is shown next to the set
partment heater* - messages (p. 142) time.
6. Briefly press OK to move to the lit
minutes setting. 3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
3 Press OK again to activate the timer.

04 Climate control
||
4. Deactivate the timer as follows: Engine block heater and passenger Sym- Display Specification
• long press on OK or compartment heater* - messages bol
Symbols and messages regarding the engine
• short press on OK to continue in the
The heater is
menu. Then select to stop the timer block and passenger compartment heater (p.
140) differ depending on whether the com- switched on and
and confirm with OK.
bined instrument panel is analogue (p. 60) or running.
5. Exit the menu with RESET. digital (p. 61). The heater's timer
A timer-started heater can be switched off is activated after
When the heater has been activated
directly (p. 141). the remote control
the heat symbol illuminates in the
information display. key has been
Related information removed from the
• Engine block heater and passenger com- ignition switch and
partment heater* - messages (p. 142) When one of the timers is activated the sym-
04 bol for activated timer illuminates in the infor- leaving the car -
mation display at the same time as the set the engine and
time is shown next to the symbol. passenger com-
partment are
Symbol for activated timer in ana- heated at the set
logue combined instrument panel. time.
Fuel The heater has

Symbol for activated timer in digital operated been stopped by
combined instrument panel. heater the car's electron-
stopped ics in order to
Battery facilitate starting
The table shows symbols and display texts saving the engine.
that appear. mode

04 Climate control
Sym- Display Specification Additional heater* Fuel-driven additional heater*

bol For cars with diesel engines sold in cold cli- The car is equipped with either an electric (p.
mate zones4 an additional heater may be 144) or a fuel-driven additional heater (p. 143).
Fuel Setting the heater required to obtain the correct operating tem-
operated is not possible due perature in the engine and to obtain sufficient The heater starts automatically when extra
heater to fuel level being heating in the passenger compartment. heat is required when the engine is running.
stopped too low - this is in The heater is switched off automatically when
Low fuel order to facilitate In such instances, the car is equipped with the correct temperature is reached or when
level starting the engine either the engine is switched off.
as well as • electric additional heater (p. 144) or
approx. 50 km NOTE
driving. • fuel-driven additional heater (p. 143)5.
When the auxiliary heater is active there
Fuel Heater not work- Related information may be smoke from underneath the car, 04
operated ing. Contact a • Engine block heater and passenger com- which is perfectly normal.
heater workshop for partment heater* (p. 140)
Service repair. Volvo rec- Auto mode or shutdown
required ommends that you The additional heater's automatic start
contact an author- sequence can be switched off if required.
ised Volvo work-
shop.
NOTE
A display text clears automatically after a time Volvo recommends that the fuel-driven
additional heater should be switched off
or after one press on the indicator stalk (p.
for short distances.
101) OK button.
Related information 1. Before starting the engine: Select key

• Engine block heater and passenger com- position I (p. 71).
partment heater* - direct start/immediate
2. Press OK to access the menu.
stop (p. 141)
• Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - timer (p. 141)
4 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned.
5 For cars equipped with parking heater (p. 140).

04 Climate control
||
3. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional Electric additional heater*
heater6 or Settings7 and select with OK. The car is equipped with either a fuel-driven
4. Select one of the options ON or OFF (p. 143) or an electric additional heater (p.
using the thumbwheel and confirm with 143).
OK. The heater cannot be controlled manually but
5. Exit the menu with RESET. is instead activated automatically after the
engine has been started in outside tempera-
NOTE tures below 9 °C and is switched off after the
set passenger compartment temperature has
The menu options are only visible in key been reached.
position I - any adjustments must therefore
be made before starting the engine. Related information
04 • Engine block heater and passenger com-
Related information partment heater* (p. 140)
• Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* (p. 140)
6 Analogue combined instrument panel.

7 Digital combined instrument panel.

LOADING AND STORAGE
05 Loading and storage
Storage spaces
Overview of storage spaces in the passenger
compartment.
05
146
Storage compartment1 in door panel

Storage compartment, driver’s side (p.
148)
Ticket clip
Storage compartment
Glovebox (p. 149)
Storage compartment, cup holder (p.

148)
Jacket holder (p. 148)
Cup holder* in rear seat
Storage pocket2
Storage compartment, rear seat
05
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile
phones, cameras, remote controls for
accessories, etc. in the glove compartment
or other compartments. Otherwise they
may injure people in the car in the event of
sudden braking or a collision.
1 With ice scraper holder on the driver’s side.

2 Not applicable to textile upholstery.

Storage compartment driver’s side Jacket holder Tunnel console

This storage compartment (p. 146) is located The coat hanger is located on the left-hand The tunnel console is located between the
on the driver's side, to the left under the light- side of the passenger seat's head restraint. front seats.
ing panel.
The jacket holder is only designed for light
WARNING clothing.
Do not keep any sharp objects in the com- Related information

partment, or objects which protrude. • Storage spaces (p. 146)
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and

05 USB*/AUX input under the armrest.
Includes cup holder for driver and pas-
senger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter (p.
149) are specified, then there is a ciga-
rette lighter in the 12 V socket (p. 151) for
the front seat and a detachable ashtray in
the cup holder.)
Related information
• Storage spaces (p. 146)
• Tunnel console - armrest (p. 149)

Tunnel console - armrest Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and Glovebox

The tunnel console is located between the ashtray* The glovebox is located on the passenger
front seats. A detachable ashtray is fitted in the cup side.
holder under the armrest. The cigarette lighter
When closed, the tunnel console's armrest is fitted in the 12 V socket (p. 151) for the The owner's manual and maps can be kept in
can be adjusted* longitudinally. front seat. here for example. There are also holders for
pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox
Related information The ashtray in the tunnel console (p. 148) is can be locked (p. 176)* using the key blade
• Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 151) detached by lifting the tray straight up. (p. 166).
• Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
ashtray* (p. 149) Related information
The button pops out when the lighter is hot. • Storage spaces (p. 146)
Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils. • Glovebox - cooling (p. 150)
Related information
• Storage spaces (p. 146)
05

Glovebox - cooling Inlay mats* Vanity mirror

The glovebox (p. 149) can also be used as a Inlay mats collect e.g. rubbish and slush. The vanity mirror is located on the rear of the
cooled area3. Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay sun visor.
mats.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins in order to avoid get-
ting caught adjacent to and under the ped-
als.
Related information
• Cleaning the interior (p. 366)
Vanity mirror with lighting.

Start cooling by moving the control in
05 towards the passenger compartment to The light illuminates automatically when the
the end position. cover is lifted.
Switch off the cooling by moving the con- Related information
trol forwards to the end position. • Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
Cooling is active when the climate control (p. 347)
system is active (i.e. when the key is in key
position (p. 71) II) or the engine is running.
3 Applicable only to cars with ECC.

Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets NOTE Related information

The electrical sockets (12 V) are located in the • Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g. ashtray* (p. 149)
tunnel console's storage compartment and display screens, music players and mobile
beside the cup holder4. phones - which are connected to one of • 12 V socket - cargo area (p. 155)
the passenger compartment's 12V electri-
cal sockets could be activated by the cli-
mate control system, even when the
remote control key has been removed or
when the car is locked, for example, when
the engine block and passenger compart-
ment heater* is activated at a preset time.
For this reason remove the plugs from the
electrical sockets for optional equipment
or accessories when not in use because
the battery could be drained in the event of
such an occurrence!
12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat. IMPORTANT 05

The electrical sockets can be used for various Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W) in
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. display either socket.
screens, music players and mobile phones.
For the sockets to supply current, the remote
NOTE
control key must be in at least key position I
(p. 71). The compressor for emergency puncture
repair (p. 323) has been tested and
approved by Volvo. For information on the
WARNING
use of Volvo's recommended temporary
Always leave the plug in the socket when emergency puncture repair (TMK).
the socket is not in use.
4 If ashtray and cigarette lighter are specified then there is no cup holder and adjacent 12 V socket.

Loading • Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- Related information
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. lets with straps or web lashings. • Load retaining eyelets (p. 153)
• Cargo net (p. 155)
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. WARNING
The total of the weight of the passengers and • Loading - long load (p. 153)
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a
all accessories reduces the car's payload by
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h,
• Roof load (p. 153)
a corresponding weight. For more detailed carry the impact of an item weighing
information on weights, see Weights (p. 440). 1000 kg.
The tailgate is opened via a button
on the lighting panel or the remote WARNING
control key, see Locking/unlocking -
tailgate (p. 176). The protection provided by the inflatable
curtain in the headlining may be compro-
mised or eliminated by high loads.
WARNING
• Never load cargo above the backrest.
The car’s driving properties change
depending on the weight and positioning
of the load. WARNING
05
Always secure the load. Always secure the
To bear in mind when loading load. During heavy braking the load may
• Position the load firmly against the rear otherwise shift, causing personal injury to
seat's backrest. the car's occupants.
Note that objects must not prevent the func- Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
tion of the WHIPS system for the front seats if something soft.
any of the rear seat's backrests is folded Switch off the engine and apply the park-
down, see WHIPS - seating position (p. 36). ing brake when loading/unloading long
items. Otherwise you may accidentally
• Centre the load.
knock the gear lever or gear selector with
• Heavy objects should be placed as low the load into a drive position - and the car
as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on could then move off.
lowered backrests.
• Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
152
Loading - long load Roof load Load retaining eyelets

To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear The load carriers recommended for roof loads The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten
seat backrest can be folded down. The pas- are the ones developed by Volvo. This is in straps in order to anchor items in the cargo
senger seat backrest can also be folded for an order to avoid damage to the car and in order area.
extra long load. to achieve the maximum possible safety dur-
ing a journey.
Folding the passenger seat
See (p. 73). Carefully follow the installation instructions
supplied with the carriers.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
See (p. 76). • Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
Related information load securely with retaining straps.
• Loading (p. 152) • Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
• The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the size of the load. 05
WARNING
• Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering. Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which
protrude may cause injury under violent
braking.
WARNING
Always secure large and heavy objects
The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
racteristics are altered by roof loads. For
information about the maximum permitted
load on the roof, including load carriers Related information
and any space box, see Weights (p. 440). • Loading (p. 152)
Related information
• Loading (p. 152)
153
Loading - bag holder Loading - folding bag holder* Raising

The bag holders keep carrier bags in place A folding bag holder in the floor keeps bags in
and prevent them from overturning and place and prevents them from overturning
spreading their contents around the cargo and spreading their contents in the cargo
area. The holder has a capacity of max. 3 kg. area, and can be opened up in three posi-
tions.
Lift the handle* on the upper floor and

fold up the floor.
Move the floor forwards to an appropriate
05 position and place it in the adjustment
Bag holder groove.
Folding bag holder
Related information 3. In service position, the floor is moved all
• Loading (p. 152) It can be set to two adjustment positions and the way forwards towards the rear seat
one service position, as it is known, where it back and placed in the plastic support in
• Loading - folding bag holder* (p. 154)
is fully unfolded. There are also two floor the centre.
combination variants, one with adjustment
positions in a tub under the floor and one with Related information
adjustment positions in plastic rails. The rais- • Loading (p. 152)
ing below shows the adjustment position in a • Loading - bag holder (p. 154)
tub under the floor.
The load on the central holder is max. 3 kg
and max. 10 kg on the outer holder.

12 V socket - cargo area NOTE Cargo net

The electrical socket can be used for various A cargo net prevents cargo from being
The compressor for temporary emergency
accessories designed for 12 Volts, e.g. dis- puncture repair has been tested and thrown forward in the passenger compart-
play screens, music players and mobile approved by Volvo. For information on the ment in the event of heavy braking.
phones. use of Volvo's recommended temporary
emergency puncture repair (TMK), see
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 323).
Related information
• Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 151)
The cargo net is fitted into four mounting points. 05

Lower the cover to access the electrical For safety reasons, the cargo net must
socket. always be correctly fastened and secured.
The mesh is made of a strong nylon fabric
• The socket also provides voltage when and secured behind the front seat backrests.
the remote control key is not in the igni-
tion switch.
WARNING
IMPORTANT Loads in the luggage compartment must
be anchored well, and also have a cor-
Max. socket current is 10 A (120 W). rectly fitted safety net.
NOTE
Remember that using the electrical socket
with the engine switched off involves the
risk of discharging the car's battery.

||
Attaching 3. Hook the other end of the rod into the 4. Hook the cargo net's anchoring straps
roof mounting on the opposite side - the into the eyes on the rear of the seat slide
NOTE telescopic spring-loaded retaining hooks rails - it is easier if the backrests are
facilitate alignment. Take care to press straightened and the seats are moved
The easiest way to fit the safety net is via forward the rod's retaining hooks for each forward slightly.
one of the rear doors.
respective roof mounting's front end posi-
Pay attention to make sure that you do
tion.
not press the seat/backrest hard against
WARNING the net when the seat/backrest is moved
It is necessary to ensure that the upper back again - only adjust until the seat/
securing points of the safety net are fitted backrest makes contact with the net.
correctly and that the puller-straps are
secured properly. Damaged nets must not IMPORTANT
be used.
If a seat/backrest is pushed backwards
hard into the safety net then the net and/or
1. Unfold the cargo net and make sure that its roof mounts may be damaged.
the split upper rod is locked in the
extended position.
05 5. Tension the cargo net with the anchoring
2. Hook one end of the rod into the roof straps.
mounting with the anchoring strap locks
turned towards you.
156
Removal and storage The folded cargo net is stored in its bag in the Hat shelf
cargo area. The hat shelf can be removed to provide
additional cargo space.
Hat shelf removal
The cargo net can be easily removed and folded

up.
Release the tension in the net by pressing Related information
in the button on the anchoring strap's • Loading (p. 152)
lock and feeding out part of the strap. • Load retaining eyelets (p. 153) Undo the hat shelf lifting eyes on both 05
Press in the catch and detach both of the sides.
anchoring strap's hooks. Unhook the front edge of the hat shelf
Unhook the rod from its roof mounting by and remove it.
pulling back on the rod in the roof mount-
Related information
ings' rear end position. Press the rod in
any direction so that the hook engages in • Loading (p. 152)
the rod, which at the same time releases • Loading - long load (p. 153)
the hook on the other side.
Finally, remove the remaining roof mount-
ing hook from the roof mounting.
4. Break the rod in the centre, fold it
together and roll up the net.
Insert the net in the storage bag.
157
LOCKS AND ALARM
06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade WARNING Remote control key/PCC - losing
The remote control key is used to start the car If you lose a remote control key (p. 159) then
If there are children in the car:
and for locking and unlocking. It contains a a new one can be ordered at a workshop - an
detachable key blade (p. 165) made of metal. Remember to switch off the supply to the authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The visible section is available in two versions power windows by removing the remote
control key if the driver leaves the car. The remaining remote control keys must be
so that it is possible to distinguish between
the remote control keys. taken to the Volvo workshop. The code of the
Related information missing remote control key must be erased
The car is supplied with two remote control • Remote control key - function (p. 162) from the system as a theft prevention meas-
keys - standard or withkeyless function (p. ure. The current number of keys registered to
168). They are used to start/switch off the the car can be checked in MY CAR (p. 104)
engine and for locking/unlocking. under Information Number of keys.
Additional remote control keys can be
Related information
ordered - up to six can be programmed and
used for the same car.
• Remote control key - range (p. 163)
Variants
There are four remote control key variants:
• Remote control key, standard1
• Remote control key with Keyless start1
• Remote control key with Keyless drive1
06
• PCC with Keyless drive 2
PCC plus remote control key with keyless
function has extended functionality compared
to the standard remote control key.
1 5-button key
2 6-button key
159
06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/PCC - key Indication locking/unlocking - Related information

memory* adjusting • Keyless* (p. 168)
The key memory in the remote control When the car is locked or unlocked using the • Lock indicator (p. 161)
key/PCC (p. 159) means that certain settings remote control key (p. 159) the direction indi- • Alarm indicator (p. 182)
in the car can be individually adapted for dif- cators confirm that locking/unlocking was
ferent people. correctly performed.
The key memory function is available in com- • Locking - one flash and the door mirrors
bination with power seat and power rearview are folded3 in.
and door mirrors. Settings for door mirrors, • Unlocking - two flashes and the door mir-
driver's seat and steering force can be saved rors are folded3 out.
in the key memory.
Key memory - door mirrors, driver’s NOTE

seat and steering force Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
The settings are automatically connected to control key in the car.
each respective remote control key, see Key
memory in remote control key (p. 75) and When locking, indication is given only if all
Speed related power steering (p. 262). locks have been locked and all doors are
When locking the car with the remote key, the closed. Indication is given when the last door
combined instrument panel theme setting can has been closed.
be saved to the key, see Digital combined
06 Selecting the function
instrument panel - overview (p. 61) and MY
Different options for indicating locking/
CAR - Car settings (p. 108).
unlocking with light can be set in the car's
The function can be activated/deactivated in menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104).
the menu system MY CAR under Settings Search in the menu system MY CAR for
Car settings Car key memory. Settings Car settings Light settings
For a description of the menu system, see and select Door lock confirmation light
MY CAR (p. 104). and/or Unlock confirmation light.
For remote control keys with Keyless func-
tion, see Keyless* (p. 168).
3 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.

06 Locks and alarm
Lock indicator Remote control key/PCC - Electronic Message Specification

A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies that immobiliser
the car is locked. The electronic immobiliser is a theft protec- Insert car Error when reading the
tion system that prevents the vehicle from key remote control key during
being started (p. 268) by an unauthorised starting - Remove the key
person. from the ignition switch,
press it in again and make
Each remote control key/PCC (p. 159) has a a new start attempt.
unique code. The car can only be started with
the correct remote control key with the cor- Car key not Error reading the remote
rect code. found control key during starting
- Try to start again.
The following error messages in the com- (Applicable
bined instrument panel's information display only to cars If the error persists: Insert
are related to the electronic immobiliser: with the remote control key into
Keyless.) the ignition switch and try
to start again.
Same LED as alarm indicator (p. 182).
Immobiliser Error in immobiliser system
NOTE Try to start during starting. If the error
again persists: Contact a work-
Cars that are not equipped with alarm also shop - an authorised Volvo
have this indicator.
workshop is recom-
mended. 06
Related information
• Indication locking/unlocking - adjusting Related information
(p. 160) • Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system (p. 162)
• Keyless* (p. 168)

06 Locks and alarm
Remote-controlled immobiliser with Remote control key - function

tracking system The remote control key has functions such as
Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking locking and unlocking the doors.
system makes it possible to track and locate
the car, and to remotely activate the immobi-
liser to switch off the engine.
Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more

information and assistance with activating the
system.
Related information
• Remote control key with key blade (p.
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car
159) Communicator.
• Remote control key/PCC - Electronic Information
immobiliser (p. 161)
5-button remote control key Function buttons
Locking Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate
while the alarm is activated, see Locking/
Unlocking
unlocking - from the outside (p. 173).
Approach light duration A long press also closes all windows simulta-
06 neously (see also Total airing function (p.
Tailgate
176)).
Panic function
WARNING
If windows are closed using the remote
control key, check that nobody's hands
are trapped.
Unlocking (p. 173) - Unlocks the doors

and tailgate while the alarm is deactivated.

06 Locks and alarm
A long press also opens all windows simulta- Related information Remote control key - range
neously (see also Total airing function (p. • Remote control key with key blade (p. Remote control key (p. 159) functions have a
176)). 159) range of about 20 m from the car.
The function can be changed from unlocking • PCC* - unique functions (p. 164)
If the car does not verify a button being
all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the
pressed - move closer and try again.
driver's door only with one press of the but-
ton and, after a further press of the button -
within 10 seconds - unlocking the remaining NOTE
doors. The remote control key functions may be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
The function can be changed in the menu buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
system MY CAR under Settings Car The car can always be locked/unlocked
settings Lock settings Doors unlock with the key blade, see Detachable key
with both the alternatives All doors and blade - unlocking doors (p. 166).
Driver door, then all. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104). Related information
Approach light duration (p. 89) - Used
to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
Tailgate (p. 176) - Unlocks and disarms
the alarm for the tailgate only.
06
Panic function – Used to attract atten-
tion in an emergency.
Press and hold the button for at least 3 sec-
onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to
activate the direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least
5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches
off automatically after approx. 3 minutes.

06 Locks and alarm
PCC* - unique functions Using the information button

Remote control key with PCC has extended – Press the information button .
functionality compared with remote control > All indicator lamps flash for approxi-
key without PCC (p. 159) in the form of an mately 7 seconds and the light travels
information button and indicator lamps. around on the PCC. This indicates that
information from the car has been
read.
If any of the other buttons are pressed
during this time then the reading is
interrupted.
NOTE Green continuous light – the car is

If none of the indicator lamps illumi- locked.
nates with repeated use of the information Yellow continuous light – the car is
button and in different locations (as well as unlocked.
after 7 seconds and after the light has
travelled around on the PCC), contact a Red continuous light – the alarm has
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop been triggered since the car was locked.
Communicator. is recommended. Red light flashing alternately in both indi-
Information button cator lamps – The alarm was triggered
Indicator lamps display information in accord- less than 5 minutes ago.
06 Indicator lamps
ance with the following illustration:
Using the information button enables access Related information
to certain information from the car via the • PCC* - range (p. 165)
indicator lamps.

06 Locks and alarm
PCC* - range Related information Detachable key blade

The PCC's range for unlocking and tailgate is • Keyless* - remote control key range (p. A remote control key (p. 159) contains a
approx. 20 m from the car - for other func- 169) detachable key blade of metal with which
tions up to approx. 100 m. If the car does not • Remote control key - range (p. 163) some functions can be activated and some
verify a button being pressed - move closer operations carried out.
and try again.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
NOTE authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec-
ommended when ordering new key blades.
The information button function may be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves, Key blade functions
buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
Using the remote control key's detachable
key blade:
Out of PCC range
If the PCC is too far away from the car for the • the left-hand front door can be opened
information to be read then the status the car manually (p. 166) if central locking can-
was last left in is shown, without the light not be activated with the remote control
travelling around on the PCC. key.
If several PCCs are used for the car then it is

• the rear doors' mechanical child safety
locks can be activated (p. 179)/deacti-
only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking vated.
that shows correct status.
• the right-hand front door and the rear
doors can be locked manually (p. 174), 06
NOTE e.g. in the event of power failure.
If none of the indicator lamps illumi- • the glovebox lock* can be opened, see
nates with repeated use of the information Locking/unlocking - glovebox (p. 176).
button and in different locations (as well as
after 7 seconds and after the light has • the airbag for front passenger seat
travelled around on the PCC), contact a (PACOS*) can be activated/deactivated
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop (p. 31).
is recommended.

06 Locks and alarm
Detachable key blade - detaching/ Related information Detachable key blade - unlocking
attaching • Detachable key blade - unlocking doors doors
Detaching/attaching the detachable key blade (p. 166) The detachable key blade (p. 165) can be
(p. 165) is carried out as follows: • Child safety locks - manual activation (p. used if the central locking cannot be activated
179) using the remote control key (p. 159) - e.g. if
Removing the key blade the remote control key's battery is discharged
• Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat-
ing* (p. 31) - see Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
battery (p. 167).
The left-hand front door can be opened as

follows:
1. Unlock the left-hand front door with the
key blade in the door handle's lock cylin-
der. For illustration and more information,
see Keyless* - unlocking with the key
blade (p. 171).
NOTE
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
When the door has been unlocked using
At the same time pull the key blade the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
triggered.
straight out backwards.
06
Attaching the key blade 2. Deactivate the alarm (p. 181) by inserting
Carefully refit the key blade into its location in the remote control key in the ignition
the remote control key (p. 159). switch.
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot For cars with the Keyless system, see
pointed up and lower the key blade into Keyless* - unlocking with the key blade (p.
its slot. 171).
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is
locked in.

06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/PCC - replacing NOTE

the battery
Turn the remote control key over with the
The batteries for the remote control key/PCC buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat-
can be replaced. teries falling out when it is opened.
The batteries for the remote control key/PCC
should be replaced if: IMPORTANT
• the information symbol is illuminated and Avoid touching new batteries and their
the combined instrument panel shows contact surfaces with your fingers as this
Low battery in remote control. Please may impair their function.
change batteries.
and/or Battery replacement
• the locks repeatedly do not react to sig-
nals from the remote control key within NOTE
20 metres from the car. Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key/PCC fulfil
UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III,
sub-section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the
factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo
Opening workshop fulfil the above criteria.
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the
side. Closely study how the battery/batteries 06
are secured on the inside of the cover,
At the same time pull the key blade
with regard to their (+) and (–) sides.
straight out backwards.
Remote control key with 1 battery
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the
1. Carefully prize out the battery.
hole behind the spring-loaded catch and
gently prize the remote control key up. 2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.
}}
167
06 Locks and alarm
||
Remote control key and PCC* with 2 Keyless* The car's electrical system can be set to
batteries Keyless lock and ignition system is available in three different levels - key position (p. 71) 0, I
1. Carefully prize out the batteries. two function levels, Keyless drive and Keyless and II - with the remote control key.
2. First install one new one with the (+) side start.
Related information
up.
• Keyless* - Secure handling of the remote
3. Position the white plastic tab in between control key (p. 169)
and finally install a second new battery
• Keyless* - interference to remote control
with the (+) side down. key function (p. 170)
Battery type
Use batteries with designation CR2430, 3 V.
Assembly
1. Press the remote control key together.
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into
its slot.
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should For cars with Keyless start function the car
hear a "click" when the key blade is can be started (p. 268) without the remote
locked in. control key in the ignition switch.
06 IMPORTANT For cars with Keyless drive function, the car
can be locked and unlocked (p. 171) without
Make sure that exhausted batteries are pressing a button on the remote control key,
disposed of in a manner which is kind to and also be started without the key being
the environment. inserted in the ignition lock. The system
makes it easier and more convenient to open
Related information the car, e.g. when your hands are full.
• Remote control key with key blade (p.
Both of the car's remote control keys have
159)
Keyless function. It is possible to order more
• Remote control key - function (p. 162) remote control keys, see Remote control key
with key blade (p. 159).

06 Locks and alarm
Keyless* - remote control key range5 shows a warning message while sounding an Keyless* - Secure handling of the
In order to open a door or the tailgate without audible reminder at the same time. remote control key
pressing a button on the remote control key, a When the remote control key has been It is important to handle all remote control
remote control key must be approx. 1.5 m returned to the car, the warning message keys with great care.
from the car door handle or tailgate. goes off and the audible reminder ceases
If a remote control key with keyless function
once either/or:
The person who wishes to lock or unlock a is left in the car, it is deactivated temporarily
door must have the remote control key with • a door has been opened and closed when the car is locked. This prevents unau-
him or her. It is not possible to lock or unlock • the remote control key has been inserted thorised entry.
a door if the remote control key is on the in the ignition lock However, if someone breaks into the car and
opposite side of the car. • The OK button on the direction indicator finds the remote control key, it is reactivated.
stalk. It is therefore important to handle all remote
control keys with great care.
Related information
IMPORTANT
• Keyless* - antenna location (p. 173)
When the door has been unlocked using
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
triggered.
Related information
06
The red rings in the above figure indicate the

range covered by the system's antennas.
If all remote control keys are removed from
the car when the engine is running or key
position (p. 71) I or II is active and a door has
been opened and then closed, the informa-
tion display in the combined instrument panel
5 Does not apply to cars with keyless start

06 Locks and alarm
Keyless* - interference to remote Keyless* - locking Related information

control key function Cars with the Keyless-drive system have a • Keyless* (p. 168)
Electromagnetic fields and screening can touch-sensitive area on the outer handle of • Alarm indicator (p. 182)
interfere with the Keyless function. the doors and a rubberised button next to the
tailgate's rubberised pressure plate.
NOTE
Do not place/store the remote control key
with keyless function near a mobile phone
or metal object - no closer than 10-15 cm.
If interference is experienced nonetheless,

use the remote control key (p. 159) and the
key blade like a traditional remote control key.
Related information
Lock the doors and the tailgate by grasping

one of the door handles or pressing the
smaller of the tailgate's two rubberised but-
06 tons - the lock indicator (p. 161) in the wind-
screen confirms that locking has been com-
pleted by starting to flash.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed
before the car can be locked - otherwise the
car is not locked.
NOTE
In cars with automatic gearbox selectors,
the gear selector must be set to the P
position; otherwise the car can be neither
locked nor alarmed.

06 Locks and alarm
Keyless* - unlocking6 Keyless* - unlocking with the key 1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight
Unlocking with Keyless-drive takes place blade up into the hole on the underside of the
when a hand grasps a door handle or the tail- If central locking cannot be activated with the door handle/cover - do not prize.
gate's rubberised pressure plate is actuated - remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are > The plastic cover loosens automati-
open the door or tailgate as normal. discharged, then the left-hand front door can cally by means of the torque when the
be opened using the remote control key's blade is pushed straight up and into
NOTE detachable key blade (p. 166). the opening.
The door handles normally register a hand 2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cyl-
that takes hold of the handle, but with inder and unlock the door.
thick gloves on or after a very quick hand
movement a second attempt may be 3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
required, or with the glove taken off.
NOTE
Related information When the left-hand front door is unlocked
• Keyless* (p. 168) using the key blade and is opened, this
triggers the alarm (p. 181). It is switched
• Keyless* - locking (p. 170)
off by inserting the remote control key in
the ignition switch, see Alarm - remote
control key not working (p. 183).
Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover. Related information

To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's • Keyless* (p. 168) 06
plastic cover must be removed - this is also
done with the key blade:
6 Does not apply to remote control key with keyless start.

06 Locks and alarm
Keyless* - key memory • Adjust steering force in the menu system Keyless* - lock settings
The key memory7
in the remote control MY CAR (p. 108). Lock settings for the Keyless-drive function
key/PCC means that certain settings in the Related information can be adapted in the MY CAR menu system
car can be individually adapted for different • Keyless* (p. 168)
persons. Lock settings for the Keyless-drive function
can be adapted by indicating in the menu
The key memory function is available in com- system for MY CAR which doors are to be
bination with power seat* and power rearview unlocked, under Car settings Lock
and door mirrors. Settings for door mirrors, settings Keyless entry - there select
driver's seat and steering force can be saved between All doors unlock, Any door, Doors
in the key memory. on same side and Both front doors.
Memory function in remote control key For a description of the menu system, see
with Keyless function MY CAR (p. 104).
If several people each with a remote control
key (p. 159) approach the car, then the set- Related information
tings for seat and mirrors are implemented for • Keyless* (p. 168)
the person who opens the driver's door.
After the driver's door has been opened by
person A with remote control key A but
person B with remote control key B shall
drive, the settings can be changed as follows:
06
• Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
behind the steering wheel person B
presses their remote control key's unlock
button, see Remote control key - function
(p. 162).
• Select one of three possible memories for
adjusting the power seat (p. 74) with seat
button 1 - 3.
• Adjust seat and mirrors (p. 97) manually.
7 Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.

06 Locks and alarm
Keyless* - antenna location WARNING Locking/unlocking - from the outside

The Keyless system has a number of inte- Locking/unlocking from the outside is carried
People who have had a pacemaker opera-
grated antennae located around the car. tion should not come closer than 22 cm to out using the remote control key (p. 162). The
the Keyless system's antennas with their remote control key can lock/unlock all doors,
pacemaker. This is to prevent interference the tailgate and the fuel filler flap. Different
between the pacemaker and the Keyless sequences for unlocking can be selected.
system.
In order that the lock sequence can be acti-
vated, the driver's door must be closed - if
Related information any of the other doors or the tailgate is open,
• Keyless* (p. 168) then it/they is/are locked and the alarm is
activated only when it/they are closed. With
the Keyless* system all the doors and tailgate
must be closed.
NOTE
Rear bumper, centre Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
Door handle, left rear
Cargo area, central and furthest in under If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the
the floor remote control key, the battery may be dis-
charged - lock or unlock the left-hand front 06
Door handle, right rear
door with the detachable key blade (p. 166).
Centre console, under the rear section
NOTE
Centre console, under the front section.
Remember that the alarm is triggered
when the door is opened after being
unlocked with the key blade - the alarm is
switched off when the remote control key
is inserted into the ignition switch.

06 Locks and alarm
||
WARNING Manual locking of the door The door can be opened from both the
In certain situations the car must be lockable outside and the inside.
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the
car when it is locked from the outside manually, e.g. in the event of power failure. The door is blocked against opening from
using the remote control key - it is then not the outside. To return to position A, the
The left-hand front door can be locked with inner door handle must be opened.
possible to open any of the doors from the
inside with the door controls. For more its lock cylinder and the remote control key's
detachable key blade (p. 171). The doors can also be unlocked with the
information, see Deadlocks* (p. 178).
unlock button on the remote control key (p.
Other doors have no lock cylinders and 159) or with the central locking button on the
Automatic relocking instead have a lock switch on the end of each driver's door.
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened door which must be depressed using the key
within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked blade - they are then mechanically locked/ NOTE
again automatically. This function reduces the blocked to prevent them being opened from
risk that the car is left unlocked unintention- outside. The doors can still be opened from • A door's lock reset only locks that par-
ally. (For cars with alarm, see Alarm (p. 181).) the inside. ticular door - not all doors simultane-
ously.
Related information • A manually locked rear door with acti-
• Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. vated manual child safety locks (p.
175) 179) cannot be opened from either the
• Remote control key - function (p. 162) outside or the inside. A rear door that
is locked in this way can only be
unlocked with the remote control key
or central locking button.
06
Related information
• Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
battery (p. 167)
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up
with child safety locks (p. 179).
– Remove the detachable key blade (p.
166) from the remote control key. Insert
the key blade in the hole for lock reset
and press the key in until the key bot-
toms, approx. 12 mm.

06 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking - from the inside With central locking button on both front Car settings Lock settings Automatic
Locking/unlocking can be performed using doors and electric lock button in each rear door locking. For a description of the menu
the driver's door button for central locking. All door: system, see MY CAR (p. 104).
doors and tailgate (p. 176) can be locked or • Illuminated lamp means that only that
unlocked simultaneously. particular door is locked. When all but-
Related information
tons are illuminated all doors are locked. • Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.
173)
Unlocking • Alarm (p. 181)
A door can be unlocked from the inside in
two different ways:
• Press the central locking button .
A long press also opens all the side windows*
simultaneously (see also Total airing function
(p. 176)).
• Pull the door handle and open the door -
the door is unlocked and opened in one
operation.
Central locking
Locking
• Press one side of the button to lock -
• Both front doors must be closed for the
the other side to unlock. central locking to be activated. Press the
central locking button - all doors are 06
Lamp in lock button
When the lamp in the central locking button locked. If any of the rear doors is open, it
will lock when it is closed.
for the driver's door is illuminated it means
that all doors are locked. A long press also closes all the side windows
simultaneously (see also Total airing function
With central locking button only in the driver's (p. 176)).
door, other doors have no button:
• Illuminated lamp means that all doors are Automatic locking
locked. The doors and tailgate are locked automati-
cally when the car starts to move.
the menu system MY CAR under Settings

06 Locks and alarm
Total airing function Locking/unlocking - glovebox Locking/unlocking - tailgate

The total airing function opens or closes all The glovebox (p. 149) can only be locked/ The tailgate can be opened, locked and
side windows simultaneously and can be unlocked using the detachable key blade from unlocked in a number of different ways.
used for example to quickly air the car during the remote control key (p. 159).
hot weather. Manual opening
For information on the key blade, see Detach-
able key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 166).
Rubber plate with electrical contact.

Central locking button
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical
A long press on the symbol in the central lock. To open:
Locking the glovebox:
locking button opens all side windows simul- 1. Push down gently on the wider of the two
06 taneously. The same procedure on the Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
rubberised pressure plates under the
button closes all side windows simulta- cylinder. outer handle - the lock is released.
neously. Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. 2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked open the tailgate.
Related information position.
• Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
175) Pull out the key blade.
• Power windows (p. 95) • Unlock by carrying this out in reverse
order.
Related information
176
06 Locks and alarm
IMPORTANT The doors remain locked and armed. Opening the car from inside
• Minimal force is required to release the The tailgate can be opened in two different
rear hatch lock - just gently press the ways using the remote control key:
rubberised panel. One press - The boot lid is unlocked, but
• Do not place the lift force on the rub- remains closed - press lightly on the rubber-
ber panel when opening the rear hatch ised pressure plate under the outer handle
- lift the handle. Using too much force and lift the boot lid. If the tailgate is not
may damage the electrical contacts on opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked
the rubber panel. and the alarm is re-armed.
Two presses - The boot lid is unlocked and
Unlocking with the remote control key the lock is disengaged at which the boot lid
opens about a centimetre - lift the outer han-
dle to open. Rain, cold, frost or snow could
Unlocking, tailgate
however prevent the tailgate from disengag-
ing from the lock. To open the tailgate:
– Press the lighting panel button (1).
NOTE
> The lock releases and the tailgate
• When the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked opens by a few centimetres.
with 2 presses or from the car interior,
automatic relocking does not take Locking with the remote control key
place because the boot lid/tailgate is – Press the remote control key (p. 162) but- 06
open - it must be closed manually. ton for locking .
• After the boot lid/tailgate has been > The lock indicator on the instrument
Using the remote control key (p. 159) closed it is unlocked and the alarm is panel starts flashing, which means that
button the alarm for the tailgate can be dis- not armed - relock it and re-arm the the car is locked and the alarm* has
armed* and the tailgate unlocked on its own. alarm with the remote control key's been activated.
lock button .
The lock indicator (p. 161) on the instrument
Related information
panel stops flashing in order to show that not
all of the car is locked and the alarm's* level • Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
175)
and movement sensors and the sensors for
opening the tailgate are disconnected. • Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.
173)

06 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap Deadlocks* Temporary deactivation

The fuel filler flap is unlocked with the remote Deadlocks8 means that all door handles are
control key (p. 159) button. mechanically disengaged, which prevents
doors being opened from the inside.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked until the
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
car is locked with the remote control key
control key (p. 159) and are set after an
button. If the car is locked during travel or
approximately 10 second delay after the
with the interior buttons, the fuel filler flap will
doors have been locked.
remain unlocked.
The fuel filler flap locking logic also follows NOTE
the locking or unlocking of the keyless-drive If a door is opened within the delay time
and the central locking system. then the sequence is interrupted and the
alarm is deactivated. Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
Related information
• Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing (p. 294) MY CAR
The car can only be unlocked from a dead-
• Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 294)
lock state with the remote control key. The OK MENU
front left door can also be unlocked with the
detachable key blade (p. 165). TUNE knob control
EXIT
WARNING
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
06 Do not allow anyone to remain in the car doors must be locked from the outside, then
without first deactivating the deadlocks in the deadlocks function can be temporarily
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in. switched off. This is carried out as follows:
1. Access the menu system MY CAR under
Settings Car settings Reduced
Guard (for a detailed description of the
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104)).
8 Only in combination with alarm.

06 Locks and alarm
2. Select Activate once. NOTE Child safety locks - manual activation

> The combined instrument panel shows The child safety locks prevent children from
the message Locks and alarm
• Remember that the alarm is activated
being able to open a rear door from the
when the car is locked.
Reduced guard and the deadlocks inside.
function is switched off when the car is • If any of the doors are opened from
the inside then the alarm is triggered. The child safety locks are located on the trail-
locked. ing edge of the rear doors and are only acces-
or sible when the doors are open.
Related information
– Select Ask when exiting. • Keyless* - unlocking with the key blade Activate/deactivate child safety locks
> Each time the engine is switched off (p. 171)
the centre console's screen shows the
message Activate Reduced Guard
until engine has started again? fol-
lowed by the alternatives Confirm
with OK and Cancel with EXIT.
If the deadlocks function shall be switched
off
– Press OK/MENU and lock the car. (Note
that the alarm's movement and tilt detec-
tors* are switched off at the same time.)
> The next time the engine is started, the Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up 06
system is reset to zero and the com- with manual door lock (p. 174).
bined instrument panel shows the – Use the remote control key's detachable
message Locks and alarm Full key blade (p. 166) to turn the knob.
guard at which the deadlocks function
and the alarm's movement and tilt The door is blocked against opening from
detectors are re-engaged. the inside.
The door can be opened from both the
If the locking system shall not be changed
outside and the inside.
– Press EXIT and lock the car.

06 Locks and alarm
||
NOTE Child safety locks - electrical 2. Press the button in the driver's door con-
activation* trol panel.
• A door's knob control only blocks that
The child safety locks prevent children from > The information display shows the
particular door - not both rear doors
being able to open a rear door from the message Rear child lock activated
simultaneously.
inside. and the button's lamp illuminates - the
• Cars with an electric child safety lock locks are active.
do not have a manual child lock. Activation
The electrical child safety locks can be acti- When the electric child safety lock is active
vated/deactivated in all key positions (p. 71) then the rear:
Related information higher than 0. Activation/deactivation can be • windows can only be opened with the
• Child safety locks - electrical activation* performed up to 2 minutes after switching off driver's door control panel
(p. 180) the engine, provided that no door is opened. • doors cannot be opened from inside.
• Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. The current setting is stored when the engine
175)
is switched off - if the child safety locks are
activated at engine shutdown, the function
will remain activated the next time the engine
is started.
Related information
• Child safety locks - manual activation (p.
179)
06 • Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
175)
Control panel driver's door.

1. Start the engine or choose a key position
higher than 0.

06 Locks and alarm
Alarm NOTE Deactivating a triggered alarm

The alarm is a device that warns in the event – Press the remote control key unlock but-
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in ton or insert the remote control key in the
of e.g. a break-in in the car. the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also regis- ignition switch.
Activated alarm is triggered if:
tered. For this reason the alarm is trig-
Related information
• a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is gered if the car is left with a window open
• Alarm - automatic re-arming (p. 182)
opened or if the passenger compartment heater is
• a movement is detected in the passenger
used. • Alarm - remote control key not working
To avoid this: Close the window when (p. 183)
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*) leaving the car. If the car's integrated pas-
senger compartment heater (or a portable
• the car is raised or towed away (if fitted electric heater) shall be used - direct the
with a tilt detector*) airflow from the air vents so that they are
• the battery's cable is disconnected not pointing upwards in the passenger
compartment. Alternatively, reduced alarm
• the siren is disconnected. level can be used, Reduced alarm level (p.
If there is a fault in the alarm system then the 183).
information display in the combined instru-
ment panel shows a message. In which case,
NOTE
contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. Do not attempt to repair or alter compo-
nents in the alarm system yourself. Any
such attempts may affect the terms of the
insurance. 06
Arming the alarm

– Press the remote control key lock button.
Deactivate the alarm

– Press the remote control key unlock but-
ton.

06 Locks and alarm
Alarm indicator Alarm - automatic re-arming Alarm - automatic arming

The alarm indicator shows alarm system (p. Automatic re-arming of the alarm (p. 181) pre- In certain countries the alarm (p. 181) is acti-
181) status. vents the car being left with the alarm dis- vated after a certain delay if the driver's door
armed unintentionally. was opened and closed but the car was not
re-locked.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (p. 159)(and the alarm is disarmed) but
none of the doors or the tailgate is opened Related information
within 2 minutes, then the alarm is automati- • Alarm signals (p. 183)
cally re-armed. The car is relocked at the
same time.
Related information
• Alarm - automatic arming (p. 182)
Same LED as lock indicator (p. 161).

A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
• LED not lit – Alarm not armed
• The LED flashes once every other second
06 – Alarm is armed
• The LED flashes rapidly after disarming
the alarm (and until the remote control
key is inserted in the ignition switch and
key position I is selected) – Alarm has
been triggered.
182
06 Locks and alarm
Alarm - remote control key not Alarm signals Reduced alarm level
working When the alarm (p. 181) is triggered a siren Reduced guard means that the movement
If the alarm (p. 181) cannot be deactivated sounds and all direction indicators flash. and tilt detectors can be temporarily deacti-
with the remote control key, e.g. if the key's vated.
battery (p. 167) is discharged - the car can be • A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm -
unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as
own battery and works independently of e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during
follows:
the car battery. transport on a car train or car ferry - tempo-
1. Open the left-hand front door with the • The direction indicators flash for 5 rarily deactivate the movement and tilt detec-
detachable key blade (p. 171). minutes or until the alarm is switched off. tors.
> The alarm is triggered, the direction The procedure is the same as with the tem-
indicators flash and the siren sounds. porary disengaging of deadlocks, see Dead-
locks* (p. 178).
Related information
• Alarm (p. 181)
• Alarm indicator (p. 182)
06
2. Insert the remote control key in the igni-

tion switch.
> The alarm is deactivated.

DRIVER SUPPORT
07 Driver support
Stability and traction control system Active Yaw Control Driver Steering Recommendation – DSR
(DSTC) The function checks the driving and brake DSR (Driver Steering Recommendation) helps
The stability and traction control system, force of the wheels individually in order to the driver steer the car in the right direction
DSTC (Dynamic Stability & Traction Control), stabilise the car. when there is reduced traction or when the
helps the driver to avoid skidding and ABS system engages.
Spin Control
improves the car's traction. The primary role of the DSR function is to
The function reduces engine power if the
drive wheels slip against the underlying sur- help the driver steer in the right direction
The activation of the system during braking
face in order to maintain stability and traction. when the car is skidding.
may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The
car may accelerate slower than expected DSR engages by applying slight torque to the
when the accelerator pedal is depressed. Traction control system steering wheel in the direction in which the
The function is active at low speed and trans- car should be steered to maintain/achieve
fers power from the driving wheel that is spin- maximum possible traction and stabilise the
WARNING
ning to the one that is not. car.
The stability and traction control system is
a supplementary function - it cannot han- Engine drag control - EDC Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA1
dle all situations in all road conditions. EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involun-
Trailer stability assist (p. 305) function is to
The driver always bears responsibility for tary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or
stabilise the car and trailer combination if it
ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely engine braking when driving in low gears on
begins to snake. For more information, see
and that applicable road traffic rules and slippery road surfaces.
Driving with a trailer (p. 299).
regulations are followed.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's abil- NOTE
The system consists of the following func- ity to steer the car.
tions: The function is deactivated if the driver
Corner Traction Control - CTC selects Sport mode.
• Active Yaw Control
CTC compensates for understeer and allows
• Spin Control higher than normal acceleration in a bend Related information
07
• Traction control system without wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on • Stability and traction control system
• Engine drag control - EDC an arcing motorway entrance road to quickly (DSTC) - operation (p. 186)
reach the prevailing traffic speed. • Stability and traction control system
• Corner Traction Control - CTC
(DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 187)
• Driver Steering Recommendation – DSR
• Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA
1 Trailer Stability Assist

07 Driver support
Stability and traction control system 2. Uncheck the box and back out of the
(DSTC) - operation menu system with EXIT.
The stability and traction control system, > The system then allows a more sporty
DSTC (Dynamic Stability & Traction Control), driving style.
helps the driver to avoid skidding and The Sport mode is active until the driver
improves the car's traction. deselects it or until the engine is switched off
Selection of level - Sport mode - after the engine is started the next time the
The stability and traction control system DSTC system is back in its normal mode
(DSTC) is always activated - it cannot be again.
switched off. Related information
However, the driver can select the Sport • Stability and traction control system
mode, which allows for a more active driving (DSTC) (p. 185)
experience. In Sport mode the system • Stability and traction control system
detects whether the accelerator pedal, steer- (DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 187)
ing wheel movements and cornering are more
• MY CAR (p. 104)
active than in normal driving and then allows
controlled skidding with the rear section up to
a certain level before it intervenes and stabil-
ises the car.
If the driver stops a controlled skid by releas-
ing the accelerator pedal then the DSTC sys-
tem intervenes and stabilises the car.
With Sport mode, maximum traction is
obtained if the car has become stuck, or
07 when driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or
deep snow.
Proceed as follows to select Sport mode:
1. Press the centre console's MY CAR but-
ton and in the display screen's menu sys-
tem find My V40 DSTC.
186
07 Driver support
Stability and traction control system helps the driver to avoid skidding and
(DSTC) - symbols and messages improves the car's traction.
The stability and traction control system,
DSTC (Dynamic Stability & Traction Control),
Table
SymbolA Message Specification
DSTC Temporarily OFF DSTC system temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature. - The function is reacti-
vated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
DSTC Service required DSTC system disengaged.

• Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
"Message" There is a message in the combined instrument panel - read it!

and
Constant glow for System check when the engine is started.

2 seconds.
Flashing light. DSTC system is being activated.
Sport mode is activated.

07
A The symbols are schematic.
Related information
• Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) (p. 185)
• Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - operation (p. 186)
187
07 Driver support
Road Sign Information (RSI) WARNING Road sign information (RSI)* -

The road sign information function (RSI – operation
RSI does not work in all situations but is
Road Sign Information) helps the driver to designed merely as a supplementary aid. The road sign information function (RSI –
remember which road signs the car has Road Sign Information) helps the driver to
passed. The driver always bears ultimate responsi- remember which road signs the car has
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely and that applicable road traffic rules passed. How the function is operated is
and regulations are followed. described below.
Related information
• Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 188)
• Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 190)
Examples of readable speed related2 signs.

The road sign information function gives
information on current speed, that a motor- Recorded speed information3.
way or road is starting/ending and when When RSI has recorded a road sign with an
overtaking is prohibited. If both a sign for imposed speed, the combined instrument
motorway/road for motorised traffic and a panel displays the sign as a symbol.
sign showing the maximum permitted speed
Together with the symbol for
are passed, RSI decides to show the sign
07 the current speed limit, a
symbol for maximum permitted speed.
sign showing that overtaking
is prohibited may also be
displayed where appropriate.
2 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations only show a few examples.

07 Driver support
End of restriction or motorway Additional signs Some speeds are applicable

A corresponding road sign is shown in the only after e.g. a specific dis-
combined instrument panel for tance or at a certain time of
day.
approx. 10 seconds in situations where RSI detects a sign that involves the end of a speed limit - or other speed-related The driver's
information, attention
e.g. end of aismotorway
. drawn to the situation by
means of a symbol for an
Examples of such signs are:
additional sign under the
End of all restrictions. symbol showing speed.
Display of additional information

A symbol for additional sign
in the form of an empty
frame under the combined
instrument panel's speed
End of motorway. Examples of additional signs3.
symbol means that the RSI
Sometimes different speed limits are signpos- has detected an additional
ted for the same road - an additional sign sign with supplementary
then indicates the circumstances under which information for the current speed limit.
the different speeds apply. The road section
may be particularly susceptible to accidents Setting in MY CAR
in rain and/or fog, for example. There are options for RSI in the MY CAR
Following which, the sign information is hid- menu system; see MY CAR - driving support
den until the next speed-related sign is An additional sign relating to rain is displayed system (p. 109).
detected. only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
The speed applicable on an
exit is indicated in certain
markets by means of an
additional sign containing an 07
arrow.
Speed signs linked to this
type of additional sign are displayed only if
the driver is using the direction indicator.
}}
189
07 Driver support
||
Road sign information On/Off 5 km/h or more. This warning is given by the Road sign information (RSI)* -
symbol showing the applicable maximum limitations
speed temporarily flashing when this speed is The road sign information function (RSI –
exceeded. Road Sign Information) helps the driver to
To activate speed warning: remember which road signs the car has
passed. The function has the following limita-
• Check the option Speed alert at tions.
Settings Car settings Speed alert
and go back out by pressing EXIT. The RSI function's camera sensor has limita-
tions just like the human eye. Find out more
Related information about this in the section on the camera sen-
• Road Sign Information (RSI) (p. 188) sor limitations (p. 231).
The combined instrument panel's speed sym- • Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
bol display can be disabled. To deactivate the Signs which indirectly provide information on
(p. 190)
RSI function: a prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for
• MY CAR (p. 104) towns/districts, are not recorded by the RSI
• Uncheck the option Road Sign function.
Information at Settings Car settings
Here are some other examples of what can
Road Sign Information and go back disrupt the function:
out by pressing EXIT.
• Faded signs
Speed warning • Signs positioned on bends
• Rotated or damaged signs
• Concealed or poorly positioned signs
• Signs completely or partly covered with
frost, snow and/or dirt.
07
Related information
• Road Sign Information (RSI) (p. 188)
• Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 188)
The driver can opt to receive a warning when
the applicable speed limit is exceeded by

07 Driver support
Speed limiter* Related information Speed limiter* - getting started

A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a • Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 191) A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates • Speed limiter - temporary deactivation reverse cruise control - the driver regulates
the speed using the accelerator pedal but is and standby mode* (p. 193) the speed using the accelerator pedal but is
prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- • Speed limiter* - alarm for speed excee- prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-
selected/set speed by the speed limiter. ded (p. 194) selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
• Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 194)
Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument
panel Digital and Analogue. panel Digital and Analogue.
Speed limiter - On/Off. Speed limiter - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed. speed is resumed.
Standby mode Standby mode
07
Activate and adjust the max. speed. Activate and adjust the max. speed.
Selected speed Selected speed
Speed limiter active Speed limiter active

07 Driver support
||
Switch on and activate 2. Scroll with the button until the com- Speed limiter* - changing speed
When the speed limiter is active, its bined instrument panel shows a mark (5) A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a
symbol (6) is shown in combination with a by the desired maximum speed. reverse cruise control - the driver regulates
mark (5) by the set maximum speed in the > The speed limiter is then active and the the speed using the accelerator pedal but is
combined instrument panel. selected max. speed is stored in the prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-
Selection and storage of the highest possible memory. selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
speed in the memory can be made both dur- To change the stored speed:
ing a journey and while stationary. Related information
• Speed limiter* (p. 191) • Adjust with short presses on or in
While driving the steering wheel keypad - every press
1. Press the steering wheel button to gives +/- 5 km/h. The last presses made
switch on the speed limiter. are stored in the memory.
> The symbol (6) for speed limiter illumi- To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
nates in the combined instrument
• Hold down the button and release it when
panel. the combined instrument panel shows a
2. When the car is moving at the desired mark next to the desired maximum
highest possible speed: Press one of the speed.
steering wheel buttons or until the Related information
combined instrument panel shows a
• Speed limiter* (p. 191)
mark (5) next to the desired maximum
speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the
memory.
07 When stationary
1. Press the steering wheel button to
switch on the speed limiter.

07 Driver support
Speed limiter - temporary Temporary deactivation - standby mode – Depress the accelerator pedal fully.
deactivation and standby mode* To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter > The combined instrument panel shows
A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a and set it in standby mode: the stored maximum speed with a col-
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates – oured mark (5) and the driver can tem-
Press .
the speed using the accelerator pedal but is porarily exceed the set maximum
prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- > The combined instrument panel's speed – the mark (5) changes colour
selected/set speed by the speed limiter. mark (5) changes colour from GREEN from GREEN to WHITE (Digital) or
to WHITE (Digital) or from WHITE to WHITE to GREY (Analogue) during that
GREY (Analogue) and the driver can time.
temporarily exceed the set maximum
speed. The speed limiter is automatically reac-
tivated after the accelerator pedal is
The speed limiter is reactivated with released and the car's speed is slowed
one press on . The mark (5) then down to below the selected/stored
changes colour from WHITE to GREEN maximum speed - the mark (5)
(Digital) or GREY to WHITE (Analogue) changes colour from WHITE to GREEN
and the car's maximum speed is lim- (Digital) or GREY to WHITE (Analogue)
ited again. and the car's maximum speed is again
limited.
Temporary deactivation with the
accelerator pedal Related information
Steering wheel keypad and instrument panel Dig- The speed limiter can also be set in standby • Speed limiter* (p. 191)
ital and Analogue.
mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rap-
Speed limiter - On/Off. idly accelerating the car out of a situation:
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Standby mode 07
Activate and adjust the max. speed.
Selected speed
Speed limiter active

07 Driver support
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed Speed limiter* - deactivation Cruise control*
exceeded A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is more relaxing driving on motorways and long,
the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- straight roads with regular traffic flows.
prevented from accidentally exceeding a selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
pre-selected/set speed by the speed limiter. Overview
To deactivate the speed limiter:
On steep roads the speed limiter's engine – Press the steering wheel button .
braking effect may be inadequate and the
selected maximum speed is exceeded. The > The combined instrument panel's (p.
driver is alerted about this with an acoustic 191) symbol for the speed limiter and
signal. The signal is active until the driver has the mark for the set speed are extin-
slowed to below the selected maximum guished. The selected and stored
speed. speed are thus deleted from the mem-
ory and cannot be resumed with the
NOTE button.
The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds The driver can then use the accelerator
if the speed has been exceeded by at least pedal to choose a speed without limi-
3 km/h provided that none of the buttons tation. The steering wheel buttons and combined instru-
or has been depressed during the ment panel in cars without speed limiter4.
last half minute. Related information
Related information
07
4 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

07 Driver support
WARNING Cruise control* - managing speed

The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and inter- the driver to maintain an even speed. It is
vene when the cruise control is not main- possible to activate, set or change the speed.
taining a suitable speed and/or suitable
distance. Activating and setting the speed
The driver always bears ultimate responsi-
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely.
Related information
The steering wheel buttons and combined instru- • Cruise control* - managing speed (p.
ment panel in cars with speed limiter4. 195)
Cruise control - On/Off. • Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 197)
Standby mode ceases and the stored • Cruise control* - resume set speed (p.
speed is resumed. 198)
Standby mode • Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 199) The steering wheel buttons and display in cars
without speed limiter5.
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).
Cruise control active - WHITE symbol

(GREY = Standby mode).
07

07 Driver support
||
NOTE • Cruise control* - resume set speed (p.
198)
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at
speeds below 30 km/h. • Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 199)
Changing the speed

• Adjust with short presses on or -
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
presses made are stored in the memory.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
• Hold down the button and release it at
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars the required speed.
with speed limiter5. A temporary increase in speed with the accel-
To enable cruise control: erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting - the car
• Press the steering wheel button returns to the set speed when the accelerator
> The cruise control symbol (6) in the com- pedal is released.
bined instrument panel for cruise control
active changes from GREY to WHITE and NOTE
shows that the cruise control is in If any of the Cruise Control buttons are
standby mode. held depressed for several minutes then it
To activate cruise control: is blocked and deactivated. To be able to
reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be
• At the required speed - press the steering stopped and the engine restarted.
wheel button or .
07 > The current speed is stored in the mem- Related information
ory and the combined instrument panel's • Cruise control* (p. 194)
marking (5) illuminates at the selected • Cruise control* temporary deactivation
speed. and standby mode (p. 197)

07 Driver support
Cruise control* temporary • the gear selector/lever is moved to neu-

deactivation and standby mode tral position N (automatic gearbox)
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps • the driver maintains a speed higher than
the driver to maintain an even speed. The the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
function can be temporarily deactivated and The driver must then regulate the speed.
set in standby mode.
Related information
Temporary deactivation - standby mode • Cruise control* (p. 194)
• Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 195)
• Cruise control* - resume set speed (p.
198)
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars • Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 199)
with speed limiter6.
To temporarily disengage cruise control and
set it in standby mode:
• Press .
> The combined instrument panel's
marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars from WHITE to GREY.
without speed limiter6.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
set in standby mode if:
• wheels lose traction
07
• the foot brake is used
• speed falls below approx. 30 km/h
• the clutch pedal is depressed for longer
than 1 minute7
7 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.

07 Driver support
Cruise control* - resume set speed Related information

The cruise control (p. 194) (CC – Cruise • Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 195)
Control) helps the driver to maintain an even • Cruise control* temporary deactivation
speed. After temporary deactivation and and standby mode (p. 197)
standby mode (p. 197) it is possible to resume • Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 199)
the set speed.
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars

with speed limiter8.
To reactivate the cruise control from standby
mode:
• Press the steering wheel button .
> The combined instrument panel's
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour
without speed limiter8. from GREY to WHITE and the speed is
then set to the last speed stored.
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once
the speed has been resumed by selecting
07
.

07 Driver support
Cruise control* - deactivate Adaptive cruise control (ACC)*

The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
the driver to maintain an even speed. How it Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a
is deactivated is described here. safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
The adaptive cruise control provides a more

relaxing driving experience on long journeys
on motorways and long straight main roads in
smooth traffic flows.
The driver sets the desired speed (p. 203)
and time interval to the car in front. When the
radar detector detects a slower vehicle in
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars front of the car, the speed is automatically
with speed limiter9. adapted to that. When the road is clear again
The cruise control is deactivated with a steer- the car returns to the selected speed.
ing wheel button (1) or by switching off the If the adaptive cruise control is switched off
engine - the set speed is deleted from the or set to standby mode and the car comes
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars
without speed limiter9. memory and cannot be resumed with the too close to a vehicle in front, then the driver
button. is warned instead by a Distance Alert (p. 214)
about the short distance.
Related information
• Cruise control* (p. 194)
• Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 195)
• Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 197)
• Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 07
198)

07 Driver support
||
WARNING Related information Adaptive cruise control* - function
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC –
The driver must always be observant with 202)
regard to the traffic conditions and inter- Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver
vene when the adaptive cruise control is • Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. maintain a safe distance from the vehicle
not maintaining a suitable speed or suita- 200) ahead.
ble distance. • Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle (p. 204)
all traffic, weather and road conditions. • Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
Read all the sections about the adaptive deactivation, and standby mode (p. 204)
cruise control in the owner's manual in • Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p.
order to learn about its limitations, of 206)
which the driver should be aware before it
is used. • Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle (p. 205)
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and • Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise
speed, even when the adaptive cruise con- control functionality (p. 208)
trol is being used. • Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing
and action (p. 211)
Function overview10.
IMPORTANT • Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
Warning lamp - braking by driver required
messages (p. 212)
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control
components must only be performed at a Steering wheel (p. 77) keypad
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended. Radar sensor (p. 209)
Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise
Automatic gearbox control system and a coordinated spacing
07 Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced system.
functionality with the adaptive cruise control's
Queue Assist (p. 206).
10 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.

07 Driver support
WARNING what the driver set for time interval (p. 204). If does not brake, then cruise control uses the
the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in warning lamp and warning sound from the
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision front then the car will instead maintain the collision warning system (p. 223) in order to
avoidance system. The driver must inter- cruise control's set speed. This also happens alert the driver that immediate intervention is
vene if the system does not detect a vehi-
cle in front. if the speed of the vehicle in front exceeds required.
the cruise control's set speed.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small The adaptive cruise control aims to control NOTE
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy- the speed in a smooth way. In situations that The warning lamp may be difficult to see in
cles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary demand sudden braking the driver must strong sunlight or when wearing sun-
vehicles and objects. brake himself/herself. This applies with large glasses.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for differences in speed, or if the vehicle in front
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot WARNING
sensor (p. 209) braking may come unexpect-
of water or slush on the road, in heavy edly or not at all. Cruise Control warns only of vehicles
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding which the radar sensor has detected.
roads or on slip roads. The adaptive cruise control can be activated Hence the warning may not be given, or it
to follow another vehicle at speeds from may be given with a certain delay. Do not
The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly 30 km/h11 up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls wait for a warning without braking when so
below 30 km/h or if the engine speed required.
measured by a radar sensor. Cruise control
regulates the speed with acceleration and becomes too low, the cruise control is set in
braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a standby mode at which automatic braking Steep roads and/or heavy load
low sound when they are being used by the ceases - the driver must then take over him- Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control
adaptive cruise control. self/herself to maintain a safe distance to the is primarily intended for use when driving on
vehicle ahead. level road surfaces. It may have difficulty in
WARNING keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
Warning lamp - braking by driver
ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes,
The brake pedal moves when Cruise Con- required
with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which 07
trol brakes. Do not rest your foot beneath Adaptive cruise control has a braking
case, be extra attentive and ready to slow
the brake pedal as it may become trapped. capacity that is equivalent to more than 40%
down.
of the car's braking capacity.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the If the car needs to be braked more heavily Related information
vehicle ahead in the same lane according to than cruise control capacity and the driver • Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)
11 Queue Assist (p. 206) (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range of 0-200 km/h.

07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - overview Time distance Time distance

Operation of the adaptive cruise control (p.
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol ACC is active at the GREEN symbol
199) and steering wheel keypad varies
(WHITE = standby mode). (WHITE = standby mode).
depending on whether or not the car is equip-
ped with speed limiter (p. 191)12. Adaptive cruise control without Speed Related information
limiter • Adaptive cruise control* - managing
Adaptive cruise control with Speed speed (p. 203)
limiter
• Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval
(p. 204)
• Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
deactivation, and standby mode (p. 204)

speed is resumed.
Cruise control - On/Off.
Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
speed is resumed. Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Standby mode Activate and adjust the speed.
07 Time interval - Increase/decrease. (Not used)
Activate and adjust the speed. Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
standby mode).
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
standby mode).

07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - managing At the same time a speed NOTE

speed range is marked:
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are
The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC – • the higher speed with held depressed for several minutes then it
Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver GREEN marking is the pre- is blocked and deactivated. To be able to
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle programmed speed reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be
ahead. stopped and the engine restarted.
• the lower speed is the
To enable cruise control: speed of the car in front. In certain situations, cruise control cannot
be activated. In this case, the combined
• Press the steering wheel button -a Changing the speed instrument panel (p. 212) shows Cruise
similar WHITE symbol is illuminated in the To change the stored speed: control Unavailable.
combined instrument panel (p. 212)
which shows that the cruise control is in • Adjust with short presses on or -
Related information
standby mode (p. 204). every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
presses made are stored in the memory.
• Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)
To activate cruise control: • Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
If speed is increased using the accelera-
• At the required speed - press the steering 202)
tor pedal prior to pressing the / but-
wheel button or .
ton, then it is the car's current speed
> The current speed is stored in the mem- when the button is pressed that is stored
ory, the combined instrument panel in the cruise control.
shows a "magnifying glass" around the To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
selected speed for a second or so and its
marking changes from WHITE to GREEN. • Hold down the button and release it at
the required speed.
When this symbol changes colour
from WHITE to GREEN, the cruise
control is active and the car main-
tains the stored speed. 07
Only when the symbol shows
an image of another vehicle
is the distance to the vehicle
in front controlled by the
cruise control.

07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - set time The same symbol is also shown when Dis- Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
interval tance Alert (p. 214) is activated. deactivation, and standby mode
The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC – The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC –
Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver NOTE Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle Only use the time intervals permitted by maintain an even speed and a safe distance
ahead. local traffic regulations. from the vehicle ahead. The cruise control
can be temporarily deactivated and set in
Different time intervals to the If Cruise Control does not appear to react
when activated, this may be because the standby mode.
vehicle in front can be
time distance to the car in front is prevent-
selected and shown in the
ing an increase in speed.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
combined instrument panel with Speed limiter
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the The higher the speed the longer the calcu- To temporarily disengage adaptive cruise
more lines the longer the lated distance in metres for a given time
interval. control and set it in standby mode:
time interval. One line corre-
sponds to approximately 1 second to the Read more about how you manage the • Press the steering wheel button
vehicle in front, 5 lines speed (p. 203). This symbol and stored speed mark-
approximately 3 seconds. ing then changes colour from
To set/change the time distance: Related information GREEN to WHITE.
• Turn the steering wheel button set's Temporary deactivation - standby mode
thumbwheel (or use the / buttons for without Speed limiter
cars without Speed limiters). To temporarily disengage cruise control and
At low speed, when the distances are short, set it in standby mode:
the adaptive cruise control increases the time •
interval slightly. Press the steering wheel button
The adaptive cruise control allows the time Standby mode due to driver intervention
07
interval to vary noticeably in certain situations The adaptive cruise control is temporarily dis-
in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle engaged and set automatically in standby
in front smoothly and comfortably. mode if:
Note that a short time interval only allows the
driver a short time to react and take action if
any unforeseen traffic problem should arise.

07 Driver support
• the foot brake is used An automatic deactivation can be due to: Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
• the clutch pedal is depressed for longer • the driver opens the door another vehicle
than 1 minute13 The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC –
• the driver takes off his seatbelt
• the gear selector/lever is moved to neu- Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver
tral position N (automatic gearbox)
• engine speed is too low/high maintain a safe distance from the vehicle
• speed has fallen below 30 km/h14 ahead and it can also assist during overtaking.
• the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute. • wheels lose traction Read more about the different time intervals
The driver must then regulate the speed. • brake temperature is high (p. 204) to the vehicle in front.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel- • the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet When the car is following another vehicle and
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked). the driver indicates an impending overtaking
affect the cruise control setting - the car For more information on symbols, messages manoeuvre with the direction indicator15, the
returns to the last stored speed when the and their meaning, see section Symbols and adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accel-
accelerator pedal is released. messages in the display (p. 212). erate the car towards the vehicle in front.
For more information, see the sections Man- Resume set speed This function is active at speeds
aging speed (p. 203) and Overtaking another Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is above 70 km/h.
vehicle (p. 205). reactivated with one press on the steering Read more about how you manage the speed
Automatic standby mode wheel button - the speed is then set to the (p. 203).
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on last stored speed.
other systems, e.g. Stability and traction con- WARNING
trol system (DSTC) (p. 185). If any of these NOTE
Be aware that this function can be acti-
systems stop working then cruise control is A marked speed increase may occur once vated in more situations other than during
automatically deactivated. the speed has been resumed by selecting overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator
. is used to indicate a change of lane or exit
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal to another road - the car will then acceler-
will sound and the message Cruise control ate briefly. 07
Cancelled is shown in the combined instru- Related information
ment panel. The driver must then intervene • Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)
Related information
and adapt the speed and distance to the
• Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing • Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)
vehicle ahead. and action (p. 211)
13 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.
14 Does not apply to a car with Queue Assistant - it can go all the way down to 0 km/h.
15 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.

07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control* - Queue Extended speed range
The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC – Assist
Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC – NOTE
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver In order to activate the cruise control the
ahead. maintain a safe distance from the vehicle driver's door must be closed and the driver
ahead. Queue Assist also provides the adap- must be wearing the seatbelt.
Keypad with Speed limiter tive cruise control with enhanced functionality
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged at speeds lower than 30 km/h.
with a short press of the steering wheel but- With an automatic gearbox, the adaptive
ton . The set speed is cleared and cannot In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle
cruise control is supplemented with the within the range 0-200 km/h.
be resumed with the button.
Queue Assist function (also referred to as
Keypad without Speed limiter "Queue Assist"). NOTE
A short press on the steering wheel button Queue Assistant has the following functions: Activation of the cruise control below
sets the adaptive cruise control in standby 30 km/h requires a vehicle in front within a
mode. With a further short press the cruise
• Extended speed range - also at lower reasonable distance.
than 30 km/h and at stationary
control is deactivated. The set speed is
cleared and cannot be resumed with the
• Change of target
For shorter stops in connection with inching
button. • Automatic braking ceases when station- in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is
ary automatically resumed if the stops do not
Related information Note that the lowest programmable speed for exceed approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer
• Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199) the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h - even before the car in front starts moving again
though the cruise control is capable of follow- then the cruise control is set in standby mode
ing another vehicle down to a standstill, a (p. 204) with automatic braking. The driver
lower speed cannot be selected. must then reactivate it in one of the following
ways:
07 Learn more about how you manage the
speed (p. 199) and different time intervals to • Press the steering wheel button .
the vehicle in front (p. 204). or
• Depress the accelerator pedal.
> The cruise control will then resume fol-
lowing the vehicle in front.

07 Driver support
NOTE WARNING fore intervene and brake the car himself in

order to maintain its position.
Queue Assist can keep the car stationary When the adaptive cruise control is follow-
for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the ing a vehicle ahead at speeds in excess of
brakes release. 30 km/h and the target is changed from a IMPORTANT
vehicle ahead to a stationary vehicle, the Queue Assist can keep the car stationary
See more information under the header
cruise control will ignore the stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the
below, "Cessation of automatic braking
vehicle and instead select the stored brakes release.
when stationary".
speed.
The driver's attention is drawn to this over
Change of target
• The driver must intervene him/herself several stages, with increasing intensity:
and brake.
1. Acoustic alarm (pinging) and text mes-
sage.
Automatic standby mode with change 2. A warning lamp in the windscreen also
of target starts to flash.
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged
3. "Stabbing" braking occurs.
and set in standby mode:
For more information on symbols, mes-
• when the speed is below 5 km/h and sages and their meaning, see the section
cruise control is not sure whether the tar- Symbols and messages in the display (p.
get object is a stationary vehicle or some 212).
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then other object, e.g. a speed bump.
there may be stationary traffic in front.
• when the speed is below 5 km/h and the Queue Assist releases the foot brake and is
When the adaptive cruise control is following vehicle in front turns off so the cruise set to standby mode in these situations as
another vehicle at speeds lower than control no longer has a vehicle to follow. well:
30 km/h and changes target from a moving to
a stationary vehicle, the cruise control will Termination of automatic braking at a • the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
standstill pedal
slow down for the stationary vehicle.
In the following situations, Queue Assist • the gear selector is moved to P, N or R 07
stops automatic braking at a standstill: position
• the driver opens the door • the driver sets the cruise control in
standby mode
• the driver takes off his seatbelt.
This means that the brakes are released and
• the parking brake is applied.
the car will start to roll - the driver must there-
}}
207
07 Driver support
||
Related information Adaptive cruise control* - switch Related information
• Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199) cruise control functionality • Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)
• Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC – • Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
control functionality (p. 208) Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver deactivation, and standby mode (p. 204)
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle
ahead.
Switch from Adaptive cruise control to

Cruise control
A button press can be used to deactivate the
adaptive element (spacing system) in the
adaptive cruise control (p. 199), with the car
then only following the set speed.
• Hold down the steering wheel button
- the combined instrument panel's sym-
bol changes from to .
> By these means the cruise control is acti-
vated.
WARNING
The car no longer brakes automatically
after switching from ACC to CC - it merely
follows the set speed.
07 Switch back from Cruise control to

Adaptive cruise control
Switch off cruise control with 1-2 presses on
. The next time the system is switched on
it is the Adaptive cruise control that is acti-
vated.

07 Driver support
Radar sensor Radar sensor - limitations

The function of the radar sensor is to detect The radar sensor (p. 209) has certain limita-
cars or larger vehicles in the same direction, tions, due to its limited field of vision,
in the same lane. amongst other things.
The radar sensor is used by the following The capacity of the radar sensor to detect
functions: vehicles in front is reduced significantly:
• Adaptive cruise control* • if the radar sensor becomes blocked and
• Collision Warning with Auto Brake and cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy
Pedestrian Detection* rain or slush, or if other objects have col-
lected in front of the radar sensor.
• Distance Warning*
Modification of the radar sensor could result NOTE
in it being illegal to use.
Keep the surface in front of the radar sen-
sor clean.
IMPORTANT
In the event of visible damage to the car's • if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi-
grille, or if you suspect that the radar sen- cantly different from your own speed.
sor may be damaged:
• Contact a workshop - an authorised Field of vision
Volvo workshop is recommended. The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. ACC field of vision.
The function may completely or partially In some situations another vehicle is not
detected, or the detection is made later than Sometimes the radar sensor is late at
disappear - or malfunction - if the grille,
expected. detecting vehicles at close distances, e.g.
the radar sensor or its bracket is damaged
or has loosened. a vehicle that drives in between the car
and vehicles in front.
07
Related information Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the
• Radar sensor - limitations (p. 209)
lane can remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
• Collision warning system* (p. 223) wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
• Distance Warning* (p. 214) from view.

07 Driver support
||
WARNING WARNING
The driver must always be observant with Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
regard to the traffic conditions and inter- avoidance system. The driver must inter-
vene when the adaptive cruise control is vene if the system does not detect a vehi-
not maintaining a suitable speed or suita- cle in front.
ble distance.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle for humans or animals, and not for small
all traffic, weather and road conditions. vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy-
cles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary
Read all the sections about the adaptive
vehicles and objects.
cruise control in the owner's manual in
order to learn about its limitations, of Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
which the driver should be aware before it example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
is used. junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot
of water or slush on the road, in heavy
The driver always bears responsibility for
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding
maintaining the correct distance and
roads or on slip roads.
speed, even when the adaptive cruise con-
trol is being used.
Related information
WARNING • Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)
• Collision warning system* (p. 223)
Accessories or other objects such as auxil-
iary lamps must not be fitted in front of the • Distance Warning* (p. 214)
grille.
07

07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing means that the radar signals from the radar The following table presents examples of
and action sensor (p. 209) are blocked and that vehicles possible causes for a message being shown
The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC – in front of the car cannot be detected. along with the appropriate action:
Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver In turn this means that - apart from Adaptive
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle Cruise Control - Distance Warning (p. 214)
ahead. and Collision Warning (p. 223) with
Auto Brake are not operating either.
If the combined instrument panel shows the
message Radar blocked See manual this
Cause Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road
radar signals. surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer
blocked.
Related information
07

07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols maintain a safe distance from the vehicle
and messages ahead.
The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC –
Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver

The symbol is WHITE Adaptive cruise control is set to Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode
(p. 204).
The symbol is GREEN The car maintains the stored speed.
Standard cruise control is selected manually.
DSTC Normal to enable The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until DSTC has been set to Normal mode - Stability
Cruise and traction control system (DSTC) (p. 185).
Cruise control Cancel- The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.
led
Cruise control Unavaila- The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.

ble This could be due to:
• brake temperature is high
• the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
For more information about fault tracing, see the section Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and
07 action (p. 211)

07 Driver support

Radar blocked See The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
manual
• The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy
rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
The driver can then choose to switch to normal cruise control Cruise control* (p. 194) (CC) - a text
message provides information on appropriate alternatives.
Read more about radar sensor limitations (p. 209).
Cruise control Service The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.

required
• Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Press Brake To hold + The car is at a standstill and the adaptive cruise control will release the foot brake, which is why the
acoustic alarm + warning car may start rolling soon.
light in windscreen + "pull-
• The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver
ing" brakes depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.
(Only with Queue Assis-
tant)
Below 30 km/h Only fol- Shown with attempts to activate the adaptive cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h without a vehi-
lowing cle in front within the activation distance (approx. 30 metres).
(Only with Queue Assis-
tant)
07
Related information

07 Driver support
Distance Warning* NOTE tion is handled by the car's menu system MY

Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function CAR under Settings Car settings
Distance warning is deactivated during the
that informs the driver about the time interval time the adaptive cruise control is active. Distance Alert. For a description of the menu
to vehicles in front. system, see MY CAR (p. 104).
Distance Warning is active at speeds above WARNING Set time interval

30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in
front of the car, in the same direction. No dis- Distance warning only reacts if the dis-
tance information is provided for oncoming, tance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than
the preset value - the speed of the driver's
slow or stationary vehicles. vehicle is not affected.
Operation
Controls and symbol for time interval.

Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Time interval - On.

Orange-coloured warning lamp16. Different time intervals to the
An orange-coloured warning lamp in the vehicle in front can be
windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if selected and shown in the
Press the button in the centre console to combined instrument panel
07 the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter
switch the function on or off. The function is as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
than the set time interval.
switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the more lines the longer the
button. time interval. One line corre-
Some combinations of the selected equip- sponds to approximately 1 second to the
ment leave no vacant space for a button in vehicle in front, 5 lines
the centre console - in which case the func- approximately 3 seconds.
16 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

07 Driver support
The same symbol is also shown when adap- Distance Alert* - limitations Related information
tive cruise control (p. 199) is activated. Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function • Distance Warning* (p. 214)
that informs the driver about the distance to • Distance Alert* - symbols and messages
NOTE vehicles in front. The function, which uses the (p. 216)
The higher the speed the longer the calcu- same radar sensor as the adaptive cruise con-
lated distance in metres for a given time trol (p. 199) and collision warning with auto
interval. brake (p. 223), has some limitations.
The set time interval is also used by the
function adaptive cruise control (p. 200). NOTE
Only use the time intervals permitted by Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia-
local traffic regulations. tions in light intensity, as well as wearing
sunglasses, could mean that the warning
light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
Related information
Poor weather or winding roads could
• Distance Alert* - limitations (p. 215) affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect
• Distance Alert* - symbols and messages vehicles in front.
(p. 216) The size of other vehicles could also affect
detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
could mean that the warning lamp illumi-
nates at a shorter distance than the setting
or that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance
than that set due to limitations in sensor
range.
For further information on radar sensor limita- 07

tions, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 209)
and Collision warning system* - operation (p.
228).

07 Driver support
Distance Alert* - symbols and interval to vehicles in front. The function has the function is reduced due to its limitations
messages certain symbols and messages that can be (p. 215).
Distance Warning (p. 214) (Distance Alert) is a displayed in the combined instrument panel if
function that informs the driver about the time

Radar blocked See Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.
manual Radar sensor (p. 209) is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy
rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
For information, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 209).
Collision warn. Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake (p. 229) fully or partially disengaged.
Service required Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
07

07 Driver support
City Safety™ IMPORTANT City Safety™ - function

City Safety™ is a function for helping the City Safety™ detects the traffic in front of the
Maintenance and replacement of City
driver to avoid a collision when driving in Safety™ components must only be per- car with a laser sensor (p. 220) fitted in the
queues, amongst other things, when changes formed by a workshop - an authorised top edge of the windscreen. If there is an
in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in Volvo workshop is recommended. imminent risk of collision, City Safety™ will
attention, could lead to an incident. automatically brake the car, which may be
experienced as sudden braking.
The City Safety™ function is active at speeds WARNING
under 50 km/h and it helps the driver by auto-
City Safety™ does not engage in all driv-
matically braking the car in the event of immi- ing situations or traffic, weather or road
nent risk of collision with vehicles in front, conditions.
should the driver not react in time by braking
City Safety™ does not react to vehicles
and/or steering away.
driving in a different direction from the car,
City Safety™ is activated in situations where to small vehicles and motorcycles or to
the driver should have started braking earlier, people and animals.
which is why it cannot help the driver in every City Safety™ can prevent collision at a
situation. speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at
a higher speed difference, it is only possi-
City Safety™ is designed to be activated as ble to reduce collision speed. In order to
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary obtain full brake function, the driver must
intervention. depress the brake pedal.
City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse Never wait for City Safety™ to engage.
for the driver to change his/her driving style. If The driver always bears responsibility for
the driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do maintaining the proper distance and
the braking, there might be a risk of a colli- speed.
sion sooner or later.
The driver or passengers normally only notice Related information 07
City Safety™ if a situation arises where the • City Safety™ - limitations (p. 219)
car is extremely close to being in a collision. • City Safety™ - function (p. 217)
If the car is also equipped with Collision • City Safety™ - operation (p. 218)
Warning with Auto Brake (p. 223)* these two • City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 220)
systems complement each other. • City Safety™ - symbols and messages (p.
222)

07 Driver support
||
When the function is activated and brakes, City Safety™ - operation
the combined instrument panel shows a mes- City Safety™ is a function for helping the
sage (p. 222) to the effect that the function driver to avoid a collision when driving in
is/has been active. queues, amongst other things, when changes
in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in
NOTE attention, could lead to an incident.
When City Safety™ brakes, the brake
lights come on. On and Off
Related information NOTE

• City Safety™ (p. 217) The City Safety™ function is always
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window17. • City Safety™ - operation (p. 218) switched on after the engine has been
• City Safety™ - limitations (p. 219) started via key position I and II (p. 71).
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation
to the vehicle in front then City Safety™ can
completely prevent a collision. In certain situations, it may advisable to disa-
ble City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches
City Safety™ activates a short, sharp braking could sweep over the bonnet and/or wind-
and stops the car in normal circumstances, screen.
just behind the vehicle in front. For most dri-
vers this is well outside normal driving style After starting the engine City Safety™ can be
and may be experienced as being uncomfort- deactivated as follows:
able. • Using MY CAR on the centre console
If the difference in speed between the vehi- display screen with its menu system,
cles is greater than 15 km/h then City search and locate Settings Car
Safety™ may not prevent the collision on its settings Driver support systems
07 own. To obtain full brake force, the driver City Safety. Select the Off option. See
must depress the brake pedal. This could MY CAR (p. 104) for more information.
then make it possible to prevent a collision,
even at speed differences above 15 km/h.
218
07 Driver support
However, the function (p. 217) will be City Safety™ - limitations City Safety™ is not activated at low speeds -
enabled the next time the engine is The sensor in City Safety™ is designed to under 4 km/h, which is why the system does
started, regardless of whether the system detect cars and other large vehicles in front of not intervene in situations where a vehicle in
was enabled or disabled when the engine the car irrespective of whether it is day or front is being approached very slowly, e.g.
was switched off. night. However, the function has a number of when parking.
limitations. Driver commands are always prioritised,
WARNING which is why City Safety™ does not intervene
The sensor has poorer functionality - or none
The laser sensor (p. 220) emits laser light in situations where the driver is steering or
at all - in e.g. heavy snowfall or rain, dense
even when City Safety™ is disabled man- accelerating in a clear manner, even if a colli-
fog, dust storms or white-out situations. Mist-
ually. sion is unavoidable.
ing, dirt, ice or snow on the windscreen may
also disrupt the function. When City Safety™ has prevented a collision
To enable City Safety™ again: with a stationary object the car remains sta-
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for
• Follow the same procedure as for disa- tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the
projecting load, or accessories such as auxili-
bling, but select the On option. car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov-
ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than
ing, then speed is reduced to the same speed
the bonnet limit the function.
Related information as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
• City Safety™ (p. 217) The laser light from the sensor in City
On a car with manual gearbox the engine
• City Safety™ - limitations (p. 219) Safety™ measures how the light is reflected.
stops when City Safety™ has stopped the
The sensor cannot detect objects with low
• City Safety™ - symbols and messages (p.
reflection capacity. The rear sections of the
car, unless the driver manages to depress the
222) clutch pedal beforehand.
vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently
thanks to the number plate and rear light
reflectors. NOTE
On slippery road surfaces the braking dis- • Keep the windscreen surface in front
tance is extended, which may reduce the of the laser sensor (p. 220) free from
capacity of City Safety™ to avoid a collision. ice, snow and dirt. For an illustration of 07
sensor location, see City Safety™ -
In such situations the ABS and DSTC sys-
function (p. 217).
tems will provide best possible braking force
with maintained stability. • Do not affix or mount anything on the
windscreen in front of the laser sensor
When your own car is reversing, City Safety™
is temporarily deactivated. • Remove ice and snow from the bonnet
- snow and ice must not exceed a
height of 5 cm.
219
07 Driver support
||
Fault tracing and action IMPORTANT City Safety™ - laser sensor
If the message (p. 222) Windscreen The City Safety™ function includes a sensor
If there are cracks, scratches or stone
sensors blocked See manual is shown in which transmits laser light. Contact a qualified
chips in the windscreen in front of either of
the combined instrument panel it indicates the laser sensor's "windows" and they workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser
that the laser sensor is blocked and cannot cover a surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo
detect vehicles in front of the car. This means (or larger), then a workshop must be con- workshop is recommended. It is absolutely
that City Safety™ is not operational. tacted for replacement of the windscreen - essential to follow the prescribed instructions
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- when handling the laser sensor.
The Windscreen sensors blocked See mended. For an illustration of sensor loca-
manual message is not shown for all situation, see City Safety™ - function (p. 217).
tions in which the laser sensor is blocked. The following two labels relate to the laser
Failure to take action may result in sensor:
The driver must therefore be diligent about reduced performance for City Safety™.
keeping the windscreen and area in front of
the laser sensor clean. To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation for City Safety™, the
The following table presents possible causes following also applies:
for the message being shown, along with
• Volvo recommends that you do not
suggestions for appropriate action. repair cracks, scratches or stone chips
in the area in front of the laser sensor -
Cause Action instead, the whole windscreen should
be replaced.
The windscreen sur- Clean the wind-
face in front of the screen surface in • Before replacing a windscreen, con-
tact an authorised Volvo workshop to
laser sensor is dirty or front of the sensor
verify that the correct windscreen is
covered with ice or from dirt, ice and
ordered and fitted.
snow. snow.
• The same type or Volvo-approved The upper label in the figure describes the
The laser sensor field Remove the windscreen wipers must be fitted dur- laser beam's classification:
07 ing replacement.
of vision is blocked. blocking object. • Laser radiation - Do not look into the
laser beam with optical instruments -
Related information Class 1M laser product.
• City Safety™ (p. 217) The lower label in the figure describes the
• City Safety™ - function (p. 217) laser beam's physical data:
• City Safety™ - operation (p. 218) • IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies
with FDA (U.S. Food Administration)
220
07 Driver support
standards for laser product design with WARNING • The laser sensor must be fitted onto
the exception of deviations in accordance the windscreen before the sensor's
with "Laser Notice No. 50" from If any of these instructions are not followed connector is plugged in.
26 July 2001. then there is a risk of eye injury!
• The laser sensor transmits a laser light
• Never look into the laser sensor (which when the remote control key is in key
Radiation data for the laser sensor emits spreading invisible laser radia- position II (p. 71) even if the engine is
The following table specifies the laser sen- tion) at a distance of 100 mm or closer switched off.
sor's physical data. with magnifying optics such as a mag-
nifying glass, microscope, lens or simi-
Maximum pulse energy 2.64 µJ lar optical instruments. Related information
• City Safety™ (p. 217)
Maximum average output 45 mW
• Testing, repair, removal, adjustment
and/or replacement of the laser sen-
Pulse duration 33 ns sor's spare parts must only be carried
out by a qualified workshop - we rec-
Divergence (horizontal x verti- 28° × 12° ommend an authorised Volvo work-
cal) shop.
• To avoid exposure to harmful radia-
tion, do not carry out any readjust-
ments or maintenance other than
those specified here.
• The repairer must follow specially
drawn up workshop information for the
laser sensor.
• Do not remove the laser sensor (this
includes removing the lenses). A
removed laser sensor fulfils laser
class 3B as per standard IEC 60825-1. 07
Laser class 3B is not eye-safe and
therefore entails a risk of injury.
• The laser sensor's connector must be
unplugged before removal from the
windscreen.
221
07 Driver support
City Safety™ - symbols and symbols (p. 222) may illuminate in the com- acknowledged by briefly pressing the OK but-
messages bined instrument panel and a text message ton on the direction indicator stalk.
In conjunction with automatic braking by the may be shown. A text message can be
City Safety (p. 217)™ system, one or more
SymbolA Message Meaning/Action

Auto braking by City Safety City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.
Windscreen sensors blocked The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
See manual
• Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about the laser sensor's limitations.
City Safety Service required City Safety™ is not operational.

Related information
• City Safety™ (p. 217)
• City Safety™ - function (p. 217)
07
222
07 Driver support
Collision warning system* two variants, depending on how the car is • Collision warning system* - general limita-
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and equipped: tions (p. 229)
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to Level 1 • Collision warning system* - camera sen-
assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- sor limitations (p. 231)
ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in The driver is merely warned18of occurring
obstacles by means of visual and acoustic
• Collision warning system* - symbols and
front that are stationary or moving in the same message (p. 233)
direction. signals - no automatic braking intervenes, the
driver must himself brake.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes-
Level 2
trian Detection is activated in situations where
the driver should have started braking earlier, The driver is warned of occurring obstacles
which is why it cannot help the driver in every by means of visual and acoustic signals - the
situation. car is braked automatically if the driver him-
self does not act within a reasonable time.
trian Detection is designed to be activated as
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary IMPORTANT
intervention. Maintenance of components included in
Collision Warning with Auto Brake &
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes- Pedestrian Detection must only be carried
trian Detection may prevent a collision or out in a workshop - an authorised Volvo
reduce the collision speed. workshop is recommended.
trian Detection must not be used as an Related information
excuse for the driver to change his/her driving • Collision warning system* - function (p.
style. If the driver solely relies on Collision 224)
Warning with Auto Brake to do the braking, • Collision warning system* - detection of
there might be a risk of a collision sooner or pedestrians (p. 227) 07
later.
• Collision warning system* - cyclist detec-
Two system levels tion (p. 225)
The Collision Warning with Auto Brake & • Collision warning system* - operation (p.
Pedestrian Detection function is available in 228)
18 No warning for cyclists with "Level 1".

07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - function 3. Auto Brake20 3 - Auto Brake

"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and The collision warning system and City The automatic brake function is activated
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to Safety™ (p. 217) complement each other. last.
assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- If in this situation the driver has not yet
ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in 1 - Collision warning
started to take evasive action and the risk of
front that are stationary or moving in the same The driver is first warned of a potentially collision is imminent then the automatic brak-
direction. imminent collision. ing function is deployed - this takes place
The collision warning system detects pedes- irrespective of whether or not the driver
trians, stationary vehicles as well as vehicles brakes. Braking then takes place with full
driving in the same direction in front of the brake force in order to reduce collision speed,
car. or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to
avoid a collision. For cyclists, the warning and
If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian
full brake intervention may come very late or
or a vehicle then the driver's attention is
simultaneously.
attracted with a flashing red warning signal
and an acoustic signal.
2 - Brake support
If the risk of collision has increased further
after the collision warning then the brake sup-
Function overview19. port is activated.
Audio-visual warning signal in the event This means that the brake system is prepared
of a collision risk. for rapid braking by applying the brakes
lightly, which may feel like a slight jolt.
Radar sensor20
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
Camera sensor quickly then full brake function is imple-
07
Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes mented.
three steps in the following order: Brake support also reinforces the driver's
1. Collision warning braking if the system considers that the brak-
ing is not sufficient to avoid a collision.
2. Brake support20
20 With system Level 2 only.

07 Driver support
WARNING Related information Collision warning system* - cyclist

• Collision warning system* (p. 223) detection
The collision warning system does not
engage in all driving situations or traffic, • Collision warning system* - detection of "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
weather or road conditions. The collision pedestrians (p. 227) Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
warning system does not react to vehicles • Collision warning system* - cyclist detec- assist the driver when there is a risk of collid-
or cyclists driving in another direction to tion (p. 225) ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
the car or to animals. front that are stationary or moving in the same
• Collision warning system* - operation (p.
direction.
Warning only activated in the event of a 228)
high risk for collision. This section "Func-
tion" and the section "Limitations" inform • Collision warning system* - general limita-
about limitations that the driver must be tions (p. 229)
aware of before using the Collision Warn- • Collision warning system* - camera sen-
ing system with Auto Brake. sor limitations (p. 231)
Warnings and brake interventions for • Collision warning system* - symbols and
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at message (p. 233)
a vehicle speed exceeding 80 km/h.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists do not work in
darkness and tunnels - not even when
streetlights are lit.
The auto-brake function can prevent a col-
lision or reduce collision speed. To ensure Optimum examples of what the system interprets
full brake performance, the driver should as a cyclist - with clear body and bicycle con-
always depress the brake pedal - even tours, directly from behind and in the car's cen-
when the car auto-brakes. tre line.
Never wait for a collision warning. The Optimal performance of the system requires
driver is always responsible that the cor- that the system function that detects a cyclist 07
rect distance and speed are maintained - receives as unambiguous information as pos-
even when the collision warning system sible about the body and bicycle contours -
with auto-brake is used. this implies the opportunity to identify the
bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper
and lower body combined with a normal
human pattern of movement.

07 Driver support
||
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle • The function's capacity to detect cyclists Related information
are not visible to the function's camera then at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the • Collision warning system* (p. 223)
the system cannot detect a cyclist. human eye.
• Collision warning system* - function (p.
• The function's capacity to detect cyclists 224)
is deactivated when driving in darkness
and tunnels - even when streetlights are
• Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 227)
lit.
• For optimum bicycle detection, the City
• Collision warning system* - general limita-
tions (p. 229)
Safety™ function must be activated, see
City Safety™ (p. 217). • Collision warning system* - operation (p.
228)
WARNING • Collision warning system* - camera sen-
sor limitations (p. 231)
Cyclist Detection is a means of assistance. • Collision warning system* - symbols and
message (p. 233)
The function cannot detect:
The function can only "see" cyclists from behind,
who are travelling in the same direction. • all cyclists in all situations and does
not see partially obscured cyclists, for
• For the function to be able to detect a
example.
cyclist, he/she must be an adult and rid-
ing a "senior bicycle". • cyclists in clothing that obscures the
contours of the body or who are
• The bicycle must be equipped with a
approaching from the side.
highly visible and approved21 rearward-
facing red reflector, fitted at least 70 cm • bicycles that have no rearward-facing
above the roadway. red reflector.
• The function can only detect cyclists • bicycles loaded with large objects.
07 directly from behind and who are travel- The driver is always responsible that the
ling in the same direction - not at an vehicle is driven properly and with a safety
angle from behind, not from the side. distance adapted to the speed.
• Cyclists travelling on the left or right-hand
edge of the car's imagined/extended side
lines may be detected late or not at all.
21 The reflector must fulfil the recommendations and conditions of the traffic authority in the market in question.

07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - detection If large parts of the body are not visible to the Related information
of pedestrians camera then the system cannot detect a • Collision warning system* (p. 223)
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and pedestrian. • Collision warning system* - function (p.
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to • In order for a pedestrian to be detected 224)
assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- he/she must appear full-length and have • Collision warning system* - operation (p.
ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in a height of at least 80 cm. 228)
front that are stationary or moving in the same • The system cannot detect a pedestrian
direction.
carrying larger items. tion (p. 225)
• The camera sensor's ability to see pedes- • Collision warning system* - general limita-
trians at dusk and dawn is limited - just tions (p. 229)
like the human eye.
• Collision warning system* - camera sen-
• The camera sensor's capacity to detect sor limitations (p. 231)
pedestrians is deactivated when driving in
darkness and tunnels - even when street- • Collision warning system* - symbols and
message (p. 233)
lights are lit.
WARNING
Pedestrian Detection is an assistance tool.
This function cannot detect all pedestrians
Optimal examples of what the system regards as
pedestrians with clear body contours.
in all situations and it cannot see e.g. parti-
ally obscured pedestrians, people in cloth-
Optimal performance of the system requires ing that hides the contours of the body or
that the system function that detects pedes- pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.
trians receives as unambiguous information • The driver is always responsible that
as possible about the contours of the body - the vehicle is driven properly and with 07
this implies the opportunity to identify the a safety distance adapted to the
head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower speed.
body combined with a normal human pattern
of movement.

07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - operation The warning lamp, see Collision warning sys- Only use warning distance Short in excep-
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and tem - function (p. 224), is tested every time tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to the engine is started by briefly illuminating the
assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- warning lamp's separate points of light if the NOTE
ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in collision warning system's light and acoustic
warnings are activated. When the adaptive cruise control is in use
front that are stationary or moving in the same the warning lamp and warning sound will
direction. be used by the cruise control even if the
Audible signal
collision warning system is switched off.
Settings for the collision warning system are The warning sound can be activated/deacti-
made from MY CAR via the centre console's vated separately: The collision warning system warns the
driver in the event of a risk of a collision,
screen and menu system. • Select On or Off in the menu system but the function cannot shorten driver
Warning signals On and Off under Settings Car settings Driver reaction time.
It is possible to select whether the collision support systems Collision Warning In order for the collision warning system to
warning system's acoustic and visual warning Warning sound. be effective, always drive with Distance
signals should be switched on or off. Alert (p. 214) set at time interval 4–5.
Set warning distance
When starting the engine, the setting that was The warning distance regulates the distance
selected when the engine was switched off is NOTE
at which the visual and acoustic warnings are
obtained automatically. deployed. Even if the warning distance has been set
to Long warnings could be perceived as
NOTE • Select Long, Normal or Short in the being late in certain situations, e.g. when
menu system MY CAR under Settings there are large differences in speed or if
The Brake Support and Auto Brake func- Car settings Driver support vehicles in front brake heavily.
tions are always activated - they cannot be
deactivated. systems Collision Warning
Warning distance
WARNING
The warning distance determines the sys-
Light and acoustic signals No automatic system can guarantee
07 tem's sensitivity. Warning distance Long pro-
To deactivate the light and acoustic signals: 100 % correct function in all situations.
vides an earlier warning. First test with Long Therefore, never test Collision Warning
• and if this setting produces too many warn- with Auto Brake by driving at people or
Locate Settings Car settings
ings, which could be perceived as irritating in vehicles - this may cause severe damage
Driver support systems Collision and injury and risk lives.
certain situations, then change to warning
Warning - there select to uncheck the
distance Normal.
box.

07 Driver support
Checking settings Related information Collision warning system* - general

The settings required can be controlled on • Collision warning system* (p. 223) limitations
the centre console's screen. Search with the • Collision warning system* - function (p. "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
menu system MY CAR under Settings Car 224) Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
settings Driver support systems • Collision warning system* - detection of assist the driver when there is a risk of collid-
Collision Warning, MY CAR (p. 104). pedestrians (p. 227) ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
Maintenance • Collision warning system* - cyclist detec-
direction.
tion (p. 225)
• Collision warning system* - general limita- The function has certain limitations - for
tions (p. 229) example, it is not active until approx. 4 km/h..
• Collision warning system* - camera sen- The collision warning system's visual warning
sor limitations (p. 231) signal may be difficult to notice in the event of
• Collision warning system* - symbols and strong sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses
message (p. 233) are being worn or if the driver is not looking
straight ahead. The warning sound should
therefore always be activated.
On slippery road surfaces the braking dis-
tance is extended, which may reduce the
capacity to avoid a collision. In such situa-
Camera and radar sensor22. tions the ABS and DSTC (p. 185) systems will
For the sensors to work correctly, they must provide best possible braking force with
be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be maintained stability.
cleaned regularly with water and car sham-
poo.
07
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
will reduce their function and may prevent
measurement.

07 Driver support
||
NOTE WARNING Collision Warning with Auto Brake is tempo-
rarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged.
The visual warning signal can be temporar- Warnings and brake interventions could be
ily disengaged in the event of high passen- implemented late or not at all if the traffic Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti-
ger compartment temperature caused by situation or external influences mean that vated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is
strong sunlight for example. If this occurs the radar or camera sensor cannot detect why the system does not intervene in situa-
then the warning sound is activated even if a pedestrian, a vehicle or a cyclist in front tions where the car is approaching a vehicle
it is deactivated in the menu system. correctly. in front very slowly, e.g. when parking.
• Warnings may not appear if the dis- The sensor system has a limited range for
In situations where the driver demonstrates
tance to the vehicle in front is small or pedestrians and cyclists23 - the system
active, aware driving behaviour, a collision
if steering wheel and pedal move- can provide effective warnings and brake
interventions for them at vehicle speeds up warning may be postponed slightly in order to
ments are large, e.g. a very active driv-
to 50 km/h. For stationary or slow-moving keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.
ing style.
vehicles, warnings and brake interventions When Auto Brake has prevented a collision
are effective at vehicle speeds up to
70 km/h.
with a stationary object the car remains sta-
tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov-
vehicles could be disengaged due to dark- ing, then speed is reduced to the same speed
ness or poor visibility.
as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at On a car with manual gearbox the engine
vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h. stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car,
unless the driver manages to depress the
clutch pedal beforehand.
The collision warning system uses the same
radar sensors as the adaptive cruise control Related information
(p. 199). • Collision warning system* (p. 223)
07
If warnings are perceived as being too fre- • Collision warning system* - function (p.
quent or disturbing then the warning distance 224)
can be reduced. This then leads to the sys- • Collision warning system* - detection of
tem providing a warning at a later stage, pedestrians (p. 227)
which reduces the total number of warnings;
see Collision warning system - operation (p. • Collision warning system* - cyclist detec-
tion (p. 225)
228).
23 For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.

07 Driver support
• Collision warning system* - operation (p. Collision warning system* - camera fog for example. Under such conditions the
228) sensor limitations functions of camera-dependent systems
• Collision warning system* - camera sen- "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and could be significantly reduced or temporarily
sor limitations (p. 231) Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to disengaged.
• Collision warning system* - symbols and assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car-
message (p. 233) ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in riageway, snow or ice on the road surface,
front that are stationary or moving in the same dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings
direction. could also significantly reduce camera sensor
The function uses the car's camera sensor, function when it is used to scan the carriage-
which has certain limitations. way and detect pedestrians and other vehi-
cles.
The car’s camera sensor is also used - as
The field of vision of the camera sensor is lim-
well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake
ited, which is why pedestrians, cyclists and
- by the functions:
vehicles cannot be detected in some situa-
• Active high beam (p. 83) tions, or they are detected later than anticipa-
• Road sign information (p. 188) ted.
• Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 235) During very high temperatures the camera is
• Lane Keeping Aid (p. 239). temporarily switched off for
approx. 15 minutes after the engine is started
in order to protect camera functionality.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the Fault tracing and action
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist If the display shows the message
and dirt. Windscreen Sensors blocked then this
Do not stick or attach anything to the means that the camera sensor is blocked and
windscreen in front of the camera sensor cannot detect pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles 07
as this may reduce effectiveness or cause or road markings in front of the car.
one or more of the systems dependent on
the camera to stop working. At the same time, this means that - besides
Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the Auto-
matic main/dipped beam dimming, Road Sign
The camera sensors have limitations similar Information, Driver Alert Control and Lane
to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in
darkness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick

07 Driver support
||
Keeping Aid functions will not have full func- Cause Action
tionality either.
The following table presents possible causes The windscreen Wait. It may take
for a message being shown along with the surface in front of several minutes for
appropriate action. the camera has the camera to
been cleaned but measure the visibil-
the message ity.
Cause Action remains.
The windscreen Clean the wind- Dirt has appeared Visit a workshop to
surface in front of screen surface in between the inside have the wind-
the camera is dirty front of the camera of the windscreen screen inside the
or covered with ice from dirt, ice and and the camera. camera cover
or snow. snow. cleaned - an author-
Thick fog, heavy No action. At times ised Volvo work-
rain or snow means the camera does shop is recom-
that the camera not work during mended.
does not work suffi- heavy rain or snow-
ciently well. fall. Related information
224)
tion (p. 225)
07
228)
tions (p. 229)
• Collision warning system* - symbols and
message (p. 233)

07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - symbols assist the driver when there is a risk of collid-
and message ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and front that are stationary or moving in the same
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to direction.

Collis'n warning OFF Collision warning system switched off.
Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Collision warn. The collision warning system cannot be activated.

Unavailable Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Auto braking was acti- Auto Brake has been active.

vated The message clears after one press of the OK button.
Windscreen sensors Camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

blocked See manual Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
• Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Radar blocked See Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
manual Radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if 07
slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Collision warn. Serv- Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
ice required
A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
}}

07 Driver support
||
Related information
224)
tion (p. 225)
228)
tions (p. 229)
• Collision warning system* - camera sen-
sor limitations (p. 231)
07

07 Driver support
Driver Alert System* Driver aid status Driver Alert Control (DAC)*
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist DAC is intended to attract the driver's atten-
drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or tion when he/she starts to drive less consis-
who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are tently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or
driving on. starts to fall asleep.
The Driver Alert System consists of different The objective for DAC is to detect slowly
functions which can either be switched on at deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily
the same time or individually: intended for major roads.
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p.
236).
• Lane keeping assistant - operation (p.
241).
A switched-on function is set in standby The current status for all driver aids can be
mode and is not activated automatically until checked in MY CAR (p. 106).
speed exceeds 65 km/h.
Related information
The function is deactivated again when speed • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 235)
decreases to below 60 km/h.
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
The functions use a camera which is depend- messages (p. 237)
ent on the lane having side markings painted • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p.
on each side. 236) A camera detects the side markings painted
on the carriageway and compares the section
WARNING of the road with the driver's steering wheel
Driver Alert System does not work in all movements. The driver is alerted if the vehicle
situations but is designed merely as a sup- does not follow the carriageway evenly. 07
plementary aid.
In some cases driving ability is not affected
The driver always bears ultimate responsi- despite driver fatigue. In which case there
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven may not be any warning issued for the driver.
safely. For this reason it is always important to stop
and take a break in the event of any signs of

07 Driver support
||
driver fatigue, irrespective of whether or not Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation If the vehicle is being driven errati-
DAC issues a warning. Settings for Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. cally, the driver is notified by an
235) are made from the centre console screen acoustic signal plus the text mes-
NOTE and its menu system (p. 104). sage (p. 237) Driver Alert Time for
a break - the linked symbol is illuminated in
The function must not be used to extend a
the combined instrument panel at the same
period of driving. Always plan breaks at
regular intervals, and make sure you are time. The warning is repeated after a time if
well rested. driving ability does not improve.
The warning symbol can go off:
Limitation • Press the left stalk switch OK button.
In some cases the system may issue a warn-
ing despite driving ability not deteriorating, for WARNING
example:
An alarm should be taken very seriously,
• in strong side winds as a sleepy driver is often not aware of
• on rutted road surfaces. his/her own condition.
DAC is not intended for city traffic. In the event of an alarm or a feeling of
To set Driver Alert in standby mode: tiredness; stop the car in a safe manner as
soon as possible and rest.
NOTE • In MY CAR, search for Car settings
Studies have shown that it is equally as
The camera sensor has certain limitations, Driver support systems Driver Alert dangerous to drive while tired as it is under
see Collision warning system* - camera and check the box - No check in the box the influence of alcohol.
sensor limitations (p. 231). means: Standby function disengaged.
Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds Related information
Related information 65 km/h and remains active as long as the • Driver Alert System* (p. 235)
• Driver Alert System* (p. 235) speed is over 60 km/h.
07 • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 235)
236) • Lane Keeping Aid* (p. 239)
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages (p. 237)
• Lane Keeping Aid* (p. 239)

07 Driver support
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols instrument panel or in the centre console's
and messages screen in different situations.
Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 235) can show
symbols and text messages in the combined
Combined instrument panel

Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
break
Windscreen sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limita-
tions (p. 231).
Driver Alert system The system is disengaged.

Service required
Display
Sym- Message Specification
07
bol
Driver Alert OFF The function is disengaged.
Driver Alert Available The function is activated.
}}

07 Driver support
||
Sym- Message Specification
bol
Driver Alert Standby <65 The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
km/h
Driver Alert Unavailable The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor lim-
itations (p. 231).
Related information
• Driver Alert System* (p. 235)
236)
07

07 Driver support
Lane Keeping Aid* WARNING Lane keeping assistant - function

The lane keeping assistant is one of the func-
LKA is merely a driver's aid and does not Off & On
tions in the Driver Alert System - sometimes engage in all driving situations or traffic,
also referred to as LKA (Lane Keeping Aid). The Lane Keeping Aid is active within the
weather or road conditions.
The lane keeping assistant is intended for use speed interval 65-200 km/h on roads with
The driver always bears ultimate responsi- clearly visible side lines. The function is tem-
on motorways and similar major roads to
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven porarily deactivated on narrow roads with
reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally safely and that applicable laws and road
leaving its own lane in certain situations. less than 2.6 metres between the lane side
traffic regulations are followed.
lines.
Related information
• Driver Alert System* (p. 235)
• Lane keeping assistant - limitations (p.
241)
• Lane keeping assistant - function (p. 239)
241)
• Lane keeping assistant - symbols and
messages (p. 243)
A camera reads the painted side lines of the

Press the button in the centre console to acti-
road/lane. If the car is about to cross a side
vate or deactivate the function. The function
line, the Lane Keeping Aid actively steers the
is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the
car back into the lane with slight steering tor-
button.
que in the steering wheel.
Some combinations of the selected equip- 07
If the car reaches or passes a side line, the
ment leave no vacant space for an On/Off
Lane Keeping Aid warns the driver with puls-
button in the centre console - in which case
ing vibrations in the steering wheel.
the function is handled instead by the car's
menu system MY CAR. Here, proceed as fol-
lows:

07 Driver support
||
• Select On or Off under Settings Car If the vehicle approaches the left or right side Dynamic cornering
settings Lane Keeping Aid. line of the lane and the direction indicator is
not activated, the car is steered back into the
For a description of the menu system, see lane.
MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).
In addition, the following selections can be Warning with vibration in the steering
made in MY CAR: wheel
• Warning with vibration in the steering
wheel: Vibration only - On or Off.
• Active steering: Steering assist only -
On or Off.
• Both Warning with vibration in the steer-
ing wheel and Active steering: Full LKA does not engage in sharp inside curves.
function - On or Off.
In certain cases, the Lane Keeping Aid allows
Active steering the car to cross side lines without engaging
The Lane Keeping Aid strives to keep the car active steering or warning with pulsing vibra-
within the side lines for the lane. tions in the steering wheel. Using an adjacent
LKA steers and warns with pulsing steering
lane for dynamic cornering when there is a
wheel vibrations24. clear line of vision is an example of one such
case.
If the vehicle passes a side line, the Lane
Keeping Aid warns the driver with pulsing Related information
vibrations in the steering wheel. This occurs • Lane Keeping Aid* (p. 239)
regardless of whether the car is actively • Lane keeping assistant - limitations (p.
steered back by applying a slight steering tor- 241)
07 que.
241)
messages (p. 243)
LKA intervenes and steers away.
24 The figure shows 3 pulsing vibrations when the side line is passed.

07 Driver support
Lane keeping assistant - operation Lane keeping assistant - limitations
The lane keeping assistant is supplemented • The Lane Keeping Aid camera sensor is
with self-explanatory graphics in different sit- restricted in a similar way to the human
uations. Here are some examples: eye. For more information, see Collision
warning system* - camera sensor limita-
NOTE tions (p. 231) and (p. 229).
LKA is temporarily deactivated for as long NOTE

as the direction indicator is switched on.
In certain demanding situations LKA may
find it difficult to assist the driver correctly
- in which case it is recommended that
LKA intervenes on the right-hand side (marked in LKA is switched off.
red in the figure). Examples of such a situation could be:
The Lane Keeping Aid intervenes and steers • roadworks
away from the side line - this is indicated
with: • winter road conditions
• poor road surface
• RED line for the side in question.
• very sporty driving style
Related information • poor weather with reduced visibility.
• Driver Alert System* (p. 235) Hands on the steering wheel
LKA "sees" and follows the side lines (marked in • Lane keeping assistant - limitations (p. In order for Lane Keeping Aid to operate, the
red in the figure). 241) driver must have his/her hands on the steer-
If the Lane Keeping Aid is active and • Lane keeping assistant - function (p. 239) ing wheel. LKA continual monitors this. If
detects/"sees" the side lines, the LKA symbol hands are not detected on the steering wheel, 07
indicates this with WHITE lines.
messages (p. 243) a text message encouraging the driver to
• GREY side line – the Lane Keeping Aid actively steer the car is shown.
does not see a line on that side of the car. If the driver does not follow the request to
begin steering, the Lane Keeping Aid goes
into standby mode and will remain in this
mode until the driver begins to steer the car
again.

07 Driver support
||
Related information
241)
messages (p. 243)
07

07 Driver support
Lane keeping assistant - symbols and the combined instrument panel in combina-
messages tion with an explanatory message - follow the
recommendation given if appropriate.
In situations where there is no LKA function
Message examples:
or it is interrupted, a symbol may be shown in

Lane Keeping Aid Unavaila- The Lane Keeping Aid is set to standby mode because the speed is lower than 65 km/h.
ble at this speed
Lane Keeping Aid Unavaila- The lane does not have clear side lines or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read
ble for current markings about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limita-
tions (p. 231) and (p. 229).
Lane Keeping Aid Available The function scans the lane's side lines.
Windscreen sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor
limitations (p. 231) and (p. 229).
Lane Keeping Aid Service The system is disengaged.

required
07
Lane Keeping Aid Interrup- LKA has been set to standby mode. The lines of the LKA symbol indicate when the function is
ted active again.
A The table's symbols are schematic. The symbols shown in the combined instrument panel may have a slightly different appearance.
}}

07 Driver support
||
Related information
• Lane keeping assistant - limitations (p.
241)
241)
07

07 Driver support
Park assist syst* Related information Park assist syst* - function

Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- • Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors The parking assistance system is automati-
ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on (p. 248) cally activated when the engine is started -
the centre console's display screen indicate • Park assist syst* - function (p. 245) the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If
the distance to the detected obstacle. • Park assist syst* - forward (p. 247) parking assistance is switched off with the
button, the lamp goes out.
Parking assistance sound level can be • Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 248)
adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal • Park assist syst* - backward (p. 247)
using the centre console's VOL knob or in the
car's menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p.
• Park assist camera (p. 249)
104). • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253)
Parking assistance is available in two vari-

ants:
• Rear only
• Both front and rear.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the
towbar is included when the function
measures the parking space.
WARNING
• Parking assistance does not relinquish
07
the driver's own responsibility during
parking.
• The sensors have blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
• Be aware of e.g. people and animals
near the car.

07 Driver support
||
Marked sectors show which of the four sen- IMPORTANT
sor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the
car symbol a selected sector box is, the Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or
shorter the distance between the car and a low barriers may be in the "signal shadow"
and are then temporarily not detected by
detected obstacle. the sensors - the pulsating tone may then
The frequency of the signal increases the unexpectedly stop instead of changing
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of over to the expected constant tone.
or behind the car. Other sound from the audio The sensors cannot detect high objects,
system is muted automatically. such as projecting loading docks.
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is • In such situations, pay extra attention
constant and the active sensor's field nearest and manoeuvre/reposition the car par-
the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is ticularly slowly or stop the current
On/Off for the sensors for parking assistance and
within the distance for the constant tone both parking manoeuvre - there may be a
CTA25.
behind and in front of the car, then the tone high risk of damage to vehicles or
The centre console's display screen shows other objects since the sensors are
sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.
an overview of the relationship between the temporarily unable to function opti-
car and detected obstacle. mally.
Related information
• Park assist syst* (p. 245)
• Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 248)
• Park assist syst* - forward (p. 247)
• Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 248)
07 • Park assist syst* - backward (p. 247)
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253)
Display screen view - showing an obstacle left
front and right rear.
25 Side warning, CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) (p. 260)

07 Driver support
Park assist syst* - backward NOTE Park assist syst* - forward

Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike
ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genu- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
the centre console's display screen indicate ine trailer wiring - parking assistance may the centre console's display screen indicate
the distance to the detected obstacle. need to be switched off manually in order the distance to the detected obstacle.
that the sensors do not react to them.
The parking assistance system is automati-
cally activated when the engine is started -
Related information the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If
• Park assist syst* (p. 245) parking assistance is switched off with the
• Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors button, the lamp goes out.
(p. 248)
• Park assist syst* - function (p. 245)
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles behind comes from one of the rear
loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged. The distance covered in front of the car is
about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for
When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the tow-
obstacles in front comes from one of the front 07
bar, rear parking assistance is switched off
loudspeakers.
automatically - otherwise the sensors would
react to the trailer. Front park assist is active up to
approx. 10 km/h. The lamp in the button is
illuminated in order to indicate that the sys-
tem is activated. When the speed is below
10 km/h the system is reactivated.

07 Driver support
||
IMPORTANT Park assist syst* - fault indication Park assist syst* - cleaning the
Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- sensors
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
that these must not obscure the sensors - ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-
the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived the centre console's display screen indicate ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
as an obstacle. the distance to the detected obstacle. the centre console's display screen indicate
the distance to the detected obstacle.
If the combined instrument panel's
Related information information symbol illuminates with The sensors for parking assistance must be
• Park assist syst* (p. 245) a constant glow and the text mes- cleaned regularly to ensure that they work
• Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors sage Park assist syst Service required is properly. Clean them with water and car
(p. 248) shown, then parking assistance is disen- shampoo.
• Park assist syst* - function (p. 245) gaged.
IMPORTANT
• Park assist syst* - backward (p. 247)
Under some circumstances, the parking
• Park assist camera (p. 249) sensors can give false warning signals due
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253) to external sound sources which emit the
same ultrasound frequencies as those with
which the system works.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes
and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Related information Sensor location, front.

07 • Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors

(p. 248)
• Park assist syst* - backward (p. 247)

07 Driver support
Park assist camera Function and operation

The parking camera is an assist system and is
activated when reverse gear is engaged (can
be changed in the settings menu, see MY
CAR - menu options (p. 106)).
The camera image is shown on the centre

console's screen.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the
Sensor location, rear. towbar is included when the function
measures the parking space. CAM button location.
NOTE The camera shows what is behind the car
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors WARNING and if something appears from the sides.
will reduce their function and may prevent
measurement. • The parking camera is an aid and can The camera shows a wide area behind the
never replace the responsibilities of car and part of the bumper and any towbar.
the driver when reversing. Objects on the screen may appear to tilt
Related information
• Park assist syst* (p. 245) • The camera has blind spots where slightly - this is normal.
obstacles cannot be detected.
• Be aware of people and animals near NOTE
• Park assist syst* - forward (p. 247) the car.
Objects on the display screen may be
• Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 248) closer to the car than they appear to be on
• Park assist syst* - backward (p. 247) the screen. 07
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253) If another view is active the parking camera
system takes over automatically and the
camera image is displayed on the screen.
When reverse gear is engaged two unbroken
lines are shown graphically which illustrate

07 Driver support
||
where the car's rear wheels will roll with the Light conditions ment, which shows the driver the path the car
current steering wheel angle, this facilitates The camera image is adjusted automatically will take when it turns.
tight parking, reversing into tight spaces and according to prevailing light conditions.
for hitching a trailer. The car’s approximate Because of this, the image may vary slightly NOTE
external dimensions are illustrated by means in brightness and quality. Poor light condi-
of two dashed lines. These help lines can be tions can result in a slightly reduced image • When reversing with a trailer which is
switched off in the settings menu. not connected electrically to the car,
quality.
the lines on the display show the route
If the car is also equipped with parking assis- the car will take - not the trailer.
tance sensors* then their information is dis- NOTE
• The screen shows no lines when a
played graphically as coloured fields in order Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow trailer is connected electrically to the
to illustrate the distance to detected obsta- and ice to ensure optimum function. This car's electrical system.
cles, see Park assist syst* - function (p. 245). is particularly important in poor light.
• The parking camera is deactivated
The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after automatically when towing a trailer if a
reverse gear has been disengaged or until the Park assist lines Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.
car's speed exceeds 10 km/h forward or
35 km/h backward.
IMPORTANT
Remember that the display only shows the
area behind the car - so pay attention to
the sides and front of the car when turning
the steering while reversing.
07
Examples of how the park assist lines can be dis-
played for the driver.
Camera location next to the opening handle. The lines on the screen are projected as if
they were at ground level behind the car and
are directly related to steering wheel move-

07 Driver support
Boundary lines Cars with reversing sensors* Related information

• Park assist camera - settings (p. 252)
• Park assist camera - limitations (p. 252)
Different lines in the system. Coloured areas (x 4 - one per sensor) show dis-
tance.
Boundary line, free reversing zone
If the car is also equipped with parking assis-
"Wheel tracks" tance sensors (see Park assist syst* - function
(p. 245)) the distance indication will be more
The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to
precise and the coloured areas show which
about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also
of the 4 sensors is/are registering an obsta-
the limit of the car's most protruding parts,
cle.
such as door mirrors and corners - also dur-
ing turning.
Colour / paint Distance (metres)
The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side
lines indicate where the wheels will roll and Light yellow 0,7–1,5
can extend about 3.2 m back from the
bumper if no obstacle is in the way. Yellow 0,5–0,7 07
Orange 0,3–0,5
Red 0–0,3

07 Driver support
Park assist camera - settings • Park assist syst* (p. 245) Park assist camera - limitations
The parking camera is an assist system and is • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253) The parking camera is an assist system and is
activated when reverse gear is engaged. • MY CAR (p. 104) activated when reverse gear is engaged.
Press OK/MENU when a camera view is NOTE

shown. Make the settings as desired.
Bicycle racks or other accessories moun-
Miscellaneous ted on the back of the car may obscure
• The default setting is that the camera is the line of sight of the camera.
activated when reverse gear is engaged.
• One press on CAM activates the camera To bear in mind
even if reverse gear is not engaged. Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it
• Change between normal and zoomed only looks like a relatively small part of the
image by turning TUNE or by pressing image is obscured, it could be a relatively
CAM. large sector that is hidden from view. Obsta-
cles could thereby go undetected until they
Towbar are very close to the car.
The camera can be used to advantage when
hitching a trailer. A help line for the towbar's
• Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice
and snow.
intended "course" towards the trailer can be
shown in the display - just as for the "wheel • Clean the camera lens regularly with luke-
tracks". warm water and car shampoo - take care
not to scratch the lens.
• The towbar can be zoomed in for preci-
sion manoeuvring with one press on Related information
CAM. Pressing again gives normal view. • Park assist camera (p. 249)
The towbar's park assist line is activated in • Park assist camera - settings (p. 252)
07 the menu system MY CAR where a selection • Park assist syst* (p. 245)
can be made between displaying the "wheel
tracks" or towbar course - both options can-
not be displayed simultaneously.
Related information
• Park assist camera - limitations (p. 252)

07 Driver support
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* WARNING Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function
The Park Assist Pilot (PAP – Park Assist Pilot) The Park Assist Pilot (PAP – Park Assist Pilot)
PAP does not work in all situations but is
helps the driver to park by first checking designed merely as a supplementary aid. helps the driver to park by first checking
whether a space is sufficiently large and then whether a space is sufficiently large and then
turning the steering wheel and steering the The driver always has the final responsibil- turning the steering wheel and steering the
ity for driving the vehicle in a safe manner
car into the space. The combined instrument car into the space. The combined instrument
and for paying attention to the surround-
panel uses symbols, graphics and text when ings and other road users approaching or panel uses symbols, graphics and text when
elements are to be executed. passing during parking. elements are to be executed.
NOTE
Related information
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations (p. The PAP function measures the space and
256) turns the steering wheel - the driver's task
is to follow the combined instrument pan-
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function (p. el's instructions and select the gear
253) (reverse/forward), control the speed, brake
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation (p. and stop.
254)
• Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols and PAP can be activated if the following criteria
messages (p. 257) are met once the engine has been started:
• Park assist camera (p. 249) • The functions DSTC or ABS must not
The On/Off button is on the centre console. intervene during an ongoing PAP function
- these can be activated due to e.g. steep
and slippery surfaces, see the sections
NOTE
on Foot brake (p. 288) and Stability and
When a towbar is configured with the car's traction control system (p. 185) for more
electrical system, the protrusion of the information.
towbar is included when the function 07
measures the parking space. • Trailers must not be connected to the car.
• The speed must be below 50 km/h.

07 Driver support
||
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation The PAP function searches for a parking
The Park Assist Pilot (PAP – Park Assist Pilot) space and checks whether it is big enough.
helps the driver to park by first checking Proceed as follows:
whether a space is sufficiently large and then 1. Activate PAP by pressing
turning the steering wheel and steering the this button and do not drive
car into the space. faster than 30 km/h.
The driver is instructed about how PAP works
by means of simple, clear instructions in the
combined instrument panel - using both
graphics and text graphics and text message 2. Keep an eye on the combined instrument
(p. 257). panel and be prepared to stop the car
Principle for PAP. when the graphics and text message so
NOTE request.
The PAP function parks the car using the fol-
Remember that certain steering wheel 3. Stop the car when the graphics and text
lowing steps:
positions may obstruct the combined
so request.
1. The function searches for a parking space instrument panel's instructions when you
and measures it (A & B (p. 254)). During turn it during the parking manoeuvre.
measurement, speed must not NOTE
exceed 30 km/h. 1 - Searching and checking PAP searches the area for a parking
2. The car is steered into the space while measurements space, displays instructions and guides
reversing (C & D (p. 255)). the car in on its passenger side. But if
3. The car is straightened up in the space by required the car can also be parked on the
driver's side of the street:
driving back and forth (E & F (p. 255)).
• Activate the direction indicator for the
Related information driver's side - the car is then parked
07 • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253) on that side of the street instead.

07 Driver support
2 - Reversing in NOTE 1. Engage first gear or D position, wait until

the steering wheel has been turned, then
• Keep your hands away from the steer- drive slowly forwards.
ing wheel when the PAP function is
2. Stop the car when the graphics and text
activated.
message so request.
• Make sure that the steering wheel is
3. Engage reverse gear and drive back-
not hindered in any way and can rotate
wards slowly until the graphics and text
freely.
message tell you to stop.
• To achieve optimum results - wait until
The function is disengaged automatically
the steering wheel is fully turned
when parking is complete, and the graphics
before starting to drive backward/
forward. and text message show that parking is com-
plete. It may be necessary for the driver to
correct the positioning. Only the driver can
During the Reversing step, PAP will steer the 3 - Straightening up determine whether the car is properly parked.
car into the parking space. Proceed as fol-
lows: IMPORTANT
1. Check that the area behind the car is The warning distance is shorter when the
clear, then engage reverse gear. sensors are used by Active Park Assist
compared with when Park Assist uses the
2. Reverse slowly and carefully without sensors.
touching the steering wheel - and no
faster than approx. 7 km/h.
3. Keep an eye on the combined instrument Related information
panel and be prepared to stop the car • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253)
when the graphics and text message so • Park assist camera (p. 249)
request.
07
When the car has reversed into the parking
space, it must be straightened up and stop-
ped.

07 Driver support
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations IMPORTANT tem to drive as close to the side of the
The Park Assist Pilot (PAP – Park Assist Pilot) road as possible where you intend to
Under certain circumstances, PAP is park.
helps the driver to park by first checking unable to find parking spaces - one reason
whether a space is sufficiently large and then for this may be the fact that there is inter- • Bear in mind that the front of the car may
turning the steering wheel and steering the ference with the sensors from external swing out towards oncoming traffic while
car into the space. The combined instrument sound sources which emit the same ultra- being parked.
panel uses symbols, graphics and text when sound frequencies as those with which the • Objects situated higher than the detection
elements are to be executed. system works. areas of the sensors are not included
Examples of such sources include horns, when calculations are made for the park-
The PAP sequence is stopped: wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes ing manoeuvre. This may cause PAP to
• if the car is driven too quickly - above and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc. swing into the parking space too early,
7 km/h and hence such parking pockets should
To bear in mind be avoided.
• if the driver touches the steering wheel
• if the ABS or DSTC function is enabled - The driver should bear in mind that the Park • The driver is responsible for determining
Assist Pilot is an aid – not an infallible, fully- whether the space selected by PAP is
e.g. if a wheel loses grip on a slippery
automatic function. The driver must therefore suitable for parking.
road surface.
A text message indicates where the PAP
be prepared to intervene. There are also • Use approved tyres26 with the correct tyre
details to bear in mind while parking, e.g.: pressure - this affects the ability of PAP
sequence was stopped.
to park the car.
• PAP starts out from the current location
NOTE of the parked vehicles - if they are inap- • Heavy rain or snow may cause the sys-
propriately parked then the car's tyres tem to measure the parking space incor-
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors and wheel rims may be damaged against rectly.
will reduce their function and may prevent kerbs.
measurement. • Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare
• PAP is designed for parking on straight wheel are fitted.
streets, not sharp curves or bends. For • Do not use PAP if loaded objects are pro-
07 this reason, make sure the car is parallel truding from the car.
to the parking space when PAP measures
the space.
• It is not always possible to find parking
spaces on narrow streets since there is
not enough space for manoeuvring. In
such parking situations, it helps the sys-
26 "Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.

07 Driver support
IMPORTANT Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols BLIS (Blind Spot Information System)
and messages BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a
The PAP system's parameters may need
to be updated when changing to another The Park Assist Pilot (PAP – Park Assist Pilot) function designed for providing support for
approved wheel rim size involving changed helps the driver to park by first checking the driver when driving in dense traffic on
tyre circumference. Consult a workshop - whether a space is sufficiently large and then roads with several lanes in the same direction.
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- turning the steering wheel and steering the
mended. car into the space. The combined instrument BLIS is a driver's aid intended to provide a
panel uses symbols, graphics and text when warning about:
Maintenance elements are to be executed. • vehicles in the car's blind spot
The combined instrument panel can show dif- • quickly approaching vehicles in the left
ferent combinations of symbols and text with and right lanes closest to the car.
varying content - sometimes with a self-
explanatory piece of advice on appropriate WARNING
action. BLIS is a supplementary aid and does not
If a message says that the Park Assist Pilot is work in all situations.
disengaged, contact with an authorised Volvo BLIS is no substitute for a safe driving
workshop is recommended. style and the use of rearview and door mir-
rors.
Related information BLIS can never replace the driver's
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253) responsibility and attention - it is always
the driver's responsibility to change lanes
The PAP sensors are located in the bumpers - 6
in a safe manner.
front and 4 rear.
For the PAP function to work correctly, its
sensors must be cleaned (p. 248) regularly
with water and car shampoo - these are the 07
same sensors as are used by parking assis-
tance (p. 245).
Related information

07 Driver support
||
Overview Maintenance BLIS - operation
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a
function designed for providing support for
the driver when driving in dense traffic on
roads with several lanes in the same direction.
Activate/deactivate BLIS
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.
This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in
the door panels flashing once.
Position of the BLIS lamp27. Sensor location.

Indicator lamp The sensors for the BLIS functions are
located inside the rear wing/bumper on each
BLIS symbol side of the car.
• To ensure optimal functionality, the areas
NOTE in front of the sensors must be kept
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car clean.
where the system has detected the vehi-
cle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at Related information
the same time then both lamps illuminate. • BLIS - operation (p. 258) Button for activating/deactivating.
• CTA (Cross Traffic Alert)* (p. 260) The BLIS function can be deactivated/acti-
vated by pressing the BLIS button on the
07 centre console.
Some combinations of the selected equip-
ment leave no vacant space for a button in
the centre console - in which case the func-

07 Driver support
tion is handled by the car's menu system MY The BLIS function is active at speeds above IMPORTANT
CAR28: approx. 10 km/h.
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions'
• Select On or Off at Settings Car The system is designed to react when: components or repainting the bumpers
must only be performed by a workshop -
settings BLIS. • the vehicle is overtaken by other vehicles
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp • another vehicle is quickly approaching mended.
in the button goes out/illuminates and the the vehicle.
combined instrument panel confirms the When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a Related information
change with a text message. The door panel quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the
indicator lamps flash once upon activation.
• BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) (p.
door panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a con- 257)
To extinguish the message: stant glow. If the driver activates the direction
indicator on the same side as the warning in
• BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages
• Press the left stalk switch OK button. (p. 262)
this situation then the BLIS lamp will change
or from a constant glow to flashing with a more
• Wait approx. 5 seconds – the message intense light.
extinguishes.
WARNING
When BLIS operates
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is being
reversed.
Limitations
• Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossi-
ble to provide warnings. BLIS cannot
detect hazards if it is covered. 07
• Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in
the area of the sensors.
• BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is con-
Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone nected to the car's electrical system.
for quickly approaching vehicle.
28 For information about the menu system - My car - menu option (p. 106).
259
07 Driver support
CTA (Cross Traffic Alert)* CTA function is then deactivated. BLIS CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles.
CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is a driver aid remains activated. In favourable conditions, it may also be able
intended to warn about crossing traffic when to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists
the car is reversing. CTA is a supplement to WARNING and pedestrians.
BLIS (p. 257). CTA is a supplementary aid and does not CTA is only active during reversing and is
work in all situations. activated automatically when reverse is
Activate/deactivate CTA
CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style selected at the gearbox.
CTA is activated when the engine is started.
This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in and the use of rearview and door mirrors. • If CTA detects something approaching
the door panels flashing once. CTA can never replace the driver's respon- from the side, an acoustic warning signal
sibility and attention - it is always the driv- sounds. The signal comes from either the
In cars equipped with parking assistance (p. er's responsibility to reverse in a safe man- left or the right speaker depending on
245), the CTA function can be deactivated/ ner. which direction the approaching object is
activated with the parking assistance On/Off coming from.
button. When CTA operates • CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS
lamps.
• An additional warning is provided in the
form of an illuminated icon in the display
screen's PAS graphics (p. 245).
Limitations
CTA does not perform optimally in all situa-
tions, but has a certain limitation - for exam-
ple, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through
other parked vehicles or obstructing objects.
Here are some examples of when CTA's "field
07 of vision" may be limited from the beginning
On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors. Principle for CTA. and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
CTA supplements the BLIS function by being detected until they are very close:
CTA itself can be deactivated in the MY CAR
menu system as follows: able to see crossing traffic from the side dur-
ing reversing, such as when reversing out of a
• Go to Settings Car settings BLIS parking space.
Cross Traffic Alert and deselect. The

07 Driver support
vehicle/object that is blocking, at which the Maintenance

blind sector rapidly decreases.
Examples of further limitations:
• Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossi-
ble to provide warnings. CTA cannot
detect hazards if it is covered.
• Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in
the area of the sensors.
• CTA is deactivated when a trailer is con-
nected to the car’s electrical system.
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
Blind CTA sector. IMPORTANT Sensor location.
The sensors for the CTA functions are located
Sector where CTA can detect/"see". Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions'
components or repainting the bumpers inside the rear wing/bumper on each side of
must only be performed by a workshop - the car.
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- • To ensure optimal functionality, the areas
mended. in front of the sensors must be kept
clean.
Related information
• BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) (p.
257)
• BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages
(p. 262) 07
In an angled parking slot CTA can be completely

"blind" on one side.
However, when the driver is slowly reversing
the car, the angle is changed in relation to the
261
07 Driver support
BLIS and CTA - symbols and Related information Speed related power steering
messages • BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) (p. Speed related power steering causes the
In situations where the BLIS (p. 257) and CTA 257) steering wheel force to increase with the
(p. 260) functions fail or are interrupted, the • CTA (Cross Traffic Alert)* (p. 260) speed of the car in order to give the driver
combined instrument panel may show a sym- enhanced sensitivity.
bol, supplemented by an explanatory mes-
sage - follow any recommendation given. The steering is firmer and more immediate on
motorways. Steering is light and requires no
Message examples: extra effort when parking and at low speed.
The driver can choose between three differ-
Message Specification ent levels of steering force for road respon-
siveness or steering sensitivity. Go to the
CTA OFF CTA has been deactivated
menu system MY CAR and locate Settings
manually. BLIS is active.
Car settings Steering wheel force and
BLIS and BLIS and CTA are tempo- select Low, Medium or High.
CTA OFF rarily disabled because a This menu is not accessible when the car is
Trailer trailer is connected to the moving.
attached car’s electrical system.
Related information
BLIS and BLIS and CTA are not
• MY CAR (p. 104)
CTA Serv- working.
ice required • Visit a workshop if the
message remains - an
authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
07
A text message can be acknowledged by
briefly pressing the OK button on the direc-
tion indicator stalk.

STARTING AND DRIVING
Alcolock* Alcolock* - functions and operation Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta-
The function of the Alcolock1
is to prevent the The function of the Alcolock2
is to prevent the tus:
car from being driven by individuals under the car from being driven by individuals under the
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be influence of alcohol. Indicator Battery status
started the driver must take a breath test that lamp (4)
verifies that he/she is not under the influence Functions
of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in Green flash- Charging in progress
accordance with each market's limit value in ing
force for driving legally. Green Fully charged
WARNING Yellow Semi-charged
The Alcolock is an aid and does not Red Discharged - fit the charger
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is
always the responsibility of the driver to be in the holder or connect the
sober and to drive the car safely. power supply cable from
the glovebox.
Related information
• Alcolock* - functions and operation (p. NOTE
264) Nozzle for breath test.
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will
• Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 266) Switch. keep the built-in battery fully charged and
the Alcolock is activated automatically
• Alcolock* - storage (p. 265)
when the car is opened.
Transmission button.
• Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p.
265) Lamp for battery status.
Related information
• Alcolock* - symbols and messages (p.
Lamp for result of breath test. • Alcolock* (p. 264)
268)
Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
Operation
Battery
08
1 Also called Alcoguard.


Alcolock* - storage Alcolock* - before starting the engine 1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the
is to prevent the The function of the Alcolock4 is to prevent the Alcolock is ready for use.
car from being driven by individuals under the car from being driven by individuals under the 2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If
influence of alcohol. influence of alcohol. the Alcolock is outside the car when it is
unlocked then it must first be activated
Store the Alcolock in its holder. Release the The Alcolock is activated automatically and is with the switch (2).
handheld unit by depressing it slightly in its then ready for use when the car is opened.
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath
holder and releasing it - it then springs out
and blow with an even pressure until a
and can be removed from the holder.
"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds.
The result will be one of the alternatives in
the following table Result after breath
test.
4. If no message is shown then the trans-
mission to the car may have failed - in
which case, press the button (3) to trans-
mit the result to the car manually.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alco-
lock in its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approved
Nozzle for breath test. breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it
must be repeated.
Handheld unit storage and charging station. Switch.
• Replace the handheld unit in the holder Transmission button.
by pushing it in until it engages.
• Store the handheld unit in the holder - Lamp for battery status.
this provides it with the best protection
Lamp for result of breath test.
and keeps its batteries fully charged.
Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
Related information
• Alcolock* (p. 264)
08


||
Result after breath test Alcolock* - to bear in mind Lamp for battery status.
Indicator Specification The function of the Alcolock5 is to prevent the Lamp for result of breath test.
lamp (5) + car from being driven by individuals under the
Display text influence of alcohol. Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
In order to obtain correct function and as In order to ensure that a new breath test is
Green lamp + Start the engine - no
accurate a measurement result as possible: carried out in the event of a change of driver -
Alcoguard alcohol content meas-
Approved test ured. depress the switch (2) and the send button (3)
• Avoid eating or drinking
simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At
approx. 5 minutes before the breath test.
Yellow lamp + Engine starting possi- which point the car returns to start inhibition
Alcoguard ble - measured alcohol • Avoid excess windscreen washing - the mode and a new approved breath test is
Approved test content is above alcohol in the washer fluid may result in required before starting the engine.
an incorrect measurement result.
0.1 promille but below
the limit value in Calibration and service
Change of driver
forceA. The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated
at a workshop6 every 12 months.
Red lamp + Dis- Engine starting not
30 days before recalibration is necessary the
approved test possible - measured
combined instrument panel shows the mes-
Wait 1 minute alcohol content is
sage Alcoguard Calibr. required. If calibra-
above the limit value in
tion is not carried out within these 30 days
forceA.
then normal engine starting will be blocked -
A Limit values vary from country to country. Find out what only starting with the Bypass function will
applies in your country. See also Alcolock* - to bear in then be possible, see the following heading
mind (p. 266)
"Emergency situation".
NOTE The message can be cleared by pressing the
After a completed period of driving, the send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes Nozzle for breath test. on its own after approx. 2 minutes but then
without a new breath test. reappears each time the engine is started -
Switch. only recalibration at a workshop6 can clear
Transmission button. the message permanently.
08
Related information

6 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Cold or hot weather NOTE This function can be activated several times.
The colder the weather the longer it takes The error message shown during driving can
before the Alcolock is ready for use: All activation with bypass is logged and only be cleared at a workshop6.
saved in a memory; see Recording data (p.
17). Activating the Emergency function
Temperature (ºC) Maximum heat-
ing time (sec- • Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
After the Bypass function has been activated switch OK button and the button for haz-
onds) the combined instrument panel shows ard warning flashers simultaneously for
+10 to +85 10 Alcoguard Bypass enabled the whole time approx. 5 seconds - the combined instru-
while driving and can only be reset by a work- ment panel shows Alcoguard Bypass
-5 to +10 60 shop6. enabled and the engine can be started.
The Bypass function can be tested without This function can be used once, after which a
-40 to -5 180
the error message being logged - in which reset must be made at a workshop6.
At temperatures below -20 ºC or above case, carry out all the steps without starting
Related information
the car. The error message is cleared when
+60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional power
the car is locked. • Alcolock* (p. 264)
supply. The combined instrument panel
shows Alcoguard insert power cable. In When the Alcolock is installed, either the
which case, connect the power supply cable Bypass or Emergency function is selected as
from the glovebox and wait until indicator the bypassing option. This setting can be
lamp (6) is green. changed afterwards at a workshop6.
In extremely cold weather the heating time Activating the Bypass function
can be reduced by taking the Alcolock
indoors.
• Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch OK button and the button for haz-
Emergency situation ard warning flashers simultaneously for
In the event of an emergency situation or the approx. 5 seconds - the combined instru-
Alcolock is out of order, it is possible to ment panel first shows Bypass activated
Wait 1 minute and then Alcoguard
bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car.
Bypass enabled - after which the engine
can be started.
08

Alcolock* - symbols and messages Display text Meaning/Action Starting the engine
is to prevent the The engine is started and switched off using
car from being driven by individuals under the Alcoguard Blowing too hard - blow the remote control key and the START/STOP
influence of alcohol. Blow softer more gently. ENGINE button.
In addition to the previously described mes- Alcoguard Blowing too weak - blow
sages related to how the alcolock works Blow harder harder.
before starting the engine (p. 265) the follow-
ing can also be displayed: Alcoguard Heating not finished -
wait Preheat- wait for text Alcoguard
Display text Meaning/Action ing Blow 5 seconds.
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Alcoguard The engine has been
Restart possi- switched off for less than Related information
ble 30 minutes - engine star-
ting possible without
new test.
Alcoguard Contact a workshopA. Ignition switch with remote control key extrac-
Service ted/inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.
required
Alcoguard No Transmission failed -

signal send manually with but-
ton (3) or take a new
breath test.
Alcoguard Test failed - take a new

Invalid test breath test.
Alcoguard Blowing too short - blow

Blow longer for longer.
08

IMPORTANT WARNING Related information

• Key positions (p. 71)
Do not press in the remote control key Always remove the remote control key
incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the from the ignition switch when leaving the
detachable key blade; see Detachable key car, and make sure that the key position is
blade - detaching/attaching (p. 166) 0 - in particular if there are children in the
car. For information on how this works,
see Key positions (p. 71).
1. Insert the remote control key in the igni-
tion switch and press it in to its end posi-
tion. Note that if the car is equipped with NOTE
Alcolock* then a breath test must first be
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
approved before the engine can be than normal for certain engine types during
started. For more information on the cold starting. This is done in order that the
Alcolock, see Alcolock* (p. 264). emissions system can reach normal oper-
ating temperature as quickly as possible,
2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed8.
which minimises exhaust emissions and
(For cars with automatic gearbox - protects the environment.
Depress the brake pedal.)
3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button Keyless drive*
and then release it. Follow steps 2–3 for keyless(p. 168) starting
The starter motor works until the engine is of petrol and diesel engines.
started or until its overheating protection trig-
gers. NOTE
A prerequisite for the engine to start is that
IMPORTANT one of the car's remote control keys with
the Keyless drive function is in the passen-
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts -
ger compartment or cargo area.
wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the
battery is allowed to recover. WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
08
the car while driving or during towing.
8 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.

Switching off the engine Steering lock Jump starting

The engine is switched off using the START/ The steering lock makes steering difficult if If the starter battery (p. 350) is discharged
STOP ENGINE button. the car is e.g. taken unlawfully. then the car can be started with current from
another battery.
To switch off the engine: Function
• Press the START/STOP ENGINE button • The steering lock locks when the driver's
- the engine stops. door is opened after the engine has been
switched off.
• If the car has an automatic gearbox and
the gear selector is not in a position P or • The steering lock unlocks when the
if the car is moving - Press twice or hold remote control key is in the ignition
the START/STOP ENGINE button switch9 and the START/STOP ENGINE
depressed until the engine stops. button is depressed.
A mechanical noise can be perceived when
Related information the steering lock unlocks or locks.
• Key positions (p. 71)
Related information
• Starting the engine (p. 268)
• Key positions (p. 71) When jump starting the car, the following
• Steering wheel (p. 77) steps are recommended to avoid short cir-
cuits or other damage:
1. Insert the remote control key in key posi-
tion (p. 71) 0.
2. Check that the donor battery has a volt-
age of 12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another
car - switch off the donor car's engine
and make sure that the two cars do not
touch each other.
08
9 Cars with Keyless drive must have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.
270
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's 11. Start the engine in the car with the dis- Gearboxes
clamps to the donor battery's positive charged battery. There are two main types of gearbox - Manual
terminal (1). and Automatic.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT • Manual gearbox (p. 272)
Do not use the connections when attempt-
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid ing to start, as there is a risk of sparking. • Automatic gearbox - Geartronic (p. 273)
short circuits with other components in the and Powershift (p. 276)
engine compartment.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order -
IMPORTANT
first the black and then the red.
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the > Make sure that none of the black jump To prevent damage to any drive system
battery in your car and remove the cover. components, the working temperature of
lead's clamps comes into contact with
the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp the battery's positive terminal or the overheating, a warning symbol in the com-
onto the car's positive terminal (2). clamp connected to the red jump lead! bined instrument panel lights up and a text
message is shown. Follow the recommen-
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's
WARNING dation given in the text message.
clamps to the donor battery's negative
terminal (3). • The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is con-
point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at
nected incorrectly, and this can be
the top, the outer screw head (4).
enough for the battery to explode.
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are • The battery contains sulphuric acid,
affixed securely so that there are no which can cause serious burns.
sparks during the starting procedure.
• If sulphuric acid comes into contact
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
allow it to run a few minutes at a speed large quantities of water. If acid
slightly higher than idle splashes into the eyes - seek medical
approx. 1500 rpm. attention immediately.
Related information
08
271
Manual gearbox Reverse gear inhibitor Gear shift indicator*

The function of the gearbox is to change the The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possi- The gear shift indicator notifies the driver
gear ratio depending on speed and power bility of mistakenly attempting to engage when it is appropriate to engage the next
requirements. reverse gear during normal forward travel. higher or lower gear in order to obtain the
• Follow the gearing pattern printed on the lowest possible fuel consumption.
gear lever and start from neutral position,
An essential detail in connection with environ-
N then depress the gear lever before
mental driving is to drive in the right gear and
moving it to R position.
to change gear in plenty of time.
• Engage reverse gear only when the car is
stationary. An indicator is available as an aid on certain
variants - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - which
Related information notifies the driver when it is appropriate to
• Gearboxes (p. 271) engage the next higher or lower gear in order
• Transmission fluid - grade and volume (p. to obtain the lowest possible fuel consump-
448) tion. However, taking into consideration cha-
racteristics such as performance and vibra-
tion-free running, it may be advantageous to
Gearing pattern. change gear at a higher engine speed. The
Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted framed number indicates the current gear.
on the gear lever.
Manual gearbox
• Depress the clutch pedal fully during Gear shift indicator for man-
each gear change. ual gearbox. Only one
• Take your foot off the clutch pedal marker is illuminated at a
between gear changes. time - it is illuminated in the
centre only during normal
WARNING driving.
Always apply the parking brake when When gearing up/down as recommended, the
parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear upper one is illuminated at +" or the lower at
is not sufficient to hold the car in all situa- "-", marked red in the illustration.
08 tions.

Automatic gearbox Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* Gear positions

An automatic gearbox with Geartronic differs Automatic gear positions are
from an Automatic gearbox - Powershift (p. indicated on the right of the
276), in that it has a hydraulic torque con- combined instrument panel.
verter that transfers power from engine to (Only one marker is illumi-
gearbox. It has two different gear modes - nated at a time - the one
Automatic and Manual. showing the current gear
selector position.)
Symbol "S" for Sport mode is ORANGE when
the mode is active.
P – Parking position
Select P when starting the engine or when
Combined instrument panel "Digital" with gear the car is parked.
shift indicator.
• In order to be able to move the gear
With "Analogue" combined selector from P-position, the brake pedal
instrument panel, the gear must first be depressed firmly.
positions and indicator
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when
arrows are displayed in its
the P position is engaged. Apply the parking
centre.
D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear brake as well, as a precaution - , see Parking
positions. S: Sport mode*.10 brake (p. 290).
Related information The combined instrument panel shows the
• Manual gearbox (p. 272) position of the gear selector using the follow- NOTE
ing indications: P, R, N, D, S*, 1, 2, 3 etc. The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when posi-
tion P is selected. 08
10 The gear lever's gearshift pattern varies depending on engine option.

||
WARNING etc. are displayed in a box which corre- Geartronic - Sport mode (S)
sponds to the gear that has just been The Sport programme provides
Always apply the parking brake when selected. sportier characteristics and allows
parking on a slope - the automatic trans-
mission in P is not sufficient to hold the car • Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) higher engine speed for the gears.
in all situations. to change up a gear and release the At the same time it responds more
lever, which returns to its neutral position quickly to acceleration. During active driving,
between "+" and "–". the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading
R – Reverse to a delayed upshift.
The car must be stationary when position R is or
selected. To activate Sport mode:
• Pull the lever back towards "–" (minus) to
N – Neutral
change down a gear and release it. • Move the gear selector to the side from D
The manual gearshift mode "+/-" can be position to the end position at "+S–" - the
No gear is engaged and the engine can be combined instrument panel changes indi-
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is selected at any time while driving.
cation from D to S.
stationary with the gear selector in position N. Geartronic automatically shifts down if the
Sport mode can be selected at any time while
driver allows the speed to decrease lower
D – Drive driving.
than a level suitable for the selected gear, in
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up order to avoid jerking and stalling. Geartronic - Winter mode
and down takes place automatically based on
To return to automatic driving mode: It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads
the level of acceleration and speed. The car
if 3rd gear is engaged manually.
must be stationary when the gear selector is • Move the lever to the side to the end
moved to position D from position R. position at D. 1. Depress the brake pedal and move the
gear selector from D position to the end
Geartronic – Manual gear positions (+/-) position at "+/–" - the combined instru-
The driver can also change gear manually
NOTE
ment panel shifts the indication from D to
using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The f the gearbox has a Sport programme then the figure 111.
car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal the gearbox will only become manual after
the lever has been moved forwards or 2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever
is released. forward towards "+" (plus) twice - the
backwards in its "+/-" position. The com-
The manual gear position is reached by mov- bined instrument panel then shifts the indi- combined instrument panel shifts the
ing the lever to the side from position D to the cation from S to show which of the gears indication from 1 to 3.
end position at "+/-". The combined instru- 1, 2, 3 etc. is engaged. 3. Release the brake and accelerate care-
08 ment panel's symbol "+/-" changes colour fully.
from WHITE to ORANGE and the digits 1, 2, 3
11 If the car has Sport mode* then "S" is shown first.

The gearbox "winter mode" means that the Related information

car moves off with a lower engine speed and • Automatic gearbox - Powershift* (p. 276)
reduced engine power on the drive wheels. • Transmission fluid - grade and volume (p.
448)
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kick-
down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-
down position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-
tion is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gear-
box control program has a protective down-
shift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down
function.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/
kick-down which would result in an engine
speed high enough to damage the engine.
Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift
down in this way at high engine speed – the
original gear remains engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can
change one or more gears at a time depend-
ing on engine speed. The car changes up 08
when the engine reaches its maximum speed
in order to prevent damage to the engine.

Automatic gearbox - Powershift* Powershift enables driving away on a slippery panel shows a message. The transmission
An automatic gearbox with Powershift differs road surface if 2nd gear is engaged manually can also overheat during slow driving in
from an automatic gearbox with Geartronic (p. instead of 3rd gear (Geartronic). queues (10 km/h or slower) on an uphill gradi-
273), in that it has double mechanical clutch ent, or with a trailer hitched. The transmission
Powershift or Geartronic cools down when the car is stationary, with
discs.
The model with Powershift transmission foot brake depressed and the engine running
should not be towed as it is dependent on the at idling speed.
engine running in order to receive sufficient
lubrication. If towing still has to take place, Overheating during slow driving in queues
the route must be as short as possible and can be avoided by driving in stages:
then with very low speed. • Stop the car and wait with your foot on
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or the brake pedal until there is a moderate
distance to the traffic ahead, drive for-
not the car is equipped with Powershift trans-
ward a short distance, and then wait
mission, this can be verified by checking the
another moment with your foot on the
designation on the gearbox label under the
brake pedal.
bonnet - see Type designations (p. 437). The
designation ”MPS6” means that it is
Powershift transmission - otherwise it is
IMPORTANT
D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear Geartronic automatic transmission. Use the foot brake to hold the car station-
positions. S: Sport mode*.12 ary on an uphill gradient - do not hold the
The Powershift automatic gearbox transmits To bear in mind car with the accelerator pedal. The gear-
box could then overheat.
the motive force from the engine to the drive The transmission's double clutch has over-
wheels with double mechanical clutch discs, load protection that is activated if it becomes
as opposed to Geartronic which instead uses too hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with For important information regarding
a conventional hydraulic torque converter. the accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for Powershift transmission, see Towing (p. 306).
Powershift transmission operates in the same a long time.
Text message and action
way and has similar controls and functions as Overheated transmission causes the car to In some situations the combined instrument
the Geartronic automatic transmission. One shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol panel may show a text message at the same
exception is Geartronic's Winter mode, see illuminates and the combined instrument time as a symbol is illuminated.
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 273).
08
12 The gear lever's gearshift pattern varies depending on engine option.

Symbol Message Driving characteristics Action

Transm. overheat Difficulty in maintaining even speed at Transmission overheated. Keep the car stationary using the
brake to hold constant engine speed. foot brake.A
Transm. overheat park Significant pulling in the car's traction. Transmission overheated. Park the car immediately in a safe
safely manner.A
Transm. cooling let No drive due to overheated gearbox. Transmission overheated. For fastest cooling: Run the engine
engine run at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until
the message clears.
A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
The table shows three steps with an WARNING Related information

increased degree of seriousness should the • Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 273)
transmission become too hot. In parallel with If a warning symbol combined with the text
Transm. overheat park safely is ignored • Transmission fluid - grade and volume (p.
the text message, the driver is also advised 448)
then the heat in the gearbox may become
that the car's electronics are temporarily so high that the power transmission
changing the driving characteristics. Follow between engine and gearbox is temporar-
the instructions in the text message where ily halted in order to prevent the clutch
appropriate. from malfunctioning - the car then loses
drive and is stationary until gearbox tem-
NOTE perature has cooled to an acceptable
level.
The examples in the table are no indication
of the car being defective, but show that a
safety function has been activated with a For more possible text messages with their
view to preventing damage to any of the respective proposals for solutions concerning
car's components. automatic gearbox, see Messages (p. 103).
A text message extinguishes automatically
after the action has been carried out or after
one press on the indicator stalk OK button. 08

Gear selector inhibitor • Keep your foot on the brake pedal when Deactivate automatic gear selector
There are two different types of gear selector moving the gear selector to another posi- inhibitor
inhibitor - mechanical and automatic. tion.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock

Parking position (P)
To be able to move the gear selector from P
to other gear positions, the brake pedal must
be depressed and the remote control key
must be in position II.
Shiftlock – Neutral (N)

If the gear selector is in the N position and
the car has been stationary for at least 3 sec-
onds (irrespective of whether the engine is
G021351
running) then the gear selector is locked. If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat
To be able to move the gear selector from N battery, the gear selector must be moved
to another gear position the brake pedal must from the P position so that the car can be
The gear selector can be moved forward and be depressed and the remote control key moved.
back freely between N and D. Other positions must be in key position II (p. 71).
are locked with a latch that is released with Lift out the contoured insert in the com-
the inhibitor button on the gear selector. partment behind the centre console and
locate a spring-loaded button in the bot-
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever tom of the compartment.
can be moved forwards or backwards
between P, R, N and D. Press and hold the button.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor Move the gear selector from the P posi-
The automatic gearbox has special safety tion and release the button.
systems: 4. Refit the storage compartment insert.
Parking position (P) Related information
08 Stationary car with engine running: • Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 273)
• Automatic gearbox - Powershift* (p. 276)

Hill start assist (HSA)* Start/Stop* The Start/Stop function gives the driver the
The foot brake can be released before setting Some engine and gearbox combinations opportunity for a more active environmentally
off or reversing uphill - the HSA (Hill Start come fitted with a Start and Stop function conscious way of driving the car by means of
Assist) function means that the car does not which engages in the event of e.g. stationary being able to allow the engine to stop auto-
roll backwards. traffic or waiting at traffic lights - the engine is matically, whenever appropriate.
then switched off temporarily and restarts Manual or Automatic
The function means that the pedal pressure in automatically when the journey is due to con-
the brake system remains for several seconds tinue. Note that there are differences in the
while the driver's foot is moved from brake Start/Stop function depending on whether the
pedal to accelerator pedal. Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Cor- gearbox is manual or automatic.
poration's core values and it influences all of
The temporary braking effect releases after Related information
our operations. This target orientation has
several seconds or when the driver acceler- • Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
resulted in several separate energy-saving
ates. 280)
functions of which Start/Stop is one, all with
Related information the collective task of reducing fuel consump- • Starting the engine (p. 268)
• Starting the engine (p. 268) tion, which in turn helps to reduce exhaust • Start/Stop* - settings (p. 284)
emissions.
• Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
General information about Start/Stop start (p. 283)
• Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p.
282)
• Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p.
281)
• Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage
manual gearbox (p. 284)
• Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p.
286)
• Battery - Start/Stop (p. 352)
The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter 08

and cleaner...

Start/Stop* - function and operation Conditions M/A Auto-starting the engine

Some engine and gearbox combinations are A Conditions M/
equipped with a Start and Stop function AA
which engages in the event of e.g. stationary Declutch, set the gear lever in neu- M
traffic or waiting at traffic lights. The tral position and release the clutch With the gear lever in neutral posi- M
Start/Stop function is activated automatically pedal - the engine stops automati- tion:
when the engine is started with the key. cally.
1. Depress the clutch pedal or
Start/StopThe function is Stop the car with the foot brake A press the accelerator pedal -
activated automatically when and then keep your foot on the the engine starts.
the engine is started with the pedal - the engine stops automati- 2. Engage a suitable gear and
key. The driver is made cally. drive.
aware of the function by the
function's On/Off button
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox. The following option is also availa- M
symbol lighting up in the ble on a downhill gradient:
In some cases the engine stops automatically
combined instrument panel before the car is completely stationary. Release the foot brake and let the
and the On/Off button lamp car move off - the engine starts
illuminating. The combined instrument panel's automatically when the speed
symbols for the Start/Stop function exceeds normal walking pace.
All of the car's normal systems such as light- illuminate as verification and
ing, radio, etc. work as normal even with an reminder that the engine has stop- Release the foot pressure on the A
engine that has stopped automatically, ped automatically. foot brake - the engine starts auto-
except that some equipment may have the matically and the journey can con-
function temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate tinue.
control system's fan speed or extremely high
volume on the audio system. A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Auto-stopping the engine Deactivating the Start/Stop function

The following is required for the engine to In certain situations, it may
auto-stop: advisable to temporarily
switch off the automatic
Start/Stop function - this is
08 carried out with a push of
this button.

Disengaged function is indicated by • Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
the combined instrument panel's 281) Some engine and gearbox combinations are
Start/Stop symbols and the button's • Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage equipped with a Start and Stop function
lamp extinguishing. manual gearbox (p. 284) which engages in the event of e.g. stationary
• Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. traffic or waiting at traffic lights. Although the
286) Start/Stop function is activated, the engine
does not always stop automatically.
The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it The engine does not auto-stop if:
is reactivated with the button or until the next
time the engine is started with the key.
Conditions M/
Start assistance HSA AA
The foot brake can also be released on an
uphill slope to auto-start the engine - the HSA the car has not achieved M
(p. 279) (Hill Start Assist) function prevents approx. 5 km/h (= fast walking pace) +A
the car from rolling backwards. first after a key start or the last auto-
stop.
HSA means that the pressure in the brake
system remains temporarily available while the driver has opened the seatbelt's M
the driver moves his/her foot from the brake buckle. +A
pedal to the accelerator pedal for driving off
with the engine auto-stopped. The temporary the capacity of the starter battery is M
braking effect releases after a couple of sec- below the minimum permissible +A
onds or when the driver accelerates. level.
Related information the engine does not have normal M

operating temperature. +A
• Start/Stop* (p. 279)
• Starting the engine (p. 268) outside temperature is below freez- M
• Start/Stop* - settings (p. 284) ing point or above approx. 30 °C. +A
• Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- the windscreen's electric heating is M
start (p. 283) activated. +A 08
282)

||
Conditions M/ Conditions M/ Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts
AA AA Some engine and gearbox combinations are
equipped with a Start and Stop function
the environment in the passenger M adaptive cruise control Queue Assist A which engages in the event of e.g. stationary
compartment differs from the preset +A is activated. traffic or waiting at traffic lights. An auto-stop-
valuesB - indicated by the ventilation ped engine may restart in certain cases with-
fan running at a high speed. the driver’s door has been opened A out the driver having decided that the journey
with the gear selector in D position. should continue.
the car is reversed. M
+A the gear selector is moved out of the A In the following cases the engine also starts
D position to S positionC or "+/-". automatically if the driver has not depressed
the starter battery's temperature is M the clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or takes
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
below freezing point or too high. +A B Car with ECC. his/her foot off the brake pedal (automatic
C Sport mode. gearbox):
the driver makes greater steering M
wheel movements. +A Related information
• Start/Stop* (p. 279) Conditions M/AA
the exhaust system's particulate fil- M
ter is full - the temporarily disen- +A • Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. Misting forms on the windows. M+A
gaged Start/Stop function is reacti- 280)
vated once an automatic cleaning • Starting the engine (p. 268) The environment in the passenger M+A
compartment deviates from the
cycle has been performed (see Die- • Start/Stop* - settings (p. 284)
preset valuesB.
sel particle filter (p. 298)).
the road is very steep. M start (p. 283) The outside temperature falls M+A
+A • Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. below freezing point or exceeds
282) approx. 30 °C.
a trailer is connected electrically to M
the car’s electrical system. +A
• Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage There is a temporarily high current M+A
manual gearbox (p. 284) take-off or starter battery capacity
the atmospheric air pressure is less M • Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. drops below the lowest permissi-
than equivalent to +A 286) ble level.
1500-2400 metres above sea level - • Battery - Start/Stop (p. 352)
08 Repeated pumping of the brake M+A
the current air pressure varies with
the prevailing weather conditions. pedal.

Conditions M/AA • Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- Start/Stop* - the engine does not
start (p. 283) auto-start
The car starts to roll - faster than M • Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. Some engine and gearbox combinations are
the equivalent normal walking 281) equipped with a Start and Stop function
pace. • Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage which engages in the event of e.g. stationary
manual gearbox (p. 284) traffic or waiting at traffic lights. The engine
The driver's seatbelt buckle is A
does not always auto-start after having auto-
opened with the gear selector in D • Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p.
286) stopped.
or N position.
• Battery - Start/Stop (p. 352) In the following cases the engine does not
Steering wheel movements. A auto-start after having auto-stopped:
The gear selector is moved from A
the D position to "+/-" or R. Conditions M/
AA
The driver’s door is opened with A
the gear selector in D position. A gear is engaged without M
declutching - a display text
B Car with ECC. prompts the driver to set the gear
lever in neutral position in order to
WARNING enable automatic starting.
Do not open the bonnet when the engine The driver is unrestrained, the gear A
has stopped automatically - the engine selector is in P position and the
may suddenly start automatically. First driver’s door is open - a normal
switch off the engine as normal using the engine start must take place.
START/STOP ENGINE button before
opening the bonnet. A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Related information
Related information
• Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
280) • Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
280)
• Starting the engine (p. 268) 08
• Start/Stop* - settings (p. 284)

• Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. Start/Stop* - involuntary engine Start/Stop* - settings
282) stoppage manual gearbox Some engine and gearbox combinations are
• Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start and Stop function
281) equipped with a Start and Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary
• Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. The car's MY
manual gearbox (p. 284) traffic or waiting at traffic lights. In the event CAR (p. 104) menu system contains an intro-
that a start-up fails and the engine stops, pro- duction of Volvo's Start-Stop system, as well
286) ceed in accordance with the below: as recommendations for energy-saving driv-
ing techniques.
• Battery - Start/Stop (p. 352) 1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the
engine starts automatically.
2. In certain cases the gear lever must be
set in neutral position. The combined
instrument panel then shows the text Put
gear in neutral.
Related information
• Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
280)
• Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- Related information
start (p. 283) • Start/Stop* (p. 279)
• Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. • Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
282) 280)
• Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. • Starting the engine (p. 268)
281)
• Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. start (p. 283)
08 286)
• Battery - Start/Stop (p. 352) 282)

• Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p.

281)
• Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage
manual gearbox (p. 284)
286)
08

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages Text message For some of them there is a recommended
The Start/Stop function can show text mes- In combination with this indicator action that should be performed. The follow-
sages on the information display. lamp the Start/Stop function may ing table shows some examples.
display text messages in the com-
bined instrument panel for certain situations.
Symbol Message Info/Action M/AA

Engine in Auto Start Illuminates for a few seconds after Start/Stop has been activated. M+A
Eco DRIVe OFF Illuminates for a few seconds after Start/Stop has been switched off. M+A
Auto Start/Stop Service Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- M+A
required ommended.
Engine management system An automatic function check is carried out. M+A
Autostart Engine running + Activated if the driver's door is opened with auto-stopped engine. M+A
acoustic signal
Engine in Auto Start The engine is ready to start automatically - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be M
depressed.
Press Start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP M
ENGINE button.
Depress clutch pedal to The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal to be depressed. M
start
08

Symbol Message Info/Action M/AA

Depress brake pedal to start The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake pedal to be depressed. M
Press brake and clutch to The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed. M
start
Put gear in neutral to start Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the gear lever in neutral position. M
Engine in Auto Start The engine is ready to start automatically - waiting for the brake pedal to be released. A
Select P or N to start Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector to N or P position and start the A
engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.
Press Start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP A
ENGINE button and the gear selector in P or N.
If a message does not go out following com- • Starting the engine (p. 268) • Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage
pletion of the action then a workshop should • Start/Stop* - settings (p. 284) manual gearbox (p. 284)
be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop • Battery - Start/Stop (p. 352)
is recommended.
start (p. 283)
Related information • Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p.
• Start/Stop* (p. 279) 282)
08
• Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. • Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p.
280) 281)

Foot brake delay is minimised by cleaning the brake lin- Symbols in the combined instrument
The foot brake is used to reduce the car's ings. panel
speed while driving. Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road Symbol Specification
surfaces, prior to long-stay parking and after
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If Constant glow – Check the
the car has been washed. Carry this out by
one brake circuit is damaged then this will brake fluid level. If the level is
braking gently during a short period while en
mean that the brakes engage at a deeper low, fill with brake fluid and
route.
level and harder pressure on the pedal is nee- check for the cause of the
ded to produce the normal braking effect. Maintenance brake fluid loss.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-
by a brake servo. ble, follow the Volvo service intervals as Constant glow for 2 seconds
specified in the Service and Warranty Book- when the engine is started -
let. automatic function check.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the IMPORTANT
engine is running. WARNING
The wear on the brake system's compo- If and illuminate at the same
nents must be checked regularly. time, there may be a fault in the brake sys-
If the brake is used when the engine is
switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and Contact a workshop for information about tem.
more force must be used to brake the car. the procedure or engage a workshop to If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
carry out the inspection - an authorised normal at this stage, drive carefully to the
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a Volvo workshop is recommended. nearest workshop and have the brake sys-
heavy load the brakes can be relieved by tem checked - an authorised Volvo work-
using engine braking. Engine braking is most shop is recommended.
efficiently used if the same gear is used
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
downhill as up. the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur-
For more general information on heavy loads ther before topping up the brake fluid.
on the car, see Engine oil - adverse driving The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
conditions (p. 444). be investigated.
Cleaning the brake discs

08 Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
may result in delayed brake function. This
288
Related information Foot brake - anti-lock braking system Foot brake - emergency brake lights
• Parking brake (p. 290) The anti-lock braking system, ABS (Anti-lock and automatic hazard warning
• Foot brake - emergency brake lights and Braking System), prevents the wheels from flashers
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. locking up during braking. Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
289) vehicles behind about sudden braking. The
The function allows steering ability to be function means that the brake light flashes
• Foot brake - emergency brake assistance maintained, and it is easier to swerve to avoid
(p. 290) instead of - as in normal braking - shining with
a hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in a constant glow.
• Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p. the brake pedal when this is engaged and this
289) is normal. Emergency brake lights are activated at
A short test of the ABS system is made auto- speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is
matically after the engine has been started working and/or in the event of sudden brak-
when the driver releases the brake pedal. A ing. After the car's speed has been slowed
further automatic test of the ABS system may below 10 km/h the brake light returns from
be made when the car reaches 10 km/h. The flashing to the normal constant glow - while
test may be experienced as pulses in the at the same time the Hazard warning flashers
brake pedal. are activated, and they flash until the driver
accelerates the car to at least 20 km/h or they
Related information are deactivated with their button.
• Foot brake (p. 288)
Related information
• Parking brake (p. 290)
• Foot brake (p. 288)
• Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
• Parking brake (p. 290)
automatic hazard warning flashers (p.
289) • Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 290)
• Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 290) • Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p.
289)
08
289
Foot brake - emergency brake Parking brake 2. Pull the lever firmly.
assistance The parking brake holds the car stationary, > The combined instrument panel warn-
Emergency brake assistance EBA (Emergency when the driver's seat is empty, by mechani- ing symbol comes on.
Brake Assist) helps to increase the braking cally locking/blocking two wheels.
force and so reduce the braking distance. NOTE
WARNING
EBA detects the driver's braking style and - The combined instrument panel's
increases the braking force when necessary. Always apply the parking brake when
warning symbol illuminates regardless of
parking on a slope - leaving the car in
The brake force can be reinforced up to the whether the parking brake is applied
gear, or in P if it has automatic transmis-
level when the ABS system is engaged. The slightly or fully.
sion, is not sufficient to hold the car in all
EBA function is interrupted when the pressure situations.
on the brake pedal is reduced. 3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
sure that the car is at a standstill position.
NOTE
4. If the vehicle moves then the parking
When EBA is activated the brake pedal brake lever must be applied at least a lit-
lowers slightly more than usual, depress tle more firmly.
(hold) the brake pedal as long as neces-
sary. If the brake pedal is released then all • When parking the vehicle, always engage
braking ceases. 1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the
gear selector in position P (for automatic
gearbox).
Related information
• Foot brake (p. 288) Parking on a hill
• Parking brake (p. 290) If the car is parked facing uphill:
• Foot brake - emergency brake lights and • Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. Combined instrument panel warning symbol.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
289) Applying the parking brake
• Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p. • Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
289) Disengaging the parking brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
08
290
2. Pull the lever up slightly, press the button, Driving in water IMPORTANT
release the lever and release the button. Fording means that the car is driven through a
Engine damage can occur if water enters
> The combined instrument panel warn- water-covered roadway. Fording must be car- the air filter.
ing symbol goes off. ried out with great caution.
In depths greater than 25 cm, water could
If the driver forgets to release the parking The car can be driven through water at a enter the transmission. This reduces the
brake – in addition to the illuminated warning maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum lubricating ability of the oils and shortens
lamp – a pinging sound combined with a speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be the service life of these systems.
message in the combined instrument panel exercised when passing through flowing In the event of the engine stalling in water,
alerts the driver of this when the car's speed water. do not try restart - tow the car from the
exceeds 10 km/h. water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo
During driving in water, maintain a low speed workshop is recommended. Risk of engine
Related information and do not stop the car. When the water has breakdown.
• Foot brake (p. 288) been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Related information
Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
• Recovery (p. 309)
function. • Towing (p. 306)
• Clean the electric contacts of the electric

engine block heater and trailer coupling
after driving in water and mud.
• Do not let the car stand with water over
the sills for any long period of time - this
could cause electrical malfunctions.
08
291
Overheating • If the car overheats, the air conditioning Driving with open tailgate
Under special conditions, for example hard may be switched off temporarily. When driving with the tailgate open, toxic
driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is • Do not turn the engine off immediately exhaust fumes can be sucked into the car
a risk that the engine and drive system may you stop after a hard drive. through the cargo area.
overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
NOTE WARNING
For information about overheating when driv-
ing with a trailer, see Driving with a trailer (p. It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic
299). operate for a time after the engine has exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
been switched off. through the cargo area.
• Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille when driving in hot climates.
• If the temperature in the engine's cooling • Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox (p. • Loading (p. 152)
system is too high then a warning symbol 300)
is illuminated and a text message High
engine temp Stop safely is shown in the • Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox
combined instrument panel's information (p. 301)
display - stop the car in a safe way and
allow the engine to run at idling speed for
several minutes in order to cool down.
• If the text message High engine temp
Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop
engine is shown then the engine must be
switched off after stopping the car.
• In the event of overheating in the gearbox
a built-in protection function is activated,
which is indicated in the combined instru-
ment panel with a warning symbol and
the text message Transmission hot
Reduce speed or Transmission hot
Stop safely - follow the recommendation
08 given and lower the speed and stop the
car in a safe way and allow the engine to
run at idling speed for a few minutes in
order to allow the gearbox to cool down.
292
Overload - starter battery Before a long journey Winter driving

The electrical functions in the car load the Before a long journey, it makes good sense to For winter driving it is important to perform
starter battery to varying degrees. Avoid using go through the following points: certain checks in order to ensure that the car
the key position II when the engine is can be driven safely.
switched off. Instead use the I mode - which • Check that the engine is working normally
uses less power, see Key positions - functions and that fuel consumption (p. 452) is nor- To bear in mind:
mal. Check the following in particular before the
at different levels (p. 71).
• Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil cold season:
Also, be aware of different accessories that or other fluid).
load the electrical system. Do not use func-
• The engine coolant (p. 447) must contain
• Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths. at least 50% glycol. This mixture protects
tions which use a lot of power when the
• Carrying a warning triangle (p. 322) is a the engine against frost erosion down to
engine is switched off. Examples of such approximately –35 °C. To achieve opti-
functions are: legal requirement in certain countries.
mum antifreeze protection, different types
• ventilation fan Related information of glycol must not be mixed.
• headlamps • Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 336) • The fuel tank must be kept filled to pre-
• windscreen wiper • Spare wheel* (p. 316) vent condensation.
• audio system (high volume). • Lamp replacement (p. 341) • Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star-
If the battery voltage is low the information ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel
display shows the text Low battery Power consumption while the engine is cold. For
save mode. The energy-saving function then more information on suitable oils, see
shuts down certain functions or reduces cer- Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p.
tain functions such as the ventilation fan 444).
and/or audio system.
– In which case, charge the starter battery IMPORTANT
by starting the engine and then running it Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
for at least 15 minutes - battery charging driving or in hot weather.
is more effective during driving than run-
ning the engine at idling speed while sta- • The condition of the battery and charge
tionary. level must be inspected. Cold weather
08
Related information
• Starter battery (p. 350)

||
places great demands on the battery and Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing Fuel filler flap - manual opening
its capacity is reduced by the cold. The fuel filler flap can be opened/closed as The fuel filler flap can be opened manually
• Use washer fluid (p. 350) to avoid ice follows: when it cannot be opened from outside.
forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec-
ommends using winter tyres on all wheels if
there is a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal require-
ment in certain countries. Studded tyres
are not permitted in all countries.
Slippery driving conditions

Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo
reacts. area (same side as fuel filler flap).
Open the fuel filler flap by slightly press-
ing in the rear part of the hatch. Carefully pull the line back in a straight
Take out the flap. line. The flap can now be opened from
outside.
Close the flap after fuelling.
For a description of locking and unlocking the IMPORTANT
fuel filler flap, see Locking/unlocking - fuel Pull the wire gently - minimal force is
filler flap (p. 178). The fuel filler flap's lock required to disengage the hatch lock.
logic also follows Keyless drive and the lock-
ing and unlocking of the central locking.
Related information
Related information • Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap (p. 178)
08
• Filling up with fuel (p. 295) • Filling up with fuel (p. 295)
294
Filling up with fuel NOTE Fuel - handling

The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel Fuel of a lower quality than that recom-
Avoid spilling by waiting approximately
filler system. Filling is carried out as follows: 5-8 seconds before carefully removing the mended by Volvo must not be used as engine
nozzle once refuelling is complete. power and fuel consumption is negatively
affected.
Related information WARNING
• Filling with fuel - with a fuel can (p. 298)
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and fuel
splashing in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol
and diesel are highly toxic and could
cause permanent injury or be fatal if swal-
• Open the fuel filler flap (p. 294). See also lowed. Seek medical attention immediately
Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 294). if fuel has been swallowed.
• Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler
opening. Take care to insert the nozzle WARNING
properly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe
consists of two opening covers. The noz- Fuel which spills onto the ground can be
zle must be pushed past both covers ignited.
before refuelling is started. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before
starting to refuel.
• Do not overfill the tank but fill until the
pump nozzle cuts out. Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could
NOTE cause spark build-up and ignite petrol
fumes, leading to fire and injury.
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather. 08
295
||
IMPORTANT Fuel - petrol Fuel - diesel
Petrol is used as fuel. Diesel is used as fuel.
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of
fuels which are not recommended will Petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard. Most Only use diesel fuel from well-known produc-
invalidate Volvo's guarantees and any sup-
engines can be run with octane ratings of 95 ers. Never use diesel of dubious quality. Die-
plementary service agreements; this is
applicable to all engines. and 98 RON. Only in exceptional cases sel should fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204
should 91 RON be used. standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to
contaminants in the fuel, such as excessively
NOTE • 95 RON can be used for normal driving.
high volumes of sulphur particles for exam-
• 98 RON is recommended for optimum ple.
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a performance and minimum fuel consump-
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- tion. At low temperatures (-6 °C to -40 °C), a par-
nation with fuel grade are factors that affin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel,
could affect the car's performance. When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,
which may lead to ignition problems. Special
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is
diesel fuel designed for low temperatures
recommended for optimum performance and
Related information around freezing point is available from the
fuel economy.
• Economical driving (p. 299) major oil companies. This fuel is less viscous
• Economical driving (p. 299) at low temperatures and reduces the risk of
IMPORTANT paraffin precipitate.
• Use only unleaded petrol to avoid The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
damaging the catalytic converter. reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
• Do not use any additives which have refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
not been recommended by Volvo. filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-
Related information gent and water.
• Economical driving (p. 299)
• Fuel - handling (p. 295) IMPORTANT
• Filling up with fuel (p. 295) Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European
diesel standard.
The sulphur content must be a maximum
08 of 50 ppm.
296
IMPORTANT 3. Wait approx. 1 minute. Related information

4. To start the engine: Depress the brake • Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 298)
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
and/or clutch pedal and then press the • Fuel - handling (p. 295)
• Special additives START button again.
• Marine diesel fuel
• Heating oil NOTE
• FAME13 (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) and Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
vegetable oil. shortage:
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in • Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
accordance with Volvo recommendations possible - if the car is tilting there is a
and generate increased wear and engine risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.
damage that is not covered by the Volvo
warranty.
Draining condensation from the fuel
filter
Empty tank The fuel filter separates condensation from
The design of the fuel system in a diesel the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine
engine means that if the vehicle runs out of operation.
fuel, the tank may need to be vented in the
workshop in order to restart the engine after The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
fuelling. specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel with contaminated fuel, see Volvo service
starvation, the fuel system needs a few programme (p. 331).
moments to carry out a check. Do this before
starting the engine, once the fuel tank has
IMPORTANT
been filled with diesel:
Certain special additives remove the water
1. Insert the remote control key in the igni- separation in the fuel filter.
tion switch and push it in to the end posi-
tion, see Key positions (p. 71).
2. Press the START button without
08
depressing the brake and/or clutch pedal.
13 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.
297
Filling with fuel - with a fuel can Diesel particle filter (DPF) motorway. The car should then be driven for
When filling with fuel (p. 295) from a fuel can, Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter, approximately 20 minutes more.
use the funnel located under the floor hatch in which results in more efficient emission con-
the cargo area. trol. NOTE
Take care to insert the funnel properly into The particles in the exhaust gases are collec- The following may arise during regenera-
tion:
the filler pipe. The filler pipe consists of two ted in the filter during normal driving. So-
opening covers. The funnel must be pushed called "regeneration" is started in order to • a smaller reduction of engine power
past both covers before filling is started. burn away the particles and empty the filter. may be noticed temporarily
This requires the engine to have reached nor- • fuel consumption may increase tem-
Related information mal operating temperature. porarily
• Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap (p. 178)
Filter regeneration takes place automatically • a smell of burning may arise.
• Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 294)
and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may
take a little longer at a low average speed. When regeneration is complete the warning
Fuel consumption may increase slightly dur- text is cleared automatically.
ing regeneration.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so
Regeneration in cold weather that the engine reaches normal operating
If the car is frequently driven short distances temperature more quickly.
in cold weather then the engine does not
reach normal operating temperature. This IMPORTANT
means that regeneration of the diesel particle
If the filter is completely filled with parti-
filter does not take place and the filter is not
cles, it may be difficult to start the engine
emptied. and the filter is non-functional. Then there
When the filter has become approximately is a risk that the filter will need to be
80% full of particles, a yellow warning triangle replaced.
is shown in the combined instrument panel,
and the message Soot filter full See manual Related information
is shown in the information display. • Fuel - diesel (p. 296)
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the • Economical driving (p. 299)
08 car until the engine reaches normal operating
temperature, preferably on a main road or

Economical driving - remove the load carriers when not in Driving with a trailer
Driving economically means driving smoothly use. When driving with a trailer there are a number
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driv- • Do not run the engine to operating tem- of important points to think about regarding
ing style and speed to the prevailing condi- perature at idling speed, but rather drive e.g. the towing bracket, the trailer and how
tions. with a light load as soon as possible - a the load is positioned in the trailer.
cold engine consumes more fuel than a
warm one. Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
• Avoid driving with open windows.
The total of the weight of the passengers and
• Do not use winter tyres when the winter • High speed results in increased fuel con-
sumption - the wind resistance increases all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
season is over. payload by corresponding weights (p. 440).
with speed.
• Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo,
and heavy braking. For more information, see Volvo Cars' envi-
ronmental philosophy (p. 20) and Fuel con- then the car is delivered with the necessary
• Drive with the correct air pressure in the
sumption and CO2 emissions (p. 452). equipment for driving with a trailer.
tyres and check it regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results, see Tyres - • The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved tyre pressures (p. 456). WARNING approved type.
• Drive in the highest gear possible, adap- Never switch off the engine while moving, • If the towbar is retrofitted, check with
ted to the current traffic situation and such as downhill, this deactivates impor- your Volvo dealer that the car is fully
road - lower engine speeds result in lower tant systems such as the power steering equipped for driving with a trailer.
and brake servo.
fuel consumption. Use the gear shift indi- • Distribute the load on the trailer so that
cator (p. 272)14. the weight on the towing bracket com-
• Remove unnecessary items from the car - plies with the specified maximum towball
the greater the load the higher the fuel load.
consumption. • Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-
• Use engine braking to slow down, when it mended air pressure (p. 321) for a full
can take place without risk to other road load.
users. • The engine is loaded more heavily than
• Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump- usual when driving with a trailer.
tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a • Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
dealer. brand new. Wait until it has been driven
• A roof load and ski box increase air resis- at least 1000 km. 08
tance, leading to higher fuel consumption
14 Manual gearbox
299
||
• The brakes are loaded much more than Level control* Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox
usual on long and steep downhill slopes. The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant When driving with a trailer (p. 299) in hilly ter-
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your height irrespective of the car's load (up to the rain in a hot climate there may be a risk of
speed. maximum permissible weight). When the car overheating.
• For safety reasons, the maximum permit- is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
ted speed for the car when coupled with which is normal. • Do not run the engine at higher revolu-
a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow tions than 4500 rpm (diesel engines:
the regulations in force for the permitted Trailer weights 3500 rpm) - otherwise the oil temperature
speeds and weights. For information on Volvo's permitted trailer may become too high.
weights, see Towing capacity and towball
• Maintain a low speed when driving with a Diesel engine 5-cyl
trailer up long, steep ascents. load (p. 441).
• In the event of a risk of overheating the
• Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
NOTE
optimal speed for the engine is
more than 12 %. 2300-3000 rpm for optimal circulation of
The stated maximum permitted trailer the coolant.
Trailer cable weights are those permitted by Volvo. The
An adapter is required if the car's towing maximum permitted speed for a car with a Related information
bracket has a 13 pin connector and the trailer trailer attached is 100 km/h. National vehi- • Manual gearbox (p. 272)
has a 7 pin connector. Use an adapter cable cle regulations may further restrict the
approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does trailer weight and speed. Towbars can be
not drag on the ground. certified for higher towing weights than the
car can actually tow.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer WARNING
If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indi-
cators are broken, the symbol for direction Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and
indicators in the combined instrument panel
trailer may be difficult to control in the
flashes faster than normal and the information event of sudden movement and braking.
display shows the text Bulb fail - Ind. signal
trailer.
Related information
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light • Towing bracket (p. 301)
08 are broken then the Bulb fail - Stop lamp
trailer text is shown.
• Lamp replacement (p. 341)

Driving with a trailer - automatic • Move the gear selector to park position P Towing bracket
gearbox when parking an automatic car with a A towing bracket means that it is possible to
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hitched trailer. Always use the parking e.g. tow a trailer behind the car.
brake.
hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
• Block the wheels with chocks when park- If the car is equipped with a detachable tow-
• An automatic gearbox selects the opti- ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill. bar, the installation instructions for the loose
mum gear related to load and engine section must be followed carefully, see
speed. Starting on a hill Detachable towbar - attachment/removal (p.
• In the event of overheating, a warning 1. Depress the foot brake. 303).
symbol is illuminated in the combined 2. Move the gear selector to driving posi-
instrument panel and a text message is tion D. WARNING
shown in the information display - follow
3. Release the parking brake. If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
the recommendation given.
towbar:
4. Release the foot brake and start driving
Steep inclines • Follow the installation instructions
off.
• Do not lock the automatic transmission in carefully.
a higher gear than the engine "can cope Related information • The detachable section must be
with" - it is not always a good idea to • Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 273) locked with the key before setting off.
drive at a high gear with low engine revo-
lutions. • Automatic gearbox - Powershift* (p. 276) • Check that the indicator window
shows green.
IMPORTANT
Important checks
See also the specific information on slow
driving with a trailer for cars with automatic • The towbar's towball must be cleaned
gearbox - Powershift (p. 276). and greased regularly.
WARNING
Parking on a hill
The moving parts of the detachable towbar
1. Depress the foot brake. must not be lubricated/oiled. This may
2. Activate the parking brake. reduce safety.
3. Move the gear selector to position P. 08

4. Release the foot brake.

||
NOTE Detachable towbar - storage Detachable towbar - specifications
Store the detachable towbar in the cargo Specifications for detachable towbar.
When a hitch with a vibration damper is
used, the towball must not be lubricated. area.
Related information
• Driving with a trailer (p. 299)
• Detachable towbar - specifications (p.
302)
• Detachable towbar - storage (p. 302)
G021485
The storage location for the removable towbar.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the detachable towbar
after use and store it in the designated
location in the car.
Related information
• Detachable towbar - specifications (p.
302)
• Detachable towbar - attachment/removal
(p. 303)
08
302
Detachable towbar - attachment/

removal
The attachment/removal of the detachable
towbar is performed in the following way:
Attaching
G021488
The indicator window must show red.
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)

A 887
Remove the protective cover by first
B 79 pressing in the catch and then pulling
the cover straight back .
C 881
G021489
D 441
Insert the towball section until you hear a
E 109 click.
F 306
G Side member
G021487
H Ball centre
Related information Ensure that the mechanism is in the

• Detachable towbar - attachment/removal unlocked position by turning the key 08
(p. 303) clockwise.
• Detachable towbar - storage (p. 302)
303
||
G021490
G021494
G021495
The indicator window must show green. Check that the towball section is secure Safety cable.
by pulling it up, down and back.
WARNING
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety
If the towball is not fitted correctly then it cable in the intended bracket.
must be detached and reattached in
accordance with the previous instructions.
Removal of detachable towbar

IMPORTANT
G000000
Only grease in the ball for the towball

Turn the key anticlockwise to locked hitch, the remainder of the towbar must be
position. Remove the key from the lock. clean and dry.
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the

unlocked position.
08
304
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA

The trailer stability assist TSA (Trailer Stability
Assist) function is to stabilise the car and
trailer combination if it begins to snake.
The TSA function is part of the DSTC system
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control), see
Stability and traction control system (DSTC)
(p. 185).
Push the protective cover until it snaps Function

Push in the locking wheel and turn it
tight. The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
anticlockwise until you hear a click. car/trailer combination. Snaking normally
Related information occurs at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it
• Detachable towbar - storage (p. 302) occurring at lower speeds (70-90 km/h) if the
• Detachable towbar - specifications (p. trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly
302) distributed, e.g. too far back.
• Driving with a trailer (p. 299) In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
• Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
• Car with trailer drives on an uneven road
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it surface or in a pothole.
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towball rearward and
• Sweeping steering wheel movements.
upward. Operation
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or
WARNING even impossible to suppress. This makes the
Secure the detachable towbar safely if it is car/trailer combination difficult to control and
stored in the car, see Detachable towbar - there is a risk that you could, for example,
storage (p. 302). end up in the wrong lane or leave the car- 08
riageway.
305
||
TSA system continually monitors car move- Related information Towing
ments, particularly lateral movements. If • Stability and traction control system During towing, one vehicle is towed by
snaking is detected, the front wheels are indi- (DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 187) another vehicle using a tow rope.
vidually braked. This serves to stabilise the • Stability and traction control system
car/trailer combination. This is often enough (DSTC) - operation (p. 186) Find out the statutory maximum speed limit
to help the driver regain control of the car. for towing before towing begins.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time the 1. Unlock the steering lock (p. 270) by
TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer inserting the remote control key in the
combination is braked with all wheels and ignition switch and giving a long press on
engine power is reduced. Once snaking has the START/STOP ENGINE button - key
been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer position (p. 71) II is activated.
combination is once again stable, the TSA 2. The remote control key must remain in
system stops regulating and the driver once the ignition switch while the car is being
again has full control of the car. towed.
Miscellaneous 3. Keep the towline taut when the towing
The TSA system can engage within the speed vehicle reduces speed by holding your
interval 65-160 km/h. foot gently pressed on the brake pedal -
thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
NOTE 4. Be prepared to brake to stop.
TSA function is switched off if the driver
selects Sport mode, see Stability and WARNING
traction control system (DSTC) (p. 185).
• Check that the steering lock is
unlocked before towing.
TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses
severe steering wheel movements to try to • The remote control key must be in key
position II - in position I all airbags are
rectify the snaking because in such a situa-
deactivated.
tion the TSA system cannot determine
whether it is the trailer or the driver that is • Never remove the remote control key
causing the snaking. from the ignition switch when the car
08 is being towed.
The DSTC symbol in the combined
instrument panel flashes when the
TSA system is working.
306
WARNING lubrication. If towing still has to take place, Jump starting

the route must be as short as possible and Do not tow the car to bump start the engine.
The brake servo and power steering do not then with very low speed. Use a donor battery if the battery is dis-
work when the engine is switched off - the
brake pedal needs to be depressed In the event of uncertainty as to whether or charged and the engine does not start, see
about 5 times more heavily and the steer- not the car is equipped with Powershift trans- Jump starting (p. 270).
ing is considerably heavier than normal. mission, this can be verified by checking the
type designation (p. 437) on the transmis- IMPORTANT
Manual gearbox sion's label under the bonnet. The designa- The catalytic converter may be damaged
Prior to towing: tion ”MPS6” means that it is Powershift – during attempts to tow-start the engine.
transmission otherwise it is Geartronic auto-
– Move gear lever into neutral and release matic transmission.
the parking brake. Related information
• Towing eye (p. 308)
Automatic gearbox Geartronic IMPORTANT
Avoid towing.
IMPORTANT • However, the car can be towed for a
Note that the car must always be towed short distance at low speed to move it
with the wheels rolling forward. from a dangerous position - not further
than 10 km and not faster than
• Do not tow cars with automatic trans-
10 km/h. Note that the car must
mission at speeds higher than 80 km/h
always be towed with the wheels roll-
or for distances in excess of 80 km.
ing forward.
Follow the speeds that are permitted
in accordance with local traffic regula- • In the event of moving a longer dis-
tions. tance than 10 km, the car must be
transported with the drive wheels
raised from the road - professional
Prior to towing: recovery is recommended.
– Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake. Prior to towing:
Automatic gearbox Powershift – Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake. 08
The model with Powershift transmission
should not be towed as it is dependent on the
engine running in order to receive sufficient
307
Towing eye Take out the towing eye that is located IMPORTANT
The towing eye is screwed into a threaded under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
The towing eye is only designed for towing
socket behind a cover on the right-hand side on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck
of the bumper, front or rear. NOTE or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for
To access the towing eye/wheel wrench in recovery assistance.
Attaching the towing eye
the foam block:
• Version 1: Lift the emergency puncture Related information
repair kit compressor unit (point 5) to • Towing (p. 306)
access the wheel wrench. Lift out the • Recovery (p. 309)
bottle of sealant (point 6) to access the
towing eye.
• Version 2: Lift the emergency puncture
repair kit compressor unit (point 5) to
access the towing eye. The wheel
wrench is located underneath the jack.
The cover for the towing eye's attach-

ment point is opened as follows:
• The cover has a marking along one
side or in a corner: Press the marking
with a finger and fold out the opposite
side/corner at the same time - the
cover turns around its axis and can
then be removed.
Screw the towing eye right in up to its
flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.
using the wheel wrench.
The towing eye is unscrewed after use.
Place the towing eye back in its position.
08
Finish by refitting the cover onto the
bumper.
308
Recovery
Recovery means that the vehicle is transpor-
ted away by means of another vehicle.
Call a recovery service for recovery assis-

tance.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transpor-
ted with the wheels rolling forward.
Related information
• Towing (p. 306)
08
309
WHEELS AND TYRES
09 Wheels and tyres
Tyres - direction of rotation Tyres - maintenance 09

NOTE
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed Amongst other things, the function of the
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have
to only turn in one direction have the direction the same type and dimension, and also the tyres is to provide grip on the road surface,
of rotation marked with an arrow. same make. dampen vibration and protect the wheel from
wear.
Follow the recommended tyre pressure (p. Driving characteristics
321) specified in the tyre pressure table. Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte-
ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre
Related information
pressure and speed rating are important for
• Tyres - dimensions (p. 315)
how the car performs.
• Tyres - speed ratings (p. 316)
• Tyres - maintenance (p. 311) Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
• Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 313)
checked by an expert even if they seem
undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even
G021778
if they are hardly ever or never used. The

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation. function can therefore be affected. This
applies to all tyres that are stored for future
The tyre must always rotate in the same use. Examples of external signs which indi-
direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should cate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are
only be switched between front and rear cracks or discoloration.
positions, never between left and right-hand
sides, or vice versa. If the tyres are fitted
incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics
and capacity to force rain and slush out of the
way are adversely affected. Tyres with the
greatest tread depth should always be fitted
to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of
skidding).
311
09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 New tyres Wear and maintenance Related information
Correct tyre pressure (p. 321) results in more • Tyres - dimensions (p. 315)
even wear. Driving style, tyre pressure, cli- • Tyres - speed ratings (p. 316)
mate and road condition affect how quickly
your tyres age and wear. To avoid differences
• Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 311)
in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns
(p. 313) arising, the front and rear wheels can
be switched with each other. A suitable dis-
tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km
and then at 10000 km intervals. Volvo recom-
mends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop for checking if you are uncertain
about tread depth. If significant differences in
wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth)
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they between tyres have already occurred, the
begin to harden at the same time as the fric- least worn tyres must always be placed on
tion capacity/characteristics gradually deteri- the rear. Understeer is normally easier to cor-
orate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh rect than oversteer, and leads to the car con-
tyres as possible when you replace them. tinuing forwards in a straight line rather than
This is especially important with regard to having the rear end skidding to one side,
winter tyres. The last four digits in the resulting in possible complete loss of control
sequence mean the week and year of manu- over the car. This is why it is important for the
facture. This is the tyre's DOT marking rear wheels never to lose grip before the front
(Department of Transportation), and this is wheels.
stated with four digits, for example 1510. The
tyre in the figure was manufactured in week Wheels must be stored lying down or hanging
15 of 2010. up - never standing up.
Summer and winter tyres WARNING

When summer and winter wheels are
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
changed the wheels should be marked with
over the car.
which side of the car they were mounted on,
for example L for left and R for right.
312
09 Wheels and tyres
Tyres - tread wear indicators Wheel bolts Locking wheel bolts* 09

A tread wear indicator shows the status of the Wheel bolts are used to fasten the wheels at Locking wheel bolts can be used on both alu-
tyre's tread. the hubs and are available in different ver- minium and steel rims. Under the cargo area
sions. floor there is space for the sleeve for the lock-
able wheel bolts.
Related information
• Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 315)
G021829
Tread wear indicators.

Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless Low wheel bolt
bands across the width of the tread. On the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread High wheel bolt
Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth Locking wheel bolts
is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be
level in height with the tread wear indicators.
Tightening torque
Change to new tyres as soon as possible.
Remember that tyres with little tread depth
• Type 1 wheel bolt (steel rim): 110 Nm
provide very poor grip in rain and snow. • Type 2 wheel bolt (aluminium rim): 130
Nm
Related information • Type 3 Lockable wheel bolt (steel/
• Tyres - speed ratings (p. 316) aluminium rim): 110 Nm
• Tyres - air pressure (p. 321) Only use rims that are tested and approved
• Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 311) by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine acces-
sories. Check the torque with a torque
wrench.

09 Wheels and tyres
09 Jack Winter tyres Using snow chains

A jack is used to raise the car, e.g. when Winter tyres are tyres that are adapted for Snow chains may only be used on the front
changing the tyres. winter road conditions. wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
The original jack should only be used for Winter tyres chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
changing to the spare wheel. The jack's Volvo recommends winter tyres with particu- wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
thread must always be well greased. lar dimensions. Tyre dimensions are depend-
ent on engine variant. When driving on winter WARNING
Related information tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted
• Warning triangle (p. 322) to all four wheels. Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-
lent chains designed for the car model,
• Emergency puncture repair* (p. 323)
and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event
NOTE of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you
Volvo recommends that you consult a consult an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and The wrong snow chains may cause serious
tyre types are most suitable. damage to your car and lead to an acci-
dent.
Studded tyres
Related information
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently
for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly
• Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.
318)
into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and espe-
cially the studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-
peratures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo
therefore recommends not to drive on winter
tyres that have a tread depth of less
than4 mm.

09 Wheels and tyres
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions Tyres - dimensions Tyres - load index 09
Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in The car's wheels, tyres and rims have a cer- Load index indicates a tyre's ability to carry a
accordance with the examples in the table tain dimension, see the examples in the table certain load.
below. below.
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimen- The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. load, a load index (LI). The car's weight deter-
sions, for example: 7Jx16x50. Example of designation:215/55R16 97W. mines the load capacity required of the tyres.
Related information
7 Rim width in inches 205 Tyre width (mm)
J Rim flange profile 50 Ratio between tyre wall height and • Tyres - speed ratings (p. 316)
tyre width (%)
16 Rim diameter in inches • Tyres - air pressure (p. 321)
R Radial ply • Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 313)
50 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
centre to wheel contact surface 17 Rim diameter in inches (")
against the hub)
93 Codes for the maximum permitted
Related information tyre load, load index (p. 315) (LI)
• Wheel bolts (p. 313) W Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (p. 316) (SS). (In
this case 270 km/h).
Related information
• Tyres - air pressure (p. 321)
• Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 311)
315
09 Wheels and tyres
09 Tyres - speed ratings Spare wheel*

Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum WARNING A spare wheel (Temporary spare) is used to
speed and therefore belongs to a particular The car must be fitted with tyres which temporarily replace a punctured normal
speed rating (SS - Speed Symbol). have the same or a higher load index (p. wheel.
315) (LI) and speed rating (SS) than speci-
Tyre speed class must at least correspond fied. If a tyre with too low a load index or A spare wheel is only intended for use tempo-
with the car's top speed. Minimum speed rat- speed rating is used, it may overheat. rarily and must be replaced by an normal
ing is indicated in the speed rating table wheel as soon as possible. The car's handling
below. The only exception to these conditions may be altered by the use of a spare wheel.
is winter tyres (p. 314) (both those with metal Related information The spare wheel is smaller than the normal
studs and those without), where a lower • Tyres - dimensions (p. 315) wheel. The car's ground clearance is affected
speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is • Tyres - air pressure (p. 321) accordingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and
chosen, the car must not be driven faster • Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 311) do not machine wash the car. If the spare
than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, wheel is fitted on the front axle, you cannot
class Q can be driven at a maximum of use snow chains at the same time. On all-
160 km/h). Traffic regulations determine how wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can
fast a car can be driven, not the speed rating be disconnected. The spare wheel must not
of the tyres. be repaired. The correct tyre pressure for the
spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure
NOTE table, Tyres - air pressure (p. 321).
The maximum permitted speed is speci-
fied in the table. IMPORTANT
• Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a
spare wheel on the car.
Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
• The car must never be driven fitted
T 190 km/h with more than one "Temporary
Spare" wheel.
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h Related information

W 270 km/h 318)
Y 300 km/h • Changing wheels - fitting the spare
wheel* (p. 319)

09 Wheels and tyres
• Changing wheels - taking out the spare Changing wheels - taking out the 5. Take hold of the far end of the spare 09
wheel* (p. 317) spare wheel* wheel, then lift. Push the spare wheel for-
• Jack (p. 314) The spare wheel* plus jack* and wheel wards slightly and lift it out of the storage
wrench* are stored under the floor in the compartment.
• Warning triangle (p. 322)
cargo area. 6. Remove the wheel wrench, the jack and
• Wheel bolts (p. 313)
the towing eye from the foam block.
NOTE
The jack must be lifted out in order to
access the towing eye.
Related information
318)
• Changing wheels - fitting the spare
wheel* (p. 319)
• Jack (p. 314)
1. Lift the rear edge of the luggage compart-
• Spare wheel* (p. 316)
ment floor (or on models with a jointed
luggage compartment floor, take hold of • Warning triangle (p. 322)
the luggage compartment floor handle, lift • Wheel bolts (p. 313)
and move the rear part of the floor for-
wards).
2. Lift out the storage compartment* (only
models with a jointed cargo area floor).
3. Lift out the lower floor (models with a join-
ted luggage compartment floor only).
4. Undo the attaching screw and lift out the
foam block containing the jack and tools.

09 Wheels and tyres
09 Changing wheels - removing wheels 3. Place chocks in front of and behind the 5. Screw together the towing eye with the
The car's wheels can be changed for e.g. win- wheels which will remain on the ground. wheel wrench* until the stop position as
ter wheels/winter tyres. Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones shown in the following illustration.
for example.
Set up the warning triangle if a wheel must be
4. Cars with steel rims have removable
replaced at a busy location. The car and jack*
wheel covers. Use the removal tool to
must be on a firm horizontal surface.
hook in and pull off any full-wheel wheel
1. Apply the parking brake and engage covers. Alternatively, the wheel covers
reverse gear, or position P if the car has can be pulled away by hand.
an automatic gearbox.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that
the threads are thoroughly lubricated and
that it is free from dirt.
The wheel wrench and towing eye.
NOTE IMPORTANT
Volvo recommends only using the jack* The towing eye must be screwed into all
that belongs to the car model in question, threads in the wheel bolt wrench.
which is indicated on the jack's label.
The decal also indicates the jack's maxi-
6. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anti-
mum lift capacity at a specified lifting
height. clockwise with the wheel wrench.
2. Take out the wheel to be fitted (summer

tyre, winter tyre or spare wheel) as well as
the tools. If it is a spare wheel being fitted
then there is a package in its location
containing gloves and a plastic bag for
the punctured wheel.

09 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels - fitting the spare 09

WARNING WARNING
wheel*
Never position anything between the Never crawl under the car when it is raised
ground and the jack, nor between the jack on the jack. It is important that the procedure for fitting
and the car's jacking point. the spare wheel is carried out correctly.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack. Fitting
7. There are two jacking points on each side Park the car such that passengers have 1. Clean the contact surfaces between
of the car. the car, or ideally a crash barrier, between wheel and hub.
themselves and the roadway.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
NOTE 3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
The car's regular jack is designed only for rotate.
use occasionally and for a short time, such
as when changing a wheel with a punc-
tured tyre, switching between summer
tyres and winter tyres, etc. Only the jack
belonging to the specific model is to be
used to jack up the car. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer time
than is required just to change a wheel,
use of a garage jack is recommended. In
this instance, follow the instructions for
IMPORTANT use that come with the equipment.
The ground under the jack must be firm,
smooth and level. Related information
• Changing wheels - fitting the spare
8. Wind up the jack so that the flange in the wheel* (p. 319) 4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
bodywork ends up in the notch in the • Changing wheels - taking out the spare important that the wheel bolts are tight-
head of the jack. wheel* (p. 317) ened with the correct tightening torque.
Check the torque with a torque wrench.
9. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. • Jack (p. 314)
Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the • Spare wheel* (p. 316)
wheel. • Warning triangle (p. 322)
• Wheel bolts (p. 313)

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 5. Putting back the jack* and tools 3. If the spare wheel has been used, then
the punctured wheel can be placed in the
plastic bag contained in the package with
the gloves. Place the foam block back in
the storage compartment and tighten the
mounting screw to the floor of the storage
compartment.
If the spare wheel has not been used,
place the foam block in the spare wheel
and place the spare wheel back in the
storage compartment. Tighten the attach-
ing screw to the floor of the storage com-
partment.
Refit any full wheel covers. The tools and jack must be returned to their 4. Return the detachable towbar.
correct places in the foam block after use.
NOTE 1. Unscrew the towing eye from the wheel NOTE
bolt wrench. • After a tyre has been inflated, always
The wheel cover outlet for the valve must
be positioned over the valve on the wheel 2. Put back any tools that have been used in refit the dust cap in order to avoid
rim during fitting. the relevant compartments in the foam damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,
block in the following order: etc.
• towing eye/funnel/torx wrench/socket • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
for locking wheel bolts/tool for wheel
unscrew.
covers
• jack (must be cranked to the correct
height so that it fits into the foam IMPORTANT
block's compartment, the handle
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
above the foot and down in the groove intended location in the car's cargo area
in the foam block) when not in use.
• socket wrench (above the jack).

09 Wheels and tyres
Related information Tyres - air pressure Tyre pressure label 09

• Changing wheels - taking out the spare Tyres can have different air pressures which
wheel* (p. 317) are measured in bar.
318) Check the air pressure in the tyres
The air pressure (p. 456) for the tyres must
• Jack (p. 314)
be checked every month. Check air pressure
• Spare wheel* (p. 316) with cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres
• Warning triangle (p. 322) are the same temperature as the ambient
• Wheel bolts (p. 313) temperature. After several few kilometres of
driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure
increases. Inadequate tyre pressure increases
G021830
fuel consumption, shortens tyre lifespan and
impairs the car's roadholding. Driving on
tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could The tyre pressure label on the driver's side
result in the tyres overheating and being door pillar (between front and rear door)
damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling shows which pressures the tyres should have
comfort, road noise and steering characteris- at different loads and speed conditions. This
tics. is also specified in the tyre pressure table.
• Tyre pressures for the car's recom-
NOTE mended tyre dimension (p. 315)
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is • ECO pressure results in improved fuel
a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also economy (p. 299)
varies depending on ambient temperature.
NOTE
Temperature differences change the
tyre pressure.
Fuel economy, ECO pressure

In order to obtain optimum fuel economy at
speeds below 160 km/h an ECO pressure is
recommended (applies to both full and light
load - see the tyre pressure table (p. 456)).

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 Related information Warning triangle Lift the floor hatch (or push the rear part
• Tyres - speed ratings (p. 316) The warning triangle is used to warn other of the luggage compartment floor for-
• Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 311) road users of a stationary vehicle. wards in models with a jointed floor and
then lift the lower floor) and remove the
• Tyres - maintenance (p. 311) Storage and folding up warning triangle.
Take the warning triangle from the case,
fold out and assemble the two loose
sides.
Fold out the warning triangle's support
legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warn-
ing triangle. Position the warning triangle in a
suitable place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
properly secured in the cargo area after use.
Related information
• Spare wheel* (p. 316)

09 Wheels and tyres
First aid kit* Emergency puncture repair* Related information 09

The first aid box contains first aid equipment. Emergency puncture repair, the emergency • Emergency puncture repair* - operation
puncture repair kit* (TMK - Temporary Mobi- (p. 325)
lity Kit), is used to seal a puncture and check • Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking
and adjust the air pressure. (p. 327)
The emergency puncture repair kit consists of • Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 325)
a compressor and a bottle of sealant. The
sealing works as a temporary repair. The
sealing fluid bottle must be replaced before
its expiration date and after use. The sealing
fluid effectively seals tyres punctured in the
tread.
NOTE
A case containing first aid equipment is The emergency puncture repair kit is only
located on the left-hand side of the cargo intended for sealing tyres with a puncture
area. in the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited

capacity to seal tyres which have punctures
in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emer-
gency puncture repair kit if they have larger
slits, cracks or similar damage. Connect the
compressor to one of the car's 12 V sockets.
Choose the socket that is nearest to the
punctured tyre.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.

09 Wheels and tyres
09 Emergency puncture repair kit* - 5. Lift the TMK compressor unit straight up.
location 6. To access the bottle of sealant, it must be
Emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - Tempo- pushed to the left until it can be lifted out
rary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture of the foam block.
and check and adjust the air pressure.
Location of the emergency puncture NOTE

repair kit To access the towing eye/wheel wrench in
the foam block:
• Version 1: Lift the emergency punc-
ture repair kit compressor unit (point 5)
to access the wheel wrench. Lift out
Version 2. the bottle of sealant (point 6) to access
Set up the warning triangle if a tyre is being the towing eye.
sealed in a trafficked location. The warning • Version 2: Lift the emergency punc-
triangle and emergency puncture repair kit ture repair kit compressor unit (point 5)
are located under the floor in the cargo area. to access the towing eye. The wheel
wrench is located underneath the jack.
1. Lift the rear edge of the luggage compart-
ment floor (or on models with a jointed
luggage compartment floor, take hold of After use, hook the belt back onto the left
Version 1. side.
the luggage compartment floor handle, lift
and move the rear part of the floor for- Version 1: The belt must be pulled behind the
wards). foam block (not above).
2. Lift out the storage compartment Version 2: The belt must be in the fork on the
(optional extra) - models with a jointed rear part of the foam block.
luggage compartment floor only.
Related information
3. Lift out the lower floor (models with a join-
• Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
ted luggage compartment floor only). (p. 325)
4. Unhook the elastic part of the belt over • Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant
the TMK compressor unit on the left side. (p. 329)

09 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair kit* - Related information Emergency puncture repair* - 09

overview • Emergency puncture repair kit* - location operation
Emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - Tempo- (p. 324) Emergency puncture repair, the emergency
rary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture • Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant puncture repair kit* (TMK - Temporary Mobi-
and check and adjust the air pressure. (p. 329) lity Kit), is used to seal a puncture and check
• Emergency puncture repair* (p. 323) and adjust the air pressure.
• Emergency puncture repair* - stowing Emergency puncture repair
components (p. 329)
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose For information on the function of the parts, see

Emergency puncture repair kit.
Bottle holder with sealant
Pressure gauge

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 1. Detach the label for maximum permitted 4. Screw the bottle into its holder. 7. Flick the switch to position I.
speed (which is fitted on one side of the
compressor) and affix it to the steering WARNING WARNING
wheel.
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped Never stand next to the tyre when the
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage. compressor is running. If cracks or
WARNING unevenness arise then the compressor
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h must be switched off immediately. The
5. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw journey should not be continued. Contact-
after the emergency tyre repair kit has in the air hose valve connection to the
been used. Volvo recommends that you ing an authorised tyre centre is recom-
bottom of the thread on the tyre's air mended.
visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum valve.
driving distance is 200 km). The staff there 6. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
can determine whether or not the tyre can NOTE
start the car.
be repaired or if it needs to be replaced. When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
WARNING drops after approximately 30 seconds.
WARNING Do not leave children in the car without
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the supervision when the engine is running. 8. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
case of contact with skin, wash away the
fluid with soap and water.
IMPORTANT
2. Check that the switch is in position 0 and Risk of overheating. The compressor must
locate the cable and the air hose. not run for more than 10 minutes.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.
The seal is broken automatically when the
bottle is screwed in.
3. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the

bottle's stopper.
326
09 Wheels and tyres
9. Switch off the compressor to check the Emergency puncture repair* - 09

WARNING
pressure on the pressure gauge. Mini- rechecking
mum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
Emergency puncture repair (p. 323), in which with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
3.5 bar. (Release air with the pressure the emergency puncture repair kit (p. 325)*
reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too (TMK - Temporary Mobility Kit), is used to seal
high.) a puncture and check and adjust the air pres- 3. Make sure the compressor is switched
sure. off. Detach the air hose and cable. Refit
WARNING the dust cap.
Check tyre pressure 4. Fold the hose into the box and leave the
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the
1. Connect the tyre sealing equipment bottle where it is. Place TMK in the cargo
hole in the tyre is too big. The journey
should not be continued. Contacting an again. area.
authorised tyre centre is recommended. 2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge. NOTE
10. Switch off the compressor and unplug the •
cable from the 12 V socket.
If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is • After a tyre has been inflated, always
insufficiently sealed. The journey refit the dust cap in order to avoid
11. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and should not be continued. Contact a damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,
fit the valve cap. tyre centre. etc.
12. As soon as possible, drive approximately • If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
bar, the tyre must be inflated to the caps can rust and become difficult to
3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so
pressure specified in accordance with unscrew.
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
the tyre pressure table (p. 456) (1 bar
Related information = 100 kPa). Release air using the pres-
sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure NOTE
is too high. The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must
• Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking
be replaced after use. Volvo recommends
(p. 327)
that this replacement is performed by an
• Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview authorised Volvo workshop.
(p. 325)
• Emergency puncture repair* - stowing
WARNING
components (p. 329)
Check the tyre pressure regularly.

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 Volvo recommends that you drive to the near- Inflating tyres with the emergency IMPORTANT
est authorised Volvo workshop for the puncture repair kit*
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Risk of overheating. The compressor must
The car's original tyres can be inflated using not run for more than 10 minutes.
Advise the workshop that the tyre contains the compressor in the emergency puncture
sealing fluid. repair kit.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in
WARNING 1. The compressor must be switched off. accordance with the tyre pressure table.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0 (Release air using the pressure reducing
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h and locate the cable and air hose. valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)
after the emergency tyre repair kit has
been used. Volvo recommends that you 2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw 6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
visit an authorised Volvo workshop for in the air hose valve connection to the hose and cable.
inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum bottom of the thread on the tyre's air
driving distance is 200 km). The staff there 7. Refit the dust cap.
valve.
can determine whether or not the tyre can
be repaired or if it needs to be replaced. Related information
WARNING • Emergency puncture repair* (p. 323)
Related information Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in • Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
danger to life. Never leave the engine run- (p. 325)
• Emergency puncture repair* - operation
(p. 325) ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf-
ficient ventilation.
• Emergency puncture repair* - stowing
components (p. 329)
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's

12 V sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the
switch to position I.

09 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair* - stowing Emergency puncture repair kit* - 09

components sealant
After using the puncture repair kit, the com- The container (bottle) with the emergency
ponents returned to their correct places in the puncture repair kit (p. 325) contains sealant
foam block. and it can be replaced.
Replace the bottle when the expiration date

has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-
mentally hazardous waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natu-
Version 2. ral rubber-latex.
The components are fitted in the foam block Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
in the following order: reaction in the event of skin contact.
1. Socket wrench Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
2. Towing eye Store out of the reach of children.
Version 1. 3. Bottle
The components are fitted in the foam block 4. TMK kit Related information
in the following order: • Emergency puncture repair* (p. 323)
5. Jack
1. Towing eye/socket wrench • Emergency puncture repair kit* - location
Related information (p. 324)
2. Bottle (pressed in from the side)
3. TMK kit
• Emergency puncture repair* - operation
4. Funnel (p. 325)
5. Jack • Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking
6. Torx wrench (p. 327)
7. Towbar • Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 325)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme

To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-
ble, follow the Volvo service programme as
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
10
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised
Volvo workshop to perform the service and
maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the
personnel, special tools and service literature
to guarantee the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Related information
• Climate control system - fault tracing and
repair (p. 340)
331
Raising the car

When raising the car it is important that the
jack or lifting arms are fitted in the intended
points on the car's underbody.
10
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a
jack is selected other than the one recom-
mended by Volvo, follow the instructions
supplied with the equipment.
332
10
Jacking points (arrows) for the jack that belongs to the car and lifting points (marked in red).
If the car is raised with a front workshop jack
then it must be positioned under one of the
two lifting points furthest in under the car. If
the car is raised with a rear workshop jack
then it must be positioned under one of the
lifting points. Ensure that the workshop jack
is positioned so that the car cannot slide off
the jack. Always use axle stands or similar.
If the car is raised with a two-pillar workshop
lift then the front and rear lifting arms can be
positioned under the outer lifting points (jack-
ing points). Alternatively, the inner lifting
points can be used at the front.
Related information
318)
333
Bonnet - opening and closing Move the catch to the left and open the Engine compartment - overview
The bonnet can be opened when the handle bonnet. (The catch hook is located The overview shows normal checking points.
in the passenger compartment has been between the headlamp and grille, see
turned clockwise and the lock by the grille has illustration.)
10 been moved to the left.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed.
Related information
• Engine compartment - checking (p. 335)
• Engine compartment - overview (p. 334)
The handle for bonnet opening is always on the The appearance of the engine compartment may
left-hand side. differ depending on engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Filling washer fluid
Radiator
Engine oil dipstick1

Filling engine oil
Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid

(located on the driver's side)
Turn the handle about 20-25 degrees
clockwise. You will hear when the catch Starter battery
releases.
Relay and fuse box
Air filter
1 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
334
WARNING Engine compartment - checking Engine oil - general

Some oils and fluids should be checked at An approved engine oil must be used in order
The ignition system has very high voltage
and output. The voltage in the ignition sys- regular intervals. that the recommended service intervals can
tem is highly dangerous. The car's electri- be applied.
cal system must always be in key position Regular checking 10
0 when work is being performed in the Check the following oils and fluids at regular
engine compartment; see Key positions - intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
functions at different levels (p. 71).
• Coolant
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition
coil when the car's electrical system is in
• Engine oil
key position II or when the engine is hot. • Washer fluid
Related information WARNING

• Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 334) Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment,
• Engine compartment - checking (p. 335)
behind the radiator) may start automati-
cally some after the engine has been
switched off.
Volvo recommends:
Always have the engine cleaned by a
workshop. There is a risk of fire if the
engine is hot.
Related information
• Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 334)
• Engine compartment - overview (p. 334)
• Coolant - level (p. 339)
• Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 336)
• Washer fluid - filling (p. 350)
335
||
When driving under adverse conditions, see texts. Certain variants have both systems. Engine oil - checking and filling
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information. Depending on engine variant the oil level is
444). checked with the dipstick or the electronic oil
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord-
ance with the intervals specified in the Serv- level sensor.
10 IMPORTANT ice and Warranty Booklet.
In order to fulfil the requirements for the Using oil of a higher than specified grade is
engine's service intervals all engines are permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a
has been made very carefully with regard higher grade; see Engine oil - adverse driving
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel conditions (p. 444).
consumption and environmental impact.
For filling capacities, see Engine oil - grade
An approved engine oil must be used in and volume (p. 445).
order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed Related information
grade of oil for both filling and oil change, • Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 336)
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-
ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of

low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure.
Certain engine variants have an oil pressure
sensor, and then the combined instrument
panel's warning symbol for low oil pressure is
used. Other variants have an oil level sensor,
when the driver is informed via the instru-
ment's warning symbol and display
336
Engine with oil dipstick2 6. If required, check the level again, do it

after driving a short distance. Then repeat
steps 1-4.
WARNING 10
Never fill above the MAX mark. The level
should never be above MAX or below MIN
as this could lead to engine damage.
WARNING
G021737
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani-
The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX fold due to the risk of fire.
Dipstick and filler pipe. marks.
Checking the oil level in a new car is espe- Measurement and filling if required Engine with electronic oil level sensor3
cially important before the first scheduled oil 1. Ensure that the car is level. After switch-
change. ing off the engine it is important to wait
5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back
Volvo recommends checking the oil level
to the sump.
every 2 500 km. The most accurate measure-
ments are made on a cold engine before star- 2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.
ting. The measurement will be inaccurate if
3. Re-insert the dipstick.
taken immediately after the engine is
switched off. The dipstick will indicate that 4. Pull it out and check the level.
the level is too low because the oil has not 5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres
had time to flow down into the oil sump. should be added. If the level is signifi-
cantly below, then an additional amount
is required.
Filler pipe4.
2 Only applies to petrol and 4-cyl. diesel.

3 Only applies to 5-cyl. diesel.
4 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
}}
337
||
You do not need to take action with respect IMPORTANT 2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand
to the engine oil level before a message is stalk switch to position Oil level.
shown in the combined instrument panel's In the event of the message Oil level low
Refill 0.5 litre, only fill with 0.5 litres. > You will then see information displayed
information display, see following figure. about the engine oil level.
10
NOTE
The oil level is only detected by the system
during driving. The system cannot directly
detect changes when the oil is filled or
drained. The car must be driven
about 30 km before the oil level display is
correct.
WARNING
Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4)
appears as shown in the illustration below.
Message and graph in the display. The left-hand The level must never be above MAX or The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill
display shows the digital combined instrument below MIN, as this could lead to engine more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. The rec-
panel and the right-hand the analogue. ommended filling level is 4. Message and graph
damage.
Message in the display. The left-hand display shows the
digital combined instrument panel and the right-
Engine oil level WARNING hand the analogue.
On certain cars, the oil level can be checked Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani- Related information
using the electronic oil level gauge with the fold due to the risk of fire. • Engine oil - general (p. 335)
thumbwheel when the engine is switched off.
Measuring the oil level
WARNING If the oil level needs to be checked then it
If the message Oil service required is should be carried out in accordance with the
shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may sequence below.
be too high. 1. Activate key position II; see Key positions
- functions at different levels (p. 71).
338
Coolant - level WARNING IMPORTANT

The coolant cools the internal combustion
engine to the correct operating temperature.
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant • A high content of chlorine, chlorides
requires topping up when the engine is at and other salts may cause corrosion in
The heat that is transferred from the engine to operating temperature, unscrew the the cooling system.
the coolant can be used to heat the passen- expansion tank cap slowly to gently 10
ger compartment. release the overpressure. • Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
The coolant level must lie between the MIN
and MAX marks on the expansion tank. For capacities and for standards regarding • Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
water quality; see Coolant - grade and vol-
Checking the level and topping up ume (p. 447). • Mix the coolant with approved quality
tap water. In the event of any doubt
Check the coolant regularly about water quality, used ready-mixed
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX coolant in accordance with Volvo rec-
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is ommendations.
not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could • When changing coolant/replacing
occur, causing a risk of damage to the cooling system components, flush the
engine. cooling system clean with approved
quality tap water or flush with ready-
mixed coolant.
• The engine must only be run with a
well-filled cooling system. Otherwise,
temperatures that are too high may
occur resulting in the risk of damage
When topping up the coolant, follow the (cracks) in the cylinder head.
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather
conditions. Never top up with water only. The
risk of freezing increases with both too little
and too much coolant concentrate.
339
Brake and clutch fluid - level Filling Climate control system - fault tracing
Brake and clutch fluid level should be and repair
between the reservoir MIN and MAX marks. The air conditioning system must only be
serviced and repaired by an authorised work-
10 Checking the level shop.
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-
voir. The level must be between the MIN and Troubleshooting and repair
MAX marks that are visible inside the reser- The air conditioning system contains fluores-
voir. Check the level regularly. cent tracing agents. Use ultraviolet light when
Change the brake fluid every other year or at looking for leaks.
every other regular service. Volvo recommends that you contact an
For capacities and recommended brake fluid authorised Volvo workshop.
grade, see Brake fluid - grade and volume (p. The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.
449). The fluid should be changed annually on WARNING
cars driven in conditions requiring hard, fre- Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.
The air conditioning system contains pres-
quent braking, such as driving in mountains The level must be between the MIN and MAX surised refrigerant R134a. This system
or tropical climates with high humidity. marks, which are located on the inside of the must only be serviced and repaired by an
reservoir. authorised workshop.
WARNING
IMPORTANT Related information
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- Do not forget to refit the cap. • Volvo service programme (p. 331)
ther before topping up the brake fluid.
Volvo recommends that the reason for the
loss of brake fluid is investigated by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
340
Lamp replacement WARNING NOTE

Lamp replacement can be carried out for
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
bulbs. When replacing LED and Xenon lamps, replacement of Xenon lamps must be car- lamps and rear lamps may temporarily
please refer to a workshop. ried out at a workshop - an authorised have condensation on the inside of the
Volvo workshop is recommended. Working lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is 10
The bulbs are specified (p. 347). The follow- with Xenon lamps demands extreme cau- designed to withstand this. Condensation
ing list contains locations of bulbs and other tion because the headlamp is equipped is normally vented out of the lamp housing
light sources that are specialised, such as with a high voltage unit. when the lamp has been switched on for a
LED5 lamps, or are unsuitable for changing time.
for some other reason, except at a workshop:
WARNING
• Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon Related information
lamps) The car’s electrical system must be in key • Lamps - specifications (p. 347)
position 0 when replacing bulbs; see Key
• Position/parking lamps front6 positions - functions at different levels (p. • Lamp replacement - location of front
71). lamps (p. 342)
• Daytime running lights6
• Side direction indicators, door mirrors6 lamps (p. 345)
• Approach lighting, door mirrors IMPORTANT
• Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
• Interior and cargo area lighting Never touch the glass part of the bulbs (p. 347)
with your fingers. Grease from your fingers
• Glovebox lighting is vaporised by the heat, coating the
• Position/parking lamps rear reflector and then causing damage.
• Side marker lamps, rear
• Brake light above the rear windscreen NOTE
• Number plate lighting. If an error message remains after the bro-
ken bulb has been replaced then we rec-
ommend that you visit an authorised Volvo
workshop.
5 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

6 Certain variants
341
Lamp replacement - location of front Lamp replacement - headlamps 5. Press down the catch.
lamps All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the
Unplug the connector.
The overview shows the location of the lamps engine compartment. First loosen and remove
at the front. the whole headlamp. Place the headlamp on a soft surface so
10 as not to scratch the lens.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the
connector.
6. Replace the relevant bulb as instructed.

The headlamp must be fitted and the contact
fitted correctly before switching on the lights
or switching key position.
Related information
Position/parking lamps (p. 344) (LED in 1. Lift out the bonnet stop.
Xenon headlamps) • Lamp replacement - location of front
2. Loosen the screw with a Torx tool, lamps (p. 342)
Main beam in Xenon headlamps (p.
343) / Extra main beam in Xenon head- size T30. • Lamp replacement - cover for main/
lamps (p. 344) 3. Turn the locking pin anticlockwise. dipped beam bulbs (p. 343)
Dipped beam in halogen headlamps (p. • Lamps - specifications (p. 347)
343) / Xenon lamps in Xenon headlamps Pull out the locking pin.
(p. 341) 4. Release the headlamp by alternately
Indicator (p. 344) tilting and pulling it out.
Daytime running lights (p. 345) (LED* or
IMPORTANT
bulb depending on variant)
Take care when lifting out the headlamp so
Related information as not to damage any parts.
• Lamps - specifications (p. 347)

Lamp replacement - cover for main/ Lamp replacement - dipped beam Lamp replacement - main beam
dipped beam bulbs The dipped beam bulb is fitted inside the The main beam bulb is fitted inside the head-
Main/dipped beam bulbs are accessed by headlamp's larger cover. lamp's larger cover.
releasing the headlamp's larger cover.
NOTE NOTE 10
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps. Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
1. Press the hooks together.

Angle out the cover.
2. Replace the relevant bulb as instructed. 1. Detach the headlamp (p. 342). 1. Detach the headlamp (p. 342).
2. Undo the cover (p. 343). 2. Undo the cover (p. 343).
Related information
• Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 342) 3. Press the bulb holder upwards until it 3. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
• Lamp replacement - dipped beam (p. releases.
Pull out the bulb holder.
343)
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts
• Lamp replacement - main beam (p. 343)
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
• Lamp replacement - extra main beam (p. in reverse order.
344) Related information
Related information • Lamps - specifications (p. 347)
343
Lamp replacement - extra main beam Lamp replacement - direction Lamp replacement - position/parking
The extra main beam bulb is fitted inside the indicators front lamps front
headlamp's larger cover. The direction indicator lamp is fitted inside The position/parking lamp bulb holder is
the headlamp's smaller cover. located on the side of the headlamp.
10 NOTE
Applies to cars with Xenon headlamps*. NOTE
Not applicable to cars with Xenon head-
lamps* as these are equipped with LED
lamps.
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 342).

2. Undo the cover.
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 342). 3. Push in the catch.
2. Undo the cover (p. 343).
3. Press the bulb holder upwards until it 1. Detach the headlamp (p. 342).
detaches. in reverse order. 2. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Pull out the bulb holder. Related information Pull out the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts • Lamps - specifications (p. 347) 3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts
in reverse order. in reverse order.

Lamp replacement - daytime running Lamp replacement - location of rear Lamp replacement - direction
lights lamps indicators rear, brake lights and
The daytime running light bulb is fitted inside The overview shows the location of the lamps reversing lamp
the bumper's cover. at the rear. Direction indicators rear, brake lights and
reversing lamp are replaced from inside the 10
NOTE cargo area.
Only applies to daytime running lights with
bulbs.
Brake light (LED)
Position/parking lights (LED)

1. Remove the hatch in the upholstery (1) on
Brake lights (p. 345) the same side as the defective bulb.
Side marker lamps (LED) 2. Press the catch sideways.

1. Undo the cover.
2. Indicator (p. 345) Pull out the bulb holder.
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
Pull out the bulb holder. Reversing lamp (p. 345)
and turning anticlockwise.
3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts Fog lamps (p. 346) 4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts
in reverse order. in reverse order.
Related information
Related information
345
||
Related information Lamp replacement - rear fog lamp Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
• Lamp replacement - location of rear The fog lamp bulb is fitted in the bumper's
lamps (p. 345) Pull out the bulb holder.
bulb holder.
• Lamps - specifications (p. 347) 3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts
10 in reverse order.
Related information
Insert (approx.20 mm) a blunt, knife-like

object, e.g. a table knife, at the triangle.
Carefully prise until the lug releases.
IMPORTANT
Take care not to damage any parts.
346
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror Lamps - specifications Lighting [W]A Type

lighting The specifications apply to bulbs. When
The vanity mirror's lamps are fitted inside the replacing LED and Xenon lamps, please refer Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL
lamp lenses. to a workshop.
Vanity mirror light- 1,2 T5 Socket 10
ing W2x4.6d
Lighting [W]A Type
A Watt
Dipped beamB 55 H7 LL B Cars with halogen headlamps
C Cars with Xenon headlamps
65 H9 D Certain variants
Main beamB
Additional main 55 H7 LL Related information

beamC • Lamp replacement (p. 341)
Front direction 21 HY21W lamps (p. 342)
indicators
Position/parking 5 W5W LL lamps (p. 345)
lamps frontB • Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens (p. 347)
and gently prize up the lug on the edge. Daytime running 19 PW19W
2. Carefully detach and lift aside the lamp lightsD
lens.
Side direction indi- 5 WY5W LL
3. Using needle-nose pliers, pull the bulb cators, door mir-
straight out to the side. Do not squeeze rorsD
too hard with the pliers. Otherwise, the
bulb glass could break. Direction indica- 21 PY21W LL
tors, rear
in reverse order. Brake lights 21 P21W LL
Related information Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL
347
Wiper blades IMPORTANT IMPORTANT

The wiper blades sweep water away from the
Before placing the wiper blades in the If the wiper arms in the service position
windscreen and rear window. Together with service position, make sure that they are have been folded up from the windscreen,
the washer fluid they clean the windows and not frozen down. they must be folded back down onto the
10 ensure visibility for driving. windscreen before the wipers are allowed
to return to their starting position. This is to
The windscreen wiper blades must be in serv- 1. Place the remote control key in the igni- avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.
ice position when they are to be replaced. tion lock7 and briefly press the START/
STOP ENGINE button to set the car's
Service position Replacing the wiper blades
electrical system to key position I. For
detailed information on key positions, see
Key positions - functions at different lev-
els (p. 71).
2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE
button again to set the car’s electrical
system in key position 0.
3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk
switch up and hold it in position for
approx. 1 second.
> The wipers then move to standing
straight up.
Wiper blades in service position.
The wipers return to their starting position
In order to make replacement possible, to
when you briefly press the START/STOP
clean or lift the wiper blades (for scraping off
ENGINE button to set the car’s electrical sys-
ice from the windscreen, for example), they
tem to key position I (or when the car is
must be in service position.
started).
7 Not necessary in cars with Keyless function.
348
Replacing the wiper blades, rear

window
10
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in serv-
G021763
ice position. Press the button located on
the wiper blade mounting and pull
straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
NOTE
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"
is heard. The wiper blades are different lengths. The 1. Fold out the wiper arm.
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
Check that the blade is firmly installed. the passenger side. 2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the
arrow).
4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the 3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end
windscreen. WARNING
position against the wiper arm as a lever
The wipers return from service position to Since the car is equipped with airbag to detach the blade more easily.
their starting position when you briefly press Pedestrian Airbag, Volvo recommends that
genuine wiper arms are used and that you 4. Press the new wiper blade into position.
the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the Check that it is firmly installed.
only use genuine parts for them.
car’s electrical system to key position I (or
when the car is started). 5. Lower the wiper arm.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen,
see Car washing (p. 363).
}}
349
||
IMPORTANT Washer fluid - filling Starter battery
Washer fluid is used for cleaning the head- The service life and function of the battery is
Check the blades regularly. Neglected
maintenance shortens the service life of lamps and windows. Washer fluid with anti- influenced by factors such as the number of
the wiper blades. freeze must be used during winter. starts, discharging, driving style, driving con-
10 ditions, climatic conditions etc.
Related information The starter battery is a traditional 12 V bat-
• Washer fluid - filling (p. 350) tery.
• Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running.
• Check that the cables to the battery are
correctly connected and properly tight-
ened.
WARNING
• The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
The windscreen and headlamp washers share can be formed if a jump lead is con-
a common reservoir. nected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
IMPORTANT
• The battery contains sulphuric acid,
Use washer fluid with antifreeze during the which can cause serious burns.
winter to avoid freezing in the pump, reser- • If sulphuric acid comes into contact
voir and hoses. with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
For capacities, see Washer fluid - quality and splashes into the eyes - seek medical
volume (p. 449). attention immediately.
Related information
• Wiper blades (p. 348) IMPORTANT
Only a traditional battery charger should
ever be used when charging the battery.
350
IMPORTANT NOTE Battery - symbols

There are information and warning symbols
If the following instruction is not observed The life of the battery is shortened if it
then the energy saving function for info- becomes discharged repeatedly. on the battery.
tainment system may be temporarily dis-
engaged, and/or the message in the com-
The life of the battery is affected by several Symbols on the battery 10
factors, including driving conditions and
bined instrument panel's information dis- Use protective goggles.
climate. Battery starting capacity decrea-
play about the starter battery's state of
ses gradually with time and therefore
charge may be temporarily inapplicable,
needs to be recharged if the car is not
following the connection of an external
used for a longer time or when it is only
battery or battery charger:
driven short distances. Extreme cold fur-
• The negative battery terminal on the ther limits starting capacity.
car's starter battery must never be To maintain the battery in good condition,
used for connecting an external bat- Further information is
at least 15 minutes of driving/week is rec-
tery or battery charger - only the car ommended or that the battery is con- available in the owner's
chassis may be used as the ground- nected to a battery charger with automatic manual.
ing point. trickle charging.
See Jump starting (p. 270) for a descrip- A battery that is kept fully charged has a
tion of how the cable clamps must be maximum service life.
attached. Store the battery out of
Related information the reach of children.
• Battery - symbols (p. 351)
• Starter battery - replacement (p. 352)
The battery contains cor-
rosive acid.
351
||
Avoid sparks and naked Starter battery - replacement Battery - Start/Stop
flames. The starter battery should be replaced by an Cars with Start/Stop function, in addition to
authorised workshop. the starter battery, are equipped with a sup-
port battery.
10 The starter battery is a traditional 12 V bat-
tery. Start/Stop
Volvo recommends that you allow an author- Cars with the Start/Stop function are equip-
Risk of explosion. ped with two 12 V batteries - one extra pow-
ised workshop to replace the batteries - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. erful starter battery and one support battery
For more information on the car's starter bat- that helps during the Start/Stop function's
tery, see Jump starting (p. 270). starting sequence.
For more information on the Start/Stop func-
tion, see Start/Stop* (p. 279).
Must be taken for recy-
cling. For more information on the car's starter bat-
tery, see Jump starting (p. 270) and Starter
battery - specification (p. 459).
Battery Start Support

Cold start Starter battery 120C
NOTE capacityA, - specification
An expended battery must be recycled in CCA (A) (p. 459) 180D
an environmentally safe manner as it con-
tains lead. SizeB, 278×175×190C 150×90×106C
L×W×H
(mm) 315×175×190D 150×90×130D
Related information
Capacity 70C 8C
• Battery - Start/Stop (p. 352) (Ah) 80D 10D
A According to EN standard.
B Largest possible size.
C Manual gearbox.
D Automatic gearbox.

IMPORTANT Location of the batteries IMPORTANT

When replacing the starter battery in a car If the following instruction is not observed
with the Start/Stop function, batteries of then the Start/Stop function may tempo-
the correct type must be installed, EFB8 rarily cease to work after the connection of
an external battery or battery charger: 10
for manual gearbox and AGM9 for auto-
matic gearbox. • The negative battery terminal on the
car's starter battery must never be
NOTE used for connecting an external bat-
tery or battery charger - only the car
• The higher the current take-off in the chassis may be used as the ground-
car (extra cooling/heating, etc.) the ing point.
more the batteries must be charged = See Jump starting (p. 270) for a descrip-
increased fuel consumption. tion of how the cable clamps must be
• When the capacity of the battery has (1) Starter battery11 (2) Support battery attached.
fallen below the lowest permissible The support battery normally requires no
level then the Start/Stop function is more service than the normal starter battery.
disengaged. A workshop should be contacted in the event
of questions or problems - an authorised
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due Volvo workshop is recommended.
to high current take-off means:
• The engine starts automatically10 without
the driver depressing the clutch pedal
(manual gearbox).
• The engine starts automatically without
the driver lifting his/her foot off the foot
brake pedal (automatic gearbox).
8 Enhanced Flooded Battery

9 Absorbed Glass Mat
10 Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.
11 See Starter battery (p. 350) for a detailed description of the starter battery.
}}
353
||
NOTE Fuses - general Location, fuse boxes
All electrical functions and components are
If the battery has become so discharged
that everything is "black" and in principle protected by a number of fuses in order to
the car does not have all the normal elec- protect the car's electrical system from dam-
10 trical functions and the engine is subse- age by short circuiting or overloading.
quently started using an external battery or
battery charger, then the Start/Stop func- If an electrical component or function does
tion will be activated. It will then be possi- not work, it may be because the component's
ble for the engine to be auto-stopped but fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If
in the event of an auto-stop the Start/Stop the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a
function may fail to auto-start the engine fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends that
due to inadequate capacity in the battery. you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
The battery must first be charged in order checking.
to ensure a successful auto-start after an
auto-stop. At an outside temperature of Changing Fuse box locations in a left-hand drive car. In
+15 °C the battery needs to be charged for 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the a right-hand drive car the fuse box under the
at least 1 hour. At a lower outside tem- fuse. glovebox changes sides.
perature a charging time of 3-4 hours is
recommended. The recommendation is 2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side Engine compartment
that the battery is charged using an exter- to see whether the curved wire has
nal battery charger. blown. Under the glovebox
If this is not possible then the recommen- 3. If this is the case, replace it with a new Below right front seat
dation is to temporarily deactivate the fuse of the same colour and amperage.
Start/Stop function until the battery has
been adequately recharged. Related information
WARNING • Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 355)
For more information on charging the
starter battery, see Starter battery (p. 350). Never use a foreign object or a fuse with • Fuses - under glovebox (p. 358)
an amperage higher than that specified • Fuses - under right front seat (p. 361)
when replacing a fuse. This could cause
Related information significant damage to the electrical system
• Battery - symbols (p. 351) and possibly lead to fire.
354
Fuses - in engine compartment

Fuses in the engine compartment protect
engine and brake functions, amongst other
things.
10
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers Removing the covers Fold out the locking catches that are
that facilitate the procedure for the removal fitted on the sides of the cover on the
and fitting of fuses. starter battery.
The fuse box also provides space for several Lift the cover straight up.
spare fuses.
Replacing fuses
The fuses can be accessed following the
removal of the cover fitted on the starter bat-
tery and the cover for the electrical distribu-
tion unit.
}}
355
||
Positions Function A
The label on the inside of the cover shows the
positions of the fuses. Central electronic module, refer- 5
ence voltage, support battery
• Fuses 7-18 are of "JCASE" type and
10
should be replaced by a workshop12. Horn 15
• Fuses 19-45 and 47-48 are of "Mini Fuse"
type. Brake lights 5
Function A – –
Fold out the locking catch that is fitted ABS pump 40 Light switches 5
on the side of the electrical distribution
unit. ABS valves 30 Internal relay coils 5
Rotate the cover upward until the lock Headlamp washers* 20
lugs (1) are released. 12 V socket, tunnel console 15
front
Ventilation fan 40
Transmission control module 15
– –
Solenoid clutch A/C (petrol, 15
Primary fuse for fuses 32-36 30 4-cyl. diesel)
– – 12 V socket, tunnel console rear 15
Electric windscreen, right side* 40 Climate sensor*; air intake throt- 10

tle motors
– –
Fold the cover toward the engine to Engine control module (5-cyl.) 5
access the fuses.
Electric windscreen, left side* 40
Power seat, right* 20
Refitting the covers
Parking heater* 20
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Windscreen wipers 20

Function A Function A Function A

Relay coil in cooling fan relay 10 Valves (4-cyl. petrol); Solenoids 10 Charging point, support battery –
(4-cyl., 5-cyl. diesel); Lambda- (4-cyl. petrol); Injectors (5-cyl.
sonds (4-cyl. petrol); Mass air petrol); Lambda-sond (5-cyl. – – 10
flow meter (diesel), Bypass diesel); Crankcase ventilation
valve, EGR cooling (diesel); Reg- heater (5-cyl. diesel) Coolant pump (when no parking 10
ulator valve, fuel flow (5-cyl. die- heater is available)
sel); Regulator valve, fuel pres- Ignition coils (petrol) 10
sure (5-cyl. diesel) Related information
Diesel filter heater; Glow plug 15
control module (5-cyl. diesel)
• Fuses - under glovebox (p. 358)
Relay coil in cooling fan relay 20
(5-cyl. petrol); Lambda-sonds
• Fuses - under right front seat (p. 361)
Engine control module (4-cyl.) 10
(5-cyl. petrol)
Engine control module (5-cyl.); 15
Oil pump, automatic gearbox 10 Throttle unit (5-cyl. petrol)
(5-cyl.); Mass air flow sensor
(petrol); EVAP valve (4-cyl. pet- ABS 5
rol); Valves (5-cyl. petrol); Sole-
noids (5-cyl. petrol); Crankcase Engine control module; Trans- 10
ventilation heater (5-cyl. petrol); mission control module; Airbags
Control motor, turbo (4-cyl. die-
sel); Regulator valve, fuel flow Light height control* 10
(4-cyl. diesel); Control module,
Electric control servo 5
radiator roller cover (4-cyl. die-
sel); Solenoid, piston cooling (5-
Central electronic module 15
cyl. diesel); Turbo control valve
(5-cyl. diesel); Oil level sensor – –
(5-cyl. diesel); Solenoid clutch
A/C (5-cyl.) – –
Collision warning 5
Accelerator pedal sensor 5

Fuses - under glovebox

Fuses under the glovebox protect the airbag
and passenger compartment lighting func-
tions, amongst other things.
10
On the inside of the cover for the fuse box in Cover removal Take hold of the recess and pull until the
the engine compartment there are tweezers locking lugs in the lower edge of the
that facilitate the procedure for the removal cover are released from the fuse box.
and fitting of fuses.
Remove the cover.
The fuse box in the engine compartment
also provides space for several spare fuses.
NOTE
Replacing fuses A relatively large amount of tensile force is
The fuses can be accessed when a protective required to release the locking lugs at the
cover has been removed from the fuse box. top edge of the cover from the electrical
distribution unit.
358
Cover refitting Function A Function A

Rear window wiper 15 Climate panel 10
Interior lighting, Roof console 5 Steering wheel module 7,5 10

for front reading lamps and
passenger compartment light- Siren*; Data link connector 5
ing OBDII
Interior lighting; Power seats* 10 Main beam 15
Blind, glass roof* 10 – –
Rain sensor*; Dimming, interior 5 Reversing lamp 10

Guide in the lower lugs. rearview mirror*; Moisture sen-
sor* Windscreen wipersC; Rear 20
Turn the cover upwards until the upper windscreen wiperC
Collision warning* 5
lugs engage.
Immobiliser 5
– –
NOTE Reserve position 1, constant 15
Make sure that the upper locking lugs are Unlocking, tailgateA 10 voltage
seated properly in the grooves of the elec-
trical distribution unit. – – Reserve position 2, constant 20
voltage
Reserve position 3, constant 5
Positions voltage Movement sensor alarm*; 5
The fuses are of "Mini Fuse" type. Remote receiver
Steering lock 15
Windscreen wipersD; Rear 20
Function A
Combined instrument panel 5 windscreen wiperD
Fuel pump 20
Central locking system, fuel 10 Central locking system, fuel 10
– – filler flapB filler flapE
Unlocking, tailgateF 10
}}

||
Function A
Electric additional heater*; But- 7,5
ton seat heating rear*
10
Airbags; Pedestrian airbag 10
Reserve position 4, constant 7,5

voltage
– –
– –
A See also fuse 84.
B See also fuse 83.
C See also fuse 82.
D See also fuse 77.
E See also fuse 70.
F See also fuse 65.
Related information
• Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 355)
• Fuses - under right front seat (p. 361)

Fuses - under right front seat

Fuses under the right-hand front seat protect
infotainment and trailer functions, amongst
other things.
10
On the inside of the cover for the fuse box in Function A Function A
the engine compartment there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal – – Control panel, left rear door 25
and fitting of fuses.
Keyless* 10 Control panel, right rear door 25
The fuse box in the engine compartment
also provides space for several spare fuses.
Door handle (Keyless*) 5 – –
Positions
Control panel, left front door 25 Power seat left* 20
• Fuses 24-28 are of "JCASE" type and
should be replaced by a workshop13.
Control panel, right front door 25 – –
• Fuses 1-23 and 29-46 are of "Mini Fuse"
type.

}}

||
Function A Function A Function A
Internal relay coil 5 – – – –
10 Audio control unit (amplifier)* 5 BLIS* 5 – –
– – Parking assistance* 5 Related information

Telematics*; Bluetooth* 5 Parking camera* 5
• Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 355)
• Fuses - under glovebox (p. 358)
Audio; Infotainment control unit 15 – –
Digital radio*; TV* 10 – –
12 V socket, cargo area 15 Seat heating (driver's side) 15
– – Seat heating (passenger side) 15
– – – –
– – – –
– – – –
– – Seat heating, rear right* 15
Trailer socket 2* 20 Seat heating, rear left* 15
Primary fuse for fuses 12-16: 40 – –

Infotainment
– –
– –
– –
Trailer socket 1* 40
– –
Rear window defroster 30

Car washing WARNING NOTE

The car should be washed as soon as it
Always have the engine cleaned by a Wash the wiper blades and windscreen
becomes dirty. Wash the car in a car wash workshop. There is a risk of fire if the regularly with lukewarm soap solution or
with oil separator. Use car shampoo. engine is hot. car shampoo.
10
Washing by hand Do not use any strong solvents.
• Remove bird droppings from the paint- IMPORTANT
work as soon as possible. Bird droppings Automatic car washes
contain chemicals that affect and discol- Dirty headlamps have impaired functional-
ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
our paintwork very quickly. An authorised for example. way of washing the car, but it cannot reach
Volvo workshop is recommended for the everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom-
removal of any discoloration. Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents
but use water and a non-scratching mended for achieving optimum results.
• Hose down the underbody. sponge instead.
• Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt NOTE
has been removed so as to reduce the
NOTE The car must only be washed by hand
risk of scratches from washing. Do not
over the first few months. This is because
spray directly onto the locks. Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog the paint is more delicate when it is new.
• If necessary, use cold degreasing agent lamps and rear lamps may temporarily
on very dirty surfaces. Note that in this have condensation on the inside of the
case, the surfaces must not be hot from lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is High-pressure washing
the sun! designed to withstand this. Condensation When using high-pressure washing, use
is normally vented out of the lamp housing sweeping movements and make sure that the
• Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and when the lamp has been switched on for a nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to
plenty of lukewarm water. time. the surface of the car (the distance applies to
• Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm all exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto
soap solution or car shampoo. Wiper blades the locks.
• Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper
a water scraper. If you avoid allowing blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the
drops of water to dry in strong sunlight, windscreen, impair the service life of wiper
you reduce the risk of water drying stains blades.
which may need to be polished out.
For cleaning:
– Set the wiper blades to the service posi-
tion; see Wiper blades (p. 348).
}}
363
||
Testing the brakes IMPORTANT Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
WARNING rubber. or to give the paintwork extra protection.
Always test the brakes after washing the When using degreasant on plastic and The car does not need to be polished until it
10
car, including the parking brake, to ensure rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is is at least one year old. However, the car can
that moisture and corrosion do not attack necessary. Use a soft washing sponge. be waxed during this time. Do not polish or
the brake linings and reduce braking per- wax the car in direct sunlight.
formance. Polishing glossy trim mouldings could
wear away or damage the glossy surface
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
layer.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
Polishing agent that contains abrasive and tar stains using tar remover or white spi-
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
must not be used. rit. More stubborn stains can be removed
The heat from the friction causes the brake
linings to warm up and dry. Do the same using fine rubbing paste designed for car
thing after starting in very damp or cold Rims paintwork.
weather. Only use rim cleaning agent recommended Polish first with a polish and then wax with
by Volvo. liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the the packaging carefully. Many preparations
components contain both polish and wax.
surface and cause stains on chrome-plated
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
aluminium rims.
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
IMPORTANT
Related information
components, such as glossy trim mouldings. • Polishing and waxing (p. 364) Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
When using such a cleaning agent the rubber.
instructions must be followed carefully.
• Cleaning the interior (p. 366)
When using degreasant on plastic and
• Water and dirt-repellent coating (p. 365) rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is
necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could
wear away or damage the glossy surface
layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive
must not be used.
364
IMPORTANT Water and dirt-repellent coating Rustproofing

The windows are treated with a surface coa- The car received a thorough and complete
Only paint treatment recommended by
Volvo should be used. Other treatment ting that improves visibility in difficult weather rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body
such as preserving, sealing, protection, conditions. are made of galvanised sheet metal. The
lustre sealing or similar could damage the underbody is protected by a wear-resistant 10
paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by Water and dirt-repellent coating* anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating
such treatments is not covered by Volvo There is natural wear of the water- rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
warranty. repellent coating. exposed members, cavities, closed sections
Maintenance: and side doors.
Related information
• Car washing (p. 363) • Never use products such as car wax, Inspection and maintenance
degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it
this could ruin their water-repellent prop- is important to keep the car clean. The car's
erties. rustproofing needs to be checked regularly
• Take care when cleaning so as not to and touched-up if necessary in order for it to
damage the glass surface. be maintained.
• To avoid damaging glass surfaces when Under normal conditions the rustproofing
removing ice – only use plastic ice scra- does not require treatment for approximately
pers. 12 years. After this period, it should be trea-
• Treatment with a special finishing agent ted at three-year intervals. Volvo recom-
available from Volvo dealers is recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo
mended in order to maintain the water- workshop for assistance if the car needs fur-
repellent properties. This should be used ther treatment.
first after three years and then each year.
Related information
IMPORTANT • Paint damage (p. 367)
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove

ice from the windows. Use the heating to
remove ice from the door mirrors; see Win-
dows and rearview and door mirrors -
heating (p. 98).
Related information
• Car washing (p. 363)

Cleaning the interior Stains on fabric upholstery and roof with the instructions, preserves the leather's
Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- upholstery protective coating. After a period of use the
ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly A special fabric cleaning agent, available from natural appearance of the leather will never-
and follow the instructions included with the authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to theless emerge, depending more or less on
10 car care product. avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of the surface texture of the leather. This is a
the upholstery. natural maturing of the leather and shows
Vacuuming is important prior to using clean- that it is a natural product.
ing agents.
IMPORTANT To achieve best results Volvo recommends
Carpets and cargo area Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the cleaning and the application of protective
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning fabric upholstery. cream once to four times per year (or more if
of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is
a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. available from your Volvo dealer.
IMPORTANT
Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
• Certain items of coloured clothing (for IMPORTANT
– Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and example, jeans and suede garments)
lift the mat straight up. • Certain items of coloured clothing (for
may stain the upholstery. example, jeans and suede garments)
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in • Never use strong solvents. Such prod- may stain the upholstery.
at each pin. ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and
• Never use strong solvents. Such prod-
leather upholstery. ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and
WARNING leather upholstery.
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat Stains on leather upholstery
in the driver area is firmly affixed and Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to pre- Washing instructions for leather
secured in the pins in order to avoid get- serve its original appearance.
ting caught adjacent to and under the ped- upholstery
als. Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau- 1. Pour the leather cleaner on the damp-
tiful patina over time. The leather is refined ened sponge and squeeze out a strong
and processed so that it retains its natural foam.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for characteristics. It is given a protective coa-
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor ting, but regular cleaning is required in order
movements.
mats should be cleaned with agents recom- to maintain both characteristics and appear-
mended by your Volvo dealer! ance. Volvo offers a comprehensive product 3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
for the cleaning and treatment of leather stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the
upholstery which, when used in accordance stain. Do not rub.
366
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate) Paint damage
allow the leather to dry completely. Paint is an important part of the car's rust-
1. Same procedure as for group 1.
proofing and should therefore be checked
Protective treatment of leather 2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth. regularly. The most common types of paint-
upholstery work damage are stone chips, scratches, and 10
Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)
1. Pour a small amount of the protective marks on the edges of wings, doors and
cream on the felted cloth and massage in 1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.
bumpers.
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular 2. Same procedure as for group 1.
movements on the leather. Touching up minor paintwork damage
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes Stains on interior plastic parts, metal To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paint-
before use. parts and wood parts work should be rectified immediately.
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly Materials
The leather has now been given improved moistened with water, available from Volvo
protection against stains and improved UV dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
protection. parts and surfaces.
Washing instructions for the leather Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
steering wheel stain removers. A special cleaning agent
• Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre- available from Volvo dealers can be used for
moistened sponge and neutral soap. more difficult cleaning.
• Leather needs to breathe. Never cover
Seatbelts
the leather steering wheel with protective
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A spe-
plastic.
cial textile cleaning agent is available from
• Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care your Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is
agents are recommended for best results. dry before allowing it to retract.
If the steering wheel has stains:
Related information
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and • Car washing (p. 363)
blood)
– Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5%
ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use
a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
367
||
• primer14 - a special adhesive primer in a Repair minor paintwork damage such 2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a
spray can is available for e.g. plastic- as stone chips and scratches very fine polishing agent may be carried
coated bumpers out locally if required (e.g. if there are any
• basecoat and clearcoat - available in uneven edges). The surface is cleaned
10 spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks15 thoroughly and left to dry.
• masking tape 3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off
• fine sand paper14.
with a basecoat and clearcoat once the
Colour code primer has dried.
4. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to pro-
tect the undamaged paintwork.
G021832
NOTE
Before work is begun, the car must be clean
and dry and at a temperature above 15 °C. If the stone chip has not penetrated down
to the meal and an undamaged layer of
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the paint remains in place, fill in with basecoat
damaged surface. Then remove the tape and clearcoat as soon as the surface has
to remove any loose paint. been cleaned.
If the damage is down to the metal, use

of a primer is appropriate. In the event of Related information
Code for the car's colour • Rustproofing (p. 365)
damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive
It is important that the correct colour is used. primer should be used to give better
For product label location, see Type designa- results - spray into the lid of the spray
tions (p. 437). can and brush on thinly.
14 If required.
15 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
368
AUDIO AND MEDIA
11 Audio and media
Audio and media NOTE Audyssey MultEQ1

The audio and media system consists of radio
Remove the remote control key from the
(p. 378), media player (p. 389), TV (p. 420)* ignition switch if the audio and media sys-
as well as the option to communicate with tem is being used when the engine is
mobile phone (p. 402) *. Information is pre- switched off. This is to avoid discharging
sented on a 5 or 7-inch* screen in the upper the battery unnecessarily.
section of the centre console. Functions can
be controlled via buttons in the steering
Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic1
11 wheel, in the centre console below the screen
or via a remote control (p. 424) *.
If the audio and media system is active when The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used
the engine is switched off then it is automati- in the development and tuning of the sound
cally activated the next time the key is to ensure a world-class sound experience.
inserted into key position I (p. 71) or higher,
and it continues with the same source (e.g. Related information
radio) as before the engine was switched off • Audio and media - overview (p. 371)
(the driver's door must be closed on cars with • Audio and media - operating the system
Keyless systems*). (p. 371)
Made under license from Dolby Laboratories.
The audio and media system can be used for Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic and the dou- • Audio and media - menu navigation (p.
15 minutes at a time without the remote con- ble-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby 373)
trol key being in the ignition switch by press- Laboratories. • Audio and media - menu overview (p.
ing the On/Off button. 427)
When the car is being started the audio and • Audio and media - audio settings (p. 375)
media system is switched off temporarily and • Picture settings (p. 393)
continues when the engine has started. • Favourites (p. 375)
1 Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.

11 Audio and media
Audio and media - overview Audio and media - operating the

Overview of the audio and media system's system
associated parts. The audio and media system is controlled
from the centre console and partly from the
steering wheel buttons. The information is
presented on the screen in the upper section
of the centre console.
11
AUX2 and USB3 inputs for external audio

sources (e.g. iPod®)
Steering wheel keypad (with*/without
thumbwheel).
display screen. The display screen is
available in two sizes: 5 and 7-inch. The
manual shows a 7-inch display screen.
Control panel in centre console
Related information
• Audio and media (p. 370)
• Audio and media - operating the system
(p. 371)
2 Applicable to Performance only

3 Not applicable to Performance

11 Audio and media
||
Scroll/fast forward/search - A short button then a shortcut menu is shown with Preset buttons, input of numbers and let-
press scrolls among tracks, preset radio sta- commonly used menu options. ters.
tions4 or chapters5. A long press fast for- OK/MENU - press the thumbwheel in the FAV – shortcut to a favourite setting. The
wards through disc tracks or searches for the steering wheel or the button in the centre button can be programmed for a commonly
next available radio station. console to accept a menu selection. If OK/ used function in AM, FM, etc. For more infor-
SOUND - press for access to audio set- MENU is pressed while in the normal view, a mation, see favourites (p. 375)).
tings (bass, treble, etc.). For more informa- menu for the selected source opens (e.g.
RADIO or MEDIA). Arrow to the right of the MUTE6 - press to switch off the radio/
tion, see general audio settings (p. 376).
11 screen is shown when there are underlying media audio or restore the audio if it has been
VOL - raise or lower volume. menus. switched off.
ON/OFF/MUTE - short press starts TUNE - turn the thumbwheel in the steer- Voice recognition7 - press to activate
the system and long press (until the screen is ing wheel or the knob in the centre console to voice recognition (for mobile phone and navi-
off) switches off. Note that the whole of the scroll among tracks/folders, radio and TV* gation system connected via Bluetooth®*).
Sensus system (including navigation * and stations, phone contacts* or to navigate
phone functions*) starts/switches off at the among choices on the display screen. Related information
same time. Briefly press to mute the sound • Audio and media - menu navigation (p.
(MUTE) or restore the sound if it had been EXIT - short press leads upwards in the 373)
switched off. menu system, interrupts current function, • Audio and media (p. 370)
interrupts/rejects phone calls or erases
Disc insert and eject slot. entered characters. Long press leads to nor-
mal view, or if you are in normal view to the
Disc eject.
highest menu level (main source view), from
Main sources - press to select the main where you can reach the same main source
source (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA). Last active buttons located in the centre console (7).
source is shown (e.g. FM1). A new source INFO - If more information than can be
view is selected if the main source button is
shown on the screen is available, press the
pressed while in RADIO or MEDIA. If you are
INFO button to see the remaining informa-
in TEL* or NAV* and press the main source
tion.
4 Does not apply to DAB.

5 Only applies to DVD discs.
6 Cars without navigation.
7 Cars with navigation*.

11 Audio and media
Audio and media - menu navigation steering wheel buttons. The information is
The audio and media system is controlled presented on the screen in the upper section
from the centre console and partly from the of the centre console.
11
The example shows navigation to different functions when a disc is played back. (1) Main source button, (2) Normal view, (3) Shortcut/source menu, (4) Quick
menu, (5) Source menu
}}
373
11 Audio and media
||
Select main source by pressing a main Quick menu - fast mode when TUNE is
source button (1) (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL). To turned, e.g. for changing disc tracks, radio
navigate through the source menus, use the station, etc.
controls TUNE, OK/MENU, EXIT or the main
source button (1). Source menu - for menu navigation
(accessed by pressing OK/MENU).
To view available functions, see Audio and
media - menu overview (p. 427). Related information
11 NOTE (p. 371)
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel • Audio and media - menu overview (p.
keypad with a thumbwheel*, these can be 427)
used instead of the controls in the centre
console (TUNE, OK/MENU, EXIT), Audio
and media - operating the system (p. 371).
Menus and views in the display screen

The appearance depends on the source,
equipment in the car, settings, etc.
Main source button - press to switch the
main source or to show the Shortcut/Source
menu in the active source.
Normal view - normal mode for the
source.
Shortcut/Source menu - shows com-
monly used menu options in the main
sources, e.g. TEL and MEDIA (accessed by
pressing the active source's main source but-
ton (1)).
374
11 Audio and media
Favourites • DISC Audio and media - audio settings

Save frequently used functions as favourites. • USB* The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimal
Possible functions that can be saved are • iPod* sound reproduction, but can be adapted to
within radio, media, reversing camera and your needs.
menu source MY CAR where many of the • Bluetooth*
car's functions are handled, e.g. setting the • AUX Setting for optimal sound reproduction
clock, door mirrors and locks. The function is • TV* The audio system is pre-calibrated for opti-
then accessed easily by pressing the FAV mum sound reproduction by means of digital
It is also possible to select and store a signal processing.
button. favourite for MY CAR, CAM* and NAV*. 11
Favourites can also be selected and stored This calibration takes into account loud-
under MY CAR. For more information on the speakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104). acoustics, listener position etc. for each com-
bination of car model and audio system.
Related information
There is a also a dynamic calibration that
• Save as favourite (p. 418)
takes into account the position of the volume
control, radio reception and vehicle speed.
The controls explained in these operating
instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and
Equalizer, are only intended for the user to
be able to adapt the sound reproduction
according to personal taste.
The FAV button can be used to store func-
Related information
tions that are used frequently so that the
function can be started simply by pressing
(p. 376)
FAV. You can select a favourite (e.g.
Equalizer) for each function as follows: • Audio and media - advanced audio set-
tings (p. 376)
In RADIO mode:
• Setting the audio profile (p. 377)
• AM
• FM1/FM2
• DAB1*/DAB2*
In MEDIA mode:

11 Audio and media
Audio and media - general audio • Subwoofer*8 - Bass speaker level. Audio and media - advanced audio
settings • DPL II centre level3 channel centre settings
General audio settings for the audio and level8 - Volume for centre speaker. Adapt the audio settings for radio and media
media system. according to your wishes.
• DPL II surround level8, 9 – Level for sur-
Press SOUND to access the audio settings round. The following functions can be adapted:
menu (Bass, Treble, etc.). Scroll forward with
Related information • Setting the equaliser (p. 377)
SOUND or OK/MENU to your selection (e.g.
Treble).
• Audio and media - menu navigation (p. • Setting the audio profile (p. 377)
11 373)
Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save
• Setting the audio volume and automatic
• Audio and media - audio settings (p. 375) volume control (p. 377)
the setting with OK/MENU.
• Audio and media - advanced audio set- • Setting the audio volume for external
Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to tings (p. 376) audio source (p. 397)
access other options:
Related information
• Surround8 - Can be set to the On/Off • Audio and media - audio settings (p. 375)
position. When On is selected, the sys-
tem selects the setting for optimal sound • Audio and media - general audio settings
reproduction. Normally DPLII and (p. 376)
then appear in the display screen. If the
recording is made with Dolby Digital tech-
nology then playback will take place with
this setting, then appears in the
display screen. When Off is selected, 3-
channel stereo is available.
• Bass - Bass level.
• Treble - Treble level.
• Fader – Balance between the front and
rear speakers.
• Balance – Balance between the left and
right-hand speakers.
8 Only Premium Sound Multimedia.

9 Only when Surround is activated.

11 Audio and media
Setting the equaliser Setting the audio profile Setting the audio volume and
Set the equaliser10
and adjust the volume Set the audio profile and optimise your audio automatic volume control
separately for different radio frequencies or experience in accordance with your needs. Set the audio compensation for excessive
TV. noise in the passenger compartment.
The sound experience can be optimised for
1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio the driver's seat, both front seats or the rear The audio system compensates for disrupting
settings and select Equalizer. seat. If there are passengers in both the front noises in the passenger compartment by
and rear seats then the option recommended increasing the volume in relation to the speed
2. Select wavelength by turning TUNE and
is; both front seats. The options can be of the car. The compensation level can be set
confirm with OK/MENU. 11
selected under Audio settings Sound to low, medium, high or off. Select the level
3. Adjust the audio settings by turning stage. under Audio settings Volume
TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU. Con- compensation.
tinue in the same way with other wave- Related information
lengths you want to change. • Audio and media - audio settings (p. 375) Related information
4. When you have finished with audio set- • Audio and media - menu navigation (p. • Audio and media - advanced audio set-
373) tings (p. 376)
tings, press EXIT to confirm and return to
normal view. • Audio and media - menu navigation (p.
373)
Related information
• Audio and media - advanced audio set-
tings (p. 376)
• Audio and media - menu navigation (p.
373)
10 Not applicable to Performance
377
11 Audio and media
Radio • Navigation in channel group list (Ensem- Radio tuning

It is possible to listen to the AM and FM radio ble) (p. 388) The radio automatically compiles a radio sta-
frequencies and, also in certain cases, digital • Radio stations as presets (p. 380) tion list11 of the strongest FM stations whose
radio (DAB) (p. 387)*. • Scan radio frequencies (p. 386) signals it is currently receiving. It is possible to
activate automatic or manual radio tuning.
• Radio programme types (PTY) (p. 383)
• Radio text (p. 385) NOTE
• DAB to DAB link (p. 388)
The reception is dependent both on how
11 • Digital radio* (DAB) - frequencies (p. 388) good the signal strength and signal quality
• Digital radio* (DAB) - subchannel (p. 389) are. The transmission may be disturbed by
various factors such as tall buildings or the
• Digital radio* (DAB) - resetting (p. 389) transmitter being far away. Coverage level
can also vary depending on where in the
Related information country you are located.
(p. 371)
Related information
• Automatic radio tuning (p. 379)
Controls for radio functions. 373)
• Manual radio tuning (p. 380)
For operating the radio, see Operating the • Audio and media - menu overview (p.
system (p. 371) and Menu navigation (p. 373). 427) • Radio station list (p. 379)
AM/FM radio
• Radio tuning (p. 378)
• Radio stations as presets (p. 380)
• Scan radio frequencies (p. 386)
• RDS functions (p. 381)
• Radio text (p. 385)
Digital radio* (DAB)

• Digital radio* (DAB) (p. 387)
• Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn)
(p. 387)

11 Audio and media
Automatic radio tuning Radio station list NOTE

Searches for the next/previous available sta- The radio automatically compiles a radio sta-
tion. tion list12 of the strongest FM stations whose
• The list only shows the frequencies of
stations that are currently being
signals it is currently receiving. This enables received, not a complete list of all
1. Press RADIO, turn TUNE until the you to find a station when you drive into an
desired wavelength (AM, FM1 etc.) is radio frequencies on the selected
area where you do not know the radio sta- wavelength.
shown, press OK/MENU. tions and their frequencies.
2. Hold in
• If the signal from the currently received
/ in the centre console station is weak, this may prevent the
To go to the list and select a station:
(or in the steering wheel keypad*). The radio from updating the station list. If 11
radio searches for the next/previous avail- 1. Select the desired wavelength (FM1 or this occurs, press the INFO button
able station. FM2). (while the station list is shown in the
2. Turn TUNE one step in either direction. display screen) in order to change to
Related information manual tuning and set a frequency. If
This displays the list of all stations in the
• Radio tuning (p. 378) the station list is no longer shown, turn
area. The currently tuned station is indi-
TUNE one step in either direction to
cated with enlarged text in the list.
show the list again, and press INFO to
3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to switch.
select a station from the list.
4. Confirm your choice by pressing OK/ The list disappears from the display screen
MENU. after a few seconds.
If the station list is no longer shown, turn
TUNE one step in either direction and press
the INFO button in the centre console to
change to manual tuning (or to return from
manual tuning to the function for "Station
list").
Related information
11 Does not apply to Performance.


11 Audio and media
Manual radio tuning NOTE Radio stations as presets

The radio automatically compiles a radio sta- Frequently used radio stations are optimally
The preset from the factory is that the
tion list13, but it is possible to perform radio radio automatically searches for the sta- saved as presets in order to facilitate simple
tuning manually. tions in the area where you are driving (see activation.
section "Radio station list").
The preset from the factory is that the radio
shows the station list of the strongest stations But if you have changed over to manual
tuning (by pressing the INFO button in the
in the area when you turn TUNE (see the sec-
centre console when the station list was
tion Radio station list (p. 379)). When the shown), then the radio remains set in the
11
radio station list is shown, press the INFO function for manual tuning the next time
button in the centre console to change to you switch on the radio. To change back
manual tuning. This allows you to select a fre- to the function for "Radio station list", turn
quency from the list of all available radio fre- TUNE one step (to show the complete list
quencies in the selected wavelength. In other of stations) and press the button INFO.
words, if turn TUNE one step in a manual Note that if you press INFO when the sta-
search the frequency is changed from e.g. tion list is not shown then INFO is acti-
93.3 to 93.4 MHz, etc. vated. For more information on this func-
tion, see Audio and media - operating the Preset buttons.
To manually select a station: system (p. 371).
1. Press the RADIO button, turn TUNE until AM/FM radio
the required frequency band (AM, FM1 Related information 10 presets can be stored per wavelength
etc.) is displayed, press OK/MENU. • Radio tuning (p. 378) (AM, FM1 etc.).
2. Turn TUNE to select a frequency. The stored presets are selected using the
preset buttons.
1. Tune into a station, see Radio tuning (p.
378).
380
11 Audio and media
2. Hold in one of the preset buttons for a vated/deactivated in DAB mode under DAB RDS functions
few seconds, the sound disappears dur- menu Show presets. With RDS the radio can automatically change
ing this time and returns when the station to the strongest transmitter. RDS provides the
is stored. The preset button can now be NOTE facility to receive e.g. traffic information (TP)
used. and to search for certain programme types
The audio system's DAB system does not
A list of pre-selected channels can be shown (PTY).
support all functions in the DAB standard.
in the display screen14. The function is acti- RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmit-
vated/deactivated in FM/AM mode under FM ters into a network. An FM transmitter in such
Related information
menu Show presets or AM menu a network sends information that gives an 11
Show presets. RDS radio the following functions:
Digital radio (DAB) 373) • Automatically switches to a stronger
10 station presets can be stored per wave- transmitter if reception in the area is poor.
length. DAB has 2 memories for presets: • Searches for programme type, such as
DAB1 and DAB2. Storage of presets is per- traffic information or news.
formed by means of a long press on the • Receives text information on current radio
desired preset button, for more information programme.
see AM/FM radio above. The stored presets
are selected using the preset buttons. NOTE
A preset contains one channel but no sub- Some radio stations do not use RDS or
channels. If a subchannel is being played and only selected parts of its functionality.
a preset is saved then only the main channel
is registered. This is because subchannels
If a required programme type is located the
are temporary. At the next attempt to retrieve
radio can switch stations interrupting the
the preset, the channel which contained the
audio source currently in use. For example, if
subchannel will be played. The preset is not
the CD player is in use, it is paused. The
dependent on the channel list.
interrupting transmission is played back at a
A list of pre-selected channels can be shown preset volume, see Volume control for inter-
in the display screen14. The function is acti- rupting radio programme types (PTY) (p.
385). The radio returns to the previous audio
14 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
381
11 Audio and media
||
source and volume when the set programme Alarms in the event of accidents and Traffic information (TP)
type is no longer broadcast. disasters This function allows traffic information that is
The programme functions alarm (ALARM!), This function is used to warn of serious acci- broadcast within a set radio station's RDS
traffic information (TP), news (NEWS), and dents and catastrophes. The message network to break through.
programme types (PTY) interrupt one another ALARM! appears on the display screen when
an alarm message is transmitted. The symbol TP shows that the function is
in order of priority, where alarm has the high-
activated. If the preset station can send traffic
est priority and programme types has the The alarm cannot be temporarily interrupted information then this is shown by TP glowing
lowest. For additional settings of program- or deactivated. brightly in the display screen, otherwise TP
11 ming interruptions (EON Distant and EON
will be grey.
Local), see Enhanced Other Networks (EON)
(p. 383). Press EXIT to return to the interrup- Related information – Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
ted audio source, press the OK/MENU to • RDS functions (p. 381)
FM menu TP.
clear the message.
TP from selected station/all stations
Related information The radio can only interrupt for traffic infor-
• Alarms in the event of accidents and dis- mation from the selected station or all sta-
asters (p. 382) tions within the RDS network.
• Traffic information (TP) (p. 382) – Go in FM mode to FM menu
• Enhanced Other Networks (EON) (p. 383)
Advanced settings Set TP favourite
• Traffic information (TP) (p. 382) to change.
• News broadcasts (p. 383)
Related information
• Automatic radio frequency update (AF) (p.
385)
• Regional radio programmes (REG) (p.
386)
• Resetting RDS functions (p. 386)
382
11 Audio and media
Enhanced Other Networks (EON) News broadcasts Radio programme types (PTY)
EON is useful in urban areas with many This function allows news broadcasts within a The PTY function can be used to select one
regional radio stations. It allows the distance set radio station's RDS network to break or more radio programme types, such as Pop
between the car and the radio station trans- through. Music and Serious Classical Music. After
mitter to determine when programme func- selecting a programme type, navigation only
tions should interrupt the current audio The symbol NEWS shows that the function is takes place within the channels that are
source. active. broadcasting that type.
– Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
– Activate/deactivate in FM mode by PTY can be selected for FM and DAB radio.
selecting one of the options under FM FM menu News settings News. The PTY symbol is shown in the display 11
menu Advanced settings EON: News from selected station/all stations screen when the function is active. This func-
tion allows programme types broadcast
• Local – interrupts only if the radio station The radio can only interrupt for news from the
within a set station's RDS network to break
transmitter is close. selected station or all stations in the RDS net-
through.
work.
• Distant15 – interrupts if the station trans-
mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of – Go in FM mode to FM menu News PTY for FM radio
static. 1. Activate in FM mode by first selecting the
settings Set news favourite to
change. programme types under FM menu
Related information
Advanced settings PTY settings
• RDS functions (p. 381) Related information Select PTY.
2. Then the PTY function must be activated
under FM menu Advanced settings
PTY settings Receive traffic
bulletins from other networks.
Deactivation of the PTY function is performed
in FM mode under FM menu Advanced
settings PTY settings Receive traffic
bulletins from other networks. Selected
programme types (PTY) are not reset.
15 Factory settings.
383
11 Audio and media
||
Resetting and removing PTY are performed Searching radio programme types Show radio programme types (PTY)
under FM menu Advanced settings (PTY) Some radio stations broadcast information
PTY settings Select PTY Clear all. This function searches the whole frequency about programme type and programme cate-
band for the selected radio programme type. gory. The current station's radio programme
PTY for DAB radio type, e.g. Pop Music and Serious Classical
Programme type is selected in DAB mode 1. In FM mode select one or more PTY Music, can be shown in the display screen.
under DAB menu PTY filtering. Exit this under FM menu Advanced settings PTY can be selected for FM and DAB radio.
mode as follows: PTY settings Select PTY.
Show radio programme type for FM
11 – Press EXIT. 2. Go to FM menu Advanced settings radio
> An indicator is shown in the display PTY settings Seek PTY. – Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
screen when PTY is activated. FM menu Advanced settings PTY
To finish searching, press EXIT.
In some cases DAB radio will exit PTY mode, settings Show PTY text.
see DAB to DAB link (p. 388). – To continue searching for another broad-
cast of the selected programme types, Show radio programme type for DAB
Related information press on or . radio
• Searching radio programme types (PTY) Activate/deactivate in DAB mode under DAB
(p. 384) Related information
menu Advanced settings Show PTY
• Show radio programme types (PTY) (p. • Radio programme types (PTY) (p. 383)
text.
384) • Show radio programme types (PTY) (p.
• Volume control for interrupting radio pro- 384) Related information
gramme types (PTY) (p. 385) • RDS functions (p. 381) • Radio programme types (PTY) (p. 383)
• RDS functions (p. 381) • Searching radio programme types (PTY)
(p. 384)
384
11 Audio and media
Volume control for interrupting radio Radio text Automatic radio frequency update
programme types (PTY) Certain RDS stations transmit information on (AF)
programme content, artists etc. This informa- The function selects the strongest transmitter
The interrupting programme types, e.g. tion is shown in the display screen16. Radio for the set radio station.
NEWS or TP, are heard at the volume text can be shown for FM and DAB radio.
selected for each respective programme In order to find a strong transmitter the func-
type. If the volume level is adjusted during the Radio text for FM radio tion may, in exceptional cases, need to
programme interruption, the new level is – Activate/deactivate in FM mode under search the entire FM wavelength.
saved until the next programme interruption. FM menu Show radio text. – Activate/deactivate in FM mode under 11
Related information FM menu Advanced settings
Radio text for DAB radio
• Radio programme types (PTY) (p. 383) Alternative frequency.
Activate/deactivate in DAB mode under DAB
menu Show radio text. Related information
NOTE
Only one of the functions "Show radio
text" and "Show presets" can be acti-
vated at a time. If one of them is activated
when the other is already activated, then
the previously activated function is deacti-
vated automatically. Both functions can be
deactivated.
Related information
16 Only cars with 7-inch screen
385
11 Audio and media
Regional radio programmes (REG) Scan radio frequencies Resetting RDS functions
This function causes the radio to continue The function automatically searches for avail- All radio settings can be reset to the original
with a regional radio transmitter even if its sig- able radio channels and takes into account factory settings.
nal strength is low. any programme type filtering (PTY).
– The reset is carried out in FM mode under
The symbol REG shows that the function is When a station is found, it is played for FM menu Advanced settings
active. approx. 10 seconds before scanning is Reset all FM settings.
resumed. When a station is playing back it is
– Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
saved as a preset in the usual way, see Radio Related information
11 FM menu Advanced settings REG. stations as presets (p. 380). • RDS functions (p. 381)
Related information – To start scanning go in FM/AM/DAB*
• RDS functions (p. 381) mode to FM menu Scan, AM menu
Scan or DAB menu Scan.
NOTE
Scanning stops if a station is saved.
Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY

mode. In which case only channels of the
pre-selected programme type are played.
Related information

11 Audio and media
Digital radio* (DAB) • Digital radio* (DAB) - resetting (p. 389) Storing channel groups (Ensemble
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital learn)
broadcasting system for radio. The car sup- Storage of channel groups (Ensemble learn)
ports DAB, DAB+ and DMB. for digital radio (DAB).
NOTE When the vehicle is moved to a new broad-

casting area, programming of existing chan-
Coverage for DAB is not available in all nel groups in the area may be necessary.
locations. If there is no coverage then the
message No reception is shown in the Programming of channel groups creates an 11
display screen. updated list of all available channel groups.
The list is not updated automatically.
Service and Ensemble Programming is carried out in the menu sys-
• Service - Channel, radio channel (only tem in DAB mode under DAB menu
audio services are supported by the sys- Ensemble learn. Programming can also take
tem). place as follows:
• Ensemble - A collection of radio chan-
nels on the same frequency. 1. Turn TUNE one step in either direction.
> Ensemble learn is shown in the list of
Related information available channel groups.
• Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn)
(p. 387) 2. Press OK/MENU.
> New programming is started.
• Navigation in channel group list (Ensem-
ble) (p. 388) Programming can be cancelled with EXIT.
• Radio (p. 378)
Related information
• Radio stations as presets (p. 380) • Digital radio* (DAB) (p. 387)
• Scan radio frequencies (p. 386) • Navigation in channel group list (Ensem-
• Radio programme types (PTY) (p. 383) ble) (p. 388)
• DAB to DAB link (p. 388)
• Digital radio* (DAB) - frequencies (p. 388)
• Digital radio* (DAB) - subchannel (p. 389)

11 Audio and media
Navigation in channel group list DAB to DAB link Digital radio* (DAB) - frequencies
(Ensemble) DAB to DAB linking means that the DAB radio DAB can be transmitted on two wave-
Navigation in the channel group list (Ensem- can go from one channel with poor or no lengths17.
ble) for digital radio (DAB). reception to the same channel in another
channel group with better reception. • Band III - covers most areas.
To navigate in and access the channel group • LBand - available only in a few areas.
list turn TUNE. The name of the Ensemble is There may be a certain delay when changing
shown in the upper part of the display screen. channel group. There may be a period of By selecting for example Band III on its own,
When switching to the new Ensemble the silence between the current channel no channel programming takes place more
11
name changes to the new one. longer being available to the new channel quickly than if both Band III and LBand have
becoming available. been selected. It is not certain that all channel
• Service - Shows channels irrespective of groups will be found. Wavelength selection
the channel group to which they are allo- The function can be activated/deactivated in does not affect the stored memories.
cated. The list can also be filtered using DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced
the selection of programme type (PTY Wavelengths can be deactivated/activated in
settings DAB linking.
filtering), see Radio programme types DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced
(PTY) (p. 383). Related information settings DAB band.
Related information • Digital radio* (DAB) (p. 387)
Related information
• Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn) • Digital radio* (DAB) (p. 387)
(p. 387)
• Digital radio* (DAB) (p. 387)
17 Not all areas/countries use both wavelengths.

11 Audio and media
Digital radio* (DAB) - subchannel Digital radio* (DAB) - resetting Media player
Secondary components are usually named All DAB settings can be reset to the original The media player can playback audio and
subchannels. These are temporary and can factory settings. video from CD/DVD* (p. 390) discs and exter-
contain e.g. translations of the main pro- nally connected audio sources via AUX/USB*
gramme into other languages. – The reset is carried out in DAB mode (p. 394) input, or wirelessly stream (p. 397)
under DAB menu Advanced settings audio files from external devices using
If one or more subchannels are broadcast Reset all DAB settings. Bluetooth®. Certain media players can show
then the symbol is shown to the left of the TV (p. 420)* and have the option to communi-
channel name in the display screen. A sub- Related information cate with a mobile phone (p. 402)* via 11
channel is indicated by the - symbol appear- • Digital radio* (DAB) (p. 387) Bluetooth®.
ing to the left of the channel name in the dis-
play screen.
Press to access the subchannels.
Subchannels can only be accessed on the
selected main channel and not on any other
channel without selecting it.
Display of subchannels can be deactivated/
activated in DAB mode under DAB menu
Advanced settings Sub channels
Related information
• Digital radio* (DAB) (p. 387) Controls for the media player.
For operating the media player, see Audio
and media - operating the system (p. 371)
and Audio and media - menu navigation (p.
373).
Related information
• Audio and media (p. 370)
• Voice recognition* control of a mobile
phone (p. 412)

11 Audio and media
• Remote control* (p. 424) CD/DVD* Fast forward/reverse

• Media player - compatible file formats (p. The media player can playback pre-recorded It is possible to fast forward/rewind audio and
393) and burned CD/DVD18 discs. video files.19
The media player supports and can play the Hold the button for / depressed in
following main types of discs and files: order to fast forward/rewind audio or video
• Pre-recorded CD discs (CD Audio). files forward/backward.
• Burned CD discs with audio and/or video Audio files are fast forwarded/rewound at one
11 files18. speed, while video files can be fast forwar-
• ded/rewound at several speeds. Repeatedly
Pre-recorded DVD video discs18.
press the buttons / to increase the
• Burned DVD discs18 with audio and/or fast forward/rewind speed for video files.
video files.
Release the button to return to viewing at
For more information about the supported normal speed.
formats, see Media player - compatible file
formats (p. 393). Related information
• Playback and navigation of CD/DVD* disc
(p. 371) (p. 418)
• Playback and navigation of external audio
(p. 418) source (p. 395)
• Playback and navigation of DVD video
discs (p. 391)

19 Only applies to CD/DVD* discs, USB and iPod®.

11 Audio and media
Random selection of disc track or Playback and navigation of DVD video Navigation in the DVD video disc's
audio file discs menu
This function plays the tracks/audio files in When playing back a DVD video disc21 a disc
random order20. menu may appear on the display screen. The
disc menu gives access to additional func-
To listen to the tracks/audio files in random tions and settings, such as selecting subtitles,
order for the selected source: language and scene selection.
1. Press OK/MENU For basic playback and navigation, see Oper-
ating the system, page (p. 371). See below for 11
2. Turn TUNE to Random
a more detailed description.
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
the function. NOTE
Related information A video film is only shown when the car is
• Audio and media - operating the system stationary. When the car is moving at a
(p. 371) speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu is
shown and No visual media available performed using the number keys in the cen-
• Playback and navigation of CD/DVD* disc while driving appears on the display tre console as illustrated above.
(p. 418) screen, although the audio is heard during
• Playback and navigation of external audio this time. The picture is shown again as Changing chapter or title
source (p. 395) soon as the car's speed falls below about Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and
6 km/h. navigate through them (if the film is being
• Media Bluetooth®* (p. 397)
played back then it is paused). Press OK/
MENU to select the chapter, this also leads
back to the original position (if the film was
being played back then it is restarted). Press
EXIT to access the title list.
Titles are selected in the title list by turning
TUNE and the selection is confirmed with
OK/MENU, this also leads back to the chap-
ter list. Press OK/MENU to activate the
20 Does not apply to DVD video discs. For externally connected audio sources via the AUX/USB input this only applies to USB and iPod®. Not supported by all mobile phones.

11 Audio and media
||
selection and return to the start position. Use Camera angle for playback of DVD DivX® Video On Demand
EXIT to cancel the selection and this leads video discs The media player can be registered in order to
back to the original position (without any If the DVD video disc supports it, the function play DivX VOD23 type files from burned discs
selection being made). can be used to choose from which camera or USB.
The chapter can also be changed by pressing position a particular scene should be
shown22. The code for registration can be found in the
on / on the centre console or the
steering wheel keypad*. menu system MY CAR Settings
Go in disc mode to Disc menu Advanced Information DivX® VOD code. For gen-
11 Related information settings Angle. eral information on menus, see under
• Audio and media - operating the system MY CAR, see MY CAR - operation (p. 104).
(p. 371) Related information
• Audio and media - operating the system For more information visit www.divx.com/
(p. 371) vod.
(p. 418)
• Camera angle for playback of DVD video • Playback and navigation of DVD video Related information
discs (p. 391) • Audio and media - operating the system
discs (p. 392)
(p. 371)
• Playback and navigation of burned discs
with audio/video files (p. 419) • Playback and navigation of DVD video
discs (p. 391)
• Fast forward/reverse (p. 390)
• Scan disc track or audio file (p. 420) • Playback and navigation of burned discs
with audio/video files (p. 419)
• Random selection of disc track or audio
file (p. 391) • Playback and navigation of external audio
source (p. 395)
• Media player - compatible file formats (p.
393)
22 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.


11 Audio and media
Picture settings Media player - compatible file formats Compatible file formats via USB
You can adjust the display settings (when the The media player can play back a variety of connection
car is stationary) for brightness and contrast24. file types and is compatible with the formats Audio and video files in the following table are
in the following tables. supported by the system for playback via the
1. Press OK/MENU and select Image USB connection.
settings, confirm with OK/MENU. Compatible file formats for CD/DVD*
2. Turn TUNE to the adjustment option and discs Audio format mp3, wma, aac, m4a
confirm with OK/MENU.
NOTE Video formatA divx, avi, asf
11
3. Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and
confirm with OK/MENU. Dual format, double-sided discs (DVD A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre-
Plus, CD-DVD format) are thicker than reg- mium Sound Multimedia.
To return to the settings list, press the OK/ ular CD discs and therefore playback can-
MENU or EXIT. not be guaranteed and malfunction may Related information
arise. • Playback and navigation of CD/DVD* disc
The picture settings can be reset to factory (p. 418)
settings with the Reset option. If a CD contains a mixture of MP3 and
CDDA tracks, all MP3s will be ignored. • Playback and navigation of DVD video
discs (p. 391)
Related information
• Audio and media - operating the system • Playback and navigation of burned discs
Audio formatA CD audio, mp3, wma with audio/video files (p. 419)
(p. 371)
• Audio and media (p. 370) Audio formatB CD audio, mp3, wma, aac, • Playback and navigation of external audio
m4a source (p. 395)
Video formatC CD video, DVD video,

divx, avi, asf
A Applies to Performance.
B Does not apply to Performance.
C Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre-
mium Sound Multimedia.

11 Audio and media
External audio source via AUX/USB* USB memory MP3 player

input To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick, Many MP3 players have their own file sys-
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or only store music files on it. It takes a lot tems that are not supported by the audio sys-
MP3 player, can be connected to the audio longer for the system to load storage media tem. For use in the system, an MP3 player
system. that contains anything other than compatible must be set in USB Removable device/
music files. Mass Storage Device mode.
NOTE iPod®
An iPod® is charged and supplied with power
11 The system supports mobile media com- by the USB connection* via the player's con-
pliant with USB 2.0 and the FAT32 file sys-
tem and can handle 1000 folders with a
nection cable.
maximum of 254 subfolders/files in every
folder. The top level, which can handle up NOTE
to 1000 subfolders/files, is an exception to
this. The system only supports the playback of
audio files from iPod®.
NOTE
NOTE
When using a longer model USB memory
An audio source connected to the USB input stick the use of a USB adapter cable is When an iPod® is used as audio source,
can be operated25 using the car's audio con- recommended. This is to avoid mechanical the car's infotainment system has a menu
trols. A device connected via the AUX input wear to the USB input and the connected structure that is similar to the iPod® play-
cannot be controlled via the car. USB memory stick. er's own menu structure.
There is a recess in the right-hand rear edge

USB hub Related information
of the tunnel console where cables can be
routed so that the hatch can be closed with- It is possible to connect a USB hub to the • Audio and media - operating the system
USB connection and thereby connect multi- (p. 371)
out cables being pinched.
ple USB devices simultaneously. Selection of • Connecting an external audio source via
An iPod® or MP3 player with rechargeable USB device is made in USB mode under AUX/USB* input (p. 395)
batteries is recharged (when the ignition is on
or the engine is running) if the device is plug-
USB menu Select USB device. • Playback and navigation of external audio
source (p. 395)
ged into the USB connection.
25 Only applies to the media source connected via the USB connection.

11 Audio and media
Connecting an external audio source The text Reading USB is shown in the dis- Playback and navigation of external
via AUX/USB* input play screen when the system is loading the audio source
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or storage media's file structure. Depending on Playback and navigation of external audio
MP3 player, can be connected to the audio the file structure and number of files there source26
system via any of the connections in the cen- may be some delay before loading is finished.
For basic playback and navigation, see Audio
tre console.
NOTE and media - operating the system (p. 371).
See below for a more detailed description.
The system supports most iPod® models
produced in 2005 or later. Audio files have the symbol , video 11
files27 have the symbol and folders
NOTE have the symbol .
To prevent damage to the USB connec- When playback of a file is complete the play-
tion, this is shut off if the USB connection back of the other files (of the same type) in
is short-circuited or if a connected USB
unit is taking too much power (this may
happen if the unit connected does not
meet the USB standard). The USB con-
nection is reactivated automatically the
Connection points for external audio sources.
next time the ignition is turned on, unless
the fault persists.
To connect the audio source:
1. Press MEDIA, turn TUNE to the required Related information
sound source USB, iPod or AUX, press • External audio source via AUX/USB* input
OK/MENU. (p. 394)
> If USB is selected then Connect USB • Playback and navigation of external audio
is shown in the display screen. source (p. 395)
2. Connect your audio source to one of the
connections in the centre console's stor-
age compartment (see previous illustra-
tion).
26 Only applies to USB and iPod®.


11 Audio and media
||
that particular folder continues. Change28 of file has been played out, playback of the first • DivX® Video On Demand (p. 392)
folder takes place automatically when all the file starts again.
files in the current folder have been played 1. Press OK/MENU
back. The system automatically detects and
changes setting when a device containing 2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder
only audio files or only video files is con- 3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
nected to the USB port and then it plays back the function.
these files. However, the system does not
change setting if a device containing a mix- Pause
11
ture of audio and video files is connected to When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE
the USB port, but instead the player contin- is pressed, the media player is paused. When
ues to play back the previous file type. the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed
again, the media player starts. It is also possi-
Search function26 ble to pause via the menu system30, press
The keypad on the control panel in the centre OK/MENU, select Play/Pause.
console can be used to find a filename in the
current folder. Related information
The search function is accessed either by • Audio and media - operating the system
(p. 371)
turning TUNE (to access the folder structure)
or by pressing one of the letter keys. As a let- • Connecting an external audio source via
ter or character in a search string is entered AUX/USB* input (p. 395)
you get closer to your search target. • External audio source via AUX/USB* input
(p. 394)
Start playback of a file by pressing OK/
MENU. • Fast forward/reverse (p. 390)
• Scan disc track or audio file (p. 420)
Repeat folder29
This function makes it possible to play files in
• Random selection of disc track or audio
file (p. 391)
a folder over and over again. When the last
• Media player - compatible file formats (p.
393)
28 If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.

26 Only applies to USB and iPod®.
29 Only applies to USB.
30 Does not apply to iPod®

11 Audio and media
Setting the audio volume for external Related information Media Bluetooth®*
audio source • Audio and media - advanced audio set- The car's media player (p. 389) is equipped
Set the volume for external audio player. If the tings (p. 376) with Bluetooth®31 and can wirelessly play
volume is too high or too low then the quality • Audio and media - menu navigation (p. streaming audio files from external devices
of the sound may deteriorate. 373) with Bluetooth®, such as mobile phones and
PDAs.
If an external audio source (e.g. an MP3
player or iPod®) is connected to the AUX
input then the audio source that is connected
11
can have a different volume than the audio
system's internal volume (e.g. radio). Correct
this by adjusting the volume of the input:
1. Press the MEDIA button and turn TUNE
to AUX and wait a few seconds or press
OK/MENU.
2. Press OK/MENU and then turn TUNE to
AUX input volume. Confirm with OK/
MENU.
3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume for the Media Bluetooth® functions, controls overview.
AUX input. The device must first be registered and con-
nected to the car (p. 399).
NOTE
Navigation and control of the audio can be
If the external audio source's volume is too carried out via the centre console buttons or
high or too low, the quality of the sound via the steering wheel keypad*. In some
may deteriorate. The audio quality may external devices it is also possible to change
also be impaired if the player is charged
while the infotainment system is in AUX tracks from the device.
mode. In which case, avoid charging the To play back the audio the car's media player
player via the 12 V socket. must first be set in Bluetooth mode.
31 Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

11 Audio and media
||
When a mobile phone is connected to the • Scan disc track or audio file (p. 420) Connecting and disconnecting a
car, it is also possible to remotely control a • Random selection of disc track or audio Bluetooth®* device
selection of the mobile phone's functions, see file (p. 391) The car is equipped with Bluetooth®32 and
Bluetooth® handsfree phone (p. 402). Switch can wirelessly communicate with other
between the main sources TEL and MEDIA
Bluetooth® devices after registration and con-
to operate each one's functions.
nection (p. 399).
NOTE A maximum of ten Bluetooth® devices can be

11 registered. Registration is performed once
The Bluetooth® media player must support
the Audio/Video Remote Control Profile per device. After registration the device no
(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution longer needs to be activated as visible/
Profile (A2DP). The player should use searchable.
AVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwise
some functions may not work. When the Bluetooth® function is active and
the last device connected is in range it is con-
Not all mobile phones and external media nected automatically to the car. When the car
players available in the market are fully searches for the last device connected its
compatible with the Bluetooth® function in
name is shown in the display screen. To con-
the car's media player. Volvo recommends
that you contact an authorised Volvo nect to another device, press EXIT and select
dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for change device (p. 401).
information on compatible phones and
When the Bluetooth® device is out of range of
external media players.
the car it is automatically disconnected. It is
also possible to manually disconnect (p. 401)
NOTE a device. If you want to deregister a
Bluetooth® device from the car, select
The car's media player can only play the
audio files via the Bluetooth® function. Removing a Bluetooth®* device (p. 402). The
car will then not locate the device automati-
cally.
Related information
• Audio and media - operating the system It is possible to have two Bluetooth® devices
(p. 371) connected simultaneously. One phone and
one media device, which it is possible to
• Connecting and disconnecting a
switch between (p. 401). It is also possible to
Bluetooth®* device (p. 398)

11 Audio and media
call with the phone and simultaneously Registering a Bluetooth®* device although it starts from the main source
stream audio files. It is possible to have two Bluetooth®
devices MEDIA.
Related information connected simultaneously. One phone and There are two possible ways of connecting
one media device, which it is possible to devices, either search for the external device
(p. 371) switch between. It is also possible to call with from the car, or search for the car from the
the phone and simultaneously stream audio external device. If one option does not work
• Media Bluetooth®* (p. 397) files. then try with the other.
• Bluetooth® handsfree phone (p. 402)
If you are not already in the normal view for
A maximum of ten Bluetooth® devices can be 11
registered. Registration is performed once the phone, press TEL in the centre console.
per device. After registration the device no
longer needs to be activated as visible/
searchable.
NOTE
If the phone's operating system is updated
then it is possible that the registration of
the phone is interrupted. In which case,
disconnect the phone, see Removing a
Bluetooth®* device (p. 402) and then
reconnect it, see Registering a Bluetooth®*
device (p. 399).
Example of normal view for phone.
Connecting an external device takes place in
different ways depending on whether or not Alternative 1 - search for the external
the device has been connected previously. device via the car's menu system
The connection options below presume that 1. Make the external device searchable/visi-
this is the first time the device is being con- ble via Bluetooth®, see the external devi-
nected (registered) and that no other device is ce's manual or www.volvocars.com.
connected. The connection options show the
connection of a phone. Connecting a media
device (p. 397) is performed in the same way

11 Audio and media
||
2. Press OK/MENU and follow the instruc- Related information Automatic connection of Bluetooth®*
tions on the display screen. • Audio and media - operating the system device
> The external device is now connected (p. 371) When a Bluetooth® device is registered (p.
to the car and can be controlled from • Connecting and disconnecting a 399) in the car the last external device con-
the car. Bluetooth®* device (p. 398) nected is connected automatically when it is
within range.
If connection failed, press EXIT twice and
connect the device as described under Alter- When the Bluetooth® function is active and
native 2. the last device connected is in range it is con-
11
nected automatically. When the car searches
Alternative 2 - Search for the car with for the last device connected its name is
the Bluetooth® function of the external shown in the display screen. If the last con-
device. nected device is not available then the sys-
1. Make the car searchable/visible via tem will try to connect an earlier device.
Bluetooth®. Turn TUNE to Phone To connect to another device, press EXIT,
settings, confirm with OK/MENU, select select to connect a new device (p. 399) or
Discoverable and confirm with OK/ change to another already registered device
MENU. (p. 401).
2. Select My Volvo Car on the screen of the
external device and follow the instruc- Related information
tions. • Audio and media - operating the system
(p. 371)
3. Enter a PIN code in the external device
and then select to connect.
• Connecting and disconnecting a
4. Press OK/MENU and enter the same PIN
code via the car keypad in the centre
console.
Once the external device is connected, its
Bluetooth® name appears on the car's display
screen and the unit can be controlled from
the car.

11 Audio and media
Changing to another Bluetooth®* 2. Press TEL and then select Change Disconnecting the Bluetooth®* device
device phone. When the Bluetooth® device is out of range of
It is possible to change from a connected > The car searches for previously con- the car it is automatically disconnected. It is
device to another one if there are several nected devices. The external devices also possible to disconnect a phone manually.
devices in the car. The device must first have detected are specified with their
been registered (p. 401)) to the car. respective Bluetooth® name in the dis- When the mobile phone has been discon-
play screen. nected an ongoing call can be continued by
Changing media device using the mobile phone's built-in microphone
1. Check that the external device is search- 3. Select the device to be connected. and speaker.
11
able/visible via Bluetooth®, see the man- > Connection of the external device
The handsfree function is deactivated when
ual for the external device. takes place.
the engine is switched off and the door is
2. Press MEDIA, select Bluetooth and then Related information opened33.
Change device. • Audio and media - operating the system If you want to deregister a Bluetooth® device
> The car searches for previously con- (p. 371) from the car, select Remove Bluetooth®
nected devices. The external devices • Connecting and disconnecting a device (p. 402). The car will then not locate
detected are specified with their Bluetooth®* device (p. 398) the device automatically.
respective Bluetooth® name in the dis-
play screen. Manual disconnection of phone
The phone can be manually disconnected in
3. Select the device to be connected.
phone mode under Phone menu
> Connection of the external device
Disconnect phone.
takes place.
Changing phone NOTE

1. Check that the external device is search- Even when your mobile phone has been
able/visible via Bluetooth®, see the man- manually disconnected, some mobile
ual for the external device. phones may automatically couple up to
the last handsfree unit connected, e.g.
when a new call begins.
33 Only Keyless Drive.

11 Audio and media
||
Related information Removing a Bluetooth®* device Bluetooth® handsfree phone
• Audio and media - operating the system If you do not want a Bluetooth®*
device regis- A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth®
(p. 371) tered to the car any longer then it is possible can be connected wirelessly to the car34.
• Connecting and disconnecting a to remove (deregister) it from the car. The car
Bluetooth®* device (p. 398) will then not locate the device automatically. The device must first be registered and con-
nected to the car (p. 399).
Removing a media device
• Bluetooth® handsfree phone (p. 402) The audio and media system works as
Press MEDIA, select Bluetooth Remove handsfree, with the option to remote control a
11 Bluetooth device. selection of the mobile phone's functions via
the centre console buttons or via the steering
Removing a phone
wheel keypad*. The mobile phone can be
Press TEL, select Phone menu Remove operated by its own keys irrespective of
Bluetooth device. whether or not it is connected.
Related information When another Bluetooth® device is con-
• Audio and media - operating the system nected to the car, it is also possible to use
(p. 371) the media device, see Media Bluetooth®* (p.
• Connecting and disconnecting a 397). Switch between the main sources TEL
Bluetooth®* device (p. 398) and MEDIA to operate each one's functions.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully
compatible with the handsfree function.
Volvo recommends that you seek assis-
tance from an authorised Volvo dealer for
information on compatible phones.
Activate
A short press on TEL activates/searches last
connected phone. If a phone is already con-
nected, and TEL is pressed, a shortcut menu
is shown with commonly used menu options

11 Audio and media
for the phone. The symbol indicates Bluetooth®* handsfree phone - Making and receiving calls
that a phone is connected. overview Making and receiving calls and functions for
System overview for Bluetooth®* handsfree making and receiving calls.
To call
phone.
1. Make sure that the symbol appears Incoming call
at the top of the display screen and that – Press OK/MENU to answer the call, even
the handsfree function is in phone mode. if the audio system is in e.g. RADIO or
MEDIA mode.
2. Dial either the desired number or the
speed dial number (p. 410). Or in normal Refuse or end with EXIT. 11
view turn TUNE to the right to access the
phone book, and to the left for the call Automatic answer
register for all calls. For information on The automatic answer function means that
the phone book, see Phone book (p. calls are accepted automatically.
405). – Activate/deactivate in phone mode under
3. Press OK/MENU. Phone menu Call options Auto
answer.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
System overview
In call menu
Related information Mobile phone Press OK/MENU during an ongoing call to
access the following functions:
(p. 371) Microphone
• Bluetooth®* handsfree phone - overview • Mute - audio system microphone is
Steering wheel keypad muted.
(p. 403)
• Connecting and disconnecting a Control panel in centre console • Mobile phone - the call is transferred
from handsfree to the mobile phone. For
Related information some mobile phones the connection is
• Making and receiving calls (p. 403) interrupted. This is normal. The handsfree
• Bluetooth® handsfree phone - audio set- (p. 371)
function asks if you want to reconnect.
tings (p. 404)
• Dial number - option to call a third party
• Bluetooth® version information (p. 405) using the number keys (current call set in
• Connecting and disconnecting a standby).

11 Audio and media
||
Call lists Related information Bluetooth® handsfree phone - audio
The call lists are copied to the handsfree • Audio and media - operating the system settings
function at each new connection and are then (p. 371) It is possible to adjust the call volume, audio
updated during the connection. In normal • Voice recognition* control of a mobile system volume and ring signal volume, and
view, turn to the left with TUNE to see the call phone - dialling a contact (p. 417) change the ring tone.
register for All calls .
Phone call volume
In phone mode it is possible to see all the call phone - dialling from the call register (p.
417) The phone call volume can only be changed
lists under Phone menu All calls: during a call. Use the steering wheel keypad*
11
• All calls • Voice recognition* control of a mobile
or turn the VOL control.
phone - calling the voice mailbox (p. 417)
• Missed calls
• Bluetooth® handsfree phone (p. 402) Audio system volume
• Answered calls
• Bluetooth® handsfree phone - audio set-
Providing there is no ongoing call taking
• Dialled calls tings (p. 404) place, the audio system volume is controlled
as usual by turning VOL.
• Call duration • Phone book (p. 405)
If an audio source is active during an incom-
NOTE ing call then it can be muted automatically.
Activate/deactivate in phone mode under
Certain mobile phones show a list of the
last dialled numbers in reverse order. Phone menu Phone settings Sounds
and volume Mute radio/media.
Voice mailbox Ring volume
In normal view a speed dial number for the
In phone mode go to Phone menu Phone
voice mailbox can be programmed in and
then accessed later via a long press on 1. settings Sounds and volume Ring
volume and adjust by turning VOL. Press
Voice mailbox number is changed in phone OK/MENU to hear the audio volume. Press
mode under Phone menu Call options EXIT to save.
Voicemail number Change number. If
there is no number stored then this menu can Ring signals
be reached with one long press on 1. The handsfree function has integrated ring
signals that can be selected in phone mode
under Phone menu Phone settings

11 Audio and media
Sounds and volume Ring signals Ring Bluetooth® version information Phone book
signal 1 etc. Show the car's current Bluetooth® version. There are two phone books. These are
merged into one in the car and are displayed
NOTE The car's current Bluetooth® version can be as a single phone book in the car.
seen in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth
For some mobile phones, the ringtone on
menu Bluetooth software version in car. • The car downloads the mobile phone's
the phone connected will not be switched phone book and only displays this phone
off when one of the inbuilt signals for the book when the mobile phone from which
handsfree system is used. Related information
• Audio and media - operating the system this phone book was downloaded is con-
nected. 11
(p. 371)
In order to select the connected phone's ring • The car also has a built-in phone book.
signal35, go in phone mode to Phone menu
This contains all the contacts stored in
Phone settings Sounds and volume • Media Bluetooth®* (p. 397) the car irrespective of which phone was
Ring signals Mobile phone ring connected when saving them. These con-
tacts are visible for all users, regardless of
signal.
the mobile phone that is connected to the
Related information car. If a contact is saved in the car then
• Audio and media - operating the system the symbol is shown in front of the
(p. 371) contact in the phone book.
NOTE
Changes made from the car to a record in
the mobile phone's telephone book will
result in a new record in the car's tele-
phone book, i.e. changes will not be saved
to the phone. From the car, this will now
look like you have double records, with dif-
ferent icons. Note also that when a short-
cut number is saved or a change to a con-
tact is made, this will result in a new
record in the car's phone book.
35 Not supported by all mobile phones.

11 Audio and media
||
All use of the phone book requires that the • Phone book - memory status (p. 411) Phone book - quick search for
symbol appears at the top of the dis- • Phone book - clearing (p. 411) contacts
play screen and that the handsfree function is In normal view turn TUNE to the right to show
in phone mode. a list of contacts.
The audio and media system stores a copy of Turn TUNE to select and press OK/MENU to
each registered mobile phone's phone book. call.
The phone book can be copied automatically
to the audio and media system during each Under the name of the contact is the phone
11 connection. number that is selected by default. If the sym-
bol > appears to the right of the contact then
– Activate/deactivate the function in phone there are several phone numbers stored for
mode under Phone menu Phone the contact. Press OK/MENU to show the
settings Download phone book. numbers. Change and dial a number other
than that selected by default by turning
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's
TUNE. Press OK/MENU to dial.
contact information then this is shown in the
display screen. Search the list of contacts via the centre con-
sole's keypad, enter the start of the contact's
Related information name, see Character table keypad in centre
• Audio and media - operating the system console (p. 407) for the function of the but-
(p. 371) tons.
• Bluetooth® handsfree phone (p. 402) The list of contacts can also be accessed
• Phone book - quick search for contacts from normal view by pressing and holding the
(p. 406) button on the centre console's keypad with
• Phone book - character table keypad in the letter that the contact searched for starts
centre console (p. 407) with. For example, a long press on the button
for 6 gives instant access to that part of the
• Phone book - searching for contacts (p.
408) list where the contacts with the letter M are
located.
• Phone book - new contact (p. 409)
• Phone book - speed dial numbers (p. Related information
410) • Audio and media - operating the system
• Phone book - receiving a vCard (p. 411) (p. 371)
406
11 Audio and media
• Phone book (p. 405) Phone book - character table keypad Key Function
• Phone book - character table keypad in in centre console
centre console (p. 407) Character table of possible characters for use +0pw
• Phone book - searching for contacts (p. in the phone book.
408) #*
• Phone book - new contact (p. 409) Key Function
• Phone book - speed dial numbers (p. Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1 Related information
410) • Audio and media - operating the system 11
• Phone book - receiving a vCard (p. 411) ABCÅÄÆÀÇ2 (p. 371)
• Phone book - memory status (p. 411) • Bluetooth® handsfree phone (p. 402)
• Phone book - clearing (p. 411) DEFÈΔ3 • Phone book - quick search for contacts
(p. 406)
GHIÌ4 • Phone book (p. 405)
• Phone book - searching for contacts (p.
JKL5 408)
MNOΚØÑÒ6 • Phone book - speed dial numbers (p.
410)
PQRSΤ7 • Phone book - receiving a vCard (p. 411)
• Phone book - memory status (p. 411)
TUVÜÙ8 • Phone book - clearing (p. 411)
WXYZ9
Shift between upper and lower

case letter.
407
11 Audio and media
Phone book - searching for contacts NOTE 123/ABC Change between letters and
Searching for contacts in the phone book. numbers with OK/MENU.
There is no text wheel for High Perform-
ance, so TUNE cannot be used there to
More Change to special characters
input characters: only the digit and letter
buttons on the control panel in the centre with OK/MENU.
console can be used for this.
Leads to the phone book (3).
Turn TUNE to select a contact,
1. Turn36 TUNE to the desired letter, press press OK/MENU to see the
11 OK/MENU to confirm. The number and saved numbers and other
letter buttons on the control panel in the information.
centre console can also be used.
2. Continue with the next letter and so on. A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-
The result of the search is shown in the acter. A long press on EXIT will clear all
phone book (3). entered characters.
Search contacts using the text wheel. By pressing a number key in the centre con-
3. To change the input mode to numbers or
Character list special characters, or to go to the phone sole when the text wheel is shown (see illus-
book, turn TUNE to one of the options tration above), a new character list (1)
Changing the input mode (see table appears in the display screen. Continue
(see explanation in the table below) in the
below) repeatedly pressing the number key to the
list for changing the input mode (2), press
Phone book OK/MENU. desired letter and then release. Continue with
the next letter and so on. When a button is
To search for or edit a contact, go in phone
depressed the entry is confirmed when
mode to Phone menu Phone book another button is depressed.
Search.
To enter a number, hold in the corresponding
number key.
Related information
(p. 371)
408
11 Audio and media
• Phone book (p. 405) Phone book - new contact 1. When the Name row is selected, press
• Phone book - character table keypad in Create new contact in the phone book. OK/MENU to reach the input mode (illus-
centre console (p. 407) tration above).
• Phone book - quick search for contacts 2. Turn37 TUNE to the desired letter, press
(p. 406) OK/MENU to confirm. The number and
• Phone book - new contact (p. 409) letter buttons on the control panel in the
centre console can also be used.
• Phone book - speed dial numbers (p.
410) 3. Continue with the next letter and so on.
11
• Phone book - receiving a vCard (p. 411) The name entered is shown in the input
field (2) in the display screen.
• Phone book - clearing (p. 411) 4. To change the input mode to numbers,
special characters, change between
uppercase/lowercase letters, etc., turn
TUNE to one of the options (see explana-
Entering letters for New contact. tion in the table below) in the list (1) and
Changing the input mode (see table then press OK/MENU.
below)
When the name has been fully entered, select
Input field OK in the list on the display screen (1) and
New contacts can be added in phone mode press OK/MENU. Now continue with the tele-
phone number in the same way as above.
under Phone menu Phone book New
contact. When the telephone number has been
entered, press OK/MENU and select a tele-
NOTE phone number type (Mobile phone, Home,
Work or General). Press OK/MENU to con-
There is no text wheel for High Perform- firm.
ance, so TUNE cannot be used there to
input characters: only the digit and letter When all details have been filled in, select
buttons on the control panel in the centre Save contact in the menu to save the con-
console can be used for this. tact.
409
11 Audio and media
||
123/ABC Change between letters and • Phone book - searching for contacts (p. Phone book - speed dial numbers
numbers with OK/MENU. 408) Store as speed dial number in order to easily
• Phone book - speed dial numbers (p. dial a number or a contact.
More Change to special characters 410)
with OK/MENU. Use phone mode to add speed dial numbers
• Phone book - receiving a vCard (p. 411)
under Phone menu Phone book
OK Save and go back to Add • Phone book - memory status (p. 411)
Speed dial.
contact with OK/MENU. • Phone book - clearing (p. 411)
Dialling with speed dial numbers can be per-
11 Change between uppercase formed in phone mode using the number
and lowercase letters with OK/ keys on the keypad in the centre console, by
MENU. pressing a number key and then pressing
OK/MENU. If there is no contact stored on
Press OK/MENU, the cursor the speed dial number then an option is
moves to the input field (2) at shown to save a contact to the selected
the top of the display screen. speed dial number.
The cursor can now be moved,
with TUNE, to the appropriate Related information
place to e.g. insert new letters • Audio and media - operating the system
or delete with EXIT. To be able (p. 371)
to insert new letters first go
back to the input mode, by
pressing OK/MENU. • Phone book (p. 405)
• Phone book - quick search for contacts
• Audio and media - operating the system • Phone book - character table keypad in
(p. 371) centre console (p. 407)
• Bluetooth® handsfree phone (p. 402) • Phone book - searching for contacts (p.
• Phone book (p. 405) 408)
• Phone book - quick search for contacts • Phone book - new contact (p. 409)
(p. 406) • Phone book - receiving a vCard (p. 411)
• Phone book - character table keypad in • Phone book - memory status (p. 411)
centre console (p. 407) • Phone book - clearing (p. 411)
410
11 Audio and media
Phone book - receiving a vCard Phone book - memory status Phone book - clearing
Receiving electronic business cards (vCard) to See phone book memory status. Clear the car's built-in phone book (p. 405).
the car's phone book.
Memory status of the car's phone book and The car's phone book can be deleted, this is
It is possible to receive a vCard to the car's the connected mobile phone's phone book carried out in phone mode under Phone
phone book from other mobile phones (other can be seen in phone mode under Phone menu Phone book Clear phone book.
than the one currently connected to the car). menu Phone book Memory status.
In order to allow this the car is set to visible NOTE
mode for Bluetooth®. The function is acti- Related information
Deleting the car's telephone book only 11
vated in phone mode under Phone menu • Audio and media - operating the system
(p. 371) deletes contacts in the car's telephone
Phone book Receive vCard. book. Contacts in the mobile phone's
• Bluetooth® handsfree phone (p. 402) phone book are not deleted.
Related information • Phone book (p. 405)
(p. 371) • Phone book - quick search for contacts Related information
(p. 406) • Audio and media - operating the system
• Bluetooth® handsfree phone (p. 402) (p. 371)
• Phone book - character table keypad in
• Phone book (p. 405) centre console (p. 407) • Bluetooth® handsfree phone (p. 402)
• Phone book - quick search for contacts • Phone book - searching for contacts (p. • Phone book (p. 405)
(p. 406) 408)
• Phone book - quick search for contacts
• Phone book - character table keypad in • Phone book - new contact (p. 409) (p. 406)
centre console (p. 407)
• Phone book - speed dial numbers (p. • Phone book - character table keypad in
• Phone book - searching for contacts (p. 410) centre console (p. 407)
408)
• Phone book - receiving a vCard (p. 411) • Phone book - searching for contacts (p.
• Phone book - clearing (p. 411) 408)
410)
• Phone book - memory status (p. 411) 410)
• Phone book - clearing (p. 411)
• Phone book - receiving a vCard (p. 411)
411
11 Audio and media
Voice recognition* control of a mobile WARNING Getting started with voice recognition
phone
The driver always holds overall responsibil-
Voice recognition38 allows the driver to voice- ity for driving the vehicle in a safe manner
activate certain functions in a Bluetooth®-con- and complying with all applicable rules of
nected mobile phone or in Volvo's navigation the road.
system.
The voice recognition system allows the
NOTE driver to voice-activate certain functions of a
11 • The information in this section Bluetooth®-connected mobile phone and in
describes the use of voice commands Volvo's navigation system, while the driver
to control a mobile phone connected can keep his/her hands on the wheel at the
using Bluetooth®. For detailed infor- same time. The input data are in dialogue
mation on using a Bluetooth®-con- form with spoken commands from the user
Steering wheel keypad.
nected mobile phone, see Bluetooth® and verbal replies from the system. The voice
handsfree phone (p. 402). recognition system uses the same micro- Button for voice recognition
• The Volvo navigation system has a phone as the Bluetooth® handsfree system Before voice commands to a mobile phone
separate supplement which contains (see Bluetooth®* handsfree phone - overview can be used the mobile phone must be
more information on voice recognition (p. 403)) and the voice recognition system's paired and connected via Bluetooth® hands-
and voice commands to control the replies come via the car's speakers. free. If a telephone command is given and no
system. mobile phone is paired, then the system will
provide information about this. For informa-
Voice commands offer convenience and help tion on pairing and connecting a mobile
the driver to avoid being distracted, and phone, see Registering a Bluetooth®* device
instead concentrate on driving and focus (p. 399).
attention on the road and traffic conditions. • Press the button for voice recognition (1)
in order to activate the system and initiate
a dialogue with voice commands. The
system will then display commonly used
commands in the display screen in the
centre console.
38 Only applies to vehicles equipped with Volvo's navigation system.

11 Audio and media
Keep the following things in mind when you • Connecting and disconnecting a Language options for voice
use the voice recognition system: Bluetooth®* device (p. 398) recognition* control of a mobile
• For a command - speak after the tone, • Language options for voice recognition* phone
with normal voice at normal speed. control of a mobile phone (p. 413) Possible language options for voice recogni-
• Do not speak while the system is replying • Help functions for voice recognition* con- tion* control of a mobile phone are selected in
(the system cannot understand com- trol of a mobile phone (p. 414) the menu system for MY CAR, see MY CAR -
mands during this time). Voice settings (p. 112).
• The car's doors and windows must be phone - user setting and voice volume (p.
closed. 415) 11
• Avoid background noise in the passenger • Voice recognition* control of a mobile

compartment. phone - voice commands (p. 415)
NOTE
If the driver is unsure of which command
to use, he (she) can say "Help" - the sys-
tem then responds with a few different
commands which can be used in the cur-
rent situation.
Voice commands can be disabled by:
Language list.
• saying "Cancel"
Voice recognition is not possible for all lan-
• not speaking
guages. Languages available for voice recog-
• a long press on the steering wheel but- nition are marked with an icon in the lan-
ton for Voice recognition guage list - . Changing the language is per-
• Press EXIT or another main source formed in the menu system MY CAR, see MY
button (e.g. MEDIA). CAR (p. 104).
Related information
(p. 371)
• Bluetooth®* handsfree phone - overview
(p. 403)

11 Audio and media
||
Related information Help functions for voice recognition* tion of the menu system, see MY CAR (p.
• Audio and media - operating the system control of a mobile phone 104).
(p. 371) Help functions are available to help you The instructions are divided into 3 lessons,
• Voice recognition* control of a mobile become familiar with the system and the which take around 5 minutes in total to com-
phone (p. 412) facility to teach the voice recognition system plete. The system starts with the first lesson.
• MY CAR - Voice settings (p. 112) your voice and your accent. To skip a lesson and go to the next one,
press the button for voice recognition and say
• Instructions: A function that helps you "Next". Go back to the previous lesson by
become familiar with the system and the saying "Previous".
11 procedure for giving commands.
Exit the instructions by means of a long press
• Voice training: A function that enables
on the button for voice recognition.
the voice recognition system to learn to
know your voice and your accent. The Voice training
function provides an opportunity to voice
The system displays up to fifteen phrases for
train two user profiles.
you to say. Voice training can be started in
The help functions can be accessed by the menu system MY CAR under Settings
pressing the MY CAR button on the control
Voice settings Voice training. Select
panel in the centre console and then turning
TUNE to the desired menu option. between User 1 or User 2. For a description
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104).
Instructions After voice training has been completed,
The instructions can be started in two ways: remember to set your user profile under
Voice user setting.
NOTE
Related information
This instruction and voice training can only
be started when the car is parked. • Audio and media - operating the system
(p. 371)
• Press the button for voice recognition (p.
phone (p. 412)
371) and say "Voice tutorial".
• Activate the instructions in the menu sys-
tem MY CAR under Settings Voice
settings Voice tutorial. For a descrip-

11 Audio and media
Voice recognition* control of a mobile Voice recognition* control of a mobile Related information
phone - user setting and voice volume phone - voice commands • Audio and media - operating the system
User profile and voice volume can be set in It is possible to use voice recognition to con- (p. 371)
the MY CAR menu system. trol the mobile phone with predefined voice • Voice recognition* control of a mobile
commands. phone (p. 412)
• User setting - Two user profiles can be
set, the function is activated in the menu The driver initiates a dialogue with voice com- • Voice recognition* control of a mobile
phone - quick commands (p. 416)
system MY CAR under Settings Voice mands by pressing the button for voice rec-
settings Voice user setting. Select ognition (p. 412). • Voice guidance* control of a mobile
phone - dialling a number (p. 416) 11
between User 1 or User 2. For a descrip- Once a dialogue has been started, commonly
tion of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. used commands will be shown in the display • Voice recognition* control of a mobile
104). phone - dialling from the call register (p.
screen. Greyed-out text or text within brack-
417)
• Voice output volume - Can be changed ets is not included in the spoken command.
in the menu system MY CAR under • Voice recognition* control of a mobile
When the driver becomes accustomed to the phone - dialling a contact (p. 417)
Settings Voice settings Voice system, he/she can speed up the command
output volume. For a description of the dialogue and skip the prompts from the sys- • Voice recognition* control of a mobile
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104). phone - calling the voice mailbox (p. 417)
tem, by briefly pressing the button for voice
Related information recognition.
Commands can be given in several
(p. 371)
ways
• Voice recognition* control of a mobile The command "Phone call contact" can be
phone (p. 412) pronounced as e.g.:
• "Phone > Call contact" - Say "Phone",
wait for the system's reply, and then con-
tinue by saying "Call contact."
or
• "Phone call contact" - Say the whole
command in one sequence.

11 Audio and media
Voice recognition* control of a mobile Voice guidance* control of a mobile • You can also change the number by say-
phone - quick commands phone - dialling a number ing the commands "Correct" (which dele-
Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone How to describe a number to control a mobile tes the last spoken group of numbers) or
"Delete" (which deletes the whole spoken
can be performed with a number of prede- phone using voice recognition.
phone number).
fined quick commands.
The system understands the numbers 0 (zero)
Related information
Quick commands for the phone can be found to 9 (nine). These numbers can be pro-
in the menu system MY CAR under Settings nounced individually, in groups of several • Audio and media - operating the system
(p. 371)
Voice settings Voice command list numbers at a time, or the whole number all at
11 • Voice recognition* control of a mobile
Phone commands and General once. Numbers greater than 9 (nine) cannot
be handled by the system, e.g. 10 (ten) or 11 phone - voice commands (p. 415)
commands. For a description of the menu
system, see MY CAR (p. 104). (eleven) are not possible.
The following is an example of a dialogue
Related information
with voice commands. The system's reply will
vary depending on the situation.
(p. 371)
• Voice recognition* control of a mobile The user starts the dialogue by saying:
phone - voice commands (p. 415) Phone > call number
or
Phone call number
System reply
Number?
User action
Start saying the numbers (as individual units,
i.e. six-eight-seven, etc.) in the phone num-
ber. If you say several numbers and pause,
the system will repeat them, and then say
"Continue".
Continue to say the numbers. When finished,
finish the command by saying "Call".

11 Audio and media
Voice recognition* control of a mobile Voice recognition* control of a mobile Voice recognition* control of a mobile
phone - dialling from the call register phone - dialling a contact phone - calling the voice mailbox
Use voice recognition with the mobile phone Use voice recognition with the mobile phone Use voice recognition with a mobile phone to
to dial from the call register. to dial a contact. call the voice mailbox.
The following dialogue allows you to make a The following dialogue allows you to call your The following dialogue allows you to call your
phone call from one of your mobile phone's pre-defined contacts in the mobile phone. voice mailbox to check if you have received
call registers. any messages. The phone number for your
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
voice mailbox must be registered in the
The user starts the dialogue by saying: 11
Phone > call contact Bluetooth® function, see Making and receiv-
Phone > call from the call register ing calls (p. 403).
or
or The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone call contact
Phone call from the call register Phone > call voice mailbox
Continue by responding to the system's
Continue by responding to the system's prompts. or
prompts.
Consider the following when you call a con- Phone call voice mailbox
Related information tact:
Continue by responding to the system's
• Audio and media - operating the system • If there are several contacts with similar prompts.
(p. 371) names, they will be presented in the
• Voice recognition* control of a mobile screen in the numbered rows and the Related information
phone - voice commands (p. 415) system prompts you to select a row num- • Audio and media - operating the system
ber. (p. 371)
• If there are more rows in the list than can • Voice recognition* control of a mobile
be displayed simultaneously, saying phone - voice commands (p. 415)
"Down" allows you to scroll down in the
list (and saying "Up" allows you to scroll
up in the list).
Related information
(p. 371)
phone - voice commands (p. 415)

11 Audio and media
Save as favourite Playback and navigation of CD/DVD* the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed
Save frequently used functions as favourites. disc again, the media player starts. It is also possi-
The function can then be started easily by For basic playback and navigation, see Audio ble to pause via the menu system39, press
pressing the FAVbutton. and media - operating the system (p. 371). OK/MENU, select Play/Pause.
See below for a more detailed description.
To save a function as a favourite: NOTE
1. Select a main source (e.g. RADIO, Starting playback of a disc A video film is only shown when the car is
MEDIA). Press the MEDIA button, turn TUNE until stationary. When the car is moving at a
11 2. Select a wavelength or source (AM, Disc, Disc is displayed, press OK/MENU. If there speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is
is a disc in the media player then the disc shown and No visual media available
etc.).
starts playing back automatically, otherwise while driving appears on the display
3. Press and hold the FAV button until the Insert disc is shown in the display screen. screen, although the audio is heard during
"favourites menu" is shown. this time. The picture is shown again as
Then insert a disc, with text side up. The disc soon as the car's speed falls below about
4. Turn TUNE to select an option from the starts to play back automatically. 6 km/h.
list and press OK/MENU to save. If a disc with audio/video files is inserted into
> When the main source (e.g. RADIO, the player then the disc's folder structure
NOTE
MEDIA) is active the stored function is needs to be loaded. Depending on the quality
available via a short press on FAV. of the disc and the quantity of information Some audio files that are copy-protected
there may be a certain delay before playback by record companies or privately copied
Related information starts. audio files cannot be loaded by the player.
• Favourites (p. 375)
Disc eject Related information
Press the eject button (p. 371) to eject the • Audio and media - operating the system
disc. (p. 371)
A disc remains in the ejected position for • Playback and navigation of burned discs
about 12 seconds, after which it is inserted with audio/video files (p. 419)
back into the player for safety reasons. • Playback and navigation of DVD video
discs (p. 391)
Pause in playback (pause)
When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE • Fast forward/reverse (p. 390)
is pressed, the media player is paused. When • Scan disc track or audio file (p. 420)
39 Does not apply to CD Audio

11 Audio and media
• Random selection of disc track or audio Playback and navigation of burned changes setting when a disc containing only
file (p. 391) discs with audio/video files audio files or only video files is loaded into
• Media player - compatible file formats (p. Playback and navigation of burned discs with the media player and then plays back these
393) audio/video files40. files. However, the system does not change
setting if a disc containing a mixture of audio
NOTE and video files is loaded into the media
player, but instead the player continues to
A video film is only shown when the car is play back the previous file type.
stationary. When the car is moving at a
speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is Repeat folder 11
shown and No visual media available This function makes it possible to play files in
while driving appears on the display a folder over and over again. When the last
screen, although the audio is heard during
this time. The picture is shown again as file has been played out, playback of the first
soon as the car's speed falls below about file starts again.
6 km/h. 1. Press OK/MENU
2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder
NOTE
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
Some audio files that are copy-protected the function.
by record companies or privately copied
audio files cannot be loaded by the player. Related information
Audio files have the symbol , video (p. 371)
files40 have the symbol and folders • Playback and navigation of CD/DVD* disc
(p. 418)
have the symbol .
• Playback and navigation of DVD video
When playback of a file is complete the play- discs (p. 391)
back of the other files (of the same type) in
• Fast forward/reverse (p. 390)
that particular folder continues. Change41 of
folder takes place automatically when all the • Scan disc track or audio file (p. 420)
files in the current folder have been played • Random selection of disc track or audio
back. The system automatically detects and file (p. 391)

41 If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.

11 Audio and media
• Media player - compatible file formats (p. Scan disc track or audio file TV*
393) This function play backs the first ten seconds The TV picture is only shown when the car is
• DivX® Video On Demand (p. 392) of each disc track/audio file42. stationary. When the car is moving at a speed
over approx. 6 km/h the picture disappears,
To scan selected source: although the audio is heard during this time.
1. Press OK/MENU The picture reappears when the car has stop-
ped.
2. Turn TUNE to Scan
11
> The first 10 seconds of each disc track
or audio file are played.
3. Cancel the scan with EXIT, the disc track
or audio file being played back will con-
tinue playing.
Related information
(p. 371)
(p. 418)
• Playback and navigation of external audio TV functions, control overview.
source (p. 395)
• Media Bluetooth®* (p. 397) NOTE
This system only supports TV broadcasts
in the countries that broadcast in MPEG-2
or MPEG-4 format and follow the DVB-T
standard. The system does not support
analogue broadcasts.
42 Does not apply to DVD video discs. For externally connected audio sources via the AUX/USB input this only applies to USB and iPod®. Not supported by all mobile phones.

11 Audio and media
NOTE • Turn TUNE, a list of all available channels Related information

in the area is shown. If any of these chan- • Audio and media - operating the system
The TV picture is only shown when the car nels is already saved as a preset then its (p. 371)
is stationary. When the car is moving at a preset number is shown to the right of the
speed over about 6 km/h the picture dis- channel name. Continue turning TUNE to
• Searching TV* channels/Preset list (p.
appears, No visual media available 422)
reach the desired channel and press OK/
while driving appears on the display • TV* - channel management (p. 422)
MENU.
screen, although the audio is heard during
this time. The picture reappears when the • By pressing the preset buttons (0-9). • Information about the current TV* pro-
car has stopped. gramme (p. 423)
• Via a short press on the / but- 11
tons the next available channel in the area • Teletext* (p. 423)
NOTE is shown. • Picture settings (p. 393)
The reception is dependent both on how • Reception of TV* channel is lost. (p. 424)
good the signal strength and signal quality NOTE
are. The transmission may be disturbed by If the car has been moved within the coun-
various factors such as tall buildings or the try, for example, from one city to another,
TV transmitter being far away. Coverage it is not certain that the presets are availa-
level can also vary depending on where in ble at the new location as the frequency
the country you are located. range may have changed. Then do another
search and save a new preset list; see
Save available TV channels as presets (p.
IMPORTANT 422).
A TV licence is required for this product in
some countries.
NOTE
If no reception is available on the preset
Watch TV
buttons, it may be because the car is at a
– Press MEDIA, turn TUNE until TV is location other than where the scan of TV
shown in the display, press OK/MENU. channels was run, for example, if the car
> A search starts and after a short while was driven from Germany to France. A
the most recently used channel is new selection of country and a new search
shown. may then need to be carried out.
Changing channel
It is possible to change channel as follows:

11 Audio and media
Searching TV* channels/Preset list Related information TV* - channel management

After a search of TV channels the available • Audio and media - operating the system The preset list can be edited. You can change
channels are saved in a preset list. (p. 371) the order of the channels that are shown in
• TV* (p. 420) the preset list. A TV channel can have more
1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU. than one place in the preset list. The TV chan-
• TV* - channel management (p. 422)
2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/ nel positions can also vary in the preset list.
MENU.
To change the order in the preset list, go in
3. Turn TUNE to Select country and press TV mode to TV menu Reorganise
11 OK/MENU. presets.
> If one or more countries have previ-
1. Turn TUNE to the channel you want to
ously been selected then they are
move in the list and confirm with OK/
shown in a list.
MENU.
4. Turn TUNE to either Other countries or > The selected channel is highlighted.
one of the previously selected countries.
Press OK/MENU. 2. Turn TUNE to the new location in the list
and confirm with OK/MENU.
> A list of all available countries is
shown. > The channels change places with each
other.
5. Turn TUNE to the desired country (e.g.
Sweden) and press OK/MENU. After the preset channels (max. 30) come all
the other channels available in the area. It is
> An automatic scan for available TV
possible to move a channel up to a place in
channels starts, this scan takes a little
the preset list.
while. During this time the figure for
each channel found and added as a Save the available TV channels as
preset is shown. When the scan is presets
complete a message is shown and the If the car has been moved within the country,
picture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 for example, from one city to another, it is not
presets) has now been created and is certain that the presets are available at the
available. To change channel, see TV* new location as the frequency range may
(p. 420). have changed. In which case, carry out
The scan and preset storage can be cancel- another scan and save a new preset list.
led with EXIT. 1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU.

11 Audio and media
2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/ Information about the current TV* Teletext*
MENU. programme It is possible to look at Teletext.
3. Turn TUNE to Autostore and press OK/ Press the INFO button (p. 371) in order to dis-
play information about the current pro- Proceed as follows:
MENU.
gramme, the next programme and its start 1. Press the button on the remote
> An automatic scan for available TV
time. control.
channels starts, this scan takes a little
while. During this time the figure for If the INFO button is pressed once more then 2. Enter the page number (3 digits) with the
each channel found and added as a additional information on the current pro- number keys (0-9) to select page.
preset is shown. When the scan is 11
gramme can sometimes be displayed, such > The page is shown automatically.
complete a message is shown and the as start and end times and a brief description
picture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 of the current programme. Enter new page number, or press the remote
presets) has now been created and is control buttons / to go to the next
available. To change channel, see TV* To return to the TV picture, wait several sec-
page.
(p. 420). onds or press EXIT.
Return to TV screen with EXIT or by pressing
Scanning the TV channels Related information the button on the remote control.
This function automatically scans through the • Audio and media - operating the system
(p. 371) It is also possible to control the teletext with
frequency range for all channels available in
the coloured buttons on the remote control.
the area where you are. When a channel is • TV* (p. 420)
found, it is shown for approx. 10 seconds Related information
before scanning is resumed. Scanning is • Audio and media - operating the system
stopped with EXIT, then the channel that you (p. 371)
just watched continues to be shown. Scan-
ning does not affect the preset list.
• TV* (p. 420)
• Remote control* (p. 424)
Activate scanning in TV mode under TV
menu Scan.
Related information
(p. 371)
• TV* (p. 420)
• Searching TV* channels/Preset list (p.
422)

11 Audio and media
Reception of TV* channel is lost. Remote control*

If the reception for the TV channel that is The remote control can be used for all func-
being shown disappears then the picture will tions in the audio and media system. The
freeze. When the reception returns the display remote control's buttons have similar func-
starts again. tions as the buttons on the centre console or
the steering wheel keypad.
If the reception for the TV channel that is
being shown disappears then the picture will
freeze. Shortly after this a message appears
11 informing that the reception has been lost for
the current TV channel, and a new search for
the channel continues. When the reception
returns the display of the TV channel starts
immediately. It is possible to change channel
at any time when the message is shown.
If the message Reception lost, searching is
shown then this is because the system has
detected that there is no reception for all TV
channels. One possible reason may be that a
border has been crossed and that the system
is set to the wrong country. In which case,
change to the right country in accordance
with Searching TV* channels/Preset list (p. (p.
422)).
Related information
(p. 371)
• TV* (p. 420) Corresponds to TUNE in the centre con-
sole.
When using the remote control, first press the
remote control's button to position F.

11 Audio and media
Then aim the remote control at the IR Remote control* - functions Key Function
receiver, which is located to the right of the Possible functions to be controlled using the
INFO button (p. 371) in the centre console. remote control*. Navigate up/down
WARNING Key Function Navigate right/left

Keep loose objects such as mobile F = Front display screen
phones, cameras, remote controls for Confirm selection or go to the
accessories, etc. in the glove compartment menu system for the selected
or other compartments. Otherwise they Change to navigation* 11
may injure people in the car in the event of source
sudden braking or a collision.
Change to radio source (AM, Volume, decrease
FM1 etc.)
NOTE Volume, increase
Change to media source (Disc,
Do not expose the remote control to direct TV* etc.)
sunlight (e.g. on the instrument panel) - 0-9 Preset channels, number and
otherwise problems may arise with the Change to Bluetooth® hands- letter input
batteries.
free*
Shortcuts for favourite setting
Related information Scroll/fast rewind, change track/
• Audio and media - operating the system song. Information about the current
(p. 371) programme, song, etc. Also
Play/pause
• Remote control* - functions (p. 425) used when there is more infor-
mation available than can be
• Remote control* - battery replacement (p. Stop shown in the display screen
426)
Selection of language for sound-
Scroll/fast forward, change
track
track/song
Subtitles, selection of language
Menu
for text
To previous, cancels function, Teletext*, On/Off

deletes input characters

11 Audio and media
||
Related information Remote control* - battery NOTE
• Audio and media - operating the system replacement
(p. 371) Be sure to dispose of the exhausted bat-
How to replace the batteries in the remote teries in an environmentally safe manner.
• Remote control* (p. 424) control for the audio and media system

• Remote control* (p. 424)
Battery life is normally 1-4 years and
depends on how much the remote control
11 is used.
The remote control is powered by four batter-

ies of the AA/LR6 type.
Take along extra batteries for a long journey.
1. Push down the catch on the battery cover

and slide the battery cover in the direc-
tion of the infrared lens.
2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new
batteries in accordance with the symbols
in the battery compartment and fit them.
3. Refit the cover.

11 Audio and media
Audio and media - menu overview Menu overview - AM Related information

Overview of possible options and settings in Overview of possible options and settings for • Audio and media - menu overview (p.
the audio and media system. AM radio. 427)
RADIO Main menu AM See page 373)
• Menu overview - AM (p. 427)
• Menu overview - FM (p. 428) Show presets (p. 380)
• Menu overview - Digital radio (DAB)* (p. See footnote A
428) 11
Scan (p. 386)
MEDIA
• Menu overview - CD Audio (p. 430) Audio settings (p. 376)
• Main overview - CD/DVD Data (p. 429) See footnote B
• Menu overview - DVD Video (p. 430)
(p. 377)
• Menu overview - iPod (p. 431) Sound stage
• Menu overview - USB (p. 432) See footnote C
• Menu overview - Media Bluetooth (p.
432) (p. 377)
Equalizer
• Menu overview - AUX (p. 433) See footnote D
• Menu overview - TV (p. 434)
(p. 377)
Volume compensation
TEL
• Menu overview - Bluetooth handsfree (p.
433) (p. 376)
Reset all
audio settings
Related information
• Audio and media - operating the system A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre-
(p. 371) mium Sound Multimedia.
B The menu options for audio settings are the same for all
• Audio and media - menu navigation (p. audio sources.
373) C Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
D Does not apply to Performance.

11 Audio and media
Menu overview - FM (p. 386) Menu overview - Digital radio (DAB)*

Reset all FM settings
Overview of possible options and settings for Overview of possible options and settings for
FM radio. DAB radio*.
Audio settings (p. 376)
Main menu FM1/FM2 See page Main menu DAB1*/DAB2* See page
(p. 377)
Sound stage
TP (p. 382) Ensemble learn (p. 387)
See footnote B
Show radio text (p. 385) PTY filtering (p. 383)
11 (p. 377)
Equalizer
Show presets (p. 380) (p. 383)
See footnote C Turn off PTY filtering
See footnote A
(p. 377)
Volume compensation Show radio text (p. 384)
Scan (p. 386)
(p. 376) Show presets (p. 380)
News settings (p. 383) Reset all
audio settings See footnote A
Advanced settings
A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre- Scan (p. 386)
mium Sound Multimedia.
(p. 386) B Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
REG C Does not apply to Performance. Advanced settings
(p. 385) Related information (p. 388)

Alternative frequency • Audio and media - menu overview (p. DAB linking
427)
(p. 383) • Audio and media - menu navigation (p. (p. 388)
EON DAB band
373)
(p. 382) (p. 389)
Set TP favourite Sub channels
(p. 383) (p. 383)

PTY settings Show PTY text

11 Audio and media
(p. 389) Main overview - CD/DVD Data (p. 377)

Reset all DAB settings Volume compensation
Overview of possible options and settings for
CD/DVD43 Data.
Audio settings (p. 376) (p. 376)
Reset all
Main menu CD/DVDA Data See page audio settings
(p. 377) (Disc menu)
Sound stage
A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre-
See footnote B Play (p. 418) mium Sound Multimedia.
B Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
Pause C Does not apply to Performance. 11
(p. 377)
Equalizer
Related information
See footnote C Stop (p. 418) • Audio and media - menu overview (p.
(p. 377) 427)
Volume compensation Random (p. 391)
373)
(p. 376) Repeat folder (p. 419)
Reset all
audio settings
Change subtitles (p. 418)
mium Sound Multimedia. Change audio track (p. 418)
C Does not apply to Performance.
Scan (p. 420)
Related information
• Audio and media - menu overview (p.
427)
• Audio and media - menu navigation (p. (p. 377)
373) Sound stage
See footnote B
(p. 377)
Equalizer
See footnote C
429
11 Audio and media
Menu overview - CD Audio Menu overview - DVD Video (p. 377)

Volume compensation
CD Audio. DVD44 Video.
(p. 376)
Reset all
Main menu CD Audio (Disc See page Main menu DVDA Video See page audio settings
menu) (Disc menu)
Random (p. 391) DVD disc menu (p. 391) mium Sound Multimedia.
11
Scan (p. 420) Play/Pause/Continue (p. 391) Pop-up menuA*video and TV* See
page
Press OK/MENU when a video
Audio settings (p. 376) Stop (p. 391) file is being played back or TV*
is being shown in order to
(p. 377) Subtitles (p. 391) access the pop-up menu.
Sound stage
See footnote A Audio tracks (p. 391) Image settings (p. 393)
(p. 377) Source menu (p. 373)

Equalizer Advanced settings
B See footnote B
See footnote
(p. 392)
(p. 377) Angle DVD disc menu (p. 391)
Volume compensation
See footnote C
(p. 392)
(p. 376) DivX® VOD code
Reset all DVD disc TOP menuC (p. 391)
audio settings Audio settings (p. 376)
A Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV.
A Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia. B What is shown in the pop-up menu for the source menu
B Does not apply to Performance. (p. 377) depends on what is being played back or displayed, it can
Sound stage be e.g. CD/DVD data menu or USB menu.
C Only applies to DVD video discs.
Related information
(p. 377)
• Audio and media - menu overview (p. Equalizer
427)
373)

11 Audio and media
Related information Menu overview - iPod Related information

• Audio and media - menu overview (p. Overview of possible options and settings for • Audio and media - menu overview (p.
427) iPod®45. 427)
• Audio and media - menu navigation (p. • Audio and media - menu navigation (p.
373) Main menu iPodA See page 373)
Random (p. 391)
Scan (p. 420) 11
(p. 377)
Sound stage
See footnote B
(p. 377)
Equalizer
See footnote C
(p. 377)
Volume compensation
(p. 376)
Reset all
audio settings
A Does not apply to Performance.

C Does not apply to Performance.

431
11 Audio and media
Menu overview - USB (p. 377) Menu overview - Media Bluetooth

Equalizer
USB46. See footnote C Media Bluetooth®47.
See page (p. 377) Main menu Media Blue- See page
Main menu USBA Volume compensation
toothA
Play (p. 395)
(p. 376)
Reset all Random (p. 391)
Pause
audio settings
11
Change device (p. 401)
Stop (p. 395) A Does not apply to Performance.
C Does not apply to Performance. Remove Bluetooth device (p. 402)
Random (p. 391)
Related information Scan (p. 420)
Repeat folder (p. 395) • Audio and media - menu overview (p.
427)
Bluetooth software (p. 405)
Select USB device (p. 394) • Audio and media - menu navigation (p. version in car
373)
Change subtitles (p. 395)
Change audio track (p. 395)
(p. 377)
Sound stage
Scan (p. 420) See footnote B
Audio settings (p. 376) (p. 377)

Equalizer
(p. 377) See footnote C

Sound stage
See footnote B

432
11 Audio and media
(p. 377) Menu overview - AUX Menu overview - Bluetooth handsfree

Volume compensation
AUX. Bluetooth® handsfree48.
(p. 376)
Reset all
audio settings Main menu AUX See page Main menu Bluetooth® See page
handsfreeA (Phone menu)
AUX input volume (p. 397)
B Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia. All calls (p. 403)
C Does not apply to Performance. Audio settings (p. 376)
11
All calls
• Audio and media - menu overview (p. (p. 377)
Sound stage
427) (p. 403)
See footnote A Missed calls
373) (p. 377)
Equalizer (p. 403)
Answered calls
See footnote B
(p. 403)
(p. 377) Dialled calls
Volume compensation
(p. 403)
(p. 376) Call duration
Reset all
audio settings
Phone book (p. 405)
A Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
B Does not apply to Performance. (p. 408)
Search
Related information
• Audio and media - menu overview (p. New contact
(p. 409)
427)
• Audio and media - menu navigation (p. (p. 410)
373) Speed dials
433
11 Audio and media
||
(p. 411) (p. 403) Menu overview - TV
Receive vCard Voicemail number
Overview of possible options and settings for
TV*.
(p. 411) Disconnect phone (p. 401)
Memory status
Main menu TV* See page
(p. 411)
Clear phone book Select country (p. 422)
Related information
Change phone (p. 401) • Audio and media - menu overview (p.
Reorganise presets (p. 422)
11 427)
Remove Bluetooth device (p. 402) • Audio and media - menu navigation (p. Autostore (p. 422)
373)
Phone settings Scan (p. 422)
(p. 399) Audio settings (p. 376)

Discoverable
(p. 377)
(p. 404) Sound stage
Sounds and volume
See footnote A
(p. 405)
Download phone book (p. 377)
Equalizer
(p. 405) See footnote B
Bluetooth software
version in car (p. 377)
Volume compensation
Call options
(p. 376)
Reset all
(p. 403) audio settings
Auto answer
A Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
B Does not apply to Performance.

11 Audio and media
Pop-up menuA*video and TV* See

page
Press OK/MENU when a video
file is being played back or TV*
is being shown in order to
access the pop-up menu.
Image settings (p. 393)
Source menu (p. 373) 11
See footnote B
DVD disc menu (p. 391)

See footnote C
DVD disc TOP menuC (p. 391)
A Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV.

B What is shown in the pop-up menu for the source menu
depends on what is being played back or displayed, it can
be e.g. CD/DVD data menu or USB menu.
C Only applies to DVD video discs.
Related information
• Audio and media - menu overview (p.
427)
373)

SPECIFICATIONS
12 Specifications
Type designations Type designation, vehicle identification num-

ber, etc., i.e. information unique to the car,
can be read on a label in the car.
Label location
12
}}
437
12 Specifications
||
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle NOTE
identification and engine numbers can facili-
tate all contact with an authorised Volvo It is not intended that the decals illustrated
dealer regarding the car and when ordering in the owner's manual should be exact
replicas of those in the car. They are
spare parts and accessories. included to show their approximate
Type designation, vehicle identification appearance and location in the car. The
number, maximum permissible weights, information that applies to your particular
car is available on the respective decals
codes for colour and upholstery and type
for your car.
approval number. The label is visible
when the right rear door is opened.
Related information
Label for A/C system.
• Weights (p. 440)
12
Label for parking heater. • Engine specifications (p. 443)
Engine code and engine serial number.
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial num-

ber.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle
Identification Number)
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
438
12 Specifications
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can
be read in the table.
12
Dimensions mm Dimensions mm Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2647 G Front track 1546A J Width 1802
B Length 4369 1551B K Width including door mirrors 2041
C Load length, floor, folded rear 1559C L Width including folded-in

seat 1508 door mirrors 1857
H Rear track 1533A
D Load length, floor 684 1538B
A Offset 52.5 mm.
B Offset 50 mm.
C Offset 46 mm.
E Height 1420 1546C
F Load height 532 I Load width, floor 960
439
12 Specifications
Weights WARNING
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read
The car's driving characteristics change
on a label in the car. depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (p. 441) (when a trailer is
hitched) influence the load capacity and are
not included in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight -
Kerb weight.
12
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car
without extra equipment or accessories.
This means that for every accessory added For information on label location, see Type des-
the loading capacity of the car is reduced ignations (p. 437).
correspondingly by the weight of the Max. gross vehicle weight
accessory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load- Max. train weight (car+trailer)
ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/
Summum equipment levels, as well as Max. front axle load
other accessories such as Towbar, Load Max. rear axle load
carrier, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary
lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety Equipment level
grille, Carpets, Luggage cover, Power
seats, etc. Max. load: See registration document.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- Max. roof load: 75 kg.
taining the kerb weight of your own partic-
ular car. Related information
• Towing capacity and towball load (p.
441)
440
12 Specifications
Towing capacity and towball load Towing capacity and towball load for driving
with a trailer can be read in the tables.
Max. weight braked trailer

Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
T2 B4164T4 Manual, B6 1300 75
T3 B4164T3 Manual, B6 1300 75
T4 B4164T Manual, B6 1300 75
T4 B4164T Automatic, MPS6 1500 75

12
T4 B5204T8 Automatic, TF-80SD 1500 75
D2 D4162T Manual, B6 1300 75
D2 D4162T Automatic, MPS6 1300 75
D3 D5204T6 Manual, M66 1500 75
D3 D5204T6 Automatic, TF-80SD 1500 75
D4 D5204T4 Manual, M66 1500 75

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 437).
}}
441
12 Specifications
||
Max. weight unbraked trailer
Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
T2 B4164T4 Manual, B6 650 50
T3 B4164T3 Manual, B6 650 50
T4 B4164T Manual, B6 650 50
T4 B4164T Automatic, MPS6 700 50

12
D2 D4162T Manual, B6 650 50
D2 D4162T Automatic, MPS6 700 50
D3 D5204T6 Manual, M66 700 50
D4 D5204T4 Manual, M66 700 50

Related information
• Weights (p. 440)
• Trailer Stability Assist - TSA (p. 305)
442
12 Specifications
Engine specifications NOTE

Engine specifications (output etc.) for each
Not all engines are available in all markets.
respective engine alternative can be read in
the table.
Engine Engine Output Output Torque (Nm/ No. of Bore Stroke Swept Com-
codeA (kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) rpm) cylinders (mm) (mm) volume pression
(litres) ratio
T2 B4164T4 88/4500 120/4500 240/1600-3000 4 79 81,4 1,596 10,0:1
T3 B4164T3 110/5700 150/5700 240/1600–4000 4 79 81,4 1,596 10,0:1

12
T4 B4164T 132/5700 180/5700 240/1600–5000 4 79 81,4 1,596 10,0:1
T4 B5204T8 132/5000 180/5000 300/2700–4000 5 81,0 77 1,984 10.5:1
T5 B5204T9 157/6000 213/6000 300/2700–5000 5 81,0 77 1,984 10.5:1
T5 B5254T12 187/5400 254/5400 360/1800–4200 5 83 92,3 2,497 9.5:1
T5 B5254T14 183/5400 249/5400 360/1800–4200 5 83 92,3 2,497 9.5:1
D2 D4162T 84/3600 115/3600 270/1750-2500 4 75 88,3 1,560 16,0:1
D3 D5204T6 110/3500 150/3500 350/1500-2750 5 81,0 77 1,984 16,5:1
D4 D5204T4 130/3500 177/3500 400/1750-2750 5 81,0 77 1,984 16,5:1

Related information
• Coolant - grade and volume (p. 447)
• Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 445)
443
12 Specifications
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions Related information

Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- • Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 445)
mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. • Engine oil - general (p. 335)
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Check the oil level (p. 336), more frequently

for long journeys:
• towing a caravan or trailer
• in mountainous regions
• at high speeds
• in temperatures colder than -30 °C or
12 hotter than +40 °C IMPORTANT
The above also apply to shorter driving dis-
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
tances at low temperatures. engine's service intervals all engines are
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse filled with a specially adapted synthetic
driving conditions. It provides extra protection engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard
for the engine.
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel
Volvo recommends: consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-
ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
444
12 Specifications
Engine oil - grade and volume

Recommended engine oil grade and volume
for each respective engine alternative can be
read in the table.
Volvo recommends:
12
Engine Engine Oil grade Volume, incl. oil
codeA filter
(litres)
T2 B4164T4 Certified and factory-filled oil: Oil grade WSS-M2C925-A approx. 4.1
T3 B4164T3 options for service: approx. 4.1

Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
T4 B4164T approx. 4.1
Viscosity: SAE 5W–30
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 5W–30
D2 D4162T For the low-emissions variant (max. tyre width 205) the recommendation for best fuel econ- approx. 3.8
omy is ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.
When driving under adverse conditions, use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.
}}
445
12 Specifications
||
Engine Engine Oil grade Volume, incl. oil
codeA filter
(litres)
D3 D5204T6 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5 approx. 5.9
D4 D5204T4 Viscosity: SAE 0W–30 approx. 5.9
T4 B5204T8 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5 approx 5.5
T5 B5204T9 Viscosity: SAE 0W–30 approx 5.5
T5 B5254T12 approx 5.5

12 T5 B5254T14 approx 5.5
Related information
• Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p.
444)
• Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 336)
446
12 Specifications
Coolant - grade and volume

Approved coolant volume for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by

Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the pack-
aging.
EngineA Volume
(litres)
T2 B4164T4
T3 B4164T3 7,0 12
T4 B4164T
D2 D4162T 10,0
D3 D5204T6
8,0
D4 D5204T4
T4 B5204T8
T5 B5204T9
8,0
T5 B5254T12
T5 B5254T14
A Engine code, component and serial number can be read
on the engine; see Type designations (p. 437).
Related information
• Coolant - level (p. 339)
1 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
447
12 Specifications
Transmission fluid - grade and volume

The prescribed transmission fluid and volume
for each respective gearbox alternative can be
read in the table.
Manual gearbox
Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
B6 1,6
BOT 350M3
M66 1,9
Automatic gearbox
12 Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
TF-80SD 7,0 AW1
MPS6 7.3 BOT 341
NOTE
Under normal driving conditions, the gear-
box oil does not need to be changed dur-
ing its service life. However, it may be nec-
essary under adverse driving conditions.
Related information
• Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p.
444)
• Type designations (p. 437)
448
12 Specifications
Brake fluid - grade and volume Washer fluid - quality and volume
The medium in a hydraulic brake system is Washer fluid is used, together with wind-
called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer screen and rear window wipers (p. 93) to keep
force from e.g. a brake pedal via a master the car's windows and headlamps clean and
brake cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, ensure visibility when driving.
which in turn act on a mechanical brake.
Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recom-
Prescribed grade: DOT 4 mended by Volvo - with frost protection dur-
ing cold weather and below freezing point.
Volume: 0.6 litres
Volume:
Related information
• Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 340) • Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres.
• Cars without headlamp washing: 3.2
litres. 12
Related information
• Washer fluid - filling (p. 350)
• Wiper blades (p. 348)
449
12 Specifications
Fuel tank - volume

Fuel tank volume for each respective engine
alternative can be read in the table.
Engine Volume (litres) Prescribed grade

4-cylinder petrol approx 62 Petrol: Fuel - petrol (p. 296)
5-cylinder petrol
4-cylinder diesel approx 52 Diesel: Fuel - diesel (p. 296)
5-cylinder diesel approx 60
12 Related information
• Filling up with fuel (p. 295)
• Engine specifications (p. 443)
450
12 Specifications
Air conditioning, fluid - volume and

grade
The prescribed grade and volume of fluids in
the air conditioning system can be read in the
table.
Fluid Volume (litres) Prescribed grade

Compressor oil 0,11 PAG oil
Coolant 0,65 kg R134a
WARNING
12
The air conditioning system contains pres-
surised refrigerant R134a. This system
must only be serviced and repaired by an
authorised workshop.
Related information
• Climate control system - fault tracing and
repair (p. 340)
451
12 Specifications
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions Fuel consumption in a vehicle is measured in

litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions in grams
per km.
T2 (B4164T4) 158 6,8 105 4,5 124 5,3
T3 (B4164T3) 158 6,8 105 4,5 124 5,3

12
T4 (B4164T) 164 7,0 109 4,7 129 5,5
T4A (B4164T) 191 8.2 117 5.0 144 6.2
T4 (B4164T) 184 7.9 120 5.1 143 6.1
T4A (B4164T) 192 8.3 125 5,4 149 6.4
T4 (B5204T8) 243 10,4 135 5.8 174 7,5
T5 (B5204T9) 243 10,4 135 5.8 174 7,5
T5 (B5254T12) 263 11,3 140 6.0 185 7.9
452
12 Specifications
T5A (B5254T12) 268 11.5 144 6.2 189 8.1
D2B (D4162T) 100 3,8 82 3,1 88 3,4
D2C (D4162T) 107 4.1 90 3,4 96 3,7
12
D2B (D4162T) 115 4,4 95 3,6 102 3.9
D2C (D4162T) 116 4,4 99 3,8 105 4,0
D3 (D5204T6) 139 5,3 100 3,8 114 4,3
D3A (D5204T6) 165 6.3 108 4.1 129 4.9
D3 (D5204T6) 179 6,9 112 4,3 136 5,2
D3A (D5204T6) 179 6,8 122 4,6 143 5,4
D4 (D5204T4) 139 5,3 100 3,8 114 4,3
D4A (D5204T4) 165 6.3 108 4.1 129 4.9
}}
453
12 Specifications
||
D4 (D5204T4) 179 6,9 112 4,3 136 5,2
D4A (D5204T4) 179 6,8 122 4,6 143 5,4
A Applies only to cars fitted with 19-inch wheels.

B This only applies to the low-emissions variant.
C Does not apply to the low-emissions variant.
12
Explanation Fuel consumption and emission values in the • The driver's driving style.
table above are based on specific EU cycles2, • If the customer has specified wheels
gram/km
that apply to cars with kerb weight in the larger than those fitted as standard on the
basic version and without extra equipment. model's basic version, then resistance
litre/100 km The car's weight may increase depending on increases.
equipment. This, as well as how heavily the • High speed results in increased wind
Urban driving car is loaded, increases fuel consumption and resistance.
carbon dioxide emissions. See information
about Weights (p. 440). • Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
Extra-urban driving weather and the condition of the car.
There are several reasons for increased fuel Even a combination of the above-mentioned
Combined driving consumption compared with the table's val- examples can result in significantly improved
ues. Examples of this are: consumption. For further information, please
refer to the regulations referred to2.
2 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007
(Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for city driving and driving on main roads. - City driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the
engine. The driving is simulated. - Driving on main roads - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - Cars with manual transmission are started
in 2nd gear (applies to cars with up to 18-inch wheels). The value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of city driving and driving on main roads, in accordance with
legal requirements. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value
for CO2 emissions.
454
12 Specifications
Large deviations in fuel consumption may

arise in a comparison with the EU driving
cycles2 which are used in the certification of
the car and on which the consumption figures
in the table are based.
Consumption is higher and power output
lower for fuel with an octane rating of
91 RON.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi-
nation with fuel grade are factors that 12
could affect the car's performance.
Related information
• Fuel - petrol (p. 296)
• Fuel - diesel (p. 296)
2 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007
(Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for city driving and driving on main roads. - City driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the
engine. The driving is simulated. - Driving on main roads - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - Cars with manual transmission are started
in 2nd gear (applies to cars with up to 18-inch wheels). The value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of city driving and driving on main roads, in accordance with
legal requirements. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value
for CO2 emissions.
455
12 Specifications
Tyres - approved tyre pressures

Approved tyre pressures for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
Engine Tyre size Speed Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA
(km/h) Front Rear Front Rear Front/rear
(kPa)B (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa)
195/65 R15 0 - 160 230 230 260 260 260 (270C, 280D)
T2 (B4164T4) 205/55 R16
T3 (B4164T3) 205/50 R17
12
T4 (B4164T) 225/45 R17 160 + 230 230 270 270 –
D2 (D4162T) 225/40 R18
235/35 R19
T4 (B5204T8) 205/55 R16 0 - 160 230 230 260 260 260

T5 (B5204T9) 205/50 R17
160 + 290 240 310 270 –
T5 (B5254T12) 225/45 R17
T5 (B5254T14) 0 - 160 240 240 260 260 260
225/40 R18
D3 (D5204T6)
235/35 R19 160 + 290 240 310 280 –
D4 (D5204T4)
Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80 420 420 420 420 –

A Economical driving.
B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
C Only applies to 16" wheels for D2 automatic, low-emission variant.
D Only applies to 15" wheels for D2, low-emission variant.
456
12 Specifications
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
are not always available in all markets.
Related information
• Tyres - air pressure (p. 321)
• Type designations (p. 437)
12
457
12 Specifications
Electrical system
The electrical system is single-pole and uses
the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alterna-

tor.
The size, type and performance of the starter
battery depend on the car's equipment and
function.
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, take care to
12 replace it with a battery with the same cold
starting capacity, reserve capacity and
type as the original battery (see the label
on the battery).
Related information
• Starter battery - specification (p. 459)
458
12 Specifications
Starter battery - specification

The starter battery is used to drive the starter
motor and other electrical equipment in the
car.
Engine Voltage (V) Cold start capacity, Reserve capacity

CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A) (minutes)
Petrol 12 520–800 100–160
Diesel 12 700–800 135–160
Petrol/Diesel, manual gearbox with Start/Stop function 12 720A 130

12
Petrol/Diesel, automatic gearbox with Start/Stop function 12 800B 140
A Battery type EFB (Enhanced Flooded Battery) must be used in cars with manual gearbox and the Start/Stop function.
B Battery type AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) must be used in cars with automatic gearbox and the Start/Stop function.
IMPORTANT Related information

If the battery is replaced, take care to
replace it with a battery with the same cold • Starter battery (p. 350)
starting capacity, reserve capacity and • Battery - Start/Stop (p. 352)
type as the original battery (see the label
on the battery).
NOTE
• The battery's container size should be
consistent with the original battery's
dimensions.
• The battery's height is different
depending on size.
459
12 Specifications
Type approval - remote control key Country/Area Type approval - radar system
system Type approval for the radar system can be
Type approval for the remote control key sys- China read in the table.
tem can be read in the table.
Lock system, standard

Country/Area
EU, China
Hong Kong
12
Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)

Related information
Country/Area • Remote control key with key blade (p.
159)
EU
Korea
460
12 Specifications
Coun-
try/
Area
Singa-
pore
IDA: Infocomm Development

Authority of Singapore.
Brazil
12
Europe
Delphi Electronics &
Safety hereby declares that
L2C0038TR and L2C0049TR
are in compliance with the
essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC. This dec-
laration of conformity may, if
necessary, be consulted with
Delphi Electronics & Safety /
One Corporate Center /
Kokomo, Indiana 46904-9005
USA.
Related information
• Radar sensor (p. 209)
461
12 Specifications
Type approval - Bluetooth®

Type approval for Bluetooth® can be read in
the table.
12
462
12 Specifications
Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity)

Country/
Area
Countries
in the EU:
Exporting country: Japan

Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics Inc.
Type of equipment: Bluetooth® device
For further information visit http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/rtte/faq.htm #informing
12
}}
463
12 Specifications
||
Country/
Area
Czech Alpine Electronics, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že tento Bluetooth® Module je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými
Republic: ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Denmark: Undertegnede Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr Bluetooth® Module overholder de væsentlige krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Germany: Hiermit erklärt Alpine Electronics, Inc., dass sich das Gerät Bluetooth® Module in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden
Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Estonia: Käesolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics, Inc. seadme Bluetooth® Module vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja
nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
12
UK Hereby, Alpine Electronics, Inc., declares that this Bluetooth® Module is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Spain: Por medio de la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que el Bluetooth® Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales y
cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Greece: ΜΕ ΗΝ ΠΑΡΟ ΣΑ Alpine Electronics, Inc. ΗΛΩΝΕ Ο Bluetooth® Module Σ ΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕ Α ΠΡΟΣ ΣΟ ΣΩ ΕΣ
ΑΠΑ ΗΣΕ Σ Α Σ ΛΟ ΠΕΣ ΣΧΕ ΕΣ Α ΑΞΕ Σ ΗΣ Ο Η ΑΣ 1999/5/Ε .
France: Par la présente Alpine Electronics, Inc. déclare que l'appareil Bluetooth® Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux
autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Italy: Con la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dichiara che questo Bluetooth® Module è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre
disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latvia: Ar šo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklarē, ka Bluetooth® Module atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to
saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lithuania: Šiuo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis Bluetooth® Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos
nuostatas.
464
12 Specifications
Country/
Area
Nether- Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics, Inc. dat het toestel Bluetooth® Module in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de
lands: andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Malta: Hawnhekk, Alpine Electronics, Inc., jiddikjara li dan Bluetooth® Module jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti
oħrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Hungary: Alulírott, Alpine Electronics, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a Bluetooth® Module megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az
1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Poland: Niniejszym Alpine Electronics, Inc. oświadcza, że Bluetooth® Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi
stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
12
Portugal: Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que este Bluetooth® Module está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da
Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovenia: Alpine Electronics, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta Bluetooth® Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direk-
tive 1999/5/ES.
Slovakia: Alpine Electronics, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že Bluetooth® Module spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smer-
nice 1999/5/ES.
Finland: Alpine Electronics, Inc. vakuuttaa täten että Bluetooth® Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja
sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Sweden: Härmed intygar Alpine Electronics, Inc. att denna Bluetooth® Module står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav
och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Iceland: Alpine Electronics, Inc. hereby certifies that this Bluetooth® Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and
other relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.
Norway: Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved at utstyret Bluetooth® Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
}}
465
12 Specifications
||
Country/
Area
China: 第十三条进口和生产厂商在其产品的说明书或使用手册中，应刊印下述有关内容
1. 标明附件中所规定的技术指标和使用范围，说明所有控制调整及开关等使用方法
■ 使用频率 2.4 - 2.4835 GHz
■ 等效全向辐射率(EIRP) 天线增益 10dBi 时 ≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ①
■ 最大率谱密度天线增益 10dBi 时 ≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ①
■ 载频容限 20 ppm
■ 杂散发射(辐射) 率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外)
12 • ≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)
• ≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)
• ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)
• ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)
• ≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz)
2. 不得擅自更改发射频率大发射率(包括额外装射频率放大器)，不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线
3. 使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业产生有害干扰一旦发现有干扰现象时，应立即停止使用，并采措施消除干扰后方可
继续使用
4. 使用微率无线电设备，必须忍各种无线电业的干扰或工业科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰
5. 不得在飞机和机场附近使用
466
12 Specifications
Country/
Area
Taiwan: 低効率電波輻射性電機管理辧法第十条
第十二條
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能
第十四條
低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用
前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之
干擾
12
}}
467
12 Specifications
||
Country/
Area
South 제품 정보
Korea:
Volvo Car Korea
신청자 코드: KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L3, KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L2 and KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L1
제품 명: Bluetooth Audio Navigation Radio
모델 명: IAM2.1
산 날짜: March/2010
Alpine Electronics, Inc
12 Made in Japan
고객 정보
Volvo Car Korea
볼보자동차코리아
서울시 용산구 한남 2 동 726-173 볼보빌딩 4 층
볼보자동차 고객센터 1588-1777
http://www.volvocars.com/kr
사용자 주의사항
※당해 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다
468
12 Specifications
Country/
Area
The United
Arab Emi-
rates:
South
Africa:
12
Jamaica: Approved for use in Jamaica SMA EI: IAM2.1
Thailand: This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.
Oman
Related information

12 Specifications
Licenses INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE software and associated documentation files
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
Sensus software MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A without restriction, including without limitation
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
This software uses parts of sources from
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
clib2 and Prex Embedded Real-time OS -
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE copies of the Software, and to permit persons
Source (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991,
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, to whom the Software is furnished to do so,
1993, 1994), and Quercus Robusta (Copyright
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR subject to the following conditions: The
(c) 1990, 1993), The Regents of the University
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, above copyright notice including the dates of
of California. All or some portions are derived
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF first publication and either this permission
from material licensed to the University of
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/
California by American Telephone and
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories,
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND or substantial portions of the Software. THE
Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
12 ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
Redistribution and use in source and binary
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
forms, with or without modification, are
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
permitted provided that the following
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
conditions are met: Redistributions of source
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
code must retain the above copyright notice,
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
this list of conditions and the following This software is based in part on the work of
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form the Independent JPEG Group.
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
must reproduce the above copyright notice,
This software uses parts of sources from LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
this list of conditions and the following
"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
materials provided with the distribution.
released January 26, 2000, developed by CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
Neither the name of the <ORGANIZATION>
Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
nor the names of its contributors may be
Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics, SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this
used to endorse or promote products derived
Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc.
from this software without specific prior
parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS
Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] to promote the sale, use or other dealings in
PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. this Software without prior written
AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
to any person obtaining a copy of this
470
12 Specifications
This software is based in parts on the work of this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL),
the FreeType Team. offers spare parts or customer support. etc.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library: Portions of this product uses software You have the right of acquisition,
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young copyrighted © v2.4.3/2010 The modification, and distribution of the source
(eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rights code of the GPL/LGPL software.
reserved.
Combined Instrument Panel Software You may download Source Code from the
Open Source Software Notice This product includes software under following website at no charge: http://
following licenses: www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
This product uses certain free / open source download/TVM_8351_013
and other software originating from third GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-
parties, that is subject to the GNU General licenses/gpl-2.0.html The website provides the Source Code "As
Is" and without warranty of any kind.
Public License version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/ • Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista
GPLv3), GNU Lesser General Public License 2.6.31 kernel and kernel from By downloading Source Code, you expressly 12
version 3 (LGPLv3), The FreeType Project L2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP) assume all risk and liability associated with
License (“FreeType License”) and other • uBoot (based on v2009.08) downloading and using the Source Code and
different and/or additional copyright licenses, complying with the user agreements that
disclaimers and notices. The links how to • busybox (based on version 1.13.2.)
accompany each Source Code.
access the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3, GCC runtime library exception: http://
www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html Please note that we cannot respond to any
LGPLv3, and the other open source software
inquiries regarding the source code.
licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and • libgcc_s.so.1
notices are provided to you below. Please DivX®
LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/
refer to the exact terms of the relevant
lgpl.html
License, regarding your rights under said
licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers • Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1
to provide the source code of said free/open The FreeType Project License: http://
source software to you for a charge covering www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT
the cost of performing such distribution, such
as the cost of media, shipping and handling, • libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3)
upon written request. Please contact your
Linux software
nearest Volvo Dealer.
This product contains software licensed
This offer is valid for a period of at least three
under GNU General Public License (GPL) or DivX Certified® to play DivX® video. DivX®,
(3) years from the date of the distribution of
DivX Certified® and associated logos are
}}
471
12 Specifications
||
registered trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are Symbols in the display Symbol Specification See
used under license. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: There are a variety of different symbols in the
DivX® is a digital video format created by display in the car. The symbols are divided Parking brake (p. 66)
DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified into warning, indicator and information sym- applied, analogue
device that plays DivX video. Visit bols. Shown below are the most common instrument
www.divx.com for more information and symbols with their meanings and a reference
software tools to convert your files into DivX Airbags – SRS (p. 28), (p.
to where in the manual further information can
video. 66)
be found.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX - Red warning symbol, illuminates when Seatbelt reminder (p. 24), (p.
Certified® device must be registered in order a fault has been indicated which could affect
66)
to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) the safety and/or driveability of the car. An
content. To generate the registration code, Alternator not (p. 66)
explanatory text is shown in the combined charging
12
locate the DivX VOD section in the device instrument panel at the same time.
setup menu. Go to http://vod.divx.com with Fault in brake sys- (p. 66), (p.
this code to complete the registration - Information symbol, illuminates in tem 288)
process and learn more about DivX VOD. combination with text in the combined instru-
Covered by one or more of the following U.S. ment panel, when a deviation in any of the Warning, safety (p. 28), (p.
Patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; car's systems has occurred. The yellow sym- mode 38), (p. 66)
7,519,274. bol information can also illuminate in combi-
nation with other symbols. Control symbols in the combined
Related information instrument panel
• Volvo Sensus (p. 70) Warning symbols in the combined
instrument panel Symbol Specification See
Symbol Specification See ABL fault* (p. 65), (p.
84)
Low oil pressure (p. 66)
Emissions sys- (p. 65)
Parking brake (p. 66), (p. tem
applied, digital 290)
ABS fault (p. 65), (p.
instrument
288)
Rear fog lamp on (p. 65), (p.

85)

12 Specifications
Symbol Specification See Information symbols in the combined Symbol Specification See
instrument panel
Stability system, (p. 65), (p. Start/Stop* (p. 286)
Symbol Specification See
DSTC, Trailer 187), (p.
stability assist* 305) Main beam with (p. 83)
auto dimming -
Stability system, (p. 65), (p. Start/Stop* (p. 286)
AHB*
sport mode 187)
Camera sensor* (p. 83)
Engine preheater (p. 65)
(diesel) Start/Stop* (p. 286)
Adaptive cruise (p. 212)
Low level in fuel (p. 65), (p. control*
tank 142)
Adaptive cruise (p. 203), 12
Information, read (p. 65) Start/Stop* (p. 286)
control* (p. 212)
display text
Adaptive cruise (p. 212),
Main beam On (p. 65), (p. control*, Distance (p. 214)
82) Warning* (Distance Camera sensor*, (p. 222),
Alert) Laser sensor* (p. 233),
Left-hand direc- (p. 65) (p. 237),
tion indicators Adaptive cruise (p. 202) (p. 243)
control*
Right-hand (p. 65) Distance warning* (p. 216),
direction indica- Adaptive cruise (p. 203) (Distance Alert), (p. 222),
tors control* City SafetyTM, Col- (p. 233)
lision warning sys-
Start/Stop*, (p. 65), (p. Cruise control* (p. 194) tem*, Auto-brake*
engine auto- 280)
stopped Engine block (p. 142)
Speed limiter (p. 191)
heater and pas-
senger compart-
Radar sensor* (p. 212), ment heater*
(p. 216),
(p. 233)
}}

12 Specifications
||
Symbol Specification See Symbol Specification See Related information
Activated timer* (p. 142) Gear indicator, (p. 272) indicator symbols (p. 65)
manual gearbox • Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 66)
Activated timer* (p. 142) Automatic gear (p. 273) • Messages - handling (p. 104)
positions
ABL system* (p. 84) Registered speed (p. 188)

information*
12
Low battery (p. 142) Measuring the oil (p. 336)
level
Park Assist Pilot - (p. 253)
PAP*
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Rain sensor* (p. 93)
Symbol Specification See
Lane Keeping Aid* (p. 241) Seatbelt reminder (p. 27)
Driver Alert Sys- (p. 237), Airbag, passenger (p. 31)

tem*, Lane Keep- (p. 243) seat, activated
ing Aid*
Driver Alert Sys- (p. 236), Airbag, passenger (p. 31)

tem*, Time for a (p. 237) seat, deactivated
break

12 Specifications
12
475
13 Alphabetical Index
A Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 77 Alarm for accidents and disasters........... 382
Airbag Alcolock................................................... 264
ACC – Adaptive cruise control................. 199 activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 31 Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 128
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 84 driver's side.................................... 30, 37
Approach lighting.............................. 89, 162
Active high beam....................................... 83 passenger side......................... 30, 31, 37
Audio
Active Park Assist.................................... 253 AIRBAG ..................................................... 30
settings............................................... 375
function............................................... 253 Airbag system............................................ 29 surround..................................... 370, 376
Limitations.......................................... 256 warning symbol.................................... 28
Audio and media
operation............................................. 254 Air cleaning introduction......................................... 370
Symbols and messages..................... 257 material............................................... 129 manage the system............................ 371
Active Xenon headlamps........................... 84 passenger compartment.... 127, 128, 129 menu overview.................................... 427
Active Yaw Control.................................. 185 Air conditioning........................................ 135 menus................................................. 373
Adapting driving characteristics.............. 262 Air conditioning, fluid overview.............................................. 371
Adaptive Cruise Control........................... 199 volume and grade............................... 451 Audio profile............................................. 377
13
change cruise control functionality..... 208 Air conditioning system audio system
deactivate........................................... 206 repair................................................... 340 functions............................................. 375
fault tracing......................................... 211 Air distribution.......................................... 129 overview.............................................. 371
function............................................... 200 Recirculation....................................... 137 Audio system........................................... 370
managing speed................................. 203 table.................................................... 138 Audio volume........................................... 371
overtaking........................................... 205
Air quality system IAQS........................... 128 external audio source......................... 397
overview.............................................. 202
Alarm........................................ 181, 182, 183 phone.................................................. 404
radar sensor........................................ 209
alarm indicator.................................... 182 phone/media player............................ 404
setting the time interval...................... 204
alarm signals....................................... 183 ring signal, phone............................... 404
standby mode..................................... 204
automatic activation........................... 182 speed/noise compensation................ 377
temporary deactivation....................... 204
automatic re-arming........................... 182 Automatic car washes............................. 363
Additional heater
checking the alarm............................. 164 Automatic gearbox.......................... 273, 276
electric........................................ 143, 144
reduced alarm level............................ 183 manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 274
fuel-driven........................................... 143
remote control key not working.......... 183
476
towing and recovery........................... 307 streaming audio.................................. 397 Cargo area

trailer................................................... 301 transfer call to mobile......................... 403 cargo net............................................. 155
Automatic relocking................................. 174 Bonnet, opening...................................... 334 lighting.................................................. 88
loading................................................ 152
AUX input......................................... 371, 394 Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 340
mounting points.................................. 153
Brake fluid parcel shelf......................................... 157
grade and volume............................... 449
Car upholstery......................................... 366
B Brake light.................................................. 86
Car washing............................................. 363
Backrest..................................................... 73 Brakes.............................................. 288, 289
Catalytic converter
front seat, lowering............................... 73 Anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 289
Recovery............................................. 307
brake light............................................. 86
Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 76 CD............................................................ 390
brake system.............................. 288, 289
Bag holder .............................................. 154 Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 290 Changing wheels..................................... 317
folding................................................. 154 emergency brake lights........................ 86 Checking the engine oil level................... 335
Battery..................................... 293, 350, 459 filling brake fluid.................................. 340
Children
jump starting....................................... 270 handbrake........................................... 290 13
child safety locks.................................. 42
maintenance....................................... 350 symbols in the combined instrument
child seat and airbag............................ 48
overload.............................................. 293 panel................................................... 288
child seats and side airbags................. 34
remote control.................................... 426 Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 342 location in car....................................... 48
remote control key/PCC..................... 167
safety.............................................. 34, 42
specification....................................... 459
symbols on the battery....................... 351 Child safety locks............................ 179, 180
warning symbols................................. 351
C Child seats................................................. 42
BLIS................................................. 257, 258 Calls ISOFIX fixture system for child seats... 48
incoming............................................. 402 recommended...................................... 44
Bluetooth®
operation............................................. 402 size classes for child seats with ISO-
handsfree............................................ 402
FIX fixture system................................. 49
media.................................................. 397 Camera sensor................................ 219, 231
types..................................................... 50
microphone off................................... 403 Car care................................................... 363 upper mounting points for child seats.. 52
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 366 City Safety™............................................ 217
477
Cleaning Compass................................................. 100 D

automatic car wash............................ 363 calibration........................................... 101
car washing........................................ 363 Condensation in headlamps.................... 363 DAB Radio....................................... 378, 387
rims..................................................... 364 Daytime running lights............................... 81
Controls
seatbelts............................................. 367
centre console.................................... 371 Deadlock.................................................. 178
upholstery........................................... 366
Controls, lights........................................... 78 deactivation........................................ 178
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 128 temporary deactivation....................... 178
Control symbols................................... 61, 63
Climate control Defroster.................................................. 136
actual temperature............................. 126 Coolant
volume and grade............................... 447 Detachable towbar
auto-regulation................................... 134
storage................................................ 302
general................................................ 126 Coolant, checking and filling................... 339
personal preferences.......................... 129 Diesel....................................................... 296
Cooling system........................................ 292
sensors............................................... 127 run out of fuel..................................... 297
overheating......................................... 292
temperature control............................ 135 Diesel particle filter.................................. 298
Corner Traction Control........................... 185
Clock, adjustment...................................... 69 Digital radio (DAB).................................... 387
13 Crash, see Collision................................... 38
CO2 emissions......................................... 452 Dimensions.............................................. 439
Cruise control.......................................... 194
Collision..................................................... 38 deactivate........................................... 199 Dipstick, electronic.................................. 337
Collision warning............................. 223, 224 managing speed................................. 195 Direction indicator..................................... 87
Collision warning system resume set speed............................... 198 Direction indicators.................................... 87
function............................................... 224 temporary deactivation....................... 197
direction of rotation................................. 311
general limitations............................... 229 CTA.......................................................... 260
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 278
operation............................................. 228 Cyclist detection...................................... 225
Pedestrian detection........................... 227 Display lighting.......................................... 80
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 128
Radar sensor.............................. 209, 217 Distance Warning.................................... 214
Collision Warning System with Auto Limitations.......................................... 215
Brake....................................................... 223 Symbols and messages..................... 216
Colour code, paint................................... 368 Door mirrors............................................... 97
Combined instrument panel................ 60, 61
478
Driver Alert Control.................................. 235 Emergency equipment Engine oil......................................... 335, 444
operation............................................. 236 first aid kit........................................... 323 adverse driving conditions.................. 444
Driver Alert System.................................. 235 warning triangle.................................. 322 filter..................................................... 335
Emergency puncture repair............. 323, 324 grade and volume............................... 445
Driving...................................................... 293
cooling system.................................... 292 action.................................................. 325 Engine specifications............................... 443
with a tailer......................................... 299 inflating the tyres................................ 328 Equalizer.................................................. 377
with the tailgate open......................... 292 rechecking.......................................... 327
Error messages
stowing components.......................... 329
Driving in water........................................ 291 Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 212
Emergency puncture repair kit Driver Alert Control............................. 237
Driving with a trailer
location............................................... 324 LKA..................................................... 243
towball load........................................ 441
overview.............................................. 325 see Messages and symbols............... 212
towing capacity.................................. 441
sealing fluid......................................... 329
DVD.......................................................... 390 Error messages in BLIS........................... 262
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 452
ETC, electronic temperature control........ 132
Engine
External dimensions................................ 439
deactivate........................................... 270 13
E overheating......................................... 299
ECC, electronic climate control............... 131 start..................................................... 268
EcoGuide................................................... 64
Start/Stop........................................... 279 F
Engine and passenger compartment heater Fan
Ecolabelling, FSC, owner's manual........... 22
direct start/immediate stop................ 141 ECC.................................................... 134
Economical driving.................................. 299 messages........................................... 142 ETC..................................................... 134
ECO pressure.................................. 321, 456 timer.................................................... 141
Fault tracing for the camera sensor......... 220
Electrical socket...................................... 151 Engine block heater................................. 140
First aid.................................................... 323
cargo area........................................... 155 Engine compartment
First aid kit............................................... 323
Electrical system...................................... 458 coolant................................................ 339
oil........................................................ 335 Fluids, capacities..... 447, 448, 449, 450, 451
Electronic climate control - ECC............. 131
overview.............................................. 334 Fluids and oils.................. 447, 448, 449, 451
Electronic temperature control - ETC...... 132
Engine drag control................................. 185
479
Fog lamp G Headlamp pattern adjustment................... 90

rear........................................................ 85 Active Bending Lights .......................... 90
Foot brake....................................... 288, 289 Gearbox........................................... 271, 272 Halogen headlamp............................... 90
automatic.................................... 273, 276 Headlamps............................................... 342
Front seat
manual................................................ 272
head restraint........................................ 73 head restraint
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 278 centre seat, rear.................................... 76
FSC, ecolabelling....................................... 22
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen- front seat............................................... 73
Fuel.................................................. 295, 296
gagement................................................. 278 lowering................................................ 76
fuel consumption................................ 452
fuel economy...................................... 321 Gear shift indicator.................................. 272 Heating
fuel filter.............................................. 297 Geartronic................................................ 274 rearview and door mirrors.................... 98
rear window.......................................... 98
Fuel-driven heater Glass
seats................................................... 133
direct start/immediate stop................ 141 laminated/reinforced............................. 22
timer.................................................... 141 Heat-reflecting windscreen........................ 18
Glass roof, roller blind.............................. 100
Fuelling............................................ 178, 298 High engine temperature......................... 299
Glovebox................................................. 149
13 filling................................................... 295 High-pressure headlamp washing............. 94
cooling................................................ 150
filling with reserve fuel can................. 298 locking................................................ 176 Hill Start Assist........................................ 279
fuel filler flap....................................... 294
Gross vehicle weight............................... 440 Home safe light duration........................... 89
fuel filler flap, locking.......................... 178
fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 294 GSI - Gear selector assistance................ 272 Horn........................................................... 78
Fuel tank
volume................................................ 450
Fuse box.................................................. 354 H I
Fuses....................................................... 354 Handbrake............................................... 290 IAQS - Interior Air Quality System........... 128
changing............................................. 354 Hazard warning flashers............................ 86 Image settings......................................... 393
engine compartment.......................... 355
Headlamp control...................................... 78 Immobiliser.............................................. 161
General............................................... 354
under front right seat.......................... 361 Headlamp levelling.................................... 80 Indicator symbols...................................... 65
under glovebox................................... 358 Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 90 Inflatable curtain.................................. 34, 37
480
Information button, PCC.......................... 164 Jump starting........................................... 270 Leather upholstery, washing instructions 366
Information display.............................. 60, 61 Light indications, PCC............................. 164
Infotainment system Lighting.................................................... 341
source buttons.................................... 371 K Active Xenon headlamps...................... 84
voice control....................................... 412 approach lighting.......................... 89, 162
Kerb weight.............................................. 440
Infotainment system (Audio and media).. 370 automatic lighting, passenger com-
Key........................................... 159, 160, 172 partment............................................... 88
Inlaid mats............................................... 150
Key blade......................................... 165, 166 bulbs, specifications........................... 347
Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 80 controls................................................. 87
Keyless drive 168, 169, 170, 171, 172,
Instrument overview 173, 269 daytime running lights.......................... 81
left-hand drive car................................ 54 display lighting...................................... 80
Keyless - locking..................................... 170
right-hand drive car.............................. 57 headlamp levelling................................ 80
Keyless start (keyless drive) 168, 169, home safe lighting................................ 89
Instruments and controls..................... 54, 57
170, 171, 172, 173, 269 instrument lighting................................ 80
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)
Keyless - unlocking................................. 171 in the passenger compartment............. 87
Air cleaning......................................... 128 13
main/dipped beam............................... 82
Keypad in the steering wheel............ 78, 371
Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 87 position/parking lamps......................... 80
Key positions............................................. 71 rear fog lamp........................................ 85
Interior rearview mirror............................... 99
automatic dimming............................... 99 tunnel detection.................................... 82
Intermittent wiping..................................... 93 Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 342
iPod®, connection................................... 395
L daytime running lights........................ 345
dipped beam (cars with halogen head-
Labels...................................................... 437
lamps)................................................. 343
Laminated glass......................................... 22 direction indicators, front.................... 344
J Lamps, see Lighting................................ 341 main beam (cars with active xenon
Lane keeping assistant headlamps)......................................... 344
Jack......................................................... 314
operation............................................. 241 main beam (cars with halogen head-
Jacket holder........................................... 148 lamps)................................................. 343
Lane keeping assistant - LKA.................. 239
Journey statistics..................................... 124 position/parking lamps....................... 344
Laser sensor............................................ 220
481
rear bulb holder: direction indicators, maintenance Engine block heater and passenger
brake lamps and reversing lamps...... 345 Rustproofing....................................... 365 compartment heater........................... 142
rear fog lamps..................................... 346 Making calls............................................. 402 LKA..................................................... 243
vanity mirror........................................ 347 Messages in BLIS.................................... 262
Manual gearbox....................................... 272
LKA - Lane keeping assistant.................. 239 GSI - Gear selector assistance........... 272 Meters
Loading Towing and recovery.......................... 307 fuel gauge....................................... 60, 61
cargo area................................... 152, 154 trailer................................................... 300 speedometer................................... 60, 61
General....................................... 152, 153 Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 274 tachometer..................................... 60, 61
long load............................................. 153 Microphone.............................................. 403
Max. roof load.......................................... 440
mounting points.................................. 153
Media, Bluetooth®.................................... 397 misting
roof load............................................. 153
attending to the windows................... 126
Lock Media player.................................... 378, 389
compatible file formats....................... 393 Misting
locking................................................ 173
condensation in headlamps............... 363
manual locking.................................... 174 Memory function in seat............................ 74
unlocking.................................... 173, 175 Mobile phone
13 Menu navigation audio and media.......... 373
connect............................................... 399
Lockable wheel bolts............................... 313 Menus handsfree............................................ 402
Lock confirmation ................................... 160 Combined instrument panel............... 101 register phone..................................... 399
Lock indicator.......................................... 161 menu overview, analogue................... 102 voice control....................................... 412
menu overview, digital........................ 102
Locking/unlocking Mood lighting............................................. 88
inside.................................................. 175 Messages................................................ 104
MY CAR 104, 105, 106, 108, 109, 111,
tailgate................................................ 176 Information display............................. 103
112, 113, 114
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 212
M Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 222, 233
N
Main/dipped beam, see Lighting............... 82 Driver Alert Control............................. 237 News broadcasts..................................... 383
Main beam, automatic activation.............. 83
482
O Parking brake........................................... 290 Power seat................................................. 74

Passenger compartment filter................. 127 Powershift gearbox.......................... 276, 307
Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 444, 445
Passenger compartment heater.............. 140 Power windows......................................... 95
Oil level low.............................................. 335
Passenger compartment lighting
Output...................................................... 443 automatic.............................................. 88
outside temperature gauge....................... 68 PCC – Personal Car Communicator Q
Overheating............................................. 299 functions............................................. 162
Queue Assist............................................ 206
Owner's manual, ecolabelling.................... 22 range........................................... 165, 169
Queue Assistant....................................... 206
Pedestrian airbag....................................... 40
folding up.............................................. 42
moving the car...................................... 41
P R
Pedestrian detection................................ 223
PACOS....................................................... 31
Petrol grade............................................. 296 Radar sensor........................................... 200
Paintwork Limitations.......................................... 209
Phone 13
colour code......................................... 368
connect............................................... 399 Radio....................................................... 378
damage and touch-up........................ 367
handsfree............................................ 402 DAB............................................ 378, 387
Panel lighting............................................. 80 incoming call....................................... 402
Radio programme types (PTY)................ 383
Panic function.......................................... 162 making calls........................................ 402
phone book......................................... 405 Rain sensor................................................ 93
PAP - Active Park Assist.......................... 253
phone book, shortcut......................... 405 RDS.......................................................... 381
Parcel shelf.............................................. 157
receiving a call.................................... 403 Rear bulbs
Park Assist............................................... 245 register phone..................................... 399 location............................................... 345
backward............................................ 247 voice control....................................... 412
Rear seat
fault indicator...................................... 248
Pocket park assist - PAP......................... 253 Heating............................................... 133
function............................................... 245
parking assistance sensors................ 248 Polishing.................................................. 364 Rearview and door mirrors
Position/parking lamps.............................. 80 compass............................................. 100
Park assist camera.................................. 249
Power guide............................................... 64 door...................................................... 97
settings............................................... 252
electrically retractable........................... 98
483
heating.................................................. 98 Road sign information............................. 188 heating................................................ 133

interior................................................... 99 Limitations.......................................... 190 Heating............................................... 133
Rear window, defrosting............................ 98 operation............................................. 188 lowering the front backrest................... 73
Roller blind for glass roof......................... 100 lowering the rear backrest.................... 76
Recommendations during driving............ 293
power.................................................... 74
Recommended child seats Roof load, max. weight............................ 440
Securing loads (Loading)......................... 153
table...................................................... 44 Rustproofing............................................ 365
Sensus....................................................... 70
Recovery.................................................. 309
Service position....................................... 348
Refrigerant............................................... 340
S Service programme................................. 331
Regeneration........................................... 298
Set time interval....................................... 214
Relay/fuse box, see Fuses....................... 354 Safety lock
children................................................. 42 Side airbag SIPS.................................. 33, 37
Remote control........................................ 424
battery replacement............................ 426 Safety mode.............................................. 38 Signal input, external....................... 371, 394
Remote control immobiliser..................... 162 moving the car...................................... 40 SIPS airbag................................................ 33

13 start attempt......................................... 39 Skidding........................................... 293, 294
Remote control key......................... 159, 160
battery replacement............................ 167 Sealing fluid............................................. 329 slippery driving conditions....................... 294
detachable key blade................. 165, 166 Seat, see Seats.......................................... 73 Soot filter................................................. 298
functions............................................. 162 Seatbelt...................................................... 24 SOOT FILTER FULL................................. 298
loss..................................................... 159 loosen................................................... 26
range........................................... 163, 169 spare wheel..................................... 316, 317
pregnancy............................................. 26
installation........................................... 319
Remote control key system, type appro- putting on............................................. 25
taking out............................................ 317
val............................................................ 460 rear seat................................................ 27
seatbelt reminder.................................. 27 Speed limiter............................................ 191
Resetting, trip meter........................ 117, 121
seatbelt tensioner................................. 27 alarm for speed exceeded.................. 194
Resetting the door mirrors......................... 98 deactivation........................................ 194
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 27
Resetting the power windows................... 96 getting started............................ 191, 192
Seatbelt tensioner................................ 27, 37 temporary deactivation....................... 193
Retractable power door mirrors................. 98
Seats.......................................................... 73 Speed ratings, tyres................................. 316
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 272
head restraints, rear.............................. 76
484
Spin control............................................. 185 Symbols Towing..................................................... 306

Stability and traction control system 185, indicator symbols..................... 61, 63, 65 towing eye.......................................... 308
187 warning symbols............................. 61, 63 Towing bracket................................ 301, 302
operation............................................. 186 Symbols and messages specifications...................................... 302
Stability system....................................... 185 Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 212 Towing capacity and towball load........... 441
Collision Warning with Auto
Stains....................................................... 366 Towing eye.............................................. 308
Brake.......................................... 222, 233
Start/Stop................................................ 279 Driver Alert Control............................. 237 Traction control........................................ 185
Function and operation...................... 280 LKA..................................................... 243 Traffic information (TP) ........................... 382
the engine does not stop.................... 281
System Trailer....................................................... 299
Steering force, speed related.................. 262 tripping.................................................. 37 cable........................................... 299, 300
Steering force level, see Steering force... 262 driving with a trailer............................ 299
Steering lock............................................ 270 snaking............................................... 305
Steering wheel........................................... 77 T Trailer stability assist............................... 185

keypad.......................................... 78, 371 Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 305 13
Tailgate
steering wheel adjustment.................... 77 Transmission............................................ 272
Locking/unlocking.............................. 176
Stone chips and scratches...................... 367 Transmission oil
Temperature
Storage spaces actual temperature............................. 126 volume and grade............................... 448
driver's side........................................ 148 Transponder.............................................. 18
Temperature control................................ 135
glovebox............................................. 149
Total airing function......................... 126, 176 Tread depth............................................. 314
Jacket holder...................................... 148
tunnel console.................................... 148 Towbar Tread wear indicators.............................. 313
Storage spaces in the passenger com- detachable, attachment...................... 303 Trip computer.................. 114, 119, 123, 124
partment.................................................. 146 detachable, removal........................... 304 analogue instrument panel................. 115
surround.......................................... 370, 376 Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 301 Trip meter.................................................. 68
Switching off the engine.......................... 270 Towbar - detachable Trip meter, resetting........................ 117, 121
attachment/removal.................... 303, 304 Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 211
485
TSA - trailer stability assist ............. 185, 305 U Fault in brake system........................... 66
Tunnel console........................................ 148 Low oil pressure................................... 66
12 V socket......................................... 151 Unlocking Parking brake applied........................... 66
armrest................................................ 149 from the inside.................................... 175 seatbelt reminder............................ 27, 66
cigarette lighter and ashtray............... 149 from the outside................................. 173 Warning................................................ 66
Tunnel detection........................................ 82 Unlocking with the key blade................... 171 Warning sound
USB, connection...................................... 395 collision warning system.................... 228
TV............................................................. 420
USB input................................................ 394 Warning symbols........................... 61, 63, 66
Type approval
Bluetooth®.......................................... 462 Warning triangle....................................... 322
radar system....................................... 460 Washer fluid
remote control key system................. 460 V volume................................................ 449
Type designations................................... 437 Washer fluid, filling................................... 350
Vanity mirror...................................... 88, 150
Tyre dimension........................................ 315 Washers
Ventilation................................................ 129
Tyre load index........................................ 315 rear window.......................................... 94
13 Vibration damper..................................... 301 washer fluid, filling.............................. 350
Tyre pressure label.................................. 321
Voice control, mobile phone.................... 412 windscreen........................................... 94
Tyres
Volvo Sensus............................................. 70 Water and dirt-repellent coating.............. 365
direction of rotation............................ 311
maintenance....................................... 311 Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 365
pressure...................................... 321, 456 Waxing..................................................... 364
puncture repair................................... 323 W Weights
specifications...................................... 456 kerb weight......................................... 440
Warning lamp
tread depth......................................... 314
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 200 Wheel bolts.............................................. 313
tread wear indicators.......................... 313
collision warning system.................... 228 lockable.............................................. 313
winter tyres......................................... 314
stability and traction control system.. 185 Wheel rim, dimensions............................ 315
Warning lamps Wheel rims
Airbags – SRS....................................... 66 cleaning.............................................. 364
alternator not charging......................... 66
486
Wheels
removal............................................... 318
snow chains........................................ 314
spare wheel........................................ 316
Wheels and tyres..................................... 316
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 35
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 36
seating position.................................... 36
whiplash protection........................ 35, 37
Windows, rearview and door mirrors. 22, 365
Windscreen
heating................................................ 136
Windscreen, heating.................................. 98
13
Windscreen washing.................................. 94
Windscreen wiper...................................... 93
rain sensor............................................ 93
Winter driving........................................... 293
Winter tyres.............................................. 314
Wiper blades............................................ 348
changing............................................. 348
Cleaning.............................................. 349
replacing, rear window....................... 349
Service position.................................. 348
Wipers and washing.................................. 93
487
13
488
Volvo Car Corporation TP 16776 (English), AT 1348, Printed in Sweden, Göteborg 2013, Copyright © 2000-2013 Volvo Car Corporation

V40 Owners Manual MY14 en-GB TP 16776

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

V40 Owners Manual MY14 en-GB TP 16776

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

V40 Owners Manual MY14 en-GB TP 16776

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main sections covered in the owner's manual?

What are the main sections covered in the owner's manual?

What safety features are discussed in the manual?

What safety features are discussed in the manual?

WEB EDITION

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

05 Loading and storage 06 Locks and alarm

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5

6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Starting and driving

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 7

09 Wheels and tyres

8 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

10 Maintenance and service

11 Audio and media

10 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 11

12 Specifications 13 Alphabetical Index

Reading the owner's manual Special texts Decals 01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 15

Images Recording data for a certain length of time, but also as a 01

01 Accessories and extra equipment Change of ownership for cars with

Areas where IR film is not applied.

18 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Information on the Internet 01

A QR code reader is required to read the QR

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 21

01 The owner's manual and the Laminated glass

22 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Seatbelt - putting on Remember

Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on

Correctly fitted seatbelt.

Seatbelt height adjustment. Press the button and

Seatbelt reminder automatically after approximately Seatbelt tensioner

Safety - warning symbol WARNING

airbags are deployed.

Airbag system viewed from above, right-hand-

Airbags on driver's side Related information Passenger airbag

WARNING Passenger airbag - activating/

WARNING Related information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 31

WARNING Side airbag (SIPS)

Driver's seat, left-hand drive.

The SIPS bag system consists of two main

Related information The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is

WARNING General information on WHIPS

Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the

WARNING WARNING When the systems deploy

Seatbelt ten- In a frontal collision

Airbags In a frontal collisionB

System Triggered WARNING General information on safety mode

Related information Safety mode - attempting to start the

First, check that no fuel is leaking from the

WARNING If the message Safety mode See manual is

Do not move the car further than necessary.

The pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag) is

NOTE Related information Pedestrian airbag - moving the car